ML 550 (2008) - Automotive Mercedes-Benz - Free user manual and instructions

USER MANUAL ML 550 (2008) Mercedes-Benz

Close-up of a Mercedes-Benz car grille and headlights (no visible text or symbols)

Operator's Manual M-Class

645547281

Order No. 6515 4274 13 Part No. 164 584 72 81 Edition A 2008

M-Hess

Mercedes-Benz

ML 320 CDI

ML 350

ML 550

ML 63 AMG

Our company and staff congratulate you on the purchase of your new Mercedes-Benz.

Your selection of our product is a demonstration of your trust in our company name. Furthermore, it exemplifies your desire to own an automobile that will be as easy as possible to operate and provide years of service.

Your Mercedes-Benz represents the efforts of many skilled engineers and craftsmen. To help assure your driving pleasure, and also the safety of you and your passengers, we ask you to make a small investment of time:

• Please read this manual carefully, then return it to your vehicle where it will be handy for your reference.
• Please follow the recommendations contained in this manual. They are designed to acquaint you with the operation of your Mercedes-Benz.
• Please pay attention to the warnings and cautions contained in this manual. They are designed to help improve the safety of the vehicle operator and occupants.

We extend our best wishes for many miles of safe, pleasurable driving.

Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC A DaimlerChrysler Company

Introduction 9

Product information....9

Operator's Manual 10

Service and warranty information .. 10

Important notice for California retail buyers and lessees of Mercedes-Benz automobiles ..... 11

Maintenance 12

Roadside Assistance 12

Change of address or ownership..... 13

Operating your vehicle outside the USA or Canada...... 13

Where to find it.... 15

Symbols.... 16

Operating safety .... 17 Proper use of the vehicle .... 17

Problems with your vehicle.... 18

Reporting safety defects.... 19 Reporting safety defects .... 19

Vehicle data recording.... 20 Information regarding electronic recording devices.... 20

At a glance 21

Exterior view.... 22

Cockpit.... 24

Instrument cluster 26

Instrument cluster 28

Multifunction steering wheel 30

Center console .... 31 Upper part .... 31 Lower part .... 32

Overhead control panel 33

Storage compartments...... 34

Door control panel.... 36

Getting started 37

Unlocking 38

Unlocking with the SmartKey ...... 38

Unlocking with KEYLESS-GO*...... 39

Starter switch positions.... 39

Adjusting 43

Seats 43

Steering wheel.... 46

Mirrors.... 49

Driving.... 51

Fastening the seat belts 51

Starting the engine 54

Parking brake 57

Driving off 58

Switching on headlamps.... 59

Turn signals 60

Windshield wipers.... 60

Rear window wiper/washer...... 62

Problems while driving.... 63

Parking and locking.... 65

Parking brake 65

Switching off headlamps.... 66

Turning off the engine.... 66

Releasing seat belts.... 68

Locking.... 68

Contents

Safety and Security 71

Occupant safety.... 72

Air bags 74

Occupant Classification System..... 79

Seat belts 84

Active head restraint 88

Rear head restraints.... 89

Children in the vehicle.... 89

Blocking of rear door window operation.... 96

Panic alarm 97

Activating 97

Deactivating 97

Driving safety systems.... 98

ABS 98

BAS 100

ESP ^® 100

EBP 104

4-ETS.... 104

Anti-theft systems.... 106

Immobilizer.... 106

Anti-theft alarm system.... 106

Controls in detail 109

Locking and unlocking 110

SmartKey 110

SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* ..... 113

Checking the batteries in the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* 118

Loss of the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* ..... 118

Opening the doors from the inside.... 118

Tailgate/Power tailgate*...... 119

Automatic central locking .... 125 Locking and unlocking

from the inside.... 126

Seats 127

Front seat active head restraints. 127

Rear seat head restraints 127

Lumbar support.... 129

Multicontour seat* 129

Seat heating* 130

Seat ventilation* 131

Memory function* 133

Storing positions into memory ..... 134

Recalling positions from memory. 134

Lighting 135

Exterior lamp switch 135

Combination switch 139

Corner-illuminating front fog lamps* 140

Hazard warning flasher 141

Interior lighting 142

Door entry lamps 144

Cargo compartment lamp 144

Instrument cluster 145

Adjusting instrument cluster illumination .... 145

Resetting trip odometer 146

Tachometer.... 146

Outside temperature indicator..... 146

Contents

Control system 147

Multifunction display.... 147

Multifunction steering wheel...... 148

Menus 150

Standard display menu 154

AMG menu 156

Off-road Mode menu 159

AUDIO menu 160

NAV* menu.... 161

AIRMATIC*/Compass menu ..... 162

Vehicle status message

memory menu 162

Settings menu.... 163

Vehicle configuration 177

Trip computer menu.... 178

TEL* menu 180

Automatic transmission.... 183

Gear selector lever.... 183

Shifting procedure 186

Transmission positions.... 187

Driving tips.... 190

Gear ranges 192

Steering wheel gearshift control .. 193

Shift program (ML 63 AMG only).. 194

Emergency operation

(Limp-Home Mode) 197

Transfer case.... 198

Good visibility.... 199

Headlamp cleaning system* ...... 199

Rear view mirrors.... 199

Power folding exterior

rear view mirrors*...... 200

Sunvisors 201

Rear window defroster.... 203

Climate control.... 204

Deactivating the

climate control system 208

Operating the climate control

system in automatic mode...... 208

Setting the temperature...... 209

Adjusting air distribution...... 209

Adjusting air volume 210

Front defroster.... 210

Air recirculation mode 212

Air conditioning.... 214

Residual heat and ventilation...... 215

Rear climate control*...... 216

3-zone automatic climate control*..... 218

Deactivating the

automatic climate

control system.... 222

Operating the automatic

climate control system

in automatic mode.... 223

Setting the temperature 223

Adjusting air distribution 224

Adjusting air volume 225

Front defroster 225

Maximum cooling MAXCOOL...... 226

Air recirculation mode 227

Air conditioning 229

Using driver-side settings

for all temperature zones...... 229

Residual heat and ventilation..... 230

Rear automatic climate control..... 231

Power windows 235

Door windows.... 236

Synchronizing the door windows .. 237

Summer opening feature 237

Convenience closing feature...... 238

Power tilt/sliding sunroof 240

Opening and closing 240

Synchronizing 242

Contents

Driving systems 244

Cruise control.... 244

Downhill Speed Regulation

(DSR) 249

Off-road driving program 253

Air suspension program* 254

Adaptive Damping System

(ADS)* 255

Vehicle level control* 255

Parktronic system* 259

Rear view camera* 264

Loading 266

Carriers ^* 266

Loading instructions.... 266

Cargo tie-down rings 268

Hooks.... 269

Expanding cargo compartment .... 269

Cargo compartment cover blind... 271

Cargo net* 272

Cargo management system*...... 275

Useful features 279

Storage compartments ...... 279

Parcel nets 283

Cup holders.... 284

Ashtrays 285

Cigarette lighter 286

Power outlets 287

Floormats.... 289

Heated steering wheel* 290

Telephone* 291

Tele Aid 294

Driving instructions 311

Drive sensibly - save fuel...... 311

Drinking and driving.... 311

Pedals 311

Power assistance 312

Brakes.... 312

Driving off 315

Parking 315

Tires.... 315

Hydroplaning.... 316

Tire traction 316

Tire speed rating 317

Winter driving instructions 318

Standing water.... 319

Off-road driving 319

Trailer towing 328

Passenger compartment...... 334

Driving abroad 334

Control and operation of radio

transmitters 334

Catalytic converter

(gasoline engine).... 335

Contents

Oxidation catalyst

(diesel engine).... 335

Emission control 335

Coolant temperature.... 336

At the gas station 337

Refueling.... 337

Check regularly and before a long trip.... 339

Engine compartment 341

Hood 341

Engine oil 343

Transmission fluid level.... 345

Coolant level 345

Windshield/rear window washer system and headlamp cleaning system* ...... 346

Tires and wheels.... 348

Important guidelines 348

Tire care and maintenance...... 349

Direction of rotation.... 351

Loading the vehicle 351

Recommended tire inflation pressure 357

Checking tire inflation pressure ... 359

Tire labeling.... 370

Load identification 374

DOT, Tire Identification Number

(TIN) 374

Maximum tire load 376

Maximum tire inflation pressure ... 376

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards (U.S. vehicles).... 377

Tire ply material 379

Tire and loading terminology...... 379

Rotating tires 382

Winter driving 384

Winter tires 384

Block heater (Canada only) ...... 385

Snow chains.... 385

Maintenance.... 386

Maintenance service indicator message 386

Calling up the maintenance service indicator display 388

Resetting the maintenance service indicator 388

Vehicle care.... 389

Cleaning and care of the vehicle... 389

Practical hints 399

Lamps in instrument cluster ..... 400

Lamp in center console 411

Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display 413

Where will I find ...? 448

First aid kit.... 448

Vehicle tool kit.... 448

Minispare wheel (except ML 63 AMG)...... 452

Collapsible tire (ML 63 AMG only).... 453

Unlocking/locking in an emergency .. 455

Unlocking the vehicle 455

Locking the vehicle.... 456

Unlocking and opening the tailgate 456

Fuel filler flap 457

Resetting activated head restraints.... 458

Vehicles without Rear seat entertainment system*...... 458

Vehicles with Rear seat entertainment system*...... 459

Replacing SmartKey batteries 461

Contents

Replacing bulbs 463

Bulbs 463

Replacing bulbs for front lamps.... 466

Replacing bulbs for rear lamps..... 471

Adjusting headlamp aim.... 473

Replacing wiper blades 475

Front wiper blades 475

Rear wiper blade 476

Flat tire 478

Preparing the vehicle.... 478

Mounting the spare wheel...... 479

Bleeding the fuel system

(diesel engine only)...... 488

Battery 489

Disconnecting, removing, reinstalling and

reconnecting the battery...... 491

Charging the battery 496

Jump starting 497

Towing the vehicle 499

Installing towing eye bolt...... 501

Stranded vehicle 503

Fuses 504

Fuse box in

engine compartment 505

Fuse box in

cargo compartment...... 505

Fuse box in passenger

compartment 506

Emergency engine shut-down ..... 506

Technical data 507

Parts service 508

Warranty coverage.... 509

Loss of Service and Warranty Information Booklet 509

Identification labels 510

Layout of poly-V-belt drive 512

ML 320 CDI.... 512

ML 350, ML 550 .... 512

ML 63 AMG.... 512

Engine.... 513

Rims and tires.... 515

Same size tires.... 516

Spare wheel 518

Electrical system 519

Main Dimensions.... 520

Weights 521

Fuels, coolants, lubricants.... 522

Capacities 522

Engine oils 525

Engine oil additives 525

Air conditioning refrigerant 525

Brake fluid.... 525

Premium unleaded gasoline (gasoline engine).... 526

Fuel requirements.... 526

Gasoline additives (gasoline engine).... 527

Coolants 528

Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system*...... 530

Index.... 531

Introduction

Product information

Product information

Please observe the following in your own best interest:

We recommend using Genuine Mercedes-Benz Parts as well as conversion parts and accessories explicitly approved by us for your vehicle model.

We have tested these parts to determine their reliability, safety and special suitability for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.

We are unable to make an assessment for other products and therefore cannot be held responsible for them, even if in individual cases an official approval or authorization by governmental or other agencies should exist. Use of such parts and accessories could adversely affect the safety, performance or reliability of your vehicle. Please do not use them.

Genuine Mercedes-Benz Parts as well as conversion parts and accessories approved by us are available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center where you will receive comprehensive information, also on permissible technical modifications, and where proper installation will be performed.

Introduction

Operator's Manual

This Operator's Manual contains a great deal of useful information. We urge you to read it carefully and familiarize yourself with the vehicle before driving.

For your own safety and longer service life of the vehicle, we urge you to follow the instructions and warnings contained in this manual. Ignoring them could result in damage to the vehicle or personal injury to you or others. Vehicle damage caused by failure to follow instructions is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

Your vehicle may have some or all of the equipment described in this manual. Therefore, you may find explanations for optional equipment not installed in your vehicle. If you have any questions about the operation of any equipment, any authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center will be glad to demonstrate the proper procedures.

We continuously strive to improve our product, and ask for your understanding that we reserve the right to make changes in design and equipment. Therefore, information, illustrations and descriptions in this Operator's Manual might differ from your vehicle.

Optional equipment is also described in this manual, including operating instructions wherever necessary. Since they are special-order items, the descriptions and illustrations herein may vary slightly from the actual equipment of your vehicle.

If there are any equipment details that are not shown or described in this Operator's Manual, any authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center will be glad to inform you of correct care and operating procedures.

The Operator's Manual and Maintenance Booklet are important documents and should be kept with the vehicle.

Service and warranty information

The Service and Warranty Information Booklet contains detailed information about the warranties covering your Mercedes-Benz, including:

• New Light Truck Limited Warranty
• Emission System Warranty
• Emission Performance Warranty
• California, Maine, Massachusetts, and Vermont Emission Control System Warranty (California, Maine, Massachusetts, and Vermont only)

• State Warranty Enforcement Laws (Lemon Laws)

Introduction

Operator's Manual

Important notice for California retail buyers and lessees of Mercedes-Benz automobiles

Under California law you may be entitled to a replacement of your vehicle or a refund of the purchase price or lease price, if Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its authorized repair or service facilities fail to fix one or more substantial defects or malfunctions in the vehicle that are covered by its express warranty after a reasonable number of repair attempts. During the period of 18 months from original delivery of the vehicle or the accumulation of 18 000 miles (approximately 29 000 km) on the odometer of the vehicle, whichever occurs first, a reasonable number of repair attempts is presumed for a retail buyer or lessee if one or more of the following occurs:

(1) the same substantial defect or malfunction results in a condition that is likely to cause death or serious bodily injury if the vehicle is driven, that defect or malfunction has been subject to repair two or more times, and you have directly notified Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC in writing of the need for its repair,
(2) the same substantial defect or malfunction of a less serious nature than category (1) has been subject to repair four or more times and you have directly notified us in writing of the need for its repair, or

(3) the vehicle is out of service by reason of repair of the same or different substantial defects or malfunctions for a cumulative total of more than 30 calendar days.

Written notification should not be sent to a dealer, it should be addressed to Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Customer Assistance Center One Mercedes Drive Montvale, NJ 07645-0350

Introduction

Operator's Manual

Maintenance

The Maintenance Booklet describes all the necessary maintenance work which should be performed at regular intervals.

Always have the Maintenance Booklet with you when you take the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center for service. The service advisor will record each service in the booklet for you.

Roadside Assistance

The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program provides factory-trained technical help in the event of a breakdown. Calls to the toll-free Roadside Assistance number

1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada)

will be answered by Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Representatives 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.

Roadside Assistance will be provided in accordance with standard program guidelines which include providing service to the vehicle up to a reasonable distance from a paved roadway. We will make every effort to assist in a breakdown situation, however, the accessibility of your vehicle will be determined by our authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center technician or the tow service provider on a case-by-case basis and may be a factor in our ability to respond.

Additional charges may be applicable for a breakdown location determined not to be a reasonably accessible roadside location as determined by our authorized technician and tow service provider.

For additional information refer to the Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program brochure in your vehicle literature portfolio.

Change of address or ownership

If you change your address, be sure to send in the "Change of Address Notice" found in the Service and Warranty Information Booklet, or simply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (in the USA) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer Service (in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. It is in your own interest that we can contact you should the need arise.

If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all literature with the vehicle to make it available to the next operator.

If you bought this vehicle used, be sure to send in the "Notice of Purchase of Used Truck" found in the Service and Warranty Information Booklet, or call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (in the USA) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer Service (in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100.

Operating your vehicle outside the USA or Canada

If you plan to operate your vehicle in foreign countries, please be aware that:

• service facilities or replacement parts may not be readily available,
• unleaded gasoline for vehicles with catalytic converters may not be available; the use of leaded fuels will damage the catalysts,
  • gasoline may have a considerably lower octane rating, and improper fuel can cause engine damage.

Introduction

Operator's Manual

Warning!

This Sport Utility Vehicle is designed for both on-road and off-road use. It can go places and perform tasks for which conventional 2-wheel drive passenger cars are not intended. This vehicle will handle and maneuver differently from conventional passenger cars in driving conditions which may occur on streets, highways and off-road use.

This vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many passenger cars. As with other vehicles of this type, if you make sharp turns at excessive speeds or abrupt maneuvers, the vehicle may roll over or may go out of control and crash. Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in an accident, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal injury.

Before you start to drive this vehicle, read the Operator's Manual. Take time to become familiar with the driving characteristics of this vehicle. Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls. Learn how your vehicle handles on different road surfaces. Do not attempt sharp turns at excessive speeds or abrupt maneuvers or other unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle control. When driving off-road or working the vehicle hard, do not overload it. And, always wear your seat belts at all times. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt.

Where to find it

This Operator's Manual is designed to provide comprehensive support information for you, the vehicle operator. Each section has its own reference color.

At a glance

Here you will find an overview of all the controls that can be operated from the driver's seat.

Getting started

Here you will find all the information you need for your first drive. You should read this section first if this is your first Mercedes-Benz vehicle or if you are renting or borrowing this vehicle.

Safety and Security

Here you will find descriptions of the safety and security features of your vehicle.

Controls in detail

Here you will find detailed information about the equipment installed on your vehicle. This section expands on the "Getting started" section and also describes technical innovations. If you are already familiar with the basic functions of your vehicle, this section will be of particular interest to you.

Operation

Here you will find all the information you need for the proper operation of your vehicle.

Practical hints

This section provides fast assistance for dealing with problems you may encounter.

Technical data

All important technical data for your vehicle can be found in this section.

Indexes

The table of contents and the index are designed to help you find information quickly and easily.

The following publications are part of your vehicle documentation:

- this Operator's Manual

• the Maintenance Booklet

Separate operating instructions will be provided as required depending on the equipment options installed in your vehicle.

Introduction

Symbols

Trademarks:

- ESP ^® is a registered trademark of DaimlerChrysler.

- HomeLink ^® is a registered trademark of Prince, a Johnson Controls Company.

The following symbols are found in this Operator's Manual:

* Optional equipment is identified with an asterisk. Since standard equipment varies between models, the descriptions and illustrations in this manual may differ slightly from the actual equipment of your vehicle.

Warning!

Warning notices draw your attention to hazards that may endanger your health or life, or the health or life of others.

! Highlights hazards that may result in damage to your vehicle.

i Helpful hints or further information you may find useful.

▶This symbol points to instructions for you to follow.

▶A number of these symbols appearing in succession indicates a multiple-step procedure.

▷ page This symbol tells you where to look for further information on a topic.

This continuation symbol marks a warning which is continued on the next page.

This continuation symbol marks a procedure which is continued on the next page.

-> This symbol is used to indicate cross-references to term definitions.

Display Words appearing in the multifunction display are printed in the type shown here.

▼Operating safety

Warning!

Work improperly carried out on electronic components and associated software could cause them to cease functioning. Because the vehicle's electronic components are interconnected, any modifications made may produce an undesired effect on other systems. Electronic malfunctions could seriously impair the operating safety of your vehicle.

See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center for repairs or modifications to electronic components.

Other improper work or modifications on the vehicle could also have a negative impact on the operating safety of the vehicle.

Some safety systems only function while the engine is running. You should therefore never turn off the engine while driving.

Warning!

Heavy blows against the vehicle underbody or tires/wheels, for example when running over an obstacle, road debris or a pothole, may cause serious damage and impair the operating safety of your vehicle. If you feel a sudden significant vibration or ride disturbance, or you suspect that damage to your vehicle has occurred, you should turn on your hazard warning flashers, carefully slow down, and drive with caution to an area which is a safe distance from the road.

Inspect the vehicle underbody and tires/wheels for possible damage. If the vehicle appears unsafe, have it towed to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center or other qualified maintenance or repair facility for further inspection or repairs.

Proper use of the vehicle

Proper use of the vehicle requires that you are familiar with the following information and rules:

• the safety precautions in this manual
- the "Technical data" section in this manual
- traffic rules and regulations
- motor vehicle laws and safety standards

Warning!

Various warning labels are attached to your vehicle. These warning labels are intended to make you and others aware of various risks. You should not remove any of these warning labels unless explicitly instructed to do so by information on the label itself. Removal of any of these labels may cause you and others to be unaware of certain risks which may result in an accident and/or personal injury.

Introduction

Problems with your vehicle

If you should experience a problem with your vehicle, particularly one that you believe may affect its safe operation, we urge you to immediately contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center to have the problem diagnosed and corrected if required. If the matter is not handled to your satisfaction, please discuss the problem with the Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center management, or if necessary contact us at one of the following addresses:

In the USA:

Customer Assistance Center

Customer Relations Department

Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.

98 Vanderhoof Avenue

Toronto, Ontario, M4G 4C9

▼Reporting safety defects

For the USA only:

The following text is published as required of manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the "National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966".

Reporting safety defects

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);

go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, D.C. 20590.

You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

Introduction

Vehicle data recording

Information regarding electronic recording devices

(Including notice pursuant to California Code § 9951)

Please note that your vehicle is equipped with devices that can record vehicle systems data and, if equipped with the Tele Aid system, may transmit some data in certain accidents.

This information helps, for example, to diagnose vehicle systems after a collision and to continuously improve vehicle safety. DaimlerChrysler may access the information and share it with others

• for safety research or vehicle diagnosis purposes
  • with the consent of the vehicle owner or lessee
• in response to an official request by law enforcement or other government agency
  • for use in dispute resolution involving DaimlerChrysler, its affiliates or sales/service organization and/or
  • as otherwise required or permitted by law.

Please check the Tele Aid subscription service agreement for details regarding the information that may be recorded or transmitted via that system.

At a glance

Exterior view

Cockpit

Instrument cluster

Multifunction steering wheel

Center console

Overhead control panel

Storage compartments

Door control panel

Blue circular logo with a stylized white emblem inside, no text or symbols present.

At a glance

Exterior view

Diagram of two red Mercedes-Benz SUVs with numbered labels pointing to each car.

Item Page

① Tailgate 119

Power tailgate* 119

Cargo compartment

- Loading instructions 266

• Cargo tie-down rings 268

- Hooks 269

- Expanding 269

- Cover blind 271

- Cargo net* 272

Vehicle tool kit 448

Spare wheel 452

② Rear window defroster 206

③ Rear lamps 464

④ Fuel filler flap 337

Refueling 337

Fuel 338,526

Item Page

⑤ Exterior rear view mirrors

Adjusting 49

Auto-dimming rear view 199 mirrors*

Power folding* 200

⑥ Towing eye bolt 499

Installing towing eye bolt 501

⑦ Tires and wheels 348, 515

Checking tire inflation 359 pressure

General information 348

Flat tire 478

Spare wheel 452

⑧ Hood 341

Opening 341

Engine oil 343

Coolant 345

Item

⑨ Windshield wipers 60

Wiper blades, replacing 475

Wiper blades, cleaning 395

⑩ Windshield

Cleaning with wiper fluid 62

Cleaning 395

⑪ Roof rails 266

Carriers* 266

⑫ Power tilt/sliding sunroof 240

⑬ Doors

Locking and unlocking 110

Opening 118

Unlocking/locking in an emergency 455

⑭ Front lamps 464

⑮ Headlamp cleaning system* 199

At a glance

Cockpit

Interior view of a Mercedes-Benz car with numbered component labels pointing to the dashboard and steering wheel.

Item Page

1 Cruise control lever 245
2 Instrument cluster 26
3 Multifunction steering wheel	30
4 Horn
5 Steering wheel gearshift buttons	193
6 Gear selector lever for automatic transmission	54
7 Front Parktronic* warning indicators	262
8 Overhead control panel 33
9 Glove box release	279
Glove box lock	280

Item Page

10 Glove box 279CD changer* 279AUX-socket ^1	279
11 Power outlet 288
12 Center console 31
13 Starter switch 40
14 Steering wheel adjustment, manual	47
15 Hood lock release 341
16 Parking brake release 57
17 Parking brake pedal 65
18 Power tailgate switch* 121

Item Page

19 Door control panel 36
20 Exterior lamp switch 59,	135
21 Steering wheel adjustment, electrical*	48
Heated steering wheel*	290
22 Combination switch	139
• High beam	59
• Turn signals	60
• Windshield wipers	60
• Rear window wiper	62

^1 Depending on vehicle configuration.

At a glance

Instrument cluster

① ② ③ ④ ⑤ BRAKE mph LIM (ABS) 120 140 6 160 5 7 x1000 1/min 1/2 0 1

P54.30-9424-31

Item Page

① Left turn signal indicator lamp
② To dim instrument cluster illumination 145
③ Reset button for:
- Resetting trip odometer 146
- Resetting all settings 164
④ To brighten instrument 145 cluster illumination
⑤ Right turn signal indicator lamp
⑥ Clock 169

Item Page

⑦ Speedometer with:

Antilock Brake 400 System (ABS) indicator lamp

LIM Variable speed limiter indicator lamp ^1

Distance warning lamp ^1

^1 Lamp without function. It illuminates when the ignition is on. It should go out when the engine is running.

Item Page

BRAKE Brake warning lamp, USA only 401
(①) Brake warning lamp, Canada only 401
Electronic Stability 405 Program (ESP®) warning lamp
Combination low tire pressure/TPMS malfunction telltale, USA only Low tire pressure telltale*, Canada only 408

At a glance

Instrument cluster

mph 149.8 Miles 26753 +72°F R N P D S SRS x1000 1/min CHECK ENGINE 10

P54.30-9560-31

Item Page

⑧ Multifunction display with:

• Trip odometer 146
  • Main odometer 147

⑨ Tachometer with:

Seat belt telltale 87,

406

00 Preglow indicator 55

lamp

SRS Supplemental 72,

Restraint System 410

(SRS) indicator lamp

CHECK ENGINE Engine malfunction 403

indicator lamp,

USA only

Engine malfunction 403

indicator lamp,

Canada only

ED High beam headlamp 59,

indicator

Item Page

⑩ Fuel gauge with:

Fuel tank reserve warning 410 lamp

Fuel filler flap indica- 337

tor: The fuel filler flap

is located on the rear

right-hand side.

⑪ Multifunction display with:

• Outside temperature 147,

indicator or digital speed- 168

ometer (depending on

selected setting in the

control system)

•Transmission position 187

indicator

•Gear range indicator 192

- Selected program mode 195

indicator ^1

Item Page

• Downhill Speed Regulation (DSR) indicator 251
• Off-road driving program indicator 253
  •Rear window wiper indicator 62
• Set speed for cruise control 246

At a glance

Multifunction steering wheel

Diagram of a car dashboard with numbered parts for identification and labeling

Item Page

① Multifunction display 147

Operating the control system

② Telephone*:

Press button

to take a call

to dial

to redial

to end a call

to reject an

incoming call

③ Selecting the submenu or

setting the volume:

Press button

up/to increase

down/to decrease

148

Item Page

Voice Control

System* on ^1 , see separate operating instructions

Moving within a menu:

Press button

for next display

for previous display

OFF Voice Control

System* off ^1 , see separate operating instructions

Menu systems:

Press button

for next menu

for previous menu

▼Center console

Upper part

Diagram of car air conditioning system with numbered components and a warning triangle marker

Item Page

① COMAND system, see separate operating instructions
② Climate control 204
3-zone automatic climate control* 218
Rear window defroster 203
③ Seat heating*, 130 front passenger side
④ Seat ventilation ^* , 131 front passenger side
⑤ Parktronic system* 259 deactivation switch
⑥ Vehicle level control 257 switch*
⑦ Front passenger front air 83, bag off indicator lamp 411,

Item Page

⑧ Storage compartment ^1 281
⑨ Alarm system indicator 107 lamp
⑩ Electronic Stability Program 102 (ESP®) switch
⑪ Adaptive damping system 255 (ADS)* switch
⑫ Seat ventilation*, 131 driver's side
⑬ Seat heating*, driver's side 130
⑭ Switch for Downhill Speed 250 Regulation (DSR)
⑮ Hazard warning flasher 141
⑯ Switch for Off-road driving program 253 ML 63 AMG: Program mode selector 194 switch for automatic transmission

At a glance

Center console

Lower part

① ② ③ ④ P68 20-37C9-31

Item Page

① Storage compartment with 281
- Power outlet ^1 288 or - Ashtray with cigarette lighter ^1 285
② Cup holder 284
③ Armrest storage/telephone* compartment release 281
④ Card, ticket holder 284 (removable)

Overhead control panel

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 P68.00-4450-31

Item Page

① Left reading lamp switch 142
② Rear interior lighting switch 142
③ Automatic interior lighting switch 142
④ Front interior lighting switch 142
⑤ Right reading lamp switch 142
⑥ Front right interior lamp 142
⑦ Power tilt/sliding sunroof 240 switch
⑧ Tele Aid (emergency call system) button 297
⑨ Interior rear view mirror 199
⑩ Front right reading lamp 142

Item Page

⑪ Front left reading lamp 142
⑫ Garage door opener 302
⑬ Vehicles without telephone* installed: Hands-free microphone for Tele Aid (emergency call system)
⑭ Vehicles with telephone* installed: Hands-free microphone for Tele Aid (emergency call system) and telephone*
⑮ Front left interior lamp 142

At a glance

Storage compartments

Top-down diagram of a car interior with numbered components for identification and assembly reference.

Item Page

① Parcel net in front passen- 283 ger footwell
② Glove box/CD changer* 279
③ Door pocket
④ Parcel net on front passen- 283 ger seat backrest
⑤ Door pocket
⑥ Vehicle tool kit, spare wheel 448
⑦ Door pocket
⑧ Parcel net on driver's seat backrest 283
⑨ Door pocket
⑩ Holder for gas cards 202

Item Page

⑪ Storage compartment (depending on equipment configuration for your model) 281
⑫ Depending on vehicle configuration:
Storage compartment 281
Ashtray 285
⑬ Cup holders 284
⑭ Storage/telephone* compartment with coin holder 281
⑮ Rear storage compartments 282
⑯ Cup holder in rear armrest 284

At a glance

Door control panel

Car interior panel with numbered labels pointing to different controls and buttons

Item Page

① Inside door handle 118
② Central unlocking switch 126 Central locking switch 126
③ Exterior rear view mirror adjustment 49
④ Selection buttons for exterior rear view mirror adjustment 49 Power-folding exterior rear view mirrors* 200
⑤ Switches for opening/closing front and rear door windows 235
⑥ Rear door window override switch 96
⑦ Remote tailgate release 121, switch, power tailgate* 119

Getting started

Unlocking

Adjusting

Driving

Parking and locking

Abstract geometric pattern with three parallel blue diagonal lines on a light gray background (no text or symbols)

Getting started

Unlocking

The "Getting started" section provides an overview of the vehicle's most basic functions. First-time Mercedes-Benz owners should pay special attention to the information given here.

If you are already familiar with the basic functions described here, the "Controls in detail" section will provide you with further information. The corresponding page references are located at the end of each segment.

Unlocking with the SmartKey

P80.35-2281-31

SmartKey

① Lock button
② Unlock button* for tailgate
③ Unlock button
④ PANIC Panic button (▷page 97)

Warning!

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury.

▶ Press unlock button 🔍 on the SmartKey.

All turn signal lamps flash once. The vehicle unlocks. The locking knobs in the doors move up. The anti-theft alarm system is disarmed. The locator lighting comes on if the feature is enabled in the control system (▶page 171).

▶Enter the vehicle and insert the SmartKey in the starter switch.

For more information, see "Locking and unlocking" (>page 110).

Unlocking with KEYLESS-GO\*

With the KEYLESS-GO function, you can lock or unlock the vehicle without using the remote control buttons on the SmartKey and start the engine without inserting the SmartKey into the starter switch.

To unlock the vehicle, the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be outside the vehicle, no further than approximately 3 feet (1 meter) away from the respective door.

Warning!

When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury.

▶Grasp an outside door handle.

All turn signal lamps flash once. The vehicle unlocks. The locking knobs in the doors move up. The anti-theft alarm system is disarmed. The locator lighting comes on if the feature is enabled in the control system (▷page 171).

If the vehicle has been parked for more than 72 hours, you must pull an outside door handle in order to activate the KEYLESS-GO function.

▶Enter the vehicle.

For more information, see "SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*" (▷page 113).

Starter switch positions

Warning!

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* from the starter switch, take it with you and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury.

Getting started

Unlocking

SmartKey

0 1 2 3 P15.10-2225-31

Starter switch

0 For removing SmartKey

1 Power supply for some electrical consumers, such as seat adjustment
2 Ignition (power supply for all electrical consumers) and driving position

All lamps (except high beam headlamp indicator lamp and turn signal indicator lamps unless activated) in the instrument cluster come on. If a lamp in the instrument cluster fails to come on when the ignition is switched on, have it checked and replaced if necessary. If a lamp in the instrument cluster re-

mains on after starting the engine or comes on while driving, refer to “Lamps in instrument cluster” ( page 400).

3 Starting position

When you switch on the ignition, the indicator and warning lamps (except high beam headlamp indicator lamp and turn signal indicator lamps unless activated) in the instrument cluster come on. The indicator and warning lamps (except high beam headlamp indicator lamp and turn signal indicator lamps if activated) will go out when the engine is running. This indicates that the respective systems are operational.

If the SmartKey does not belong to the vehicle, the SmartKey can be turned in the starter switch. However, the ignition does not switch on and the engine does not start.
When the SmartKey is removed from the starter switch and the automatic transmission is in a position other than P, the automatic transmission automatically shifts to P.

! If the SmartKey cannot be turned in the starter switch, the battery may not be sufficiently charged.

• Check the battery and charge it if necessary (▷page 489).
  • Get a jump start (▷ page 497).

To prevent accelerated battery discharge or a completely discharged battery, always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch when the engine is not in operation.

Getting started

Unlocking

SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO\*

Vehicles equipped with the KEYLESS-GO feature are supplied with a SmartKey with integrated KEYLESS-GO function and a removable KEYLESS-GO start/stop button.

With the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button inserted and the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO present in the vehicle, pressing the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button

• without the brake pedal depressed corresponds to the various starter switch positions (▶page 42)
• with the brake pedal firmly depressed will start the engine (▶page 54)

If you wish or should there be a need to insert the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO in the starter switch, the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button can be easily removed by pulling it out of the starter switch.

The KEYLESS-GO start/stop button does not need to be removed from the starter switch when you leave the vehicle. However, always take the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO with you when you leave the vehicle. As long as the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is in the vehicle, the vehicle's electrical systems can be switched on or the engine can be started using the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button.

Diagram of a car air vent with labeled parts, showing component 1 and component 2 with a magnified inset view.

① KEYLESS-GO start/stop button ② Starter switch

ENGINE START STOP ③ ENGINE START STOP ④ P54 25-5796-31

KEYLESS-GO start/stop button

③ USA only
④ Canada only

The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be located in the vehicle.

▶Insert KEYLESS-GO start/stop button ① into starter switch ② (if not inserted already).
▶Make sure the automatic transmission is set to P (▷page 185).
▶Do not depress the brake pedal.

Getting started

Unlocking

Position 0

Before you press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button, the vehicle's on-board electronics have status 0 (as with SmartKey removed).

Position 1

▶Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button once.

This supplies power for some electrical consumers, such as seat adjustment.

If you now press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button

- once more, the ignition (position 2) is switched on

- twice more, the power supply is again switched off

Ignition (or Position 2)

▶Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button twice.

This supplies power for all electrical consumers.

All lamps (except high beam headlamp indicator lamp and turn signal indicator lamps unless activated) in the instrument cluster come on. If a lamp in the instrument cluster fails to come on when the ignition is switched on, have it checked and replaced if necessary. If a lamp in the instrument cluster remains on after starting the engine or comes on while driving, refer to "Lamps in instrument cluster" (>page 400).

If you now press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button once more, the power supply is again switched off.

When you switch on the ignition, the indicator and warning lamps (except high beam headlamp indicator lamp and turn signal indicator lamps unless activated) in the instrument cluster come on. The indicator and warning lamps (except high beam headlamp indicator lamp and turn signal indicator lamps if activated) should go out when the engine is running. This indicates that the respective systems are operational.

For information on starting the engine using the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button, see "Starting with KEYLESS-GO*" (▶page 55).

For more information on KEYLESS-GO, see "SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*" (▷page 113).

Adjusting

Warning!

All seat, head restraint, steering wheel, and rear view mirror adjustments, as well as fastening of seat belts, must be done before the vehicle is put into motion.

Seats

Warning!

Do not adjust the driver's seat while driving. Adjusting the seat while driving could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.

Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat backrest in an excessively reclined position as this can be dangerous. You could slide under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide under it, the belt would apply force at the abdomen or neck. That could cause serious or fatal injuries. The seat backrest and seat belts provide the best restraint when the

wearer is in a position that is as upright as possible and belts are properly positioned on the body.

Warning!

Your seat must be adjusted so that you can correctly fasten your seat belt (▷page 51).

Observe the following points:

• Adjust the backrest until your arms are slightly angled when holding the steering wheel
• Adjust the seat to a comfortable seating position that still allows you to reach the accelerator/brake pedal safely. The position should be as far back as possible with the driver still able to operate the controls properly.
• Adjust the head restraint so that it is as close to the head as possible and the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at eye level.

- Never place hands under the seat or near any moving parts while a seat is being adjusted.

Failure to do so could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury.

Warning!

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle.

Even with the SmartKey or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* removed from the starter switch or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* removed from the vehicle, the power seats can be operated.

Therefore, do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury.

Getting started

Adjusting

Warning!

According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating position. Thus, we strongly recommend that children be placed in the rear seats whenever possible. Regardless of seating position, children 12 years old and under must be seated and properly secured in an appropriately sized infant restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child. For additional information, see "Children in the vehicle" ( page 89).

A child's risk of serious or fatal injuries is significantly increased if the child restraints are not properly secured in the vehicle and/or the child is not properly secured in the child restraint.

Seat adjustment

The seat adjustment switch is located on the entry side of each front seat base.

① ② ③ ④ ⑤

① Head restraint height (vehicles with memory function)*
② Seat cushion tilt
③ Seat height
④ Backrest tilt
⑤ Seat fore and aft adjustment

When moving the seats, make sure there are no items in the footwell or behind the seats; otherwise you could damage the seats.
When the rear seats are folded forward, e.g. for cargo compartment expansion ( page 269), the front seats may not be moved to the rearmost position. Otherwise you could damage the front and rear seats.
When adjusting the seat backrest tilt and head restraint height, make sure the sun visor is folded up ( page 201). If the head restraint is in the uppermost position, it could hit and damage the sun visor.
i Vehicles without memory function ^* : The seats can be adjusted within 5 minutes after either front door has been opened. The counter resets each time

• you open or close a front door
• you insert the SmartKey into the starter switch
• you remove the SmartKey from the starter switch
• you switch the ignition on or off

Getting started

Adjusting

The memory function* (▷ page 133) lets you store the settings for the seat positions together with the settings for the steering wheel and the exterior rear view mirrors.

Seat fore and aft adjustment

▶Press the switch forward or backward in direction of arrow ⑤.

Seat height

▶Press the switch up or down in direction of arrow ③.

Seat cushion tilt

▶Press the switch up or down in direction of arrow ② until your upper legs are lightly supported.

Seat backrest tilt

▶Press the switch forward or backward in direction of arrow ④.

Head restraint height

Warning!

Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head restraints. Head restraints are intended to help reduce injuries during an accident.

With a rear seat occupied, make sure to move the respective head restraint up from the lowest non-use position and have the occupant adjust the head restraint properly.

For your protection, drive only with properly positioned and engaged head restraints.

Adjust the head restraint so that it is as close to the head as possible and the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at eye level. This will reduce the potential for injury to the head and neck in the event of an accident or similar situation.

Do not attempt to remove front seat head restraints. They can only be removed by qualified technicians. We recommend that you have this work carried out by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

Vehicles with memory function*:

▶ Press switch ① (▷ page 44) up or down in direction of arrow.

Vehicles without memory function*:

Car seat assembly diagram with numbered instructions and blue directional arrows indicating movement or force

① Head restraint
② Release button

Getting started

Adjusting

Raising:

▶Manually adjust the height of head restraint ① by pulling it upward.

If head restraint ① is fully retracted, push release button ② in direction of arrow and pull head restraint ① upward.

Lowering:

▶ To lower head restraint ①, push release button ② in direction of arrow and press down on head restraint ①.

Head restraint fore and aft adjustment

Interior view of a car showing the backrest and seat area with a blue directional arrow indicating movement (no text or symbols)

Manually adjust the angle of the head restraint.

▶While seated, reach behind you with both hands and find lower edge of the head restraint.
▶Adjust the head restraint to the desired position by pushing or pulling on the lower edge of the head restraint cushion.

For more information, see "Seats" (▷page 127).

Steering wheel

Easy-entry/exit feature\*

This feature allows for easier entry into and exit from the vehicle. When entering and exiting the vehicle, the steering wheel is in its uppermost position.

The easy-entry/exit feature can be activated or deactivated in the Comfort submenu of the control system (▷page 176).

Warning!

You must make sure no one can become trapped or injured by the moving steering wheel when the easy-entry/exit feature is activated.

To stop steering wheel movement, do one of the following:

- Move steering wheel adjustment stalk * (▷page 49).

- Press one of the stored position buttons* or memory button M* (▷page 133).

Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Children could open the driver's door and unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit feature, which could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury.

With the easy-entry/exit feature activated, the steering wheel will return to its last set position when you

- close the driver's door with the ignition switched on

or

- insert the SmartKey into the starter switch or press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button (▶page 41) once with the driver's door closed

i The last set steering wheel position is stored when

• the ignition is switched off (▷ page 39)

- the position is stored in memory (▷page 133)

With the easy-entry/exit feature activated, the steering wheel tilts upwards when you

- remove the SmartKey from the starter switch

or

- open the driver's door with the SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or 1 or the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button in position 1 (▶page 41)

If the current position for the steering wheel is in the uppermost tilt position, the steering wheel will no longer be able to move upward when the easy-entry/exit feature is activated.

The adjustment procedure is briefly interrupted, when the engine is started.

Warning!

Let the system complete the adjustment procedure before setting the vehicle in motion. All steering wheel adjustment must be completed before setting the vehicle in motion. Driving off with the steering wheel still adjusting could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.

Steering wheel adjustment, manual

Warning!

Only adjust the steering wheel with the vehicle at a standstill and make sure the steering wheel is securely locked in place before driving off.

▶▶

Getting started

Adjusting

Driving without the steering wheel adjustment locked may cause an unexpected steering wheel movement which could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Make sure the steering wheel is securely locked by trying to move it up and down, and in and out before driving off.

Make sure that

• you can reach the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent at the elbows
  •you can move your legs freely
• all displays (including malfunction and indicator lamps) on the instrument cluster are clearly visible

The steering wheel adjustment release handle is located on the lower left of the steering column.

Interior view of a car showing steering wheel and dashboard with blue directional arrows indicating motion (no text or symbols)

① Release handle

▶To unlock the steering column, pull release handle ① out to its stop limit.
▶Move steering wheel to the desired position.
▶ Push release handle ① back to its original position to relock the steering column.
The steering column is locked into position again.
▶ Make sure the steering column is securely locked by trying to move the steering wheel up and down as well as in and out before driving off.

Steering wheel adjustment, electrical\*

Warning!

Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. Adjusting the steering wheel while driving could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle.

Even with the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* removed from the starter switch or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* removed from the vehicle, the steering wheel adjustment feature can be operated.

Therefore, do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury.

The memory function* (▷ page 133) lets you store the settings for the steering wheel together with the settings for seat positions and the exterior rear view mirrors.

Make sure that

• you can reach the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent at the elbows
• you can move your legs freely
• all displays (including malfunction and indicator lamps) on the instrument cluster are clearly visible

The steering wheel adjustment stalk is located on the lower left of the steering column.

1 2 1 2 1 2 P48-1C-2290-31

① Adjusting steering wheel, in or out
② Adjusting steering wheel, up or down

Adjusting steering column in or out

▶Move stalk forward or back in direction of arrow ①.

Adjusting steering column up or down

▶Move stalk up or down in direction of arrow ②.

Mirrors

Adjust the interior and exterior rear view mirrors before driving so that you have a good view of the road and traffic conditions.

Interior rear view mirror

▶Manually adjust the interior rear view mirror.

For more information, see "Rear view mirrors" (▷page 199).

Exterior rear view mirrors

Warning!

Exercise care when using the passenger-side exterior rear view mirror. The mirror surface is convex (outwardly curved surface for a wider field of view). Objects in mirror are closer than they appear. Check your interior rear view mirror or glance over your shoulder before changing lanes.

Getting started

Adjusting

The buttons are located on the driver's door.

Car interior control panel with numbered UI icons and a magnified view of the dashboard area

① Driver's side exterior rear view mirror button
② Adjustment button
③ Passenger-side exterior rear view mirror button

▶ Switch on the ignition (▷ page 40).

▶ Press button ① for the driver's side exterior rear view mirror or button ③ for the passenger-side exterior rear view mirror.

The indicator lamp on the respective button comes on for approximately 15 seconds.

If you do not make adjustments to the selected exterior rear view mirror within 15 seconds, the indicator lamp goes out. You will then have to select the desired exterior rear view mirror again before any adjustments can be made. Adjustments can only be made with the indicator lamp for the respective exterior rear view mirror button illuminated.
▶ Push adjustment button ② up, down, left, or right according to the desired setting.
! If an exterior rear view mirror was forcibly pushed forward (hit from the rear) or forcibly pushed rearward (hit from the front), reposition it by applying firm pressure until it snaps into place. The mirror housing is then properly positioned and you can adjust the mirror in the usual manner.

! Vehicle with power folding exterior rear view mirrors*:

If an exterior rear view mirror housing is forcibly pushed forward (hit from the rear) or forcibly pushed rearward (hit from the front), press fold button ① (▶page 201) to fold mirrors in, then press fold button ① (▶page 201) again to fold mirrors out. Do not force mirrors by hand as this may damage the adjustment mechanism.

The mirror housing is then properly positioned and you can adjust the mirror in the usual manner.

The memory function* (▷ page 133) lets you store the settings for the exterior rear view mirrors together with the setting for the steering wheel and the seat positions.
At low ambient temperatures, the exterior rear view mirrors will be heated automatically.

For more information, see "Rear view mirrors" (▷page 199).

▼Driving

Warning!

Make sure that absolutely no objects are obstructing the pedal's range of movement.

Keep the driver's footwell clear of all obstacles. If there are any floormats or carpets in the footwell, make sure that the pedals still have sufficient clearance.

During sudden driving or braking maneuvers, the objects could get caught between the pedals. You could then no longer brake or accelerate. This could lead to accidents and injury.

Fastening the seat belts

Warning!

Always fasten your seat belt before driving off. Always make sure your passengers are properly restrained.

Failure to wear and properly fasten and position your seat belt greatly increases your risk of injuries and their likely severity in an accident. You and your passengers should always wear seat belts.

If you are ever in an accident, your injuries can be considerably more severe without your seat belt properly buckled. Without your seat belt buckled, you are much more likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be ejected from it. You can be seriously injured or killed.

In the same crash, the possibility of injury or death is lessened if you are wearing your seat belt. The air bags can only provide the protection they were designed to afford if the occupants are using their seat belts ( page 84).

Warning!

According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating position. Thus, we strongly recommend that children be placed in the rear seats.

Regardless of seating position, children 12 years old and under must be seated and properly secured in an appropriately sized infant restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child. For additional information, see "Children in the vehicle" (▷page 89).

A child's risk of serious or fatal injuries is significantly increased if the child restraints are not properly secured in the vehicle and/or the child is not properly secured in the child restraint.

Getting started

Driving

Warning!

Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat backrest in an excessively reclined position as this can be dangerous. You could slide under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide under it, the belt would apply force at the abdomen or neck. That could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The seat backrest and seat belt provide the best restraint when the wearer is in a position that is as upright as possible and the belt is properly positioned on the body.

Warning!

Never let more people ride in the vehicle than there are seat belts available. Make sure everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly restrained with a separate seat belt. Never use a seat belt for more than one person at a time.

Warning!

Read and observe the additional warning notices printed in the "Safety and Security" section (▷ page 76) and (▷ page 84).

Car seatbelt diagram showing four numbered components of the seatbelt seatbelt in a car interior, with magnified views highlighting key parts.

① Seat belt outlet
② Latch plate
③Buckle
④ Release button

Getting started

Driving

▶With a smooth motion, pull the belt out of seat belt outlet ①.
▶ Place the shoulder portion of the belt across the top of your shoulder and the lap portion across your hips.
▶ Push latch plate ② into buckle ③ (▶page 52) until it clicks.
▶If necessary, tighten the lap portion to a snug fit by pulling shoulder portion up.

Seat belt height adjustment

Close-up of a car seatbelt buckle with blue directional arrow indicating movement (no text or symbols on the belt)

① Release button

▶ Press release button ① and move the seat belt height adjuster upward or downward.

Proper use of seat belts

• Do not twist the belt when fastening.
• Adjust seat belt so that the shoulder portion is located as close as possible to the middle of the shoulder (it should not touch the neck). Never pass the shoulder portion of the belt under your arm. For this purpose, you can adjust the height of the belt outlet (I>page 53).
• Position the lap belt as low as possible on your hips (over hip joint) and not across the abdomen.

• Place the seat backrest in a position that is as upright as possible.

• Never use a seat belt for more than one person at a time.

• Do not fasten a seat belt around a person and another object at the same time. When using a seat belt to secure infant or toddler restraints or children in booster seats, always follow the child seat manufacturer's instructions.
• Check your seat belt periodically during travel to make sure that it is properly positioned.
• Make sure the seat belt is always fitted snugly. Take special care of this when wearing loose clothing.

Getting started

Driving

Warning!

Do not pass belts over sharp edges. They could tear.

Do not allow the belt to get caught in the door or in the seat adjustment mechanism. This could damage the belt.

Never attempt to make modifications to seat belts. This could impair the effectiveness of the belts.

Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may severely weaken them. In a crash, they may not be able to provide adequate protection.

Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly stressed in an accident must be replaced. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

Starting the engine Automatic transmission

Warning!

Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can cause unconsciousness and possible death.

Do not run the engine in confined areas (such as a garage) which are not properly ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas fumes are entering the vehicle while driving, have the cause determined and corrected immediately. If you must drive under these conditions, drive only with at least one window fully open.

R N P N D P27.60-2806-31

Gearshift pattern for automatic transmission

P Park position
R Reverse gear
N Neutral
D Drive position

For more information on how to operate the gear selector lever, see "Automatic transmission" (▶page 183).

Starting with the SmartKey

For information on turning off the engine with the SmartKey, see "Turning off the engine" (▷page 66).

Gasoline engine

▶Make sure the automatic transmission is set to P.

The transmission position indicator in the multifunction display should be on P (▷page 147).

▶Do not depress the accelerator.
▶Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 3 (▷page 39) and hold until the engine starts.

You can also use the "touch-start" function. Turn the SmartKey to position 3 and release it again immediately. The engine then starts automatically.

Diesel engine

▶ Make sure the automatic transmission is set to P.

The transmission position indicator in the multifunction display should be on P (▷page 147).

▶Do not depress the accelerator.
▶Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 2 (▷page 40).

Preglow indicator lamp 700 in the instrument cluster comes on.

▶As soon as preglow indicator lamp 📄 goes out, turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 3 (▶page 40) and release it.

The engine starts automatically.

If the engine is at operating temperature, preglow indicator lamp may not stay on and you can start the engine without preglowing.

Starting with KEYLESS-GO\*

Warning!

As long as the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is in your vehicle, the vehicle can be started. Therefore, never leave children unattended in the vehicle, as they could otherwise accidentally start the engine.

When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO with you and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.

You can start your vehicle without the SmartKey in the starter switch using the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button in the starter switch.

The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be located in the vehicle.

Getting started

Driving

ENGINE START STOP ① ENGINE START STOP ② P54.25-58C8-31

KEYLESS-GO start/stop button

① USA only
② Canada only

▶ Make sure KEYLESS-GO start/stop button ① is inserted in the starter switch (▶page 41).

If you wish to start the engine using the SmartKey instead of the KEYLESS-GO feature, remove the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button from the starter switch (▶page 41).

For information on turning off the engine with KEYLESS-GO, see "Turning off with KEYLESS-GO*" (▷page 67).

Gasoline engine

▶ Make sure the automatic transmission is set to P.
The transmission position indicator in the multifunction display should be on P (▷page 147).
▶Depress the brake pedal during the starting procedure.
▶Do not depress the accelerator.
▶Press KEYLESS-GO start/stop button ① once.
The engine starts if the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is in the vehicle.

Diesel engine

▶ Make sure the automatic transmission is set to P.
The transmission position indicator in the multifunction display should be on P.
▶Depress the brake pedal during the starting procedure.
▶Do not depress the accelerator.
▶Press KEYLESS-GO start/stop button ① once.
The engine preglows and starts if the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is in the vehicle.

If the engine is at operating temperature, the time the engine needs to preglow is reduced.

Starting difficulties

If the engine does not start as described, carry out the following steps:

▶If you are starting the engine with the SmartKey, turn SmartKey in starter switch to position 0 and repeat starting procedure.
▶If you are starting the engine with KEYLESS-GO*: Close any doors that may be open to allow for better detection of the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*.

Or:

▶Remove KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button from starter switch (▷page 41).
▶Start the engine with the SmartKey as radio signals from another source may be interfering with the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*.
▶ Repeat the starting procedure (▷page 54). Remember that extended starting attempts can drain the battery.

▶Get a jump start (▷page 497).
If the engine does not start after several starting attempts, there could be a malfunction in the engine electronics or in the fuel supply system.
▶Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center or call Roadside Assistance.

Parking brake

P42.20-2385-31

① Release handle

Warning!

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* from the starter switch, take it with you and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Children could release the parking brake, which could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury.

▶ Release the parking brake by pulling on release handle ①.

The warning lamp BRAKE (USA only) or Ⓐ (Canada only) in the instrument cluster goes out.

Getting started

Driving

Driving off

▶Depress the brake pedal.
The gear selector lever can now be used.
▶ Shift automatic transmission to D or R (▷page 185).
i Wait for the gear selection process to complete before setting the vehicle in motion.
i Shifting from gear position P to position R, N, or D is only possible with the brake pedal depressed. Without the brake pedal depressed, the gear selector lever can be moved, but the parking pawl remains engaged, not allowing shifting to occur.
▶ Release the brake pedal.
▶ Carefully depress the accelerator pedal.

! If you hear a warning signal and the message Release Parking Brake appears in the multifunction display when driving off, you have forgotten to release the parking brake. Release the parking brake (▶page 57).
Once the vehicle is in motion, the automatic central locking system engages and the locking knobs drop down.

The automatic door lock feature can be deactivated (▷page 175).

You can open a locked door from the inside. Open door only when conditions are safe to do so.

After a cold start, the automatic transmission shifts at a higher engine revolution. This allows the catalytic converter (gasoline engine) or the oxidation catalyst (diesel engine) to reach its operating temperature earlier.

Warning!

On slippery road surfaces, never downshift in order to obtain braking action. This could result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control. Your vehicle's ABS will not prevent this type of loss of control.

Warning!

It is dangerous to shift the automatic transmission out of P or N if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.

! Shift the automatic transmission to position P or R only when the vehicle is stopped in order to avoid damaging the transmission.
! Do not run cold engine at high engine speeds. Running a cold engine at high engine speeds may shorten the service life of the engine.

ML 63 AMG:

At engine temperatures below 68^ F ( 20^ C), the engine's maximum speed is restricted in order to protect it from damage. Avoid driving your vehicle at full speed when the engine is cold to prevent premature engine wear and/or diminished comfort.

! Simultaneously depressing the accelerator pedal and applying the brakes reduces engine performance and causes premature brake and drivetrain wear.

For more information, see "Driving instructions" (▶page 311).

For information on off-road driving, see "Off-road driving" (▷page 319).

Switching on headlamps

Low beam headlamps

The exterior lamp switch is located on the dashboard to the left of the steering wheel.

1 2 P54.23-5751-31

Exterior lamp switch

1 Off

2 Low beam headlamps on

▶ Switch on the ignition (▷ page 39).

▶Turn the exterior lamp switch to position 📋.

The low beam headlamps come on.

High beam

The combination switch is located on the left of the steering column.

Diagram showing car dashboard and steering wheel with labeled parts, including a close-up of the component being directed.

Combination switch

① High beam

② High beam flasher

▶Push the combination switch in direction of arrow ①.

The high beam headlamp indicator lamp ☐ in the instrument cluster comes on (▶page 26).

For more information on headlamps, see "Lighting" (▶page 135).

Getting started

Driving

Turn signals

The combination switch is located on the left of the steering column.

Diagram showing car dashboard and camera lens with labeled parts, including a magnified inset highlighting the component.

Combination switch

① Turn signals, right

② Turn signals, left

▶Press the combination switch in direction of arrow ① or ②.

The corresponding turn signal indicator lamp or in the instrument cluster flashes (page 26).

The combination switch resets automatically after major steering wheel movement.

To signal minor directional changes such as changing lanes, press combination switch only to point of resistance and release. The corresponding turn signal will flash three times.

Windshield wipers

The combination switch is located on the left of the steering column.

Diagram showing car steering wheel with labeled parts and a magnified inset highlighting the lever mechanism.

Combination switch

① Single wipe

Wiping with windshield washer fluid

② Switching on windshield wipers

▶ Switch on the ignition (▷ page 40).

! Do not operate the windshield wipers when the windshield is dry. Dust that accumulates on a windshield might scratch the glass and/or damage the wiper blades when wiping occurs on a dry windshield. If it is necessary to operate the windshield wipers in dry weather conditions, always operate the windshield wipers with windshield washer fluid ( page 62).

! If anything blocks the windshield wipers (leaves, snow, etc.), switch them off immediately.

- For safety reasons, stop the vehicle in a safe location and

- remove SmartKey from starter switch or

- turn off the engine by pressing the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button and open the driver's door (with the driver's door open, starter switch is in position 0, same as with SmartKey removed from starter switch)

before attempting to remove any blockage.

- Remove blockage.

- Turn the windshield wipers on again.

If windshield wipers fail to function at all in the combination switch position ·s or ·s ,

• set the combination switch to the next higher wiper speed
  • have the windshield wipers checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center

Switching on windshield wipers

▶Turn the combination switch to the desired position depending on the intensity of the rain.

0 Windshield wipers off
Slow intermittent wiping Rain sensor operation with low sensitivity.
- Fast intermittent wiping Rain sensor operation with high sensitivity.
Slow continuous wiping
Fast continuous wiping

Intermittent wiping

Only switch on intermittent wiping under wet weather conditions or in the presence of precipitation.

When you select intermittent wiping, the rain sensor is activated. The rain sensor automatically sets a suitable wiping interval depending on the wetness of the sensor surface.

Do not leave windshield wipers on an intermittent setting when the vehicle is taken to an automatic car wash or during windshield cleaning. Wipers will operate in the presence of water sprayed on the windshield, and windshield wipers may be damaged as a result.
! If you have set intermittent wiping, dirt on the surface of the rain sensor or optical effects may cause the windshield wipers to wipe in an undesired fashion. This could then damage the windshield wiper blades or scratch the windows. You should therefore switch off the windshield wipers when weather conditions are dry.
▶Turn the combination switch to position ⋯ or ⋯.

After the initial wipe, pauses between wipes are automatically controlled by the rain sensor.

i Intermittent wiping is interrupted when the vehicle is at a standstill and a front door is opened. This protects persons getting into or out of the vehicle from being sprayed.

Intermittent wiping will be continued when all doors are closed and

• the automatic transmission is set to position D or R or
• the wiper setting is changed using the combination switch

Single wipe

▶Press the combination switch briefly in direction of arrow ① to the resistance point.

The windshield wipers wipe one time without washer fluid.

Getting started

Driving

Wiping with windshield washer fluid

▶Press the combination switch in direction of arrow ① past the resistance point.

The windshield wipers operate with washer fluid.

To prevent smears on the windshield or noisy/chattering wiper blades, wipe with windshield washer fluid every now and then even when it is raining.

For information on cleaning the headlamps with washer fluid, see "Headlamp cleaning system*" (▷page 199).

For information on filling up the washer reservoir, see "Windshield/rear window washer system and headlamp cleaning system*" (▶page 346).

Rear window wiper/washer

The combination switch is located on the left of the steering column.

Diagram of car interior showing a hand holding a water gun with numbered parts labeled 1 to 5, including a magnified inset view.

Combination switch

① Rear window wiper switch
② Wiping rear window with washer fluid
③ Intermittent wiping
④ Rear window wiper off
⑤ Wiping rear window with washer fluid

+85°F R N P D P54.32-3207-91

⑥ Rear window wiper indicator
▶ Switch on the ignition (▷ page 40).
The rear window wiper engages automatically when the automatic transmission is shifted to position R with the windshield wipers switched on.

Activating intermittent wipe

▶ Turn rear window wiper switch ① to position ③ (▷page 62).

In the lower multifunction display you will see indicator ⑥, indicating that the rear window wiper is activated.

Deactivating intermittent wipe

▶ Turn rear window wiper switch ① to position ④ (▷page 62).

Indicator ⑥ (▶page 62) for the rear window wiper is cleared from the lower multifunction display, indicating that the rear window wiper is deactivated.

Wiping with windshield washer fluid

▶Turn and hold rear window wiper switch ① in position ② or ⑤ (▶page 62) until the rear window is clean.

The rear window wiper operates with washer fluid.

For information on filling up the washer reservoir, see "Windshield/rear window washer system and headlamp cleaning system*" ( page 346).

Problems while driving

The engine runs erratically and misfires

• An ignition cable may be damaged (gasoline engine only).
  •The engine electronics may not be operating properly.
• Unburned gasoline may have entered the catalytic converter and damaged it (gasoline engine only).
  ▶Give very little gas.
  ▶Have the problem repaired by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center as soon as possible.

The coolant temperature is above 248^ F ( 120^ C)

The coolant is too hot and is no longer cooling the engine.

▶Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as possible and turn off the engine. Allow engine and coolant to cool off.
▶Check the coolant level and add coolant if necessary (▷page 345).

Getting started

Driving

In case of accident

If the vehicle is leaking fuel:

▶Do not start the engine under any circumstances.
▶ Notify local fire and/or police authorities.

If the extent of the damage cannot be determined:

▶Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center or call Roadside Assistance.

If no damage can be determined on the

• major assemblies
- fuel system
- engine mount:
▶ Start the engine in the usual manner.

▼Parking and locking

You have now completed your first drive. You have properly stopped and parked your vehicle. End your drive as follows.

Warning!

With the engine not running, there is no power assistance for the brake and the steering system. In this case, it is important to keep in mind that a considerably higher degree of effort is necessary to brake and steer the vehicle.

Warning!

Do not park this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as grass, hay or leaves can come into contact with the hot exhaust system, as these materials could be ignited and cause a vehicle fire.

To reduce the risk of personal injury, or damage to the vehicle drivetrain, as a result of vehicle movement, before turning off the engine and leaving the vehicle always:

• Keep right foot on brake pedal.
  • Firmly depress parking brake pedal.
• Shift the automatic transmission to position P.
• Slowly release brake pedal.
• When parked on an incline, turn front wheel towards the road curb.
• Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 0 and remove the SmartKey from the starter switch, or press the start/stop button (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*).
• Take the SmartKey or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* and lock vehicle when leaving.

Parking brake

Warning!

Engaging the parking brake while the vehicle is in motion can cause the rear wheels to lock up. You could lose control of the vehicle and cause an accident. In addition, the vehicle's brake lights do not light up when the parking brake is engaged.

Car interior control panel with directional indicator and numbered component, showing a blue arrow pointing to the left side.

① Parking brake pedal

Getting started

Parking and locking

▶ Step firmly on parking brake pedal ①. When the engine is running, the warning lamp BRAKE (USA only) or (1) (Canada only) in the instrument cluster comes on.

Warning!

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* from the starter switch, take it with you and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Children could release the parking brake and/or shift the automatic transmission out of position P, either of which could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury.

Warning!

Getting out of your vehicle with the automatic transmission not fully engaged in position P is dangerous. Also, when parked on an incline, position P alone may not prevent your vehicle from moving, possibly hitting people or objects.

Always set the parking brake in addition to shifting to position P (▷page 185).

When parked on an incline, also turn front wheel towards the road curb.

Switching off headlamps

▶ Turn the exterior lamp switch to 0 (▷page 59).

For more information, see "Lighting" (▷page 135).

Turning off the engine

If the engine cannot be turned off as described, see "Emergency engine shut-down" ( > page 506).

▶Shift the automatic transmission to position P (▷page 185).

Warning!

Do not turn off the engine before the vehicle has come to a complete stop. With the engine not running, there is no power assistance for the brake and steering systems. In this case, it is important to keep in mind that a considerably higher degree of effort is necessary to brake and steer the vehicle.

▶ Apply the parking brake (▷ page 65).

Always set the parking brake in addition to shifting the automatic transmission to position P (>page 185).

When parked on an incline, also turn front wheel towards the road curb.

Getting started

Parking and locking

! Observe instructions when taking the vehicle through an automatic conveyor type car wash ( page 392).

Turning off with the SmartKey

▶Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 0 (▷page 39).
▶Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch.

The immobilizer is activated.

! If you turn off the engine using the SmartKey and

- remove the SmartKey from the starter switch

or

- open a front door

the automatic transmission will shift to park position P automatically.

Keep in mind that turning off the engine with the SmartKey alone only will automatically shift the automatic transmission to neutral position N.

Turning off with KEYLESS-GO\*

▶Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button (▷page 41) to turn off the engine.

With the driver's door closed, the starter switch is now in position 1. With the driver's door opened, the starter switch is set to position 0, same as SmartKey removed from starter switch (▷page 39).

In an emergency you can turn off the engine while driving by pressing and holding the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button for approximately 3 seconds.

! If you turn off the engine using the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button and open a front door, the automatic transmission will shift to park position P automatically.

Keep in mind that turning off the engine using the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button alone only will automatically shift the automatic transmission to neutral position N.

If you have started the engine with the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button and cannot turn it off as described above:

▶Remove the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button from the starter switch.
▶Insert the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO into the starter switch.

The engine turns off. The starter switch is in position 0 (▷page 39).

Getting started

Parking and locking

Releasing seat belts

▶Press the seat belt release button (▷page 52).

Allow the retractor to completely re-wind the seat belt by guiding the latch plate.

! Make sure the seat belt retracts fully so that the seat belt and/or latch plate cannot get caught or pinched in the door or in the seat mechanism. This can damage the seat belt and impair the effectiveness of the seat belt, and/or cause damage to the door and/or door trim panel. Such damage is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

Damaged seat belts must be replaced. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

Locking

Warning!

To prevent possible personal injury, always keep hands and fingers away from the door openings when closing the doors. Be especially careful when small children are around.

Before closing doors, make sure there is no possibility of someone getting caught in a door during closing.

Warning!

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch, take the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you, and lock your vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury.

The exterior lamps switch off automatically when you remove the SmartKey from the starter switch or open the driver's door.

When the parking lamps or the rear fog lamp are switched on and you remove the SmartKey from the starter switch and open the driver's door, an acoustic signal sounds.

In addition the message Switch Off Lights appears in the multifunction display.

Switch off the parking lamps or the rear fog lamp.

! Failure to switch off the parking lamps or the rear fog lamp when leaving the vehicle may result in a discharged battery.

▶Exit the vehicle and close all doors and the tailgate.

Locking with the SmartKey

▶ Press lock button 🔒 on the SmartKey (▶page 38).

With the tailgate and all doors closed, the turn signal lamps flash three times. The locking knobs on the doors move down. The anti-theft alarm system is armed.

For more information, see "Locking and unlocking" (▷page 110).

Locking with KEYLESS-GO\*

Close-up of a red car interior with a magnified inset showing a small component labeled '1', no readable text or symbols present.

① Lock button on the outside door handle

▶ Press lock button ① on an outside door handle.

With the tailgate and all doors closed, the turn signal lamps flash three times. The locking knobs on the doors move down. The anti-theft alarm system is armed.

For more information, see "Locking and unlocking" (▷page 110).

Safety and Security

Occupant safety

Panic alarm

Driving safety systems

Anti-theft systems

Stylized blue icon of a person in a boat, no text or symbols present

Safety and Security

Occupant safety

In this section you will learn the most important facts about the restraint systems of the vehicle.

The restraint systems are

• Seat belts (▷ page 84)
  • Child restraints (▷ page 94)
• Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH) (▶page 93)

Additional protection potential provide

• Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) with
  • Air bags (▷page 74)
  • Air bag control unit (with crash sensors)
  • Emergency Tensioning Device (ETD) for seat belts (▷page 87)
• Seat belt force limiter (▷ page 87)
  • Active head restraints (▷ page 88)

Air bag system components with

• Front passenger front air bag off indicator lamp (▶page 83)
• Front passenger seat with Occupant Classification System (OCS) ( page 79)

Although independent systems, their protective functions work in conjunction with each other.

For information on infants and children traveling with you in the vehicle and restraint systems for infants and children, see “Children in the vehicle” (▶page 89).

The SRS system conducts a self-test when the ignition is switched on and in regular intervals while the engine is running. This facilitates early detection of malfunctions.

The SRS indicator lamp in the instrument cluster (▷page 28) comes on when the ignition is switched on and goes out no later than a few seconds after the engine was started.

The SRS components are in operational readiness if the SRS indicator lamp is not lit when the engine is running.

A malfunction in the system has been detected if the SRS indicator lamp:

• fails to go out not later than approximately 4 seconds after the engine was started
• does not come on at all
- comes on after the engine was started or while driving

Safety and Security

Occupant safety

Warning!

Modifications to or work improperly conducted on restraint systems (such as seat belts and anchors, emergency tensioning devices, seat belt force limiters or air bags) or their wiring, as well as tampering with interconnected electronic systems, can lead to the restraint systems no longer functioning as intended.

Air bags or emergency tensioning devices, for example, could deploy inadvertently or fail to deploy in accidents although the deceleration threshold for air bag deployment is exceeded. Therefore, never modify the restraint systems. Do not tamper with electronic components or their software.

Warning!

In the event that the SRS indicator lamp comes on during driving or does not come on at all, the SRS self-check has detected a malfunction. For your safety, we strongly recommend that you visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center immediately to have the system checked; otherwise the SRS may not deploy when needed in an accident, which could result in serious or fatal injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily which could also result in injury.

In addition, improper work on the SRS creates a risk of rendering the SRS inoperative or causing unintended air bag deployment. Work on the SRS must therefore only be performed by qualified technicians. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

If it is necessary to modify an air bag system to accommodate a person with disabilities, contact a local authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center or call our Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) for details.

Safety and Security

Occupant safety

Air bags

Warning!

Air bags are designed to reduce the potential of injury and fatality in certain frontal impacts (front air bags), side impacts (side impact air bags and window curtain air bags) or rollovers (window curtain air bags). However, no system available today can completely eliminate injuries and fatalities.

The deployment of the air bags temporarily releases a small amount of dust from the air bags. This dust, however, is neither injurious to your health, nor does it indicate a fire in the vehicle. The dust might cause some temporary breathing difficulty for people with asthma or other breathing trouble. To avoid this, you may wish to get out of the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. If you have any breathing difficulty but cannot get out of the vehicle after the air bag inflates, then get fresh air by opening a window or door.

Warning!

To reduce the risk of injury when the front air bags inflate, it is very important for the driver and front passenger to always be in a properly seated position and to wear their respective seat belt.

For maximum protection in the event of a collision always be in normal seated position with your back against the seat backrest. Fasten your seat belt and make sure it is properly positioned on your body (▷page 51).

Since the air bag inflates with considerable speed and force, a proper seating and hands on steering wheel position will help to keep you at a safe distance from the air bag. Occupants who are unbelted, out of position or too close to the air bag can be seriously injured or killed by an air bag as it inflates with great force in the blink of an eye:

- Sit properly belted in a position that is as upright as possible with your back against the seat backrest.

• Adjust the driver's seat as far as possible rearward, still permitting proper operation of vehicle controls. The distance from the center of the driver's breastbone to the center of the air bag cover on the steering wheel must be at least 10 inches (25 cm) or more. You should be able to accomplish this by a combination of adjustments to the seat and steering wheel. If you have any problems, please see an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
• Do not lean your head or chest close to the steering wheel or dashboard.
• Keep hands on the outside of steering wheel rim. Placing hands and arms inside the rim can increase the risk and potential severity of hand/arm injury when driver's front air bag inflates.
• Adjust the front passenger seat as far as possible rearward from the dashboard when the seat is occupied.

- Always sit as upright as possible, properly use the seat belts and use an appropriately sized infant restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in severe injuries to you or other occupants.

If you sell your vehicle, it is important that you make the buyer aware of this safety information. Be sure to give the buyer this Operator's Manual.

Warning!

Accident research shows that the safest place for children in an automobile is in the rear seat.

It should be noted that with respect to both, front side impact air bags or the rear side impact air bags*, there is a possibility for a side impact air bag related injury if occupants, especially children, are not properly seated or restrained when next to a side impact air bag which needs to deploy rapidly in a side impact in order to do its job.

To help avoid the possibility of injury, please follow these guidelines:

(1) Always sit as upright as possible, properly use the seat belts, and for all children 12 years old and under, use an appropriately sized infant restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child.
(2) Always wear seat belts properly.

Air bags are designed to deploy only in certain frontal impacts (front air bags), and in side impacts (side impact and window curtain air bags) which exceed preset thresholds, and in certain rollovers (window curtain air bags). Only during these events will they provide their supplemental protection.

The driver and passengers should always wear their seat belts. Otherwise it is not possible for air bags to provide their supplemental protection.

In case of other types of impacts and impacts below air bag deployment thresholds, air bags will not deploy. The driver and passenger will then be protected to the extent possible by a properly fastened seat belt. A properly fastened seat belt is also needed to provide the best possible protection in a rollover.

We caution you not to rely on the presence of the air bags in order to avoid wearing your seat belt. It is important to your safety and that of your passengers that you replace deployed air bags and repair any malfunctioning air bags to make sure the vehicle will continue to provide supplemental crash protection for occupants.

Safety and Security

Occupant safety

Safety guidelines for the seat belt, emergency tensioning device and air bag

Warning!

• Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly stressed in an accident must be replaced and their anchoring points must also be checked. Only use belts installed or supplied by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center,
  • Air bags and pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices (ETDs) are designed to function on a one-time-only basis. An air bag or ETD that is deployed must be replaced.
• Do not pass belts over sharp edges. They could tear.
• Do not make any modification that could change the effectiveness of the belts.

• Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may severely weaken them. In a crash they may not be able to provide adequate protection.

• No modifications of any kind may be made to any components or wiring of the SRS. This includes changing or removing any component or part of the SRS, the installation of additional trim material, badges, etc. over the steering wheel hub, front passenger front air bag cover, outboard sides of the seat backrests, door trim panels, or door frame trims, and installation of additional electrical/electronic equipment on or near SRS components and wiring. Keep area between air bags and occupants free from objects (e.g. packages, purses, umbrellas, etc.).

• Do not hang items such as coat hangers from the coat hooks or handles over the door. These items may turn into projectiles and cause head and other injuries when the window curtain air bag is deployed.
  • Air bag system components will be hot after an air bag has inflated. Do not touch.

• Never place your feet on the instrument panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always keep both feet on the floor in front of the seat.
  • In addition, improper repair work on the SRS creates a risk of rendering the SRS inoperative or causing unintended air bag deployment. Work on the SRS must therefore only be performed by qualified technicians. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

• For your protection and the protection of others, when scrapping the air bag unit or emergency tensioning device, our safety instructions must be followed. These instructions are available from any authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
• Given the considerable deployment speed, required inflation volume, and the textile structure of the air bags, there is the possibility of abrasions or other potentially more serious injuries resulting from air bag deployment.

Safety and Security

Occupant safety

Warning!

Only use seat covers which have been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle model. Using other seat covers may interfere with or prevent the deployment of the front side impact air bags or the rear side impact air bags*. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center for availability.

When you sell your vehicle we strongly urge you to give notice to the subsequent owner that it is equipped with an SRS by alerting them to the applicable section in the Operator's Manual.

Front air bags

Interior view of a car dashboard with numbered annotations pointing to key components

① Driver air bag
② Passenger air bag

Driver and front passenger front air bags are deployed:

• in the event of certain frontal impacts
- if impact exceeds a preset deployment threshold
• independently of the side impact air bags

The front air bags in this vehicle have been designed to inflate in two stages. This allows the air bag to have different rates of inflation that are based on the rate of relevant vehicle deceleration as assessed by the air bag control unit.

On the front passenger-side, the front air bag deployment is additionally influenced by the passenger's weight category as identified by the Occupant Classification System (OCS) (▷page 79).

The lighter the front passenger side occupant, the higher the vehicle deceleration rate required for the second stage inflation of the air bag.

Safety and Security

Occupant safety

The air bags will not deploy in impacts which do not exceed the system's deployment thresholds. You will then be protected by the fastened seat belts.

The front passenger front air bag will only be deployed if:

• the system senses that the front passenger seat is occupied
• the i_2 PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp in the center console is not lit (▶page 83)
• the impact exceeds a preset deployment threshold

Side impact air bags, window curtain air bags

Warning!

The pressure sensors for side impact air bag control are located in the doors. Do not modify any components of the doors or door trim panels including, for example, the addition of door speakers.

Improper repair work on the doors or the modification or addition of components to the doors create a risk of rendering the side impact air bags inoperative or causing unintended air bag deployment. Work on the doors must therefore only be performed by qualified technicians. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

P91.60-2994-31

① Front side impact air bag
② Window curtain air bag
③ Rear side impact air bag*

The side impact air bags and window curtain air bags are deployed:

• on the impacted side of the vehicle
- in impacts exceeding a preset deployment threshold
• independently of the front air bags

In addition, the window curtain air bags ② are deployed in certain vehicle rollovers.

Safety and Security

Occupant safety

The side impact air bags and window curtain air bags are not deployed in impacts which do not exceed the system's deployment threshold.

The front passenger side impact air bag will not deploy if the OCS senses that the front passenger seat is empty and the front passenger seat belt is not fastened (latch plate is not inserted into the buckle). With an empty front passenger seat and the seat belt fastened (latch plate properly inserted into buckle) the front passenger side impact air bag will deploy independently of the empty seat.

Warning!

Only use seat covers which have been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle model. Using other seat covers may interfere with or prevent the deployment of the front side impact air bags or the rear side impact air bags*. Contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center for availability.

Occupant Classification System

The Occupant Classification System (OCS) automatically turns the front passenger front air bag on or off based on the classified occupant weight category determined by weight sensor readings from the front passenger seat.

The system does not deactivate the front passenger side impact air bag, the window curtain air bag, and the emergency tensioning device.

Occupants must sit properly belted in a position that is as upright as possible with their back against the seat backrest and feet on the floor to be correctly classified. If the occupant's weight is transferred to another object in the vehicle (e.g. by leaning on armrests), the OCS may not be able to properly approximate the occupant's weight category.

Furthermore, the occupant weight may appear to increase or decrease due to objects hanging on the seat, other passengers pushing on the seat, objects lodged underneath the seat or stuffed between seat and middle console or between seat and door or due to objects applying pressure on the back of the seat. Always make sure that the seat has clearance in all directions at all times.

If your seat, including your trim cover and cushion needs to be serviced in any way, take the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

Only seat accessories approved by Mercedes-Benz may be used.

Both, driver and the front passenger should always use the

PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp as an indication of whether or not the front passenger is properly positioned.

Safety and Security

Occupant safety

Warning!

If the PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp illuminates when an adult or someone larger than a small individual is in the front passenger seat, have the front passenger re-position himself or herself in the seat until the

PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp goes out, or check whether objects are caught under or around the seat.

More information about air bag display messages (▷page 421).

In the event of a collision, the air bag control unit will not allow front passenger front air bag deployment when the OCS classified the front passenger seat occupant as being up to or less than the weight of a typical 12-month-old child in a standard child restraint or if the front passenger seat is sensed as being empty.

When the OCS senses that the front passenger seat occupant is classified as being up to or less than the weight of a typical 12-month-old child in a standard child restraint, the ☐ PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp will illuminate when the engine is started and remain illuminated, indicating that the front passenger front air bag is deactivated.

When the OCS senses that the front passenger seat is classified as being empty, the

PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp will illuminate when the engine is started and remain illuminated, indicating that the front passenger front air bag is deactivated.

When the OCS senses that the front passenger seat occupant is classified as being heavier than the weight of a typical

12-month-old child seated in a standard child restraint or as being a small individual (such as a young teenager or a small adult),

the PASS AIR BAC OFF indicator lamp will illuminate for approximately 6 seconds when the engine is started and then, depending on occupant weight sensor readings from the seat, remain illuminated or go out. With the

PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp illuminated, the front passenger front air bag is deactivated. With the PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp out, the front passenger front air bag is activated.

When the OCS senses that the front passenger seat occupant is classified as an adult or someone larger than a small individual, the

PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp will illuminate for approximately 6 seconds when the engine is started and then go out, indicating that the front passenger front air bag is activated.

If the 2 PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is illuminated, the front passenger front air bag is deactivated and will not be deployed.

If the ☐ PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is not illuminated, the front passenger front air bag is activated and will be deployed:

• in the event of certain frontal impacts
- if impact exceeds a preset deployment threshold
• independently of the side impact air bags.

If the front passenger front air bag is deployed, the rate of inflation will be influenced by:

• the rate of vehicle deceleration as assessed by the air bag control unit
- the front passenger's weight category as identified by the Occupant Classification System (OCS)

Warning!

According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating position. Thus, we strongly recommend that children be placed in the rear seats whenever possible. Regardless of seating position, children 12 years old and under must be seated and properly secured in an appropriate infant or child restraint recommended for the size and weight of the child.

The infant or child restraint must be properly secured with the vehicle's seat belt, the seat belt and top tether strap, or lower anchors and top tether strap, fully in accordance with the child seat manufacturer's instructions.

Children can be killed or seriously injured by an inflating air bag. Note the following important information when circumstances require you to place a child in the front passenger seat:

• Your vehicle is equipped with air bag technology designed to turn off the front passenger front air bag in your vehicle when the system senses the weight of a typical 12-month-old child or less along with the weight of a standard appropriate child restraint on the front passenger seat.
• A child in a rear-facing child restraint on the front passenger seat will be seriously injured or even killed if the front passenger front air bag inflates in a collision which could occur under some circumstances, even with the air bag technology installed in your vehicle. The only means to completely eliminate this risk is to never place a child in a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat. We therefore strongly recommend that you always place a child in a rear-facing child restraint in the back seat.

Safety and Security

Occupant safety

• If you must install a rear-facing child restraint on the front passenger seat because circumstances require you to do so, make sure that the
  2 PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is illuminated, indicating that the front passenger front air bag is deactivated. Should the 2 PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp not illuminate or go out while the restraint is installed, please check installation. Periodically check the
  PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp while driving to make sure the
  PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is illuminated. If the PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp goes out or remains out, do not transport a child on the front passenger seat until the system has been repaired. A child in a rear-facing child restraint on the front passenger seat will be seriously injured or even killed if the front passenger front air bag inflates.

- If you have to place a child in a forward-facing child restraint on the front passenger seat, move the seat as far back as possible, use the proper child restraint recommended for the age, size and weight of the child, and secure child restraint with the vehicle's seat belt according to the child seat manufacturer's instructions. For children larger than the typical 12-month-old child, the front passenger front air bag may or may not be activated (▶page 80).

Deployment of the driver front air bag does not mean that the front passenger front air bag also should have deployed.

The Occupant Classification System (▷page 79) may have determined:

• that the seat was empty or occupied by the weight up to or less than that of a typical 12-month-old child seated in a standard child restraint – both instances where the system suppresses deployment of the front passenger front air bag even though the impact met the criteria and was of sufficient severity to deploy the driver front air bag.
• that the seat was occupied by a small individual (such as a young teenager or a small adult) or a child weighing more than the weight of a typical 12-month-old child in a standard child restraint – instances where the system may suppress deployment of the front passenger front air bag even though the impact met the criteria and was of sufficient severity to deploy the driver front air bag.

Safety and Security

Occupant safety

The 2 PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is located in the center console.

PASS AIR BAG 1 P5B 10-3739-31

① PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp

The PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp ① will be illuminated, except with the SmartKey removed from the starter switch or with the starter switch in position 0 (page 39).

Warning!

If the SRS indicator lamp and the PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp are lit at the same time, there is a malfunction in the Occupant Classification System. The front passenger front air bag will be deactivated in this case.

Have the system checked as soon as possible by qualified technicians. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

Only have the seat repaired or replaced by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

In order to ensure proper operation of the air bag system and OCS:

• Do not place more than 4.4 lb (2 kg) into the parcel net on the back of the front passenger seat. Otherwise, the OCS may not be able to properly approximate the occupant weight category.

• Do not place objects under and/or around the front passenger seat.

• Do not hang anything from or attach any items to the seats.

• Do not stuff objects such as books between the middle console and the front passenger seat.
• Do not move the front passenger seat backwards against stiff objects.
• Sit properly belted in a position that is as upright as possible with your back against the seat backrest.
• While seated, an occupant should not position him/herself in such a way as to cause the occupant's weight to be lifted from the seat bottom as this may result in the OCS being unable to correctly approximate the occupant's weight category.
• Read and observe all warnings in this chapter.

Safety and Security

Occupant safety

Self-test Occupant Classification System

After turning the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 1 or 2 or pressing the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button once or twice, the PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp (▶page 83) located in the center console illuminates. If an adult occupant is properly sitting on the front passenger seat and the system senses the occupant as being an adult, the PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp will illuminate and go out after approximately 6 seconds.

If the seat is not occupied and the system senses the front passenger seat as being empty, the ☑ Pass AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp will illuminate and not go out.

Warning!

If the PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp should not illuminate, the system is not functioning. You must see an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center before seating any child on the front passenger seat.

For more information, see the “Practical hints” section (▷page 411).

Warning!

Never place anything between seat cushion and child seat (e.g. pillow), since it reduces the effectiveness of the Occupant Classification System. The bottom of the child seat must make full contact with the passenger seat cushion. An incorrectly mounted child seat could cause injuries to the child in case of an accident, instead of increasing protection for the child.

Follow the manufacturer's instructions for installation of child seats.

Seat belts

The use of seat belts and infant and child restraint system is required by law in all 50 states, the District of Columbia, the U.S. territories and all Canadian provinces.

Even where this is not the case, all vehicle occupants should have their seat belts fastened whenever the vehicle is in motion.

For more information, see "Fastening the seat belts" ( page 51).

For information on infants and children traveling with you in the vehicle and restraint systems for infants and children, see “Children in the vehicle” ( page 89).

Warning!

Always fasten your seat belt before driving off. Always make sure your passengers are properly restrained.

Failure to wear and properly fasten and position your seat belt greatly increases your risk of injuries and their likely severity in an accident. You and your passengers should always wear seat belts.

If you are ever in an accident, your injuries can be considerably more severe without your seat belt properly buckled. Without your seat belt buckled, you are much more likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be ejected from it. You can be seriously injured or killed.

In the same crash, the possibility of injury or death is lessened if you are properly wearing your seat belt. Air bags can only protect as they are designed if the occupants are properly wearing their seat belts.

Warning!

Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat backrest in an excessively reclined position as this can be dangerous. You could slide under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide under it, the belt would apply force at the abdomen or neck. That could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The seat backrest and seat belt provide the best restraint when the wearer is in a position that is as upright as possible and the belt is properly positioned on the body.

Warning!

Never let more people ride in the vehicle than there are seat belts available. Make sure everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly restrained with a separate seat belt. Never use a seat belt for more than one person at a time.

Warning!

Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly stressed in an accident must be replaced and their anchoring points must also be checked.

Only use seat belts which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Do not make any modifications to the seat belts. This can lead to unintended activation of the ETDs or to failure.

Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may severely weaken them. In a crash they may not be able to provide adequate protection.

Have all work carried out only by qualified technicians. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

Safety and Security

Occupant safety

Warning!

USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY

• Seat belts can only work when used properly. Never wear seat belts in any other way than as described in this section, as that could result in serious injuries in case of an accident.
  • Each occupant should wear their seat belt at all times, because seat belts help reduce the likelihood of and potential severity of injuries in accidents, including rollovers. The integrated restraint system includes SRS (driver air bag, passenger front air bag, side impact air bags, window curtain air bags for side windows), ETD (seat belt emergency tensioning device), and front seat knee bolsters. The system is designed to enhance the protection offered to properly belted occupants in certain frontal (front air bags and ETD) and side (side impact, window curtain air bags and ETD) impacts which exceed preset deployment thresholds and in certain rollovers (window curtain air bags and ETD).

• Never wear the shoulder belt under your arm, against your neck or off your shoulder. In a frontal crash, your body would move too far forward. That would increase the chance of head and neck injuries. The belt would also apply too much force to the ribs or abdomen, which could severely injure internal organs such as your liver or spleen.

• Never wear belts over rigid or breakable objects in or on your clothing, such as eyeglasses, pens, SmartKeys, etc., as these might cause injuries.
• Position the lap belt as low as possible on your hips and not across the abdomen. If the belt is positioned across your abdomen, it could cause serious injuries in a crash.

• Never use a seat belt for more than one person at time. Do not fasten a seat belt around a person and another person or other objects.

• Belts should not be worn twisted. In a crash, you would not have the full width of the belt to distribute impact forces. The twisted belt against your body could cause injuries.

• Pregnant women should also always use a lap-shoulder belt. The lap belt portion should be positioned as low as possible on the hips to avoid any possible pressure on the abdomen.
• Never place your feet on the instrument panel, dashboard or on the seat. Always keep both feet on the floor in front of the seat.
• When using a seat belt to secure infant or toddler restraints or children in booster seats, always follow the child seat manufacturer's instructions.

Enhanced seat belt reminder system

When the engine is started, the seat belt telltale will always illuminate for 6 seconds to remind you and your passengers to fasten your seat belts.

If the driver's seat belt is not fastened when the engine is started, an additional warning chime will also sound for a maximum of 6 seconds or until the driver's seat belt is fastened.

If after these 6 seconds the driver's or the front passenger's seat belt (with the front passenger seat occupied) is not fastened with front doors closed,

- the seat belt telltale ⚙️ remains illuminated for as long as either the driver's or front passenger's seat belt is not fastened

- and if the vehicle speed once exceeds 15 mph (25 km/h), the seat belt telltale 🙏 starts flashing and a warning chime sounds with increasing intensity for a maximum of 60 seconds or until the driver's and the front passenger's seat belt are fastened

If the driver's or the front passenger's seat belt remains unfastened after 60 seconds, the warning chime stops sounding, the seat belt telltale stops flashing but continues to be illuminated.

The seat belt telltale will only go out if both the driver's and the front passenger's seat belt (with the front passenger seat occupied) are fastened, or the vehicle is standing still and a front door is opened.

For more information, see “Practical hints” (▷page 406).

Emergency Tensioning Device (ETD), seat belt force limiter

The seat belts for the front seats and rear outer seats are equipped with emergency tensioning devices and seat belt force limiters.

The ETD is designed to activate in the following cases:

• in frontal or rear-end impacts exceeding the system deployment threshold
  • in certain vehicle rollovers
• if the restraint systems are operational and functioning correctly, see SRS indicator lamp (▶page 410)

The ETDs for the front seats will only activate if the respective front seat belt is fastened (latch plate properly inserted into buckle).

The ETDs for the rear outer seats will activate with or without the respective seat belt fastened.

Safety and Security

Occupant safety

In an impact, emergency tensioning devices remove slack from the belts in such a way that the seat belts fit more snugly against the body. Belt force limiters, when activated, are employed to help reduce the peak force exerted by the seat belts on occupants during a crash.

Warning!

A pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Device (ETD) that was activated must be replaced.

When disposing of the pyrotechnic emergency tensioning device, our safety instructions must be followed. These are available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

Active head restraint

The active head restraints are intended to offer the driver and front passenger increased protection from whiplash type injuries. In the event of a rear-end collision, the active head restraints on the driver's and front passenger's seats are designed to move forward in the direction of travel, providing the head with increased support earlier on in the collision sequence. The active head restraints move forward whether the seat is occupied or not.

Warning!

Only use seat or head restraint covers which have been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle model. Using other seat or head restraint covers may interfere with or prevent the activation of the active head restraint. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center for availability.

Do not attach any objects (e.g. hangers) to the head restraints posts. Otherwise, the active head restraints may not be able to function properly or offer the intended degree of protection in the event of an accident.

Warning!

For your protection, drive only with properly positioned head restraints.

Adjust head restraint so that it is as close to the head as possible and the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at eye level. This will reduce the potential for injury to the head and neck in the event of an accident or similar situation.

You cannot remove the active head restraint on the driver's and front passenger's seats.

For removal of the active head restraints we recommend that you contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

For information on head restraint adjustment, see "Seats" ( page 43).

For information on resetting the activated active head restraints, see “Resetting activated head restraints” (▶page 458).

Rear head restraints Children in the vehicle

Warning!

Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head restraints installed when the rear seats are occupied. Head restraints are intended to help reduce injuries during an accident.

With a rear seat occupied, make sure to move the respective head restraint up from the lowest non-use position and have the occupant adjust the head restraint properly.

For your protection, drive only with properly positioned head restraints.

Adjust the head restraint in such a way that it is as close to the head as possible and the head restraint supports the back of the head at eye level. This will reduce the potential for injury to the head and neck in the event of an accident or similar situation.

If an infant or child is traveling with you in the vehicle:

▶ Secure the child using an infant or child restraint appropriate to the age and size of the child.

▶Make sure the infant or child is properly secured at all times while the vehicle is in motion.

Warning!

Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, even if they are secured in a child restraint system. The children could

• injure themselves on parts of the vehicle

- be seriously or fatally injured through excessive exposure to extreme heat or cold

△△

Safety and Security

Occupant safety

Do not expose the child restraint system to direct sunlight. The child restraint system's metal parts, for example, could become very hot, and the child could be burned on these parts.

If children open a door, they could

• injure other persons
  • get out of the car and injure themselves or be injured by following traffic

Do not carry heavy or hard objects in the passenger or cargo compartment unless they are firmly secured in place. For more information, see “Loading” (▶page 266) and “Useful features” (▶page 279).

Unsecured or improperly positioned cargo increases a child's risk of injury in the event of

• strong braking maneuvers
- sudden changes of direction
- an accident

Infant and child restraint systems

We recommend all infants and children be properly restrained at all times while the vehicle is in motion.

All lap-shoulder belts except the driver's seat belt have special seat belt retractors for secure fastening of child restraints.

To fasten a child restraint, follow child restraint instructions for mounting. Then pull the shoulder belt out completely and let it retract. During seat belt retraction, a ratcheting sound can be heard to indicate that the special seat belt retractor is activated. The belt is now locked. Push down on child restraint to take up any slack.

To deactivate, release seat belt buckle and let seat belt retract completely. To deactivate the special seat belt retractor for the front passenger seat, the front passenger seat must be in the most backward position. The seat belt can again be used in the usual manner.

Warning!

Never release the seat belt buckle while the vehicle is in motion, since the special seat belt retractor will be deactivated.

For information on child seats with mounting fittings for tether anchorages, see “Installation of infant and child restraint system” (▶page 94).

For information on LATCH-type child seat mounts, see "Child seat anchors – LATCH type" ( page 93).

The use of infant or child restraints is required by law in all 50 states, the District of Columbia, the U.S. territories and all Canadian provinces.

Infants and small children should be seated in an appropriate infant or child restraint system properly secured in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions for the child restraint, that complies with U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 225 and Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 210.2.

A statement by the child restraint manufacturer of compliance with these standards can be found on the instruction label on the restraint and in the instruction manual provided with the restraint.

When using any infant or child restraint system, make sure to carefully read and follow all manufacturer's instructions for installation and use.

Please read and observe warning labels affixed to the inside of the vehicle and to infant or child restraints.

Warning!

According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating position. Thus, we strongly recommend that children be placed in the rear seats whenever possible. Regardless of seating position, children 12 years old and under must be seated and properly secured in an appropriate infant or child restraint recommended for the size and weight of the child.

The infant or child restraint must be properly secured with the vehicle's seat belt, the seat belt and top tether strap, or lower anchors and top tether strap, fully in accordance with the child seat manufacturer's instructions.

Always sit as upright as possible, properly use the seat belts and use an appropriately sized infant restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child.

Children can be killed or seriously injured by an inflating air bag. Note the following important information when circumstances require you to place a child in the front passenger seat:

- Your vehicle is equipped with air bag technology designed to turn off the front passenger front air bag in your vehicle when the OCS senses the weight of a typical 12-month-old child or less along with the weight of a standard appropriate child restraint on the front passenger seat.

Safety and Security

Occupant safety

- A child in a rear-facing child restraint on the front passenger seat will be seriously injured or even killed if the front passenger front air bag inflates in a collision which could occur under some circumstances, even with the air bag technology installed in your vehicle. The only means to completely eliminate this risk is to never place a child in a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat. We therefore strongly recommend that you always place a child in a rear-facing child restraint in the back seat.

- If you must install a rear-facing child restraint on the front passenger seat because circumstances require you to do so, make sure that the PASS AIR BAC OFF indicator lamp is illuminated, indicating that the front passenger front air bag is deactivated. Should the PASS AIR BAC OFF indicator lamp not illuminate or go out while the restraint is installed, please check installation. Periodically check the PASS AIR BAC OFF indicator lamp while driving to make sure the lamp is illuminated. If the PASS AIR BAC OFF indicator lamp goes out or remains out, do not transport a child on the front passenger seat until the system has been repaired. A child in a rear-facing child restraint on the front passenger seat will be seriously injured or even killed if the front passenger front air bag inflates.

- If you have to place a child in a forward-facing child restraint on the front passenger seat, move the seat as far back as possible, use the proper child restraint recommended for the age, size and weight of the child, and secure child restraint with the vehicle's seat belt according to the child seat manufacturer's instructions. For children larger than the typical 12-month-old child, the front passenger front air bag may or may not be activated (▶page 80).

Warning!

Infants and small children should never share a seat belt with another occupant. During an accident, they could be crushed between the occupant and seat belt.

A child's risk of serious or fatal injuries is significantly increased if the child restraints are not properly secured in the vehicle and/or the child is not properly secured in the child restraint.

Safety and Security

Occupant safety

Children too big for a toddler restraint must ride in seats using regular seat belts. Position shoulder belt across chest and shoulder, not face or neck. A booster seat may be necessary to achieve proper belt positioning for children from 41 lb until they reach a height where a lap/shoulder belt fits properly without a booster.

When the child restraint is not in use, remove it from the vehicle or secure it with the seat belt to prevent the child restraint from becoming a projectile in the event of an accident.

Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, even if the children are secured in a child restraint system.

A child's unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury.

Child seat anchors - LATCH type

This vehicle is equipped with two LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) type anchors (at each of the outer rear seats) for the installation of a LATCH child seat with matching mounting fittings.

Warning!

Children too big for a toddler restraint must ride in seats using regular seat belts. Position shoulder belt across chest and shoulder, not face or neck.

A booster seat may be necessary to achieve proper belt positioning for children over 41 lb until they reach a height where a lap/shoulder belt fits properly without a booster.

Install child seat according to manufacturer's instructions.

The child seat must be firmly attached to the right and left side anchors ② (▶page 94).

An incorrectly mounted child seat may come loose during an accident which could result in serious injury or death to the child.

Damaged or impact damaged child seats or child seat mounting fittings must be replaced.

Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, even if the children are secured in a child restraint system.

The LATCH anchors are blended with covers.

Interior view of a car seatbelt seat with an inset close-up showing the seatbelt (no text or symbols visible)

① Anchorage ring covers

Safety and Security

Occupant safety

▶ Remove anchorage ring cover ① from the seat on which a child seat is to be installed.

Interior view of a car seatbelt with a highlighted inset showing the seatbelt buckle (no text or symbols present)

② Anchors

▶Install a LATCH type child seat according to the manufacturer's instructions.

! Make sure the seat belt for the center seat can operate freely with a child seat installed.

i Non-LATCH type child seats may also be used and can be installed using the vehicle's seat belt system. Install child seat according to the manufacturer's instructions.

Installation of infant and child restraint system

This vehicle is equipped with tether anchorages for a top tether strap at each of the rear seating positions.

graph TD
    A["①"] --> B["②"]
    A --> C["③"]
    B --> D["④"]
    C --> D
    D --> E["①"]
    style D fill:#000,stroke:#fff,color:#fff
    note right of D: Directional Arrow pointing to the ① node.

① Anchorage ring cover

▶ Remove anchorage ring cover ① from seat backrest of the seat on which a child seat is to be installed.

② ③ P91.49-2638-31

② Anchorage ring

③ Hook

For safety, make sure hook ③ has attached to anchorage ring ② beyond the safety catch, as illustrated.

Safety and Security

Occupant safety

▶Move the respective head restraint to its uppermost position (▷page 128).

P91.20-2162-31

② Anchorage ring

③ Hook

④ Top tether strap

▶ Guide top tether strap ④ between head restraint and top of seat backrest.

▶ Securely fasten hook ③, which is part of the tether strap ④, to anchorage ring ②.

Make sure

• the top tether strap is not twisted

- the head restraint is installed and positioned such that the top tether strap can pass freely between the head restraint and top of seat back-rest

- top tether strap is positioned between the seat backrest and the cargo compartment cover blind (if installed)

- the top tether strap is positioned between the seat backrest and the cargo net* (if installed)

Warning!

After installing top tether straps, make sure that the seat backrests are in an upright position and are properly locked. Check for secure locking by pushing and pulling on the seat backrests. If a seat backrest is not properly locked, the seat backrest could fold. The child seat would no longer be properly supported or positioned to provide its intended benefit.

▶Lower the head restraint if necessary (▶page 128).

Make sure the top tether strap can pass freely between the head restraint and top of seat backrest.

▶Install the child restraint system and tighten the top tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer's instructions.

Safety and Security

Occupant safety

Blocking of rear door window operation

With the override switch you can disable the rear side window switches in the rear door panels.

Warning!

Activate the override switch when children are riding in the back seats of the vehicle. The children could otherwise injure themselves, e.g. by becoming trapped in the window opening.

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury.

The override switch is located on the driver's door control panel.

1 P54.25-5795-31

① Override switch

For more information on power windows, see "Power windows" (▷page 235).

Disabling

▶ Press override switch ① until it engages.

The switch engages in the recessed position.

The rear door windows can no longer be operated using the switches located in the rear doors.

i Operating the rear door windows using the switches located on the door control panel of the driver's door is still possible.

Enabling

▶ Press override switch ① once more.

The switch disengages from its recessed position back to its original position.

The rear door windows can again be operated using the switches located in the rear doors.

Safety and Security

Panic alarm

▼Panic alarm

① P80.00-2117-31

① PANIC button

i USA only:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

Canada only:

This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

Activating

▶ Press and hold button ① for at least 1 second.

An audible alarm and flashing exterior lamps will operate briefly.

Deactivating

▶ Press button ① again.

or

▶Insert the SmartKey or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* in the starter switch.

or

▶Press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button (▶page 41).

The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* must be in the vehicle.

Safety and Security

Driving safety systems

In this section you will find information on the following driving safety systems:

• ABS (Antilock Brake System)
• BAS (Brake Assist System)
- ESP ^® (Electronic Stability Program)
• EBP (Electronic Brake Proportioning)
• 4-ETS (Electronic Traction System)

Warning!

The following factors increase the risk of accidents:

• Excessive speed, especially in turns
- Wet and slippery road surfaces
- Following another vehicle too closely

The driving safety systems described in this section cannot reduce these risks or prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle.

Always adapt your driving style to the prevailing road and weather conditions and keep a safe distance to other road users and objects in the street.

In winter operation, the maximum effectiveness of the ABS, the BAS, the ESP®, the EBP, and the 4-ETS is only achieved with winter tires ( page 384) or snow chains as required.

ABS

Warning!

Do not pump the brake pedal. Use firm, steady brake pedal pressure instead. Pumping the brake pedal defeats the purpose of the ABS and significantly reduces braking effectiveness.

The Antilock Brake System (ABS) regulates the brake pressure so that the wheels do not lock during braking. This allows you to maintain the ability to steer your vehicle.

The ABS is functional above a speed of approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) independent of road surface conditions.

On slippery road surfaces, the ABS will respond even to light brake pressure.

The Ⓐ indicator lamp in the instrument cluster (▷page 26) comes on when you switch on the ignition. It goes out when the engine is running.

Safety and Security

Driving safety systems

Braking

At the instant one of the wheels is about to lock up, a slight pulsation can be felt in the brake pedal, indicating that the ABS is in the regulating mode.

▶Keep firm and steady pressure on the brake pedal while experiencing the pulsation.

Continuous, steady brake pedal pressure yields the advantages provided by the ABS, namely braking power and ability to steer the vehicle.

The pulsating brake pedal can be an indication of hazardous road conditions and functions as a reminder to take extra care while driving.

Emergency brake maneuver

▶Keep continuous full pressure on the brake pedal.

Warning!

When the ABS is malfunctioning, the BAS, the ESP ^® , and the 4-ETS are also switched off. The basic driving and braking functions are still available.

When the ABS is malfunctioning, the wheels may lock during hard braking, reducing steering capability and extending the braking distance.

Warning!

The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded. The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from

excessive speed in turns, following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others.

Off-road - ABS

With the off-road driving program switched on ( page 253), the ABS designed for off-road use is automatically activated.

When applying the brakes at speeds below approximately 18 mph (30 km/h), the front wheels are locked cyclically to shorten the braking distance (dig-in effect). This affects steering the vehicle.

For more information, see "Practical hints" (▷page 399).

Safety and Security

Driving safety systems

BAS

The Brake Assist System (BAS) operates in emergency situations. If you apply the brakes very quickly, the BAS automatically provides full brake boost, thereby potentially reducing braking distance.

▶Apply continuous full braking pressure until the emergency braking situation is over.

The ABS will prevent the wheels from locking.

When you release the brake pedal, the brakes function again as normal. The BAS is then deactivated.

Warning!

If the BAS is malfunctioning, the brake system is still functioning, but without the additional brake boost available that BAS would normally provide in an emergency braking maneuver. Therefore, the braking distance may increase.

Warning!

The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase braking efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded. The BAS cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others.

ESP®

The Electronic Stability Program (ESP®) is operational as soon as the engine is running. It monitors the vehicle's traction (force of adhesive friction between the tires and the road surface) and handling.

The ESP® recognizes when a wheel is spinning or if the vehicle starts to skid. By applying brakes to the appropriate wheel and by limiting engine output, the ESP® works to stabilize the vehicle. The ESP® is especially useful while driving off and on wet or slippery road surfaces. The ESP® also helps stabilize the vehicle during braking and steering maneuvers.

The ESP® warning lamp ⚠️ in the instrument cluster (▶page 26) flashes when the ESP® is engaged.

The ESP® warning lamp ⚠️ in the instrument cluster comes on when you switch on the ignition. It goes out when the engine is running.

Safety and Security

Driving safety systems

Warning!

Never switch off the ESP® when you see the ESP® warning lamp ⚠️ flashing in the instrument cluster. In this case, proceed as follows:

• While driving off, apply as little throttle as possible.
• While driving, ease up on the accelerator.
• Adapt your speed and driving style to the prevailing road conditions.

Failure to observe these guidelines could cause the vehicle to skid.

The ESP ^® cannot prevent accidents resulting from excessive speed.

Warning!

The ESP ^ cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded. The ESP ^ cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESP ^ equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others.

! Operational or performance test must only be conducted on a two-axle dynamometer. If such tests are necessary, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. You could otherwise seriously damage the brake system or the transfer case which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

Because the ESP ^ operates automatically, the engine and ignition must be shut off (SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or 1 or KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button in position 0 or 1) when testing the parking brake on a brake test dynamometer and such testing should be no longer than 10 seconds.

Active braking action through the ESP® may otherwise seriously damage the brake system which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

The ESP® will only function properly if you use wheels of the recommended tire size (▶page 515).

For more information, see the “Practical hints” section (▷page 405) and (▷page 418).

Safety and Security

Driving safety systems

Switching off the ESP®

Warning!

The ESP ^® should not be switched off during normal driving other than in the circumstances described below. Disabling of the system will reduce vehicle stability in standard driving maneuvers.

Do not switch off the ESP ^® when a spare wheel is mounted.

To improve the vehicle's traction, switch off the ESP® in driving situations where it would be advantageous to have the drive wheels spin and thus cut into surfaces for better grip such as:

• when driving with snow chains
• in deep snow
• in sand or gravel

Warning!

Switch on the ESP ^® immediately if the aforementioned circumstances do not apply anymore. Otherwise the ESP ^® will not stabilize the vehicle when it is starting to skid or a wheel is spinning.

When you switch off the ESP®

• the ESP ^® does not stabilize the vehicle
• the engine output is not limited, which allows the drive wheels to spin and thus cut into surfaces for better grip
- the 4-ETS will still apply the brake to a spinning wheel
- the ESP ^® continues to operate when you are braking
- you cannot activate the cruise control
• the cruise control switch off if currently activated

When the ESP ^ is switched off and one or more drive wheels are spinning, the ESP ^ warning lamp ⚠️ in the instrument cluster flashes. However, the ESP ^ will then not stabilize the vehicle.

The ESP ^® switch is located on the upper part of the center console.

ESP OFF 1 P54.25-5794-31

① ESP ^® switch

▶With the engine running, press ESP ^ switch ①.

The ESP® warning lamp ⚠️ in the instrument cluster comes on.

The ESP ^® is deactivated.

Safety and Security

Driving safety systems

Warning!

When the ESP ^ warning lamp ⚠️ is illuminated continuously, the ESP ^ is switched off or is not operational due to a malfunction.

Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions and to the non-operating status of the ESP ^® .

Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an extended period of time with the ESP ^ switched off. This may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

Switching on the ESP®

▶Press ESP ^® switch ①.

The ESP® warning lamp ⚠️ in the instrument cluster goes out.

You are now again in normal driving mode.

For more information, see "Practical hints" (▷page 399).

Off-road - ESP®

With the off-road driving program switched on (▶page 253), the ESP ^® designed for off-road use is automatically activated. At speeds below 27 mph (45 km/h), the ESP ^® assists in over-/understeering, thus improving vehicle traction.

ESP® Trailer Stabilization

If the trailer you are towing should begin to sway, the rig can only be stabilized by immediately applying the brakes hard. Steering during this maneuver will not help to stabilize the rig.

ESP ^® will assist you in such situations. ESP ^® recognizes when the trailer starts swaying and will apply the brakes to reduce the vehicle speed to a non-critical speed that allows the vehicle-trailer combination to stabilize.

The ESP ^® Trailer Stabilization is functional at vehicle speeds above approximately 40 mph (65 km/h) when the ESP ^® is switched on.

Warning

The system will not be able to assist when the trailer jackknifes

• on wet or icy roads
• on roads with slippery surface
• in sand or gravel

Trailers with a high center of gravity may tip over before the system recognizes swaying of the trailer.

If the ESP ^ has switched off due to a malfunction, ESP ^ cannot stabilize the rig.

Safety and Security

Driving safety systems

EBP

The EBP enhances braking effectiveness by allowing the rear brakes to supply a greater proportion of the braking effort without a loss of vehicle stability.

Warning!

If the EBP is malfunctioning, the brake system is still functioning. However, the rear wheels may lock during hard braking, causing you to lose control over the vehicle and possibly causing an accident. Adjust your driving style to the non-operating status of the EBP.

For more information, see the “Practical hints” section (▷page 402) and (▷page 429).

4-ETS

The 4-Electronic Traction System (4-ETS) improves the vehicle's ability to utilize available traction, especially under slippery road conditions. The brakes are applied to the spinning wheel and power is transferred to the wheel(s) with traction.

The ESP® warning lamp ⚠️ in the instrument cluster, starts to flash at any vehicle speed, as soon as a tire loses traction and the wheel begins to spin.

If conditions require, switch on off-road driving program (▷page 253).

Warning!

When you see ESP ^® warning lamp flashing in the instrument cluster, then proceed as follows:

• While driving off, apply as little throttle as possible.
• While driving, ease up on the accelerator.
• Adapt your speed and driving style to the prevailing road conditions.

Failure to observe these guidelines could cause the vehicle to skid.

The 4-ETS cannot prevent accidents resulting from excessive speed.

! Operational or performance test must only be conducted on a two-axle dynamometer. If such tests are necessary, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. You could otherwise seriously damage the brake system or the transfer case which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Because the ESP® operates automatically, the engine and ignition must be shut off (SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or 1 or KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button in position 0 or 1) when testing the parking brake on a brake test dynamometer and such testing should be no longer than 10 seconds.

Active braking action through the ESP ^® may otherwise seriously damage the brake system which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

If the yellow ESP® warning lamp comes on while driving, the 4-ETS is being switched off temporarily to prevent overheating of the drive wheel brakes. In addition, the message ESP Unavailable See Operator's Manual appears in the multifunction display.

For more information, see the “Practical hints” section (▷page 400) and (▷page 413).

Off-road - 4-ETS

With the off-road driving program switched on (▷page 253), the 4-ETS designed for off-road use is automatically activated.

Safety and Security

Anti-theft systems

Immobilizer

The immobilizer prevents unauthorized persons from starting your vehicle.

Activating

With the SmartKey

▶Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch.

With KEYLESS-GO\*

▶Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button (▶page 41) on the starter switch once.

The engine is turned off.

▶Open the driver's door.

Deactivating

With the SmartKey

▶Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 2 (▷page 39).

With KEYLESS-GO\*

▶ Switch on the ignition (▷ page 40).

Starting the engine will also deactivate the immobilizer.

In case the engine cannot be started (yet the vehicle's battery is charged), the system is not operational. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA), or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).

Anti-theft alarm system

Once the alarm system has been armed, a visual and audible alarm is triggered when someone opens

• a door

• the tailgate

• the hood

The alarm will stay on, even if the activating element (a door, for example) is immediately closed.

The alarm system will also be triggered when

- the vehicle is opened with the mechanical key, see “Unlocking the vehicle” (▶page 455)

- a door is opened from the inside, see "Opening the doors from the inside" (▶page 118)

If the alarm stays on for more than 30 seconds, a call to the Response Center is initiated automatically by the Tele Aid system (▷ page 294) provided that the Tele Aid service was subscribed to and properly activated, and that necessary cellular service and GPS coverage are available.

Safety and Security

Anti-theft systems

Arming the alarm system

The alarm system indicator lamp is located to the lower left of the hazard warning flasher.

PASS AIR RAG 1 P58.10-3740-31

① Alarm system indicator lamp

▶Lock the vehicle with the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO* (▶page 68).

The turn signal lamps flash three times to indicate that the vehicle is locked.

The alarm system is armed within approximately 10 seconds. Alarm system indicator lamp ① flashes.

If the turn signal lamps do not flash three times, one of the following elements may not be properly closed:

• a door

• the tailgate

Close the respective element and lock the vehicle again.

Disarming the alarm system

▶Unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO* (▷page 38). The turn signal lamps flash once to indicate that the alarm system is disarmed. Indicator lamp ① goes out.

The alarm system will rearm automatically again after approximately 40 seconds if neither a door nor the tailgate is opened.

Canceling the alarm

To cancel the alarm:

With the SmartKey

▶Insert the SmartKey in the starter switch.

or

▶ Press the 📊 or 🔍 button on the SmartKey.

With KEYLESS-GO\*

▶Grasp an outside door handle. The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be within 3 ft (1 m) of the vehicle.

or

▶Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button (▶page 41). The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be inside the vehicle.

Controls in detail

Green abstract icon depicting a person sitting with a triangular shape and a triangular block, no text or symbols present.

Locking and unlocking

Seats

Memory function*

Lighting

Instrument cluster

Control system

Automatic transmission

Transfer case

Good visibility

Climate control

3-zone automatic climate control*

Power windows

Power tilt/sliding sunroof

Driving systems

Loading

Useful features

Controls in detail

Locking and unlocking

In the "Controls in detail" section you will find detailed information on how to operate the equipment installed in your vehicle. If you are already familiar with the basic functions of your vehicle, this section will be of particular interest to you.

To quickly familiarize yourself with the basic functions of the vehicle, refer to the "Getting started" section of this manual. The corresponding page numbers are given at the beginning of each segment.

For more information on locking and un-locking, see the "Getting started" section (▷ page 38) and (▷ page 68).

SmartKey

Your vehicle comes supplied with two SmartKeys, each with remote control and a removable mechanical key.

The SmartKey provides an extended operating range. To prevent theft, however, it is advisable to only unlock the vehicle when you are in close proximity to it.

The SmartKey centrally locks and unlocks:

• the doors

• the tailgate

• the fuel filler flap

P80.35-2285-31

SmartKey with remote control

① Lock button
② Unlock button* for tailgate
③ Locking tab for mechanical key
④ Unlock button
⑤ Battery check lamp
⑥ PANIC Panic button (▶page 97)

Controls in detail

Locking and unlocking

Warning!

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch, take it with you and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. It is possible for children to open a locked door from the inside, which could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury.

! To prevent possible malfunction, avoid exposing the SmartKey to high levels of electromagnetic radiation.

i USA only:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

Canada only:

This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

You can also open and close

• the door windows

• the tilt/sliding sunroof

using the SmartKey, see "Summer opening feature" (▷page 237) and see "Convenience closing feature" (▷page 238).

! If you cannot lock or unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey, the batteries in the SmartKey are discharged, the SmartKey is malfunctioning, or the vehicle battery is drained.

• Check the batteries in the SmartKey and replace them if necessary (▷page 461).
• Use the mechanical key to unlock the driver's door (▶page 455).
• Lock the vehicle as described in the "Practical hints" section (▶page 456).
• Have the vehicle battery and the vehicle battery connections checked ( page 489).

If the SmartKey is malfunctioning, contact Roadside Assistance or an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

Controls in detail

Locking and unlocking

Factory setting

Global unlocking

▶ Press button 🔒.

All turn signal lamps flash once. The locking knobs in the doors move up. The anti-theft alarm system is disarmed.

The vehicle will lock again automatically and rearm the anti-theft alarm system within approximately 40 seconds of un-locking if

• neither door nor tailgate is opened
• the SmartKey is not inserted in the starter switch
• the central locking switch is not activated

Global locking

▶ Press button 🔒.

With the tailgate and all doors closed, the turn signal lamps flash three times. The locking knobs in the doors move down. The anti-theft alarm system is armed.

Selective setting

If you frequently travel alone, you may wish to reprogram the SmartKey so that pressing button ☐ only unlocks the driver's door and the fuel filler flap.

▶ Press and hold buttons 📁 and 🔒 simultaneously for about 5 seconds until battery check lamp ⑤ (▷page 110) flashes twice.

The SmartKey will then function as follows:

Unlocking driver's door and fuel filler flap

▶ Press button 🔍 once.

All turn signal lamps flash once. The locking knob in the driver's door moves up. The anti-theft alarm system is disarmed.

Global unlocking

▶ Press button twice.

All turn signal lamps flash once. The locking knobs in the doors move up. The anti-theft alarm system is disarmed.

Global locking

▶ Press button

With the tailgate and all doors closed, the turn signal lamps flash three times. The locking knobs in the doors move down. The anti-theft alarm system is armed.

Restoring to factory setting

▶ Press and hold buttons 📁 and 🔒 simultaneously for about 5 seconds until battery check lamp ⑤ (▶page 110) flashes twice.

SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO\*

Vehicles equipped with KEYLESS-GO come with two SmartKeys with KEYLESS-GO, each with remote control and a removable mechanical key.

The KEYLESS-GO function is integrated into the SmartKey. On these vehicles, the validity of the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is checked when you grasp an outside door handle.

If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is valid, your vehicle unlocks

• the doors

• the tailgate

• the fuel filler flap

P80.35-2285-31

SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO\*

① Lock button
② Unlock button* for tailgate
③ Locking tab for mechanical key
④ Unlock button
⑤ Battery check lamp
⑥ PANIC Panic button (▷page 97)

Controls in detail

Locking and unlocking

Warning!

When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury.

To prevent possible malfunction, avoid exposing the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO to high levels of electromagnetic radiation.

USA only: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

Canada only: This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

You can also open and close

• the door windows

- the tilt/sliding sunroof using the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO, see "Summer opening feature" (▷page 237) and see "Convenience closing feature" (▷page 238).

! If you cannot lock or unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO, the batteries in the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO are discharged, the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is malfunctioning or the vehicle battery is drained.

• Check the batteries in the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO (▷page 118) and replace them if necessary (▷page 461).
• Use the mechanical key to unlock the driver's door (▷page 455).
• Lock the vehicle as described in the "Practical hints" section (▷page 456).
• Have the vehicle battery and the vehicle battery connections checked ( page 489).

If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is malfunctioning, contact Roadside Assistance or an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

Important notes on using KEYLESS-GO\*

• You can also use the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO like a normal SmartKey (▶page 110).
  The starter switch is located under the KEYLESS-GO button. Pull the KEYLESS-GO button out in order to access the starter switch (▶page 41).
• You can combine KEYLESS-GO functions with normal SmartKey functions (e.g. unlocking with KEYLESS-GO and locking with the 🔒 button).
  •Always carry the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO with you.
• Never store the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO together with:

- electronic items such as a cellular phone or another SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO

• metallic objects such as coins or metal foil

Doing so could impair the function of the KEYLESS-GO system.

• To lock or unlock the vehicle, the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be located outside the vehicle within approximately 3 ft (1 m) of the respective door or the tailgate.
• If the vehicle has been parked for more than 72 hours, you must pull an outside door handle in order to activate the KEYLESS-GO function.
  • In order to start the engine with the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO:

•The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be located in the vehicle.

- The KEYLESS-GO start/stop button must be inserted in the starter switch (▷page 41).

- The brake pedal must be firmly depressed. Do not depress the accelerator.

• If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is positioned farther away from the vehicle, the system may no longer recognize the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO. The vehicle then cannot be locked or the engine started via the KEYLESS-GO system.
• If you have started the engine with the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button (▶page 55), you can turn it off again by

- pressing the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button (▷page 67)

- inserting the SmartKey into the starter switch when the vehicle is at a standstill and the automatic transmission is in position P (▷page 67)

Controls in detail

Locking and unlocking

- If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is removed from the vehicle (e.g. if a passenger exits the vehicle with the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO)

• when pressing the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button or trying to lock the vehicle with the look button on an outside door handle the message Key Not Detected appears in the multifunction display
• with the engine running, the message Key Not Detected appears in the multifunction display while driving off.

Find the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO or change its present location immediately (e.g. place it on the front passenger seat or insert it in shirt pocket).

- Remember that the engine can be started by anyone with a SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO that is left inside the vehicle. Possibility 1 (One SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO in the vehicle, one SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO outside the vehicle): If you leave the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO behind when exiting and locking the vehicle, no message appears in the multifunction display. Possibility 2 (One SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO in the vehicle, no SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO outside the vehicle): When exiting and trying to lock the vehicle, the message Key Detected In Vehicle will appear in the multifunction display. The vehicle will not be locked.

Factory setting

Global unlocking

▶Grasp an outside door handle.

All turn signal lamps flash once. The locking knobs in the doors move up. The anti-theft alarm system is disarmed.

The vehicle will lock again automatically and rearm the anti-theft alarm system within approximately 40 seconds of unlocking if

• neither a door nor the tailgate is opened
• the central locking switch is not activated

The vehicle could be inadvertently unlocked if the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is within 3 ft (1 m) of the vehicle and

- an outside door handle is splashed with water

or

- you attempt to clean an outside door handle

Controls in detail

Locking and unlocking

Global locking

▶Press the lock button on an outside door handle (▷page 69).

With the tailgate and all doors closed, the turn signal lamps flash three times. The locking knobs in the doors move down. The anti-theft alarm system is armed.

Selective setting

If you frequently travel alone, you may wish to reprogram the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO so when you grasp the driver's door handle only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap unlocks.

▶ Press and hold buttons 📊 and 🔒 simultaneously for about 5 seconds until battery check lamp ⑤ (▶page 113) flashes twice.

The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO will then function as follows:

Unlocking driver's door and fuel filler flap

- Grasp the driver's outside door handle. All turn signal lamps flash once. The locking knob in the driver's door moves up. The anti-theft alarm system is disarmed.

Global unlocking

- Grasp any outside door handle other than the driver's outside door handle. All turn signal lamps flash once. The locking knobs in the doors move up. The anti-theft alarm system is disarmed.

Global locking

▶Press the lock button on an outside door handle (▷page 69).

All turn signal lamps flash three times. The locking knobs in the doors move down. The anti-theft alarm system is armed.

Restoring to factory setting

▶ Press and hold buttons 📊 and 🔒 simultaneously for about 5 seconds until battery check lamp ⑤ (▶page 113) flashes twice.

Controls in detail

Locking and unlocking

Checking the batteries in the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO\*

▶ Press button 🔍 or 🔽.

The battery check lamp (▷page 110) or (▷page 113) comes on briefly to indicate that the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO batteries are in order.

If the battery check lamp does not come on briefly during check, the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO batteries are discharged.

Replace the batteries (▷page 461).

You can obtain the required batteries at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

If the batteries are checked within signal range of the vehicle, pressing the button 🔒 or ⬇ will lock or unlock the vehicle accordingly.

Loss of the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO\*

If you lose your SmartKey, SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO or mechanical key, you should do the following:

▶Have the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO deactivated by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
▶Report the loss of the SmartKey, SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO or the mechanical key immediately to your car insurance company.
▶Have the mechanical lock replaced if necessary.

Any authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center will be glad to supply you with a replacement.

Opening the doors from the inside

You can open a locked door from the inside. Open door only when conditions are safe to do so.

① ② P72.10-9120-31

① Locking knob
② Inside door handle

If the vehicle has previously been locked from the outside with the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO*, opening a door from the inside will trigger the anti-theft alarm system.

To cancel the alarm, do one of the following:

With the SmartKey

• Insert the SmartKey in the starter switch.
• Press the 🔍 or 🔽 button on the SmartKey.

With KEYLESS-GO*

• Grasp an outside door handle.
• Press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button (▷page 41).

The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* must be inside the vehicle.

Front doors

▶ Pull on inside door handle ② on the respective front door to open door.
If the door was locked, locking knob ① will move up.

Rear doors

▶ Pull up locking knob ① on the respective rear door to unlock door.
▶ Pull on inside door handle ② on the respective rear door to open door.

Tailgate/Power tailgate\*

Warning!

Make sure the tailgate is closed when the engine is running and while driving. Among other dangers deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases may enter vehicle interior resulting in unconsciousness and death.

A minimum height clearance of 7.0 ft (2.13 m) is required to open the tailgate.

Vehicles with vehicle level control*: Depending on the set vehicle level a minimum height clearance of 7.2 ft (2.20 m) is required to open the tailgate.

! The tailgate swings open upwards automatically. Always make sure there is sufficient overhead clearance.

Controls in detail

Locking and unlocking

Tailgate

Opening the tailgate from the outside

i Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO*: The vehicle must be unlocked (▷page 38).

The handle is located above the rear license plate recess.

Red car rear view with a magnified inset showing a green arrow pointing to a vehicle's side panel (no text or symbols on the main body)

▶ Pull on the handle.

The tailgate opens slightly.

▶ Pull tailgate upwards to open.

Closing the tailgate from the outside

Warning!

To prevent possible personal injury, always keep hands and fingers away from the cargo compartment opening when closing the tailgate. Be especially careful when small children are around.

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury.

To prevent an inadvertent lockout, do not place the SmartKey in the cargo compartment. Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: To prevent a possible inadvertent lockout, the tailgate will open automatically if a SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is recognized inside the vehicle.

Top-down view of an orange car showing the hood, vent, and rear seats with a numbered label (1) pointing to the top panel.

① Handle

▶Lower tailgate by pulling firmly on handle ①.

▶ Close tailgate with hands placed flat on it.

Once the tailgate touches the latch, the tailgate will pull itself shut automatically.

If the vehicle was previously centrally locked with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO*, the tailgate will lock automatically after closing it. The turn signals flash three times to confirm locking.

Power tailgate\*

In vehicles with power tailgate, you can

• open and close the tailgate from the inside and the outside electrically
• limit the opening height of the tailgate

• interrupt the opening/closing procedure at any time by

• pressing or pulling the door-mounted remote tailgate switch (▶page 122)

• pressing the 📋 button on the SmartKey (▷page 110) or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* (▷page 113)
• pressing the tailgate closing switch (▷page 123)
• pressing the tailgate closing/locking switch (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*) (▶page 123)

! The tailgate swings open upwards automatically. Always make sure there is sufficient overhead clearance.

Opening the tailgate from the outside

You can unlock and open the tailgate simultaneously from the outside when the vehicle is at a standstill.

▶ Press and hold button 📋 on the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* until the tailgate unlocks and opens.

While the tailgate is opening, an acoustic signal sounds.

or

▶Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO ^* : Pull on the handle (▷page 120).

The tailgate is unlocked and opens. While the tailgate is opening, an acoustic signal sounds.

Opening the tailgate from the inside

You can unlock and open the tailgate simultaneously from the driver's seat when the vehicle is at a standstill.

Warning!

Maintain sight of the area around the rear of the vehicle while operating the tailgate with the door-mounted remote tailgate switch or with the 📋 button on the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*. Monitor the opening procedure carefully to make sure no one is in danger of being injured.

To interrupt the opening procedure, press or pull the door-mounted remote tailgate switch or press the 📋 button on the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*.

Controls in detail

Locking and unlocking

The switch is located in the driver's door.

① P72.20-2611-31

① Remote tailgate switch

▶ Pull remote tailgate switch ① until tailgate begins to open.

The tailgate opens. While the tailgate is opening, an acoustic signal sounds.

Limiting opening height of tailgate\*

In vehicles with power tailgate*, the tailgate opening height can be limited when transporting goods on a roof rack* (e.g. presence of an MB roof cargo container*). When activated, the tailgate opens to approximately 6.6 ft (2.00 m).

▶Activate the limiting opening height of tailgate using the control system (▷page 176).

Closing the tailgate from the inside

You can close the tailgate from the inside using the remote tailgate switch.

If the tailgate comes into contact with an object while closing (e.g. luggage that has been piled too high) the closing procedure is stopped and the tailgate reopens.

Warning!

Maintain sight of the area around the rear of the vehicle while operating the tailgate with the door-mounted switch. Monitor the closing procedure carefully to make sure no one is in danger of being injured.

To interrupt the closing procedure, press or pull the door-mounted remote tailgate switch or press the 📋 button on the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*.

Even with the SmartKey or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* removed from the starter switch or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* removed from the vehicle, the remote tailgate switch can be operated. Therefore, do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury.

Controls in detail

Locking and unlocking

▶ Press remote tailgate switch ① (▶page 122) until tailgate begins to close.
The tailgate closes. While the tailgate is closing an acoustic signal sounds.

To interrupt the closing procedure:

▶ Press or pull remote tailgate switch ① (>page 122).

Closing the tailgate from the outside

You can close the tailgate from the outside using the tailgate closing switch or the ➕ button on the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*. In vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*, you can also simultaneously lock the vehicle.

If the tailgate comes into contact with an object while closing (e.g. luggage that has been piled too high) the closing procedure is stopped and the tailgate reopens.

1 P72.20-2624-31

Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO*
① Tailgate closing switch

① P72.20-2619-31

Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*

① Tailgate closing switch

▶ Press tailgate closing switch ① or the button on the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* briefly.

The tailgate closes and an acoustic warning sounds.

Warning!

Monitor the closing procedure carefully to make sure no one is in danger of being injured. To prevent possible personal injury,

Controls in detail

Locking and unlocking

always keep hands and fingers away from the cargo compartment opening when closing the tailgate. Be especially careful when small children are around. To stop the closing procedure, do one of the following:

• Press tailgate closing switch ① (▶page 123).
• Press KEYLESS-GO* locking/closing switch* ① (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*) (>page 124).
• Press the 📋 button on the SmartKey (▶page 110) or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* (▶page 113).
• Press or pull the remote tailgate switch on the driver's door (▶page 122).

Even with the SmartKey removed from the starter switch or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* removed from the vehicle, the tailgate closing switch can be operated. Therefore, do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury.

Do not place the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* in the open cargo compartment. You may lock yourself out.
If the vehicle was previously centrally locked, the tailgate will lock automatically after closing it. The turn signals will flash three times to confirm locking.

Closing the tailgate and locking the vehicle from the outside (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO \*)

In vehicles with power tailgate and KEYLESS-GO*, you can close the tailgate and lock the vehicle simultaneously from the outside using the KEYLESS-GO* locking/closing switch.

If the tailgate comes into contact with an object while closing (e.g. luggage that has been piled too high), the closing procedure is stopped and the tailgate reopens.

▶Make sure you have the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you.

① P72.20-2620-31

① KEYLESS-GO* locking/closing switch

▶Press KEYLESS-GO* locking/closing switch ① briefly.

The tailgate closes automatically. Once the tailgate is closed, the vehicle locks if doors are closed. The turn signals flash three times to confirm locking. The locking knobs in the doors move down. The anti-theft alarm system is armed.

Warning!

Monitor the closing procedure carefully to make sure no one is in danger of being injured. To prevent possible personal injury, always keep hands and fingers away from the cargo compartment opening when closing the tailgate. Be especially careful when small children are around. To stop the closing procedure, do one of the following:

• Press tailgate closing switch ① (▶page 123).
• Press KEYLESS-GO* locking/closing switch* ① (▶page 124).
• Press the 📋 button on the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* (▶page 113).
• Press or pull the remote tailgate switch on the driver's door (▷page 122).

Even with the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* removed from the vehicle, the tailgate closing switch can be operated. Therefore, do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury.

To prevent a possible inadvertent lockout, the tailgate will open automatically if a SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is recognized inside the vehicle.

Automatic central locking

The doors and the tailgate lock automatically when the ignition is switched on and the wheels are turning at vehicle speeds of approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or more.

You can open a locked door from the inside. Open door only when conditions are safe to do so.
The doors unlock automatically after an accident if the force of the impact exceeds a preset threshold.

The vehicle automatically locks when the ignition is switched on and the wheels are turning at vehicle speeds of approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or more. You could therefore lock yourself out when the vehicle

• is pushed or towed
• is on a test stand

For information on towing the vehicle, see "Towing the vehicle" (▷page 499).

You can deactivate the automatic central locking mode using the control system (▷page 175).

Controls in detail

Locking and unlocking

Locking and unlocking from the inside

You can lock or unlock the doors and the tailgate from inside using the central locking or unlocking switch. This can be useful, for example, if you want to lock the vehicle before starting to drive.

The fuel filler flap cannot be locked or unlocked with the central locking or unlocking switch.

Warning!

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury.

The switches are located in the drivers door.

① ② P54:25-5797-31

① Central unlocking switch
② Central locking switch

Locking

▶ Press central locking switch ②. If all doors and the tailgate are closed, the vehicle locks.

Unlocking

▶ Press central unlocking switch ①. The vehicle unlocks.

You can open a locked door from inside at any time. Open door only when conditions are safe to do so.

If the vehicle was previously centrally locked with the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO*, it will not unlock using the central unlocking switch. If the vehicle was previously locked with the central locking switch:

• and the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is set to factory settings, the complete vehicle is unlocked when a front door is opened from the inside
• and the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is set to selective settings, only the front door opened from the inside is unlocked

With the passenger-side door opened, you cannot lock the vehicle with the central locking switch.

Seats

For information on seat adjustment, see the "Getting started" section (▷page 43).

For more information on seats, see "Loading" (▷page 266).

Front seat active head restraints

Warning!

For your protection, drive only with properly positioned head restraints.

Adjust the head restraint so that it is close to the head as possible and the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at eye level. This will reduce the potential for injury to the head and neck in the event of an accident or similar situation.

You cannot remove the active head restraints on the driver's and front passenger's seat.

For removal of the active head restraints we recommend that you contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

For information on head restraint adjustment, see "Seats" ( page 43).

For information on active head restraints, see "Active head restraint" (▷page 88).

Rear seat head restraints

Warning!

Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head restraints installed when the rear seats are occupied. Head restraints are intended to help reduce injuries during an accident.

With a rear seat occupied, make sure to move the respective head restraint up from the lowest non-use position and have the occupant adjust the head restraint properly.

For your protection, drive only with properly positioned head restraints.

Adjust the head restraint in such a way that it is as close to the head as possible and the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at eye level. This will reduce the potential for injury to the head and neck in the event of an accident or similar situation.

Controls in detail

Seats

Head restraint height

Car interior diagram showing seatbelt mechanism with numbered parts and directional arrows indicating movement

① Head restraint

② Release button

Raising:

▶Manually adjust the height of head restraint ① by pulling it upward to the desired position.

Lowering:

▶ To lower head restraint ①, press release button ② and push down on head restraint ①.

Head restraint fore and aft adjustment

Interior view of a car backseat showing gray seats and seatbelt, with a green arrow pointing to the rear side (no text or symbols visible)

Manually adjust the angle of the head restraint.

▶While seated, reach behind you with both hands and find lower edge of the head restraint.
▶Adjust the head restraint to the desired position by pushing or pulling on the lower edge of the head restraint cushion.

Head restraints, removing and installing

Diagram of car seatbelt mechanism with numbered parts and green directional arrows indicating movement or force

① Head restraint

② Release button

Removing

▶ Pull head restraint ① to its uppermost position.
▶ Press release button ② and pull out head restraint.

Installing

▶ Insert head restraint ① into openings on the seat backrest.
▶ Push head restraint ① down until it audibly engages.
▶ Press release button ② and adjust head restraint ① to the desired position (▶page 128).

For more information on seats, see the "Getting started" section (▷page 43).

Lumbar support

The curvature of the driver's seat can be adjusted to help enhance lower back support and seating comfort.

The lever for lumbar support adjustment is located on the right hand side of the driver's seat backrest.

Interior view of a car showing a seatbelt with a green directional arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols)

① Adjustment lever

▶ Move adjustment lever ① in direction of arrows until you have reached a comfortable seating position.

Multicontour seat\*

The multicontour seat has an extendable seat cushion and inflatable air chambers built into the backrest to provide additional lumbar and side support.

The seat cushion depth, seat backrest cushion-height and curvature can be continuously varied with switches on the inside of each front seat base after the ignition is switched on (▶page 39).

Diagram of a car's left-hand door with numbered parts and an inset view highlighting the component.

① Seat cushion depth
② Backrest side bolsters
③ Backrest center
④ Backrest bottom

Controls in detail

Seats

▶ Switch on the ignition (▷ page 40).

Seat cushion depth

▶Adjust the seat cushion depth to the length of your upper leg with switch ①.

Backrest contour

▶Adjust the contour of the seat backrest to the desired position with switch + or - .
▶Move the backrest support to the bottom with button ④ or to the center with button ③.

Backrest side bolsters

▶Adjust the side bolsters so that they provide good lateral support using switch ②.

Seat heating\*

The switches for front-seat heating are located in the center console.

① ② P54.25-5798-31

① Seat heating switch, front seats
② Indicator lamps

The switches for rear seat heating are located in the rear center console.

1 2 2 1 P54.25-4744-31

① Seat heating switch, rear seats ② Indicator lamps

Controls in detail

Seats

The red indicator lamps in the switch come on to show which heating level you have selected.

Level

3 Three indicator lamps on (highest level)

The seat heating automatically switches to level 2 after approximately 5 minutes.

2 Two indicator lamps on

The seat heating automatically switches to level 1 after approximately 10 minutes.

1 One indicator lamp on (lowest level)

The seat heating automatically switches off after approximately 20 minutes.

off No indicator lamp on

▶ Switch on the ignition (▷ page 40).

Switching on

▶ Press switch ①.

Three red indicator lamps ② in the switch come on.

▶ Continue pressing switch ① until desired seat heating level is reached.

Switching off

▶ Press switch ① repeatedly until all indicator lamps ② go out.

If one or more of the indicator lamps ② on seat heating switch ① (▶page 130) are flashing, there is insufficient voltage available since too many electrical consumers are switched on. The seat heating switches off automatically.

The seat heating will switch back on again automatically as soon as sufficient voltage is available.

Seat ventilation\*

The switches for the seat ventilation are located in the center console.

① ② P54.25-5799:31

① Seat ventilation switch, front seats ② Indicator lamps

Controls in detail

Seats

The blue indicator lamps in the switch come on to show which ventilation level you have selected.

Level

3 Three indicator lamps on(highest level)

2 Two indicator lamps on

1 One indicator lamp on(lowest level)

off No indicator lamp on

▶ Switch on the ignition (▷ page 40).

Switching on

▶ Press button ① repeatedly until the desired ventilation level is set.

The seat ventilation for the driver's seat is automatically set to the highest level if activated via summer opening feature (▷page 237).

Switching off

▶ Press button ① repeatedly until all indicator lamps ② go out.

Controls in detail

Memory function\*

▼Memory function\*

Prior to operating the vehicle, the driver should check and adjust the seat height, seat position fore and aft, and seat back-rest angle if necessary, to ensure adequate control, reach and comfort. The head restraint should also be adjusted for proper height. See also the section on air bags ( page 74) for proper seat positioning.

In addition, adjust the steering wheel to ensure adequate control, reach, operation and comfort. Both the interior and exterior rear view mirrors should be adjusted for adequate rear vision.

Fasten seat belts. Infants and small children should be seated in a properly secured restraint system that complies with U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 225 and Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 210.2.

With the memory function you can store up to three different configurations.

Each stored position on the driver's side includes the following settings:

• Seat position
• Multicontour seat*: previously saved setting
  • Steering wheel position
• Exterior rear view mirrors' position

Each stored position on the passenger side includes the following settings:

• Seat position
• Multicontour seat*: previously saved setting

Warning!

Do not activate the memory function while driving. Activating the memory function while driving could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.

The memory button and stored position buttons are located on the entry side of each front seat base.

1 2 3 M P91.10-3074-31

M Memory button

1, 2, 3 Stored position buttons

Controls in detail

Memory function\*

Storing positions into memory

▶ Adjust the seats (▷ page 43).
On the driver's side, additionally adjust the steering wheel (page 48) and exterior rear view mirrors (page 49) to the desired positions.
▶ Press memory button M.
▶ Release memory button M and press stored position button 1, 2 or 3 within 3 seconds.

All settings are stored to the selected position.

Recalling positions from memory

Do not operate the power seats using memory button M if the seat backrest is in an excessively reclined position. Doing so could cause damage to front or rear seats.
Move seat backrest to an upright position first.

▶Press and hold stored position button 1, 2 or 3 until the seat, steering wheel and exterior rear view mirrors have fully moved to the stored positions.

i Releasing the stored position button stops movement to the stored positions immediately.

Controls in detail

Lighting

Lighting

For information on how to switch on the headlamps and use the turn signals, see "Switching on headlamps" (▶page 59) and "Turn signals" (▶page 60).

If you drive in countries where vehicles drive on the other side of the road than the country in which the vehicle is registered, you must have the headlamps modified for symmetrical low beams. Relevant information can be obtained at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
i Vehicles equipped with active Bi-Xenon* headlamps: The active Bi-Xenon* headlamps monitor the vehicles steering angle and vehicle speed, then automatically shift their beams to either side to better follow the curvature of the road ahead, increasing usable illumination over conventional headlamps.

Exterior lamp switch

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 P54-25-5752-31

1 -P ≈ Standing lamps, left (turn left two stops)
2 P← Standing lamps, right (turn left one stop)
3 0 Off Daytime running lamp mode (▷page 137)
4 AUTO Automatic headlamp mode Daytime running lamp mode (▷page 137)

5 Parking lamps (also side marker lamps, tail lamps, license plate lamps, instrument panel lamps)
6 Low beam headlamps or high beam headlamps
7 知 Front fog lamps
8 0‡ Rear fog lamp

The exterior lamps switch off automatically when you remove the SmartKey from the starter switch or open the driver's door with the ignition switched off.

When the parking lamps or the rear fog lamp are switched on and you remove the SmartKey from the starter switch or open the driver's door, an acoustic signal sounds.

In addition the message Switch Off Lights appears in the multifunction display.

Switch off the parking lamps or the rear fog lamp manually.

! Failure to switch off the parking lamps when leaving the vehicle may result in a discharged battery.

Controls in detail

Lighting

Low beam headlamps

▶Turn the exterior lamp switch to position 📐.

With the SmartKey in starter switch position 1 or the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button pressed once, the following lamps will switch on:

•Tail and parking lamps
- License plate lamps
- Side marker lamps

With the SmartKey in starter switch position 2 or the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button pressed twice, the following lamps will switch on additionally:

• Low beam headlamps
• High beam headlamps (when the combination switch is pushed forward)

Automatic headlamp mode

The following lamps switch on and off automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light:

• Low beam headlamps
  •Tail and parking lamps
• License plate lamps
• Side marker lamps

Warning!

If the exterior lamp switch is set to AUTO, the headlamps will not be automatically switched on under foggy conditions.

To minimize risk to you and to others, activate headlamps by turning exterior lamp switch to 📋 when driving or when traffic and/or ambient lighting conditions require you to do so.

In low ambient lighting conditions, only switch from position AUTO to 📋 with the vehicle at a standstill in a safe location. Switching from AUTO to 📋 will briefly switch off the headlamps. Doing so while driving in low ambient lighting conditions may result in an accident.

The automatic headlamp feature is only an aid to the driver. The driver is responsible for the operation of the vehicle's lights at all times.

▶Turn the exterior lamp switch to position AUTO.

With the SmartKey in starter switch position 1 or the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button pressed once, only the parking lamps and the side marker lamps will switch on and off depending on the brightness of the ambient light.

When the engine is running, the low beam headlamps, the tail and parking lamps, the license plate lamps, and the side marker lamps will switch on and off depending on the brightness of the ambient light.

Canada only: High beam headlamps are only available with the exterior lamp switch in position 📋.

Daytime running lamp mode

In Canada the daytime running lamp mode is mandatory and therefore in a constant mode.

In the USA the daytime running lamp mode is deactivated by default. Activate the daytime running lamp mode using the control system, see "Setting daytime running lamp mode (USA only)" (▶page 170).

▶Turn the exterior lamp switch to position 0 or AUTO.

When the engine is running, the low beam headlamps are switched on.

In low ambient light conditions, the following lamps will switch on additionally:

•Tail and parking lamps
- License plate lamps
- Side marker lamps

With the daytime running lamp mode activated and the engine running, you cannot switch off the low beam headlamps manually.

Canada only

With the exterior lamp switch in position 0 or AUTO, you cannot switch on the high beam headlamps.

The high beam flasher is available at all times. For nighttime driving turn the exterior lamp switch to position 📋 to permit activation of the high beam headlamps.

When the engine is running, and you shift from a driving position to position N or P with the vehicle at a standstill, the low beam headlamps will switch off with a three-minute delay.

When the engine is running, and you

• turn the exterior lamp switch to position 00 , the low beam head-lamps, the tail and parking lamps, the side marker lamps and the license plate lamps switch on
• turn the exterior lamp switch to position 📋, the manual headlamp mode has priority over the daytime running lamp mode

Controls in detail

Lighting

USA only

With the exterior lamp switch in position 0, you cannot switch on the high beam headlamps.

The high beam flasher is available at all times. For nighttime driving turn the exterior lamp switch to position 📋 or AUTO to permit activation of the high beam headlamps.

When the engine is running, and you turn the exterior lamp switch to position ≥slant 000 or ≥slant D , the manual headlamp mode has priority over the daytime running lamp mode.

The corresponding exterior lamps switch on (▷page 135).

Locator lighting and night security illumination

The locator lighting and the night security illumination are described in the “Control system” section, see “Setting locator lighting” (▶page 171) and “Setting night security illumination” (▶page 171).

Fog lamps

Warning!

In low ambient lighting or foggy conditions, only switch from position AUTO to 📋 with the vehicle at a standstill in a safe location. Switching from AUTO to 📋 will briefly switch off the headlamps. Doing so while driving in low ambient lighting conditions may result in an accident.

Fog lamps will operate with the parking lamps and/or the low beam headlamps on. Fog lamps should only be used in conjunction with low beam headlamps. Consult your State or Province Motor Vehicle Regulations regarding permissible lamp operation.
Fog lamps cannot be switched on with the exterior lamp switch in position AUTO. To switch on the fog lamps, turn the exterior lamp switch to position D first.

Controls in detail

Lighting

Front fog lamps

▶Turn the exterior lamp switch to position 300 or D (▶page 135).
▶ Pull out the exterior lamp switch to first stop.

The front fog lamps switch on.

The green indicator lamp 40 in the exterior lamp switch comes on.

▶Push in the exterior lamp switch.

The front fog lamps switch off.

The green indicator lamp #0 in the exterior lamp switch goes out.

Rear fog lamp (driver's side only)

▶Turn the exterior lamp switch to position 📋 (▶page 135).
▶ Pull out the exterior lamp switch to second stop.
The rear fog lamp switches on.
The yellow indicator lamp 0 in the exterior lamp switch comes on.

▶Push in the exterior lamp switch to first stop.

The rear fog lamp switches off.

The yellow indicator lamp 0\$ in the exterior lamp switch goes out.

The front fog lamps remain lit.

Combination switch

Diagram showing car steering wheel with labeled parts and directional arrows, likely illustrating a maneuver or control mechanism.

① High beam
② High beam flasher

High beam

▶Turn the exterior lamp switch to position 📋 (▷page 135).
▶Push the combination switch in direction of arrow ① to switch on the high beam.

The high beam headlamp indicator lamp ☐ in the instrument cluster comes on (▷page 26). ▷

Controls in detail

Lighting

▶▶▶ Pull the combination switch in direction of arrow ② to its original position to switch off the high beam.

The high beam headlamp indicator lamp ED in the instrument cluster goes out.

High beam flasher

▶Pull the combination switch briefly in direction of arrow ②.

Corner-illuminating front fog lamps\*

The corner-illuminating front fog lamps improve illumination of the area in the direction into which you are turning.

The corner-illuminating front fog lamps will operate with the engine running and with

- the exterior lamp switch in position □D (▶page 135) or

- the exterior lamp switch in position AUTO (▷page 135) or

- the daytime running lamp mode activated (▷page 137)

The corner-illuminating front fog lamps will only come on in low ambient lighting conditions.

If you are driving faster than 25 mph (40 km/h) or have the front fog lamps switched on, the corner-illuminating function is not available.

Driving forward

Switching on corner-illuminating front fog lamps

▶Switch on the left or right turn signal (▷page 60), depending on whether you are turning left or right. The respective front fog lamp comes on and illuminates the area in the direction into which you are turning.

or

▶Turn steering wheel in desired direction.

The front fog lamp on the side of your steering direction comes on.

The corner-illuminating front fog lamps temporarily come on both sides of the vehicle if you turn the steering wheel in one direction and then again in the other direction shortly thereafter.

Controls in detail

Lighting

The corner-illuminating front fog lamps will come on automatically depending on the steering angle and vehicle speed, even if you did not switch on either turn signal. If the corner-illuminating front fog lamps came on automatically, they will also go out automatically depending on the steering angle and vehicle speed.

Switching off corner-illuminating front fog lamps

The combination switch for the turn signal resets automatically after major steering wheel movements. This will switch off the corner-illuminating front fog lamps if they were activated by switching on the left or right turn signal.

If the turn signal should stay on after making the turn, the turn signal and the corner-illuminating front fog lamps can be switched off by returning the combination switch to its original position.

There may be a brief delay before the corner-illuminating front fog lamps switch off.

Driving in reverse

Switching on corner-illuminating front fog lamps

▶Shift the automatic transmission to reverse gear R (▶page 185).

The front fog lamp opposite to your steering direction comes on.

Switching off corner-illuminating front fog lamps

▶Shift the automatic transmission to a gear other than reverse gear R (▷page 185).

The respective corner-illuminating front fog lamp goes out.

Hazard warning flasher

The hazard warning flasher can be switched on at all times, even with the SmartKey removed from the starter switch or with the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* removed from the vehicle.

The hazard warning flasher switches on automatically when an air bag deploys.

The hazard warning flasher switch is located on the center console.

P54 25-5800-31

① Hazard warning flasher switch

Controls in detail

Lighting

Switching on hazard warning flasher

▶Press hazard warning flasher switch ①.

All turn signals are flashing.

With the hazard warning flasher activated and the combination switch set for either left or right turn, only the respective turn signals will operate when the ignition is switched on.

Switching off hazard warning flasher

▶ Press hazard warning flasher switch ① again.

If the hazard warning flasher has been activated automatically, press hazard warning flasher switch ① once to switch it off.

Interior lighting

The controls for interior lighting are located in the overhead control panel.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 P54.25-4942-31

① Front left reading lamp switch
② Rear interior lighting switch
③ Automatic control switch
④ Front interior lighting switch
⑤ Front right reading lamp switch
⑥ Front right interior lamp
⑦ Front right reading lamp
⑧ Front left reading lamp
⑨ Front left interior lamp

! An interior lamp switched on manually does not go out automatically.

Leaving an interior lamp switch in the ON position for extended periods of time with the engine turned off could result in a discharged battery.

Automatic control

The interior lighting is factory-set to automatic mode.

Deactivating

▶ Press switch ③.

The switch engages in the recessed position.

The interior lighting and the locator lighting ( page 171) remain switched off even when you

• unlock the vehicle
• open a door
• open the tailgate
• remove the SmartKey from the starter switch

Controls in detail

Lighting

Activating

▶ Press switch ③.

The switch disengages from its recessed position back to its original position.

The interior lighting and the locator lighting (▷page 171) come on when you

• unlock the vehicle
• open a door
• open the tailgate
• remove the SmartKey from the starter switch

The interior lamps go out following an adjustable time delay ( page 172).

If a door remains open, the interior lamps switch off automatically after approximately 5 minutes when the SmartKey is removed or in starter switch position 0.

Manual control

An interior lamp switched on manually does not go out automatically.

Switching front/rear interior lighting on and off

▶Press front/rear interior lighting switch ④ or ② to switch on the respective interior light.
▶Press front/rear interior lighting switch ④ or ② again to switch off the respective interior light.

Switching front reading lamps on and off

▶ Press front reading lamp switch ① or ⑤ to switch on the respective front reading lamp.
▶ Press front reading lamp switch ① or ⑤ again to switch off the respective front reading lamp.

Switching rear interior reading lamps on and off

The rear interior reading lamps are located above the side windows.

Close-up of a car interior component with a green arrow pointing to a small object, labeled with number 1 (no readable text or symbols beyond label)

Passenger side reading lamp

① Rear interior reading lamp

▶ Press on reading lamp ① where indicated by arrow.
The reading lamp comes on.

▶ Press on reading lamp ① once more.

The reading lamp goes out.

Controls in detail

Lighting

Door entry lamps

For better orientation in the dark, the corresponding door entry lamps comes on when you open a door and the automatic control is activated.

The door entry lamps will switch off when the corresponding door is closed.

If you turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 0 or remove the SmartKey from the starter switch, the door entry lamps will remain lit for approximately 5 minutes.

Cargo compartment lamp

The cargo compartment lamp comes on when the tailgate is opened.

If you leave the tailgate open for an extended period of time, the cargo compartment lamp will switch off automatically after approximately 5 minutes.

Instrument cluster

For a full view illustration of the instrument cluster, see "Instrument cluster" (▶page 26).

1 2 3

① To dim instrument cluster illumination
② Reset button
③ To brighten instrument cluster illumination

The instrument cluster is activated when you

• open a door
• switch on the ignition (▷ page 40)
• press reset button ②
• switch on the exterior lamps (▷page 135)

Opening a front door or pressing the reset button without switching on the ignition or the exterior lighting activates the multifunction display illumination only for 30 seconds.

For information on changing the instrument cluster settings, e.g. the language, see "Instrument cluster submenu" (▶page 167).

Warning!

No messages will be displayed if either the instrument cluster or the multifunction display is inoperative.

As a result, you will not be able to see information about your driving conditions, such as speed or outside temperature, warning/indicator lamps, malfunction/warning messages or the failure of any systems. Driving characteristics may be impaired.

If you must continue to drive, do so with added caution. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center as soon as possible.

Adjusting instrument cluster illumination

Use button ① or ③ to adjust the illumination brightness for the instrument cluster.

The instrument cluster illumination is dimmed or brightened automatically to suit ambient light conditions.

The instrument cluster illumination will also be adjusted automatically when you switch on the vehicle's exterior lamps.

With the exterior lighting switched on, the brightness of the switches in the center console will also be adjusted when using button ① or ③.

To brighten illumination

▶ Press and hold button ③ until the desired level of illumination is reached.

To dim illumination

▶ Press and hold button ① until the desired level of illumination is reached.

Controls in detail

Instrument cluster

Resetting trip odometer

Make sure you are viewing the trip odometer display (▷page 147).

If it is not displayed, press button or on the multifunction steering wheel ( page 148) repeatedly until the trip odometer appears in the multifunction display.
▶ Press and hold reset button ② in the instrument cluster (▷page 145) until the trip odometer is reset.

Tachometer

The red marking on the tachometer ( page 26) denotes excessive engine speed.

Avoid driving at excessive engine speeds, as it may result in serious engine damage that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

To help protect the engine, the fuel supply is interrupted if the engine is operated within the red marking.

Outside temperature indicator

Warning!

The outside temperature indicator is not designed to serve as an ice-warning device and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.

Indicated temperatures just above the freezing point do not guarantee that the road surface is free of ice. The road may still be icy, especially in wooded areas or on bridges.

The outside temperature is displayed in the multifunction display (▷page 147).

The temperature sensor is located in the front bumper area. Due to its location, the sensor can be affected by road or engine heat during idling or slow driving. This means that the accuracy of the displayed temperature can only be verified by comparison to a thermometer placed next to the sensor, not by comparison to external displays (e.g. bank signs etc.).

When moving the vehicle into colder ambient temperatures (e.g. when leaving your garage), you will notice a delay before the lower temperature is displayed.

A delay also occurs when ambient temperatures rise. This prevents inaccurate temperature indications caused by heat radiated from the engine during idling or slow driving.

▼Control system

The control system is activated as soon as the SmartKey in the starter switch is turned to position 1 (▷page 40) or as soon as the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button* is in position 1 (▷page 42). The control system enables you to

• call up information about your vehicle
- change vehicle settings

For example, you can use the control system to find out when your vehicle is next due for maintenance service, to set the language for messages in the instrument cluster display, and much more.

Warning!

A driver's attention to the road and traffic conditions must always be his/her primary focus when driving.

For your safety and the safety of others, selecting features through the multifunction steering wheel should only be done by the driver when traffic and road conditions permit it to be done safely.

Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) every second.

The control system relays information to the multifunction display.

Multifunction display

①-149.8 Miles ②-26753 ③ +72°F R N P D S ④ P54.32-47 P1-31

① Trip odometer
② Main odometer
③ Transmission position indicator
④ Current transmission program mode ^1
⑤ Status indicator (outside temperature or digital speedometer)

For more information on menus displayed in the multifunction display, see "Menus" (▷page 150).

Controls in detail

Control system

Multifunction steering wheel

The displays in the multifunction display and the settings in the control system are controlled by the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel.

Diagram of a car dashboard with numbered parts for identification and labeling

① Multifunction display
② Telephone*:
Press button
to take a call
to dial
to redial
to end a call
to reject an incoming call

Operating the control system

③ Selecting the submenu or setting the volume: Press button

+ up/to increase

- down/to decrease

④ Voice Control System* on 1, see separate operating instructions

⑤ Moving within a menu: Press button

for next display

for previous display

⑥ OFF Voice Control System* off ^1 , see separate operating instructions
⑦ Menu systems:
Press button
for next menu
for previous menu

Depending on the selected menu (▷page 150), pressing the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel will alter what is shown in the multifunction display.

The information available in the multifunction display is arranged in menus, each containing a number of functions or submenus.

The individual functions are then found within the relevant menu (radio or CD operations under AUDIO, for example). These functions serve to call up relevant information or to customize the settings for your vehicle.

Controls in detail

Control system

It is helpful to think of the menus, and the functions within each menu, as being arranged in a circular pattern.

• If you press button or repeatedly, you will pass through each menu one after the other.
• If you press button 📋 or 🏠 repeatedly, you will pass through each function display, one after the other, in the current menu.

In the Settings menu, instead of functions, you will find a number of submenus for calling up and changing settings. For instructions on using these submenus, see “Settings menu” (▷page 163).

The number of menus available in the system depends on which optional equipment is installed in your vehicle.

The menus are described on the following pages.

Controls in detail

Control system

Menus This is what you will see when you scroll

through the menus ① to ⑥.

The table on the next page provides an overview of the individual menus.

graph TD
    A["1 Standard display"] --> B["2 AMG"]
    B --> C["3 Off-road Mode"]
    C --> D["4 AUDIO"]
    D --> E["5 NAV*"]
    E --> F["6 AIRMATIC*/Compass"]
    F --> G["2 Messages"]
    G --> H["Settings To reset, press reset button for 3 seconds"]
    H --> I["Instrument Cluster"]
    I --> J["Instrument Cluster"]
    J --> K["Time/Date"]
    K --> L["Lighting"]
    L --> M["Vehicle"]
    M --> N["Comfort"]
    N --> O["Comfort"]
    O --> P["Lighting"]
    P --> Q["Instrument Cluster"]
    Q --> R["Time/Date"]
    R --> S["Lighting"]
    S --> T["Instrument Cluster"]
    T --> U["Instrument Cluster"]
    U --> V["Instrument Cluster"]
    V --> W["Instrument Cluster"]
    W --> X["Instrument Cluster"]
    X --> Y["Instrument Cluster"]
    Y --> Z["Instrument Cluster"]
    Z --> AA["Instrument Cluster"]
    AA --> AB["Instrument Cluster"]
    AB --> AC["Instrument Cluster"]
    AC --> AD["Instrument Cluster"]
    AD --> AE["Instrument Cluster"]
    AE --> AF["Instrument Cluster"]
    AF --> AG["Instrument Cluster"]
    AG --> AH["Instrument Cluster"]
    AH --> AI["Instrument Cluster"]
    AI --> AJ["Instrument Cluster"]
    AJ --> AK["Instrument Cluster"]
    AK --> AL["Instrument Cluster"]
    AL --> AM["Instrument Cluster"]
    AM --> AN["Instrument Cluster"]
    AN --> AO["Instrument Cluster"]
    AO --> AP["Instrument Cluster"]
    AP --> AQ["Instrument Cluster"]
    AQ --> AR["Instrument Cluster"]
    AR --> AS["Instrument Cluster"]
    AS --> AT["Instrument Cluster"]
    AT --> AU["Instrument Cluster"]
    AU --> AV["Instrument Cluster"]
    AV --> AW["Instrument Cluster"]
    AW --> AX["Instrument Cluster"]
    AX --> AY["Instrument Cluster"]
    AY --> AZ["Instrument Cluster"]
    AZ --> BA["Instrument Cluster"]
    BA --> BB["Instrument Cluster"]
    BB --> BC["Instrument Cluster"]
    BC --> BD["Instrument Cluster"]
    BD --> BE["Instrument Cluster"]
    BE --> BF["Instrument Cluster"]
    BF --> BG["Instrument Cluster"]
    BG --> BH["Instrument Cluster"]
    BH --> BI["Instrument Cluster"]
    BI --> BJ["Instrument Cluster"]
    BJ --> BK["Instrument Cluster"]
    BK --> BL["Instrument Cluster"]
    BL --> BM["Instrument Cluster"]
    BM --> BN["Instrument Cluster"]
    BN --> BO["AIRMATIC Compass NE"]
    BO --> BP["AIRMATIC * Compass NE"]
    BP --> BQ["AIRMATIC * Compass NE"]
    BQ --> BR["AIRMATIC * Compass NE"]
    BR --> BS["AIRMATIC * Compass NE"]
    BS --> BT["AIRMATIC * Compass NE"]
    BT --> BU["AIRMATIC * Compass NE"]
    BU --> BV["AIRMATIC * Compass NE"]
    BV --> BW["AIRMATIC * Compass NE"]
    BW --> BX["AIRMATIC * Compass NE"]
    BX --> BY["AIRMATIC * Compass NE"]
    BY --> BZ["AIRMATIC * Compass NE"]
    BZ --> CA["AIRMATIC * Compass NE"]
    CA --> CB["AIRMATIC * Compass NE"]
    CB --> CC["AIRMATIC * Compass NE"]
    CC --> CD["AIRMATIC * Compass NE"]
    D --> CE["0.75 MHz 1:30 H, 50 MPH, 20.5 MPa"] --> TL["TEL off"]
    TL --> DL[Range: From reset, From Start 75 MI, Speed: 1:30 H, 1:30 H, 2:100 MHz 1:30 H, 2:100 MHz 2:100 MHz 1:100 MHz 1:100 MHz 2:100 MHz 1:100 MHz 2:100 MHz 1:100 MHz 1:100 MHz 2:100 MHz 1:100 MHz 2:100 MHz 1:100 MHz 2:100 MHz 1:100 MHz 2:100 MHz 1:100 MHz 2:100 MHz 1:100 MHz 2:100 MHz 1:100 MHz 2:100 MHz 1:100 MHz 2:200 MHz 2:200 MHz 2:200 MHz 2:200 MHz 2:200 MHz 2:200 MHz 2:200 MHz 2:200 MHz 2:200 MHz 2:200 MHz 2:200 MHz 2:200 MHz 2:200 MHz 2:200 MHz 2:20<nl>

Controls in detail

Control system

Menus, submenus and functions

Commands/submenus	Menu 1Standard display AMG(▷ page 154)	Menu 21(▷ page 156)	Menu 3Off-road Mode1(▷ page 159)	Menu 4AUDIO NAV* AIRMATIC*/Compass(▷ page 160)	Menu 5(▷ page 161)	Menu 6(▷ page 162)
	Trip- and main odometer	Engine oil tem-perature	Off-road driving program on/off	Selecting radio station	Route guidance in-structions, current direction traveled	Compass
	Checking tire inflation pressure	Vehicle supply voltage		Selecting satellite radio station*		Vehicle level*
	Checking coolant tem-perature	RACETIMER Operating CD		player
	Calling up digital speed-ometer or outside tem-perature	Overall analysis
	Calling up maintenance service indicator	Lap analysis

^1 AMG vehicles only.

The headings used in the menus table are designed to facilitate navigation within the

system and are not necessarily identical to those shown in the control system displays. The first

function displayed in each menu will automatically show you which part of the system you are in.

Controls in detail

Control system

This is what you will see when you scroll through the menus ⑦ to ⑪.

The table on the next page provides an overview of the individual menus.

graph TD
    A["10 Trip computer"] --> B["From Start 75 MI 50 MPH 20.5 HPB"]
    B --> C["11 TEL* TEL off"]
    C --> D["Maintenance service indicator Speedometer/Outside temperature Coolant temperature Tire inflation pressure"]
    D --> E["149.8 Miles 26753"]
    E --> F["Lap analysis Overall analysis RACETIMER Vehicle supply voltage"]
    F --> G["1 72 °C"]
    G --> H["Off-road mode"]
    H --> I["AUDIO off"]
    I --> J["NAV off"]
    J --> K["2 Messages"]
    K --> L["Settings To reset, press reset button for 3 seconds"]
    L --> M["Settings Instrument Cluster Time/Date Lighting"]
    M --> N["Instrument Cluster Time/Date Lighting Vehicle Comfort"]
    N --> O["Vehicle status message memory"]
    O --> P["AIRMATIC Compass NE"]
    P --> Q["Data transfer to NAV off"]
    Q --> R["Audio off"]
    R --> S["Off-road mode"]
    S --> T["Vehicle configuration"]
    T --> U["Distance warning function* DSR Speed 4 MPH"]
    U --> V["9 Vehicle configuration"]

Controls in detail

Control system

Menus, submenus and functions

	Menu 7Vehicle status message memory1(▷ page 162)	Menu 8Settings(▷ page 163)	Menu 9Vehicle configuration(▷ page 177)	Menu 10Trip computer(▷ page 178)	Menu 11TEL*(▷ page 180)
Commands/submenus	Calling up malfunction messages, warning mes-sages, and system status messages stored in mem-ory	Resetting to factory settingsInstrument cluster submenuTime/Date submenu Resetting fuel consump-Lighting submenu Distance to emptyVehicle submenuComfort submenu*	DSR (Downhill Speed Reg-ulation) programmed default speed	Fuel consumption statistics since startFuel consumption sta-tistics since last resettion statistics	Loading phone bookSearching for name in phone book

^1 The vehicle status message memory menu is only displayed if there is a message stored.

The headings used in the menus table are designed to facilitate navigation within the

system and are not necessarily identical to those shown in the control system displays. The first

function displayed in each menu will automatically show you which part of the system you are in.

Controls in detail

Control system

Standard display menu

In the standard display, the main odometer and the trip odometer appear in the multifunction display.

149,8 Hiles 26753 ① ② PS4.32-4002-34

① Trip odometer
② Main odometer

▶If you see another display, press button or repeatedly until the standard display appears.

▶ Press button 🏠 or 🔊 to select the functions in the standard display menu.

The following functions are available: Checking coolant temperature

Function Page

Checking tire inflation pressure 359
Checking coolant temperature 154
Calling up digital speedometer or outside temperature	155
Calling up maintenance service indicator	388

Warning!

• Driving when your engine is overheated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. You could be seriously burned.
• Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns which can occur just by opening the hood. Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it.

Stop the vehicle in a safe location away from other traffic. Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until the engine has cooled down.

Controls in detail

Control system

▶ Press button 🏠 or 🏠 repeatedly until the coolant temperature appears in the multifunction display.

40 80 120°C P34.32-2942-31

! Excessive coolant temperature triggers a warning message in the multifunction display ( page 431).

The engine should not be operated with the coolant temperature above 248^ F ( 120^ C). Doing so may cause serious engine damage which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

During severe operating conditions, e.g. stop-and-go traffic, the coolant temperature may rise close to 248^ F ( 120^ C).

Calling up digital speedometer or outside temperature

▶ Press button 🧑 or △ repeatedly until the digital speedometer or the outside temperature appears in the multifunction display.

55 MPH P34.32-4803-31

Digital speedometer

+72°F P54.32-3246-31

Outside temperature

You can select whether the digital speedometer or the outside temperature is shown in the multifunction display.

You can change the setting in the submenu Instrument Cluster via the function Status Line Display, see "Selecting display (digital speedometer or outside temperature) for status indicator" (▷page 168).

Controls in detail

Control system

AMG menu

This function is only available in AMG vehicles.

The main screen of the AMG menu shows you the gear currently engaged as well as the engine oil temperature.

▶ Press button 📋 or 📋 repeatedly until the AMG menu appears in the multifunction display.

1—① 72 °C—② P54.32-37-37-34

① Gear indicator
② Engine oil temperature
The engine oil temperature value flashes if the engine oil temperature has not yet reached 80°C. During this time, avoid driving at full engine speed.

Use buttons ▼ or ▲ to select the following functions in the AMG menu:

Function Page

Vehicle supply voltage 156
RACETIMER 157
Overall analysis 158
Lap analysis 159

If the engine reaches the overspeed range in the manual shift program ( page 195), the menu will be shown in red. In addition, you will see UP next to gear indicator ① as a reminder to upshift.

Vehicle supply voltage

▶ Press button 📄 or 📄 repeatedly until the AMG menu appears in the multifunction display.
▶ Press button 🏠 repeatedly until the vehicle supply voltage appears in the multifunction display.

1—① 13.9 V—② F54.32-37/08-31

① Gear indicator
② Vehicle supply voltage

RACETIMER

Warning!

The RACETIMER feature is only for use on roads and in conditions where high speed driving is permitted. Racing on public roads is prohibited under all circumstances and the driver is and must always remain responsible for following posted speed limits.

The RACETIMER allows you to time and save driving stretches in hours, minutes and seconds.

▶ Press button 📄 or 📅 repeatedly until the AMG menu appears in the multifunction display.

▶ Press button △ repeatedly until the RACETIMER appears in the multifunction display.

1—① L1 --- --- ② ③ P54.32-37/39-31

① Gear indicator

② RACETIMER

③ Lap number

You can start the RACETIMER when the engine is running or the starter switch is in position 2 (▷page 40).

While the RACETIMER is being displayed, you cannot adjust the audio volume using buttons + or -.

Starting the RACETIMER

▶ Press button +. The timer starts.

Displaying intermediate time

▶ Press button — while the timer is running. The intermediate time is shown for 5 seconds.

Stopping the RACETIMER

▶ Press button + .

The timer stops.

When you stop the vehicle and turn the SmartKey to position 1 (▷page 40) or, in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*, turn off the engine and do not open the driver's door, the RACETIMER stops timing. Timing is resumed when you switch the ignition back on (▷page 40) or restart the engine (▷page 54) and then press button +.

Controls in detail

Control system

Saving lap time and starting a new lap

You can save up to nine laps.

▶ Press button — while the timer is running.

The intermediate time will be shown for 5 seconds.

▶ Press button — within 5 seconds.

The intermediate time shown will be saved as a lap time.

The RACETIMER begins timing the new lap. The new lap begins to be timed as soon as the intermediate time is called up.

1—① L2 00:13 55—② BL 00:13 54—③ ④ ③ P54.32-3740-31

① Gear indicator
② RACETIMER
③ Best lap time
④ Lap number

Resetting current lap

▶ Press button + while the timer is running.
The timer stops.
▶ Press button —.
The lap time is reset to "0".

Deleting all laps

i It is not possible to delete a single saved lap.

▶ Press button + while the timer is running.
The timer stops.
▶Press the reset button twice (▷page 26).
▶ Press button + .

The timer starts. The saved laps are deleted.

When you switch off the engine, the RACETIMER will be reset to "0" after 30 seconds. All laps are deleted.

Overall analysis

These functions are only available if you have saved at least one lap and have stopped the RACETIMER.

▶ Press button 📄 or 📄 repeatedly until the AMG menu appears in the multifunction display.
▶ Press button 🏠 repeatedly until the overall analysis appears in the multifunction display.

1—RT 00:54 21—2 65 mph —3 60 mph —4 61 MI —5 5—Ø PS4.32-4902-31

① Overall analysis of RACETIMER
② Overall driving time
③ Maximum speed
④ Overall distance driven
⑤ Average speed

Controls in detail

Control system

Lap analysis

These functions are only available if you have saved at least two laps and have stopped the RACETIMER.

▶ Press button 📄 or 📄 repeatedly until the AMG menu appears in the multifunction display.
▶ Press button 🏠 repeatedly until the lap analysis appears in the multifunction display.

L5 00:13 ss 65 mph 60 mph 13 MI ① ② ③ ④ ⑤

① Lap number
② Lap time
③ Maximum speed
④ Lap length
⑤ Average speed during lap

▶ Press button ↗ or ↘ to see other lap analyses.

i Each lap is shown in its own submenu. The fastest lap is indicated by flashing symbol ①.

Off-road Mode menu

This function is only available in AMG vehicles.

Use this function to switch the off-road driving program (▷page 253) On or Off.

▶ Press button 📄 or 📄 repeatedly until the Off-road mode menu appears in the multifunction display.

Off-road Mode On OFF P94.32-47/92-31

Off-road mode

▶ Press button + or - to switch the off-road driving program On or Off.

The symbol 📄 appears in the lower multifunction display.

+76°F R N P D3 P54.32-3935.01

The setting is stored when you turn off the engine.

Controls in detail

Control system

AUDIO menu

The functions in the AUDIO menu operate the audio equipment which you currently have turned on.

If no audio equipment is currently turned on, the message AUDIO Off appears in the multifunction display.

The following functions are available:

Function Page

Selecting radio station 160

Selecting satellite radio station* 160

Operating CD player 161

Selecting radio station

▶Turn on the COMAND system and select radio. Refer to separate COMAND system operating instructions.

▶ Press button 📄 or 📄 repeatedly until the currently tuned station appears in the multifunction display.

FM ① ② 101.1 FM ① P54.32-3245-31

① Waveband setting
② Station frequency

▶ Press button ▼ or ▲ repeatedly until the desired station is found.

The station search depends on the selected setting in the Vehicle submenu of the control system (▶page 175). Pressing button 🖼 or ▲ will either start a frequency scan or select the next stored radio station.

You can only store new stations using the corresponding feature on the radio. Refer to separate COMAND system operating instructions.

You can also operate the radio in the usual manner.

Selecting satellite radio station\*

The satellite radio is treated as a radio application.

▶Select satellite radio with the corresponding soft key on the COMAND system.

SRT The Pulse 1 2 F54.32-2896-31

① SAT mode

② Channel name or number

▶ Press button ▼ or ▲ repeatedly until the desired channel is found.

i Additional optional satellite radio equipment and a subscription to satellite radio service provider are required for satellite radio operation. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center for details and availability for your vehicle.

For more information, refer to separate COMAND system operating instructions.

Operating CD player

Selecting CD track

▶Turn on the COMAND system and select CD. Refer to separate COMAND system operating instructions.
▶ Press button 📄 or 📋 repeatedly until the settings for the CD currently being played appear in the multifunction display.

CD4—① Track 1—② P54.32-2897-31

① Current CD (for CD changer*)
② Current track

▶ Press button ▼ or ▲ repeatedly until the desired track is selected.

i Vehicles with CD changer*: To select a CD from the CD changer magazine, press a number on the COMAND system key pad located in the center console.

Selecting MP3-CD track

▶Turn on the COMAND system and select MP3. Refer to separate COMAND system operating instructions.
▶ Press button 📋 or 📋 repeatedly until the settings for the MP3-CD currently being played appear in the multifunction display.

MP3—① Smalltown—② P34.32-3/24-31

① MP3 mode
② Current track

▶ Press button ▼ or △ repeatedly until the desired track is selected.

NAV\* menu

The NAV menu contains the functions needed to operate your navigation system.

▶ Press button 📄 or 📄 repeatedly until the message NAV appears in the multifunction display.

The message shown in the multifunction display depends on the status of the navigation system:

• With the COMAND system switched off, the message NAV off appears in the multifunction display.
• With the COMAND system switched on but route guidance not activated, the direction of travel and, if applicable, the name of the street currently traveled on appear in the multifunction display.
• With the COMAND system switched on and route guidance activated, the direction of travel and maneuver instructions appear in the multifunction display.

Controls in detail

Control system

Please refer to the COMAND system manual for instructions on how to activate the route guidance system.

AIRMATIC\*/Compass menu

The AIRMATIC/Compass menu displays the messages for air suspension* and the direction into which you are currently driving.

▶ Press button 📄 or 📅 repeatedly until one of the following messages appears in the multifunction display.

Vehicles with steel suspension:

Compass E P54.32-3749-31

Vehicles with air suspension* or ML 63 AMG:

AIRMATIC Compass NE P54.32-3871-31

▶ Press button ↘ or ↗ repeatedly until the desired setting is found.

For information on air suspension, see "Air suspension program*" (▷page 254).

For information on the compass, see "Vehicle submenu" (▷page 173) and "Compass" (▷page 307).

Vehicle status message memory menu

Use the vehicle status message memory menu to scan malfunction and warning messages that may be stored in the system. Such messages appear in the multifunction display and are based on conditions or system status the vehicle's system has recorded.

The vehicle status message memory menu only appears, if messages have been stored.

Warning!

Malfunction and warning messages are only indicated for certain systems and are intentionally not very detailed. The malfunction and warning messages are simply a reminder with respect to the operation of certain systems and do not replace the owner's and/or driver's responsibility to maintain the vehicle's operating safety by having all required maintenance and safety checks performed on the vehicle and by bringing the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center to address the malfunction and warning messages (page 413).

▶ Press button 📄 or 📋 repeatedly until the vehicle status message memory appears in the multifunction display.

If the vehicle status message memory menu does not appear, no messages have been stored.

If conditions have occurred causing status messages to be recorded, the number of messages appears in the multifunction display:

2 Messages P34.32-4504-31

▶ Press button ↻ or ↳.

The stored messages will now be displayed in the order in which they have occurred. For malfunctions and warning messages, see "Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display" (▶page 413).

i After you have scrolled through all recorded status messages, the first recorded message appears again.

Should the vehicle's system record any conditions while driving, the number of messages will reappear in the multifunction display

- when the SmartKey in the starter switch is turned to position 0 or removed from the starter switch. or

- when you turn off the engine by pressing the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button (▶page 67) in the starter switch once and open the driver's door (this puts the starter switch in position 0, same as with the SmartKey removed from the starter switch)

The vehicle status message memory will be cleared when you turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 1 or 2, or when you press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button once or twice without depressing the brake pedal. You will then only see high priority messages in the multifunction display (>page 413).

Settings menu

In the Settings menu there are two functions:

• The function Reset to factory settings?, with which you can reset all the settings to the original factory settings.
  •A collection of submenus with which you can make individual settings for your vehicle.
  ▶ Press button 📄 or 📋 repeatedly until the Settings menu appears in the multifunction display.

Settings To reset, press reset button for 3 seconds.

Controls in detail

Control system

The following settings and submenus are available in the Settings menu:

Function Page

Resetting all settings 164

Submenus in the settings menu 165

Instrument cluster submenu 167

Time/Date submenu 169

Lighting submenu 170

Vehicle submenu 173

Comfort submenu* 176

Resetting all settings

You can reset the functions of all submenus to the factory settings.

▶Press the reset button in the instrument cluster (▷page 145) for approximately 3 seconds.

The request to press the reset button once more to confirm appears in the multifunction display.

Settings Reset to Factory settings? To confirm, press reset button.

▶Press the reset button once more.

The functions of all the submenus will reset to factory settings.

The settings you have changed will not be reset unless you confirm the action by pressing the reset button a second time.

After approximately 5 seconds, the Settings menu reappears in the multifunction display ( page 163).

For safety reasons, the function Lamp Circuit Headlamp in the Lighting submenu cannot be reset while driving.

The following message appears in the multifunction display:

Settings Cannot be completely reset to factory settings while driving.

Controls in detail

Control system

Submenus in the Settings menu

▶ Press button 🔊. The collection of the submenus appears in the multifunction display.

Settings Instrument Cluster Time/Date Lighting

▶ Press button —. The selection marker moves to the next submenu.

The submenus are arranged by hierarchy. Scroll down with button —, scroll up with the button +.

With the selection marker on the desired submenu, use the △ button to access the individual functions within that submenu. Once within that submenu, you can use the △ button to move to the next function or the ▽ button to move to the previous function within that submenu.

The settings themselves are made with button + or - .

Controls in detail

Control system

The table below shows what settings can be changed within the various menus. Detailed instructions on making individual settings can be found on the following pages.

Instrument cluster(▷ page 167)	Time/Date(▷ page 169)	Lighting(▷ page 170)	Vehicle(▷ page 173)	Comfort*(▷ page 176)
Selecting speedometer display mode	Setting the time Setting daytime runninglamp mode (USA only)		Compass adjustment Activatingeasy-entry/exit feature*
Selecting language	Setting the date	Setting locator lighting	Compass calibration	Setting fold-in function* for exterior rear view mirrors
Selecting display (digital speedometer or outside temperature) for status indicator		Setting night security illumination	Audio search function
		Setting interior lighting delayed shut-off	Setting automatic central lockingLimiting opening height of tailgate*

Controls in detail

Control system

Instrument cluster submenu

Access the Instrument Cluster submenu via the Settings menu. Use the Instrument Cluster submenu to change the instrument cluster display settings.

The following functions are available:

Function Page
Selecting speedometer display mode	167
Selecting language 167
Selecting display (digital speedometer or outside temperature) for status indicator	168

Selecting speedometer display mode

▶Move the selection marker with button + or — to the Instrument Cluster submenu

▶ Press button 🏠 or 🖼 repeatedly until the message Display Unit Digital Speedometer appears in the multifunction display.

The selection marker is on the current setting.

Display Unit Digital Speedometer Km Miles P34.32-4608-31

▶ Press button + or — to set speedometer unit to Km or Miles.

Selecting language

▶Move the selection marker with button + or - to the Instrument Cluster submenu.

▶ Press button 📁 or 🕒 repeatedly until the message Language appears in the multifunction display. The selection marker is on the current setting.

Language Deutsch English Français

▶ Press button + or - to select the language to be used for the multifunction display messages.

If you select a language that is not available in the COMAND system, the messages for the audio systems, such as radio or CD player, will appear in English, regardless of the language selected. For more information see separate COMAND operating instructions.

Controls in detail

Control system

Available languages:

•German
- English
•French
•Italian
- Spanish
•Dutch
- Swedish
•Danish
• Turkish
- Portuguese
• Russian (Canada only)

Selecting display (digital speedometer or outside temperature) for status indicator

▶Move the selection marker with button + or - to the Instrument Cluster submenu.
▶ Press button 🏠 or 🖼 repeatedly until the message Status Line Display appears in the multifunction display.

The selection marker is on the current setting.

Status Line Display Speed Outside Temperature

▶ Press button + or - to select the desired setting.

The selected display is then shown continuously in the status indicator (lower display).

The other display now appears in the menu of the standard display (▷page 154):

• Digital speedometer or
- Outside temperature

Controls in detail

Control system

Time/Date submenu

Access the Time/Date submenu via the Settings menu. Use the Time/Date submenu to change the time and date settings.

The following functions are available:

Function Page

Setting the time 169

Setting the date 169

If your vehicle is equipped with the COMAND system and navigation module*, see separate COMAND system operating instructions for information on how to set the date and time.

Setting the time

This function is not available if your vehicle is equipped with the COMAND system and navigation module*.

▶Move the selection marker with button + or - to the Time/Date submenu.

▶ Press button 🏠 or 🖼 repeatedly until the message Clock Set Hour, or Clock Set Minute(s) appears in the multifunction display.

The selection marker is on the hour setting.

Clock Set Hour 10:03 PM + - PS4.32-4610-31

Example illustration for setting the hour

▶ Press button + or - to set the hour.

Setting the date

This function is not available if your vehicle is equipped with the COMAND system and navigation module*.

▶Move the selection marker with button + or — to the Time/Date submenu.

▶ Press button 🏠 or 🖼 repeatedly until the message Date Set Month, Date Set Day, or Date Set Year appears in the multifunction display.

The selection marker is on the month setting.

Date Set Month 06/30/2005 + - P84.02-1611-31

Example illustration for setting the month

▶ Press button + or - to set the month.

Controls in detail

Control system

Lighting submenu

Access the Lighting submenu via the Settings menu. Use the Lighting submenu to change the lamp and lighting settings on your vehicle.

The following functions are available:

Function Page
Setting daytime running lamp mode (USA only)	170
Setting locator lighting 171
Setting night security illumination	171
Setting interior lighting delayed shut-off	172

Setting daytime running lamp mode (USA only)

This function is not available in countries where the daytime running lamp mode is mandatory and therefore in a constant mode.

▶Move the selection marker with button + or - to the Lighting submenu.
▶ Press button ▲ or ▼ repeatedly until the message Lamp Circuit Headlamp appears in the multifunction display.
The selection marker is on the current setting.

Lamp Circuit Headlamp Manual Constant

▶ Press button + or — to select manual operation (Manual) or daytime running lamp mode (Constant).

With daytime running lamp mode activated and the exterior lamp switch in position 0 or AUTO, the low beam headlamps are switched on when the engine is running.

In low ambient light conditions the following lamps will switch on additionally:

• Parking lamps
• Tail lamps
• License plate lamps
• Side marker lamps

For more information on the daytime running lamp mode, see "Lighting" (▷page 135).

For safety reasons, changing the setting for the daytime running lamp mode is not possible while the vehicle is in motion. The following message appears in the multifunction display:

Settings can only be made at a standstill.

For safety reasons, resetting to factory settings (▷page 164) while driving will not deactivate the daytime running lamp mode.

Setting locator lighting

With the locator lighting feature activated, the exterior lamp switch in position AUTO (▶page 135) and the interior lighting in automatic mode (▶page 143), the following lamps will switch on during darkness when the vehicle is unlocked using button on the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO:

• Parking lamps
  •Tail lamps
• License plate lamps
• Side marker lamps
• Front fog lamps*

The locator lighting switches off when the driver's door is opened.

If you do not open a door after unlocking the vehicle with the SmartKey, the lamps will switch off automatically after approximately 40 seconds.

▶Move the selection marker with button + or - to the Lighting submenu.
▶ Press button △ or ▽ repeatedly until the message Surround Lighting Function appears in the multifunction display.
The selection marker is on the current setting.

Surround Lighting Function On OFF P54.32-4613-31

▶ Press button + or - to switch the locator lighting function On or Off.
▶Turn the exterior lamp switch to position AUTO when exiting the vehicle.

The locator lighting feature is activated.

Setting night security illumination (Headlamps delayed shut-off)

Use this function to set whether you would like the exterior lamps to remain on for 15 seconds during darkness after exiting the vehicle and closing all doors.

With the headlamps delayed shut-off feature activated and the exterior lamp switch in position AUTO before the engine is turned off, the following lamps will switch on when the engine is turned off:

• Parking lamps
  •Tail lamps
• License plate lamps
• Side marker lamps
• Front fog lamps

If after turning off the engine you do not open a door or do not close an opened door, the lamps will automatically switch off after 60 seconds.

Controls in detail

Control system

▶Move the selection marker with button + or - to the Lighting submenu.

▶ Press button ▲ or ▼ repeatedly until the message Headlamp Delayed Shut-off appears in the multifunction display.

The selection marker is on the current setting.

Headlamp Delayed Shut-off On OFF

▶ Press button + or — to switch the headlamps delayed shut-off feature On or Off.

▶Turn the exterior lamp switch to position AUTO before turning off the engine.

The headlamps delayed shut-off feature is activated.

You can temporarily deactivate the headlamps delayed shut-off feature:

▶Before exiting the vehicle, turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 0.

▶ Then turn it to position 2 and back to 0.

The headlamps delayed shut-off feature is deactivated. It will reactivate as soon as you reinsert the SmartKey in the starter switch.

Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:

▶Press KEYLESS-GO start/stop button in the starter switch (▷page 41).

Setting interior lighting delayed shut-off

Use this function to set whether you would like the interior lighting to remain on for 10 seconds during darkness after you have removed the SmartKey from the starter switch.

▶Move the selection marker with button + or - to the Lighting submenu.

▶ Press button 📁 or 🖼 repeatedly until the message Interior Lighting Delayed Shut-off appears in the multifunction display.

The selection marker is on the current setting.

Interior Lighting Delayed Shut-off On OFF

▶ Press button + or - to switch the interior lighting delayed shut-off feature On or Off.

Controls in detail

Control system

Vehicle submenu

Access the Vehicle submenu via the Settings menu. Use the Vehicle submenu to make general vehicle settings.

The following functions are available:

Function Page
Compass adjustment 173
Compass calibration 174
Audio search function 175
Setting automatic central locking	175
Limiting opening height of tailgate*	176

Compass adjustment

This function is not available if your vehicle is equipped with the COMAND system and navigation module*.

Determine your location on the basis of the following zone maps.

P82.86-4817-31

Zone map North America

P82.86-4818-31

Zone map South America

▶ Press button + or — to move the selection marker to the Vehicle submenu.

▶▶

Controls in detail

Control system

Press button △ or ▽ repeatedly until the message Compass Setting Zone appears in the multifunction display.

The selection marker is on the current setting.

Compass Setting Zone 8

▶ Press button + or - to set the respective compass zone.

For information on how to call up the compass, see "Compass" (▷page 307).

Compass calibration

Make sure you are in area where you can drive a full circle with your vehicle without disturbing traffic in order to calibrate the compass.

This function is not available if your vehicle is equipped with the COMAND system and navigation module*.

In order to calibrate the compass properly, mind the following:

- Calibrate the compass in open terrain. Nearby buildings, bridges, power lines and large antenna masts, for example, could impair compass calibration.

- Switch off electrical consumers (e.g. climate control, windshield wipers, or rear window defroster).

- Close all doors and the tailgate.

▶ Start the engine (▷ page 54).

▶ Press button + or - to move the selection marker to the Vehicle submenu.

▶ Press button △ or ▼ repeatedly until the message Compass Calibration appears in the multifunction display.

The selection marker is on setting switched Off.

Compass Calibration Start OFF

▶ Press button + to set the selection marker to Start.

The following message appears in the multifunction display: Compass Calibration Active Please drive in a full circle.

Controls in detail

Control system

▶Drive a full circle at a vehicle speed of between 3 mph and 6 mph (5 km/h and 10 km/h).

When calibration was successful, the following message appears in the multifunction display:

Compass Calibration

Completed Successfully

i If the message Compass Calibration Completed Successfully does not appear in the multifunction display, drive another full circle.

If calibration does not succeed within 3 minutes, the message Compass Calibration appears in the multifunction display again. Calibrating the compass has failed due to outside influences.

Repeat compass calibration in a different location.

Audio search function

Use of the Audio search function to select a radio station will enable you to start a frequency scan (Frequency) (▷page 160) or select a radio station stored in memory (Memory).

▶Move the selection marker with button + or - to the Vehicle submenu.

▶ Press button 🏠 or 🖼 repeatedly until the message Audio Search Function appears in the multifunction display.

The selection marker is on the current setting.

Audio Search Function Frequency Memory PS4.32-4618-31

▶ Press button + or - to select Frequency or Memory.

Setting automatic central locking

Use this function to activate or deactivate the automatic central locking. With the automatic central locking system activated, the vehicle is centrally locked at vehicle speeds of approximately 9 mph (15 km/h).

▶Move the selection marker with button + or - to the Vehicle submenu.

▶ Press button ▲ or ▼ repeatedly until the message Automatic Door Locking appears in the multifunction display.

The selection marker is on the current setting.

Automatic Door Locking On OFF P04.32-4619-31

▶ Press button + or — to switch the automatic central locking On or Off.

Controls in detail

Control system

Limiting opening height of tailgate\*

Use this function to activate or deactivate the limiting opening height of the tailgate.

▶Move the selection marker with button + or - to the Vehicle submenu.

▶ Press button 🏠 or 🖼 repeatedly until the message Opening Limiter Tailgate appears in the multifunction display.

The selection marker is on the current setting.

Opening Limiter Tailgate On OFF + - PS4.32-4620-31

▶ Press button + or - to switch the limiting opening height of the tailgate On or Off.

Comfort submenu\*

Access the Comfort submenu via the Settings menu. Use the Comfort submenu to change the settings for a number of convenience features.

The following functions are available:

Function Page
Activating easy-entry/exit feature*	176
Setting fold-in function* for exterior rear view mirrors	177

Activating easy-entry/exit feature \*

Use this function to activate and deactivate the easy-entry/exit feature (▷page 46).

Warning!

You must make sure no one can become trapped or injured by the moving steering wheel when the easy-entry/exit feature is activated.

To stop steering wheel movement, do one of the following:

- Move steering wheel adjustment stalk* (▷page 48).

- Press one of the stored position buttons* or the memory button M* (▷page 133).

Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Children could open the driver's door and unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit feature, which could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury.

Controls in detail

Control system

▶Move the selection marker with button + or - to the Comfort submenu.
▶ Press button △ or ▽ repeatedly until the message Easy-entry Function appears in the multifunction display.

The selection marker is on the current setting.

Easy-entry Function On OFF P94.32-4821-31

▶ Press button + or - to switch the easy-entry/exit feature On or Off.

Setting fold-in function \* for exterior rear view mirrors

Using this function, you can set the exterior rear view mirrors to be automatically folded in when you lock your vehicle.

With this function set to On and the exterior rear view mirrors folded in using the button on the door control panel (▶page 200), the exterior rear view mirrors will not fold out when you switch on the ignition. You will then have to fold out the exterior rear view mirrors using the button on the door control panel (▶page 200).
Make sure both exterior rear view mirrors are folded out completely before driving off.
▶Move the selection marker with button + or - to the Comfort submenu.
▶ Press button △ or ▽ repeatedly until the message Fold In Mirrors When Locking appears in the multifunction display.

The selection marker is on the current setting.

Fold In Mirrors When Locking On OFF

▶ Press button + or - to switch function On or Off.

Vehicle configuration

The following functions are available:

Function Page

DSR set speed 178

Controls in detail

Control system

DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation) programmed default speed

In the DSR menu, you can program the default speed the DSR is set to when it is activated.

You can program the default speed between 4-10 mph (Canada: 6-18 km/h). The set value is increased in 1 mph (Canada: 2 km/h) increments.

▶ Press button 📄 or 📋 repeatedly until the message DSR Speed appears in the multifunction display.

The selection marker is on the current setting.

DSR Speed 4 MPH F54.32-4790-31

▶ Press button + or - repeatedly until the desired speed is shown in the multifunction display.

When DSR is switched on, DSR will use the programmed default speed to regulate the vehicle's speed.

Once DSR is switched on, you can adjust the set speed using the cruise control lever (▷page 251).

Trip computer menu

Use the trip computer menu to call up statistical data on your vehicle.

The following information is available:

Function Page
Fuel consumption statistics since start	179
Fuel consumption statistics since last reset	179
Resetting fuel consumption statistics	179
Distance to empty 180

When you enter the trip computer menu, you will always see the fuel consumption statistics since start first.

Fuel consumption statistics since start

▶ Press button 📄 or 📋 repeatedly until the message From Start appears in the multifunction display.

From Start 75 MI 1:30 H 50 MPH 3 4-17.3 MPG P24.32-4824-31

① Distance driven since start
② Time elapsed since start
③ Average speed since start
④ Average fuel consumption since start

All statistics stored since the last engine start will be reset approximately 4 hours after the SmartKey in the starter switch is turned to position 0 or removed from the starter switch.

Resetting will not occur if you turn the SmartKey back to position 1 or 2 within this time period.

Fuel consumption statistics since last reset

▶ Press button 📄 or 📄 repeatedly until the message From Start appears in the multifunction display.
▶ Press button ▲ or ▼ repeatedly until the message From Reset appears in the multifunction display.

From Reset 750 H 15:00 H 50 MPH —— 3 4 —17.3 MPG PS4.32-4625-31

① Distance driven since last reset
② Time elapsed since last reset
③ Average speed since last reset
④ Average fuel consumption since last reset

Resetting fuel consumption statistics

▶ Press button 📄 or 📋 repeatedly until the message From Start appears in the multifunction display.
▶ Press button 🏠 or 🖼 repeatedly until the fuel consumption statistics which you want to reset appear in the multifunction display.
▶Press and hold the reset button in the instrument cluster (▷page 145) until the respective values are reset to 0.

The fuel consumption statistics reset automatically to 0 when either of the following values is exceeded:

•distance covered: 100000 miles
•time elapsed: 10000 hours

Controls in detail

Control system

Distance to empty

▶ Press button 📄 or 📄 repeatedly until the message From Start appears in the multifunction display.
▶ Press button 🏠 or 🖼 repeatedly until the message Range: appears in the multifunction display.

The calculated remaining driving range based on the current fuel tank level appears in the multifunction display.

Range: 265 mm P54.32-2894-31

If only very little fuel is left in the tank, a vehicle at the fuel pump is shown instead of the range.

TEL\* menu

Warning!

A driver's attention to the road must always be his/her primary focus when driving. For your safety and the safety of others, we recommend that you pull over to a safe location and stop before placing or taking a telephone call. If you choose to use the telephone while driving, please use the hands-free device and only use the telephone when weather, road and traffic conditions permit.

Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a cellular telephone while driving a vehicle.

Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) every second.

Never operate radio transmitters equipped with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. without being connected to an external antenna) from inside the vehicle while the engine is running. Doing so could lead to a malfunction of the vehicle's electronic system, possibly resulting in an accident and/or personal injury.

You can use the functions in the TEL menu to operate your telephone, provided it is connected to a hands-free system and switched on.

▶Switch on the telephone and COMAND system.
▶ Press button 📄 or 📋 on the multifunction steering wheel repeatedly until the message TEL appears in the multifunction display.

Controls in detail

Control system

Which messages will appear in the multifunction display depends on whether your telephone is switched on or off:

- If the telephone is off, the message TEL Off appears in the multifunction display.

- If the telephone is on:

The telephone will then search for a network. During this time the multifunction display is empty.

As soon as the telephone has found a network, the message Ready appears in the multifunction display.

TEL Ready P04.32-4-451-31

This standby message indicates that your telephone is ready for use and you can operate it using the control system.

Answering a call

When your telephone is ready to receive calls, you can answer a call at any time. In the multifunction display you will then see the message, or if available, the caller ID (name and number):

TEL Incoming Call P34.32-4497-31

▶ Press button

You have answered the call. The duration of the call appears in the multifunction display.

Ending a call or rejecting an incoming call

▶ Press button

Dialing a number from the phone book

If your telephone is ready to receive calls, you may select and dial a number from the phone book at any time.

▶ Press button 📄 or 📋 repeatedly until the message TEL appears in the multifunction display.

▶ Press button ↳ or ▼.

The control system reads the phone book which is stored in the telephone. This may take several minutes. The message Please Wait appears in the multifunction display.

When the message Please Wait disappears, the phone book has been loaded.

▶ Press button 🏠 or 🖼 repeatedly until the desired name appears in the multifunction display.

The stored names are displayed in ascending or descending alphabetical order.

Controls in detail

Control system

△△

TEL Newman—① PS4.12-4052-34

① Name from the phone book

If you press and hold button or for longer than 1 second, the system scrolls rapidly through the list of names until you release the button again.

Cancel the quick search mode by pressing button 📞.

▶ Press button 📞.

The system dials the selected phone number.

- If the connection is successful and this feature is supported by your network provider, the name of the party (if stored in your phone book) you are calling and the duration of the call will appear in the multifunction display.

TEL 1: 00:02:54 Newman

• If no connection is made, the control system stores the dialed number in the redial memory.

Redialing

The control system stores the most recently dialed phone numbers. This eliminates the need to search through your entire phone book.

▶ Press button 📄 or 📋 repeatedly until the message TEL appears in the multifunction display.
▶ Press button 📞.

The first number in the redial memory appears in the multifunction display.

▶ Press button △ or ▽ repeatedly until the desired name appears in the multifunction display.
▶ Press button 📞.

The control system dials the selected phone number.

▼Automatic transmission

For more information on driving with an automatic transmission, see "Automatic transmission" (▶page 54).

Your vehicle's transmission adapts its gear shifting process to your individual driving style by continually adjusting the shift points up or down. These shift point adjustments are performed based on current operating and driving conditions.

If the operating conditions change, the automatic transmission reacts by adjusting its shift program.

During the brief warm-up, transmission upshifting is delayed. This allows the catalytic converter (gasoline engine) or the oxidation catalyst (diesel engine) to heat up more quickly to operating temperature.

Warning!

Make sure that absolutely no objects are obstructing the pedal's range of movement. Keep the driver's footwell clear of all obstacles. If there are any floormats or carpets in the footwell, make sure that the pedals still have sufficient clearance.

During sudden driving or braking maneuvers the objects could get caught between the pedals. You could then no longer brake or accelerate. This could lead to accidents and injury.

Gear selector lever

The gear selector lever is located on the right of the steering column.

R N P N D P27.60-28C7-31

Gearshift pattern for automatic transmission

P Park position
R Reverse gear
N Neutral
D Drive position

Controls in detail

Automatic transmission

i The current transmission position P, R, N, or D appears in the multifunction display (>page 187).

Warning!

It is dangerous to shift the automatic transmission out of park position P or neutral position N if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.

Shifting from P to N

Moving the gear selector lever up or down shifts the automatic transmission out of park position P:

▶With the vehicle at a standstill, depress the brake pedal and keep it pressed.

▶Move gear selector lever up or down to resistance point to select neutral position N.

i The gear selector lever returns to its original position.

Shifting from N to R or from N to D

▶With the vehicle at a standstill, depress the brake pedal and keep it pressed.
▶Move gear selector lever up past the resistance point to select reverse gear R.
or
▶Move gear selector lever down past the resistance point to select drive position D.

The gear selector lever returns to its original position.
▶ Release the parking brake (▷ page 57).
▶Release the brake pedal.
▶ Carefully depress the accelerator pedal to drive off when it is safe to do so.

Shifting from P to R

▶With the vehicle at a standstill, depress the brake pedal and keep it pressed.
▶Move gear selector lever up past the resistance point to select reverse gear R.

The gear selector lever returns to its original position.
▶ Release the parking brake (▷ page 57).
▶Release the brake pedal.
▶ Carefully depress the accelerator pedal to drive off when it is safe to do so.

Shifting from P to D

▶With the vehicle at a standstill, depress the brake pedal and keep it pressed.
▶Move gear selector lever down past the resistance point to select drive position D.

The gear selector lever returns to its original position.

▶ Release the parking brake (▷ page 57).
▶Release the brake pedal.
▶ Carefully depress the accelerator pedal to drive off when it is safe to do so.

Shifting from D, R, or N to P

If you want to select park position P with the transmission being in drive position D, reverse gear R or neutral position N:

▶With the vehicle at a standstill, depress the brake pedal and keep it pressed.
▶Step firmly on parking brake pedal (▷page 65).
▶Press button on gear selector lever in direction of arrow (▶page 183) to select park position P.
▶ Release the brake pedal.

Shift the automatic transmission directly from drive position D to reverse gear R, from reverse gear R to drive position D or directly to park position P only when the vehicle is stopped. Otherwise the automatic transmission could be damaged.

When trying to free a vehicle stuck in mud or snow, see "Rocking the vehicle" (▷page 191).

Controls in detail

Automatic transmission

Shifting from D or R to N

If you want to select neutral position N with the transmission being in drive position D or reverse gear R:

▶With the vehicle at a standstill, depress the brake pedal and keep it pressed.
▶Step firmly on parking brake pedal (▷page 65).
When the vehicle needs to be moved with the engine switched off and the transmission set to neutral position N ( page 184), do not depress the parking brake pedal.
▶Move gear selector lever up to resistance point when in drive position D or down to resistance point when in reverse gear R to select neutral position N.
▶Release the brake pedal.

Shifting procedure

The automatic transmission selects individual gears automatically, depending on:

• drive position D (▷ page 187) with gear ranges (▷page 192)
• the selected program mode (M/C/S) (ML 63 AMG only) (▷page 194)
• the position of the accelerator pedal (▷page 190)
  • the vehicle speed

! Allow engine to warm up under low load use. Do not place full load on the engine until the operating temperature has been reached.

Shift into reverse gear R or park position P only when the vehicle is stopped.

Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an extended period when driving off on slippery road surfaces. This may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

With drive position D selected, you can use the steering wheel gearshift control buttons ( page 193) to influence transmission shifting by:

• limiting the gear range
• changing gears manually

Controls in detail

Automatic transmission

Transmission positions

The current transmission position appears in the multifunction display.

+72°F R N P ① D P54.32-4093-91

① Current transmission position

! If the current transmission position does not appear in the multifunction display due to a malfunction, for example, make sure that the automatic transmission is in the desired position by carefully driving off with the transmission in drive position D.

ML 63 AMG: Select program mode C ( page 194). Do not limit the gear range.

Effect

P Park position

Shift into park position P only when vehicle is stopped. The park position is not intended to serve as a brake when the vehicle is parked. Rather, the driver should always set the parking brake in addition to shifting into park position P to secure the vehicle.

If the vehicle's electrical system is malfunctioning, the automatic transmission could remain locked in park position P.

▶Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

! SmartKey:

If you turn off the engine using the SmartKey and

- remove the SmartKey from the starter switch

or

- open a front door

the transmission will shift to park position P automatically.

Keep in mind that turning off the engine with the SmartKey alone only will automatically shift the transmission to neutral position N.

! KEYLESS-GO\*:

If you turn off the engine using the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button and open a front door, the transmission will shift to park position P automatically.

Keep in mind that turning off the engine using the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button alone only will automatically shift the transmission to neutral position N.

Controls in detail

Automatic transmission

Make it a practice to always shift into park position P before turning off the engine and

- remove the SmartKey from the starter switch

or

- open a front door

or when using KEYLESS-GO*, before turning off the engine with the start/stop button and opening a front door.

Effect

R Reverse gear

Shift into reverse gear R only when the vehicle is stopped.

N Neutral

No power is transmitted from the engine to the drive axle. When the brakes are released, the vehicle can be moved freely (pushed or towed).

To avoid damage to the transmission, never shift into neutral position N while driving.

If the ESP ^® is deactivated or malfunctioning: Shift into neutral position N only if the vehicle is in danger of skidding, e.g. on icy roads.

! If you turn off the engine using the SmartKey or the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button, the transmission will shift to neutral position N automatically.

If you want the gear position to remain in neutral position N, e.g. when taking the vehicle through an automatic conveyor type car wash, observe the following instructions.

Warning!

When leaving the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* in the starter switch, do not leave children unattended in the vehicle. It is possible for children to switch on the ignition which could result in unsupervised use of vehicle equipment.

A child's unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury.

Vehicles with SmartKey:

▶With the vehicle at a standstill and the ignition switched on shift the automatic transmission to neutral position N.
▶If engaged, release the parking brake (▷page 57).
▶Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey in the starter switch.

Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:

▶With the vehicle at a standstill, depress the brake pedal and keep it pressed.
▶With the ignition switched on shift the automatic transmission to park position P.
▶Release the brake pedal.
▶Remove the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button from the starter switch (▷page 41).

▶Insert the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* into the starter switch.
▶Switch on the ignition.
▶Depress the brake pedal.
▶Shift the automatic transmission to neutral position N.
▶Release the brake pedal.
▶If engaged, release the parking brake (▷page 57).
▶Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* in the starter switch.

! Observe instructions

• when taking the vehicle through an automatic conveyor type car wash (▷page 392)
  • when towing the vehicle (▷ page 499)

! Coasting the vehicle, or driving for any other reason in neutral position N can result in transmission damage that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

Effect

D Drive

The transmission shifts automatically. All forward gears are available.

Warning!

Getting out of your vehicle without shifting into park position P is dangerous. Also, park position P alone is not intended to or capable of preventing your vehicle from moving, possibly hitting people or objects.

Always set the parking brake in addition to shifting to position P (▷page 65).

When parked on an incline, turn the front wheels towards the road curb.

Do not park this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as grass, hay or leaves can come into contact with the hot exhaust system, as these materials could be ignited and cause a vehicle fire.

Controls in detail

Automatic transmission

Warning!

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Children could shift the automatic transmission out of park position P, which could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury.

Driving tips

Accelerator position

Your driving style influences the transmission's shifting behavior:

Less throttle Earlier upshifting

More throttle Later upshifting

Kickdown

Use kickdown when you want maximum acceleration.

▶Press the accelerator past the point of resistance.

Depending on the engine speed the transmission shifts into a lower gear.

▶Ease on the accelerator when you have reached the desired speed.

The transmission shifts up again.

Stopping

When you stop briefly, e.g. at traffic lights:

▶Leave the transmission in gear.

▶Hold the vehicle with the brake.

When you stop for a longer period of time with the engine idling and/or on a hill:

▶ Set the parking brake.

▶ Shift into park position P.

Maneuvering

When you maneuver in tight areas, e.g. when pulling into a parking space:

▶Control the vehicle speed by gradually releasing the brakes.

▶Accelerate gently.

▶Never abruptly step on the accelerator.

Rocking the vehicle

Rocking the vehicle by shifting between drive position D and reverse gear R can help free a vehicle stuck in mud or snow. The engine control system of this vehicle electronically limits shifting between drive position D and reverse gear R to very low speeds, i.e. approximately 5 mph (9 km/h). To shift between drive position D and reverse gear R, move the gear selector lever past the resistance point up or down.

Working on the vehicle

Warning!

When working on the vehicle, set the parking brake and shift to park position P. Otherwise the vehicle could roll away.

Hill start assist system

Warning!

The hill start assist system is not designed to function as a parking brake and does not prevent the vehicle from moving when parked on an incline.

Always set the parking brake in addition to shifting to park position P.

On uphill grades with a gradient angle of more than 5^ , the hill start assist system maintains the pressure in the brake system for approximately 1 second after you have released the brake pedal. Therefore, you can start off smoothly without the vehicle moving immediately after releasing the brake pedal.

The hill start assist system is inactive

• when starting off on a level road or downhill grades
  • with the transmission in neutral position N
  • with the parking brake set
• if the ESP ^ has switched off due to a malfunction

Towing a trailer

If you tow a trailer, note the following points:

- Manually shift to a lower gear range (▶page 192) if the transmission hunts between gears on inclines.

A lower gear range and reduction of speed reduces the chance to overload or overheat the engine.

For more information on trailer towing, see the "Operation" section (▷page 328).

Controls in detail

Automatic transmission

Gear ranges

With the automatic transmission in drive position D, you can select a gear range for the automatic transmission to operate within.

You can limit the gear range by pressing the left gearshift button on the steering wheel gearshift control, and reverse the gear range limit by pressing the right gearshift button on the steering wheel gearshift control (▶page 193).

The selected gear range appears in the multifunction display.

+72°F R N P D3 1 P54.32-3931-31

① Current gear range

Effect

6 The transmission shifts through sixth gear only.
5 The transmission shifts through fifth gear only.
4 The transmission shifts through fourth gear only.
3 The transmission shifts through third gear only. With this selection you can use the braking effect of the engine.

Effect

2 The transmission shifts through second gear only.

Allows the use of engine's braking power when driving:

• on steep downgrades
• in mountainous regions
• under extreme operating conditions

1 The transmission operates in first gear only.

For maximum use of engine's braking effect on very steep or lengthy downgrades.

Steering wheel gearshift control

With drive position D selected, you can limit or extend the gear range.

If your vehicle is equipped with manual shift program M, you can use the steering wheel gearshift control to manually shift the gears.

i ML 63 AMG:

For information on using the steering wheel gear-shift control in program mode M, see "Shift program (ML 63 AMG only)" (>page 194).

! Allow engine to warm up under low load use. Do not place full load on the engine until the operating temperature has been reached.

Shift into reverse gear R or park position P only when the vehicle is stopped.

Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an extended period when driving off on slippery road surfaces. This may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and gear shift (no visible text or symbols)

① Left shift button: limiting gear range or downshift (in program mode M)
② Right shift button: extending gear range or upshift (in program mode M)

You cannot shift with the steering wheel gearshift control buttons when the transmission is in position P, N or R.

Limiting gear range

Warning!

On slippery road surfaces, never downshift in order to obtain braking action. This could result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control. Your vehicle's ABS will not prevent this type of loss of control.

▶ Briefly press left shift button ①.

The transmission will shift to the next lower gear as permitted by the shift program. This action simultaneously limits the gear range of the automatic transmission ( page 192).

To avoid overrevving the engine when downshifting, the transmission will not shift to a lower gear if the engine's max. speed would be exceeded.

Controls in detail

Automatic transmission

Extending gear range

▶ Briefly press right shift button ②. The transmission will shift to the next higher gear as permitted by the shift program. This action simultaneously extends the gear range of the automatic transmission ( page 192).

If you press on the accelerator when the engine has reached its rpm limit, the transmission will upshift beyond any gear range limit selected.

Canceling gear range limit

▶ Press and hold right shift button ② until the cipher for the current gear range disappears from the multifunction display (▶page 192).

The transmission will shift from the current gear range directly to gear range D.

Shifting into optimal gear range

▶ Press and hold left shift button ①. The transmission will automatically select the gear range suited for optimal acceleration and deceleration. This will involve shifting down one or more gears.

Shift program (ML 63 AMG only)

! Allow engine to warm up under low load use. Do not place full load on the engine until the operating temperature has been reached.

Shift into reverse gear R or park position P only when the vehicle is stopped.

Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an extended period when driving off on slippery road surfaces. This may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

You can choose between automatic shift program C or S and manual shift program M.

1 C M S P54.25-5801-31

① Program mode selector switch

M Manual For manual gear shifting

C Comfort For standard driving

S Sport For sporty driving

! Never change the program mode when the automatic transmission is out of park position P. This could result in a change of driving characteristics for which you may not be prepared.

Controls in detail

Automatic transmission

The selected program mode appears in the multifunction display.

+72°F R N P D3 S 1 P54.32-4151-81

① Current program mode

Automatic shift program

You can choose between automatic shift program C or S.

▶Press program mode selector switch repeatedly until the letter of the desired program mode appears in the multifunction display.

Select C for standard driving:

•The vehicle starts out in second gear (both forward and reverse) for gentler starts. This does not apply if full throttle is applied or gear range 1 is selected.

• Traction and driving stability are improved on icy roads.
• Upshifts occur earlier even when you give more gas. The engine then operates at lower rpms and the wheels are less likely to spin.

Select S for sporty driving:

• The vehicle starts out in first gear.
- Upshifts occur later.

The last selected program mode (C or S) is switched on when the engine is restarted.

Manual shift program

In the manual program mode M, system-controlled automatic gearshifting is switched off and you need to change the the gears by manually upshifting or down-shifting using the steering wheel gearshift control buttons to the left and right of the steering wheel (▷page 193).

Activating manual shift program

▶Press program mode selector switch repeatedly until the M for the manual program mode M appears in the multifunction display.

The transmission switches to the manual program mode M. Automatic shifting is switched off. The gear range is not limited.

You can change the gears manually with drive position D selected. You can upshift or downshift through the gears in succession.

The manual program mode M will not be stored. When the engine is turned off with the manual program mode M selected, the transmission will go to the automatic program mode (C or S) when the engine is restarted.

Controls in detail

Automatic transmission

Upshifting

In the manual program mode M, the transmission will not upshift, even if the engine has reached its overrewing range. Shift up to the next gear before the engine has reached its overrewing range. Make absolutely certain that the engine speed does not reach the red marking on the tachometer ( page 28). Otherwise the engine could be damaged which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

▶ Briefly press right shift button ② (▷page 193).

The transmission shifts to the next higher gear.

If you have selected the AMG menu in the control system and you are driving in the manual program mode M, upshift indicator ② in the multifunction display advises you to upshift before the engine reaches the overspeed range. Thus you can drive at the maximum engine speed for each gear without overrevving the engine.

①—1 UP—② 82 °C P54.32-3807-31

① Gear indicator
② Upshift indicator

▶Shift to the next higher gear.

The fuel supply will otherwise be interrupted to prevent the engine from over-revving.

Downshifting

Warning!

On slippery road surfaces, never downshift in order to obtain braking action. This could result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control. Your vehicle's ABS will not prevent this type of loss of control.

▶ Briefly press left shift button ① (▷page 193).

The transmission shifts to the next lower gear.

When you brake or stop, the transmission shifts down to a gear from which you can easily accelerate or drive off.

Kickdown

Using the kickdown when driving in the manual program mode M is not possible.

Deactivating manual shift program

▶Press the program mode selector switch (▷ page 194) repeatedly until C or S appears in the multifunction display.

or

▶ Restart the engine.

The transmission will go to the automatic program mode (C or S).

The manual program mode M is not stored.

Controls in detail

Automatic transmission

Emergency operation (Limp-Home Mode)

If vehicle acceleration becomes less responsive or sluggish or the transmission no longer shifts, the transmission is most likely operating in limp-home (emergency operation) mode. In this mode only second gear and reverse gear can be activated.

▶Stop the vehicle in a safe location.
▶ Shift to park position P.
▶Turn off the engine.
▶Wait at least 10 seconds before restarting.
▶ Restart the engine.
▶ Shift to drive position D (for second gear) or reverse gear R.
▶Have the transmission checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center as soon as possible.

Controls in detail

Transfer case

! Operational or performance test must only be conducted on a two-axle dynamometer. If such tests are necessary, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. You could otherwise seriously damage the brake system or the transfer case which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

Because the ESP ^ operates automatically, the engine and ignition must be shut off (SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or 1 or KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button in position 0 or 1) when testing the parking brake on a brake test dynamometer and such testing should be no longer than 10 seconds.

Active braking action through the ESP® may otherwise seriously damage the brake system which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

The vehicle is equipped with permanent four-wheel drive. Both the front and rear axles are powered at all times when the vehicle is being operated.

Controls in detail

Good visibility

Good visibility

For information on windshield wipers, see "Windshield wipers" (▷page 60).

Headlamp cleaning system\*

The headlamps will automatically be cleaned with a high-pressure water jet when you have

• switched on the headlamps and
  • operated the windshield wipers with windshield washer fluid five times

When you switch off the headlamps, the counter resets.

For information on filling up the washer reservoir, see "Windshield/rear window washer system and headlamp cleaning system*" (▶page 346).

Rear view mirrors

For more information on setting the rear view mirrors, see "Mirrors" (▷page 49).

Interior rear view mirror, antiglare position

Close-up of a car rearview mirror with a green arrow indicating the component (no text or symbols present)

① Lever

▶Tilt the mirror to the antiglare position by moving lever ① towards the windshield.

The interior rear view mirror is dimmed.

Auto-dimming rear view mirrors\*

The reflection brightness of the exterior rear view mirror on the driver's side and the interior rear view mirror will respond automatically to glare when

• the ignition is switched on and
•incoming light from headlamps falls on the sensor in the interior rear view mirror

The rear view mirror will not react if

• the automatic transmission is set to position R
• the interior lighting is turned on

Controls in detail

Good visibility

Warning!

The auto-dimming function does not react if incoming light is not aimed directly at sensors in the interior rear view mirror.

The interior rear view mirror and the exterior rear view mirror on the driver's side do not react, for example, when transporting cargo which covers the rear window.

Light hitting the mirror(s) at certain angles (incident light) could blind you. As a result, you may not be able to observe traffic conditions and could cause an accident.

Warning!

Exercise care when using the passenger-side exterior rear view mirror. The mirror surface is convex (outwardly curved surface for a wider field of view). Objects in mirror are closer than they appear. Check your interior rear view mirror or glance over your shoulder before changing lanes.

Power folding exterior rear view mirrors\*

! Before you drive the vehicle through an automatic car wash, fold the exterior rear view mirrors in. Otherwise they may get damaged.

Folding the exterior rear view mirrors in and out automatically

When the corresponding function in the control system is activated ( page 177):

- The exterior rear view mirrors automatically fold in as soon as the vehicle is locked from the outside.

- The exterior rear view mirrors automatically fold out as soon as the vehicle is unlocked and the driver's or front passenger door are subsequently opened.

Synchronizing exterior rear view mirrors

The power folding rear view mirrors may have to be synchronized after the vehicle battery has been disconnected or discharged. If the exterior rear view mirrors do not fold properly upon locking or unlocking the vehicle although the corresponding function in the control system is activated ( page 177), do the following:

▶Fold each exterior rear view mirror in completely (▶page 201).

▶Fold each exterior rear view mirror out completely (▶page 201).

When the exterior rear view mirrors fold properly upon locking the vehicle, the exterior mirrors are synchronized. Otherwise repeat the above steps.

Folding the exterior rear view mirrors in and out manually

The exterior rear view mirrors can vibrate if they are not folded out completely.

The button is located on the door control panel.

Car interior control panel with a highlighted diagram showing a vehicle's internal components and a numbered annotation.

① Button for folding exterior rear view mirrors in and out

▶ Switch on the ignition (▷ page 40).

Folding in

▶ Briefly press button ①. Both exterior rear view mirrors fold in.

If you are driving at more than approximately 30 mph (47 km/h), you will not be able to fold the exterior mirrors in.

Folding out

▶ Briefly press button ① again. Both exterior rear view mirrors fold out.

! If an exterior rear view mirror housing is forcibly pushed forward (hit from the rear) or forcibly pushed rearward (hit from the front) press button ① to fold mirrors in, then press button ① again to fold mirrors out. Do not force mirrors by hand as this may damage the adjustment mechanism.

The mirror housing is then properly positioned and you can adjust the mirror in the usual manner.

Please make sure both rear view mirrors are folded out before driving off.

Sunvisors

The sun visors protect you from sun glare while driving.

Warning!

Do not use the vanity mirror while driving. Keep the mirrors in the sun visors closed while vehicle is in motion. Reflected glare can endanger you and others.

Controls in detail

Good visibility

Labeled diagram of a car interior component with numbered parts and a green arrow indicating direction

① Sun visor
② Additional sun visor
③ Mirror lamp
④ Vanity mirror cover
⑤ Vanity mirror
⑥ Holder for gas cards
⑦ Mounting

Glare through the windshield

▶ Swing sun visor ① down.
▶ Make sure sun visor ① is properly engaged in mounting ⑦.
▶When you do not experience glare anymore, swing sun visor ① up.

Vanity mirror

▶ Swing sun visor ① down.
▶ Flip up cover ④ to access vanity mirror ⑤.

Vanity mirror lamp ③ comes on.

▶ After using vanity mirror ⑤, flip down cover ④.
▶ Swing sun visor ① up.

Glare through a side window

P68 60-2130-31

① Sun visor
② Additional sun visor

▶ Swing sun visor ① down.
▶ Disengage sun visor ① from mounting ⑦ (>page 202).
▶ Pivot sun visor ① to the side.

Controls in detail

Good visibility

! To avoid damage to vanity mirror cover ④ (▶page 202), make sure it is closed before pivoting sun visor ① to the side.

▶ Adjust sun visor ① by pushing or pulling in the direction of arrows.
▶ Swing down additional sun visor ② when you experience additional glare through the windshield.

Rear window defroster

The rear window defroster uses a large amount of power. To keep battery drain to a minimum, switch off the defroster as soon as the rear window is clear. The defroster is automatically deactivated after approximately 6 to 17 minutes of operation depending on the outside temperature.

Warning!

Any accumulation of snow and ice should be removed from the rear window before driving. Visibility could otherwise be impaired, endangering you and others.

▶ Switch on the ignition (▷ page 40).

Activating

▶ Press button 📄 on the climate control panel (▶page 206) or the automatic climate control* panel (▶page 220). The indicator lamp on the button comes on.

Deactivating

▶ Press button 📄 once more.

The indicator lamp on the button goes out.

! If the rear window defroster switches off too soon and the indicator lamp starts flashing, too many electrical consumers are operating simultaneously and there is insufficient voltage in the battery. The system responds automatically by switching the rear window defroster off.

As soon as the battery has sufficient voltage, the rear window defroster switches back on automatically.

Controls in detail

Climate control

Diagram of a car dashboard with numbered air conditioning units and directional arrows indicating airflow or ventilation.

Controls in detail

Climate control

① Driver's door air vent, fixed
② Left side air vent, adjustable
③ Thumbwheel for air volume control for left side and door air vent
④ Windshield air vents
⑤ Thumbwheel for air volume control for left center air vent
⑥ Left center air vent, adjustable
⑦ Right center air vent, adjustable
⑧ Thumbwheel for air volume control for right center air vent
⑨ Thumbwheel for air volume control for right side and door air vent
⑩ Right side air vent, adjustable
⑪ Front passenger door air vent, fixed
⑫ Climate control panel
⑬ Footwell air vents

For draft-free ventilation, move the sliders for center air vents and side air vents to the middle position.

Controls in detail

Climate control

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 AUTO OFF 80 90 16 15 14 12 10 9 REAR OFF 13 11 P83.30-4500-31

① Temperature control, left
② Air distribution and air volume (automatic, manual)
③ Front defroster
④ Increasing air volume
⑤ Air distribution (directs air through the windshield and side air vents)
⑥ Rear climate control* on/off Air supply for rear passenger compartment on/off

USA only

Canada only

⑦ Temperature control, right

⑧ AC cooling on/off Residual heat/ventilation
⑨ Air distribution (directs air through center and side air vents)
⑩ Air distribution (directs air through the footwells and side air vents)
⑪ Air volume display
⑫ Decreasing air volume
⑬ Rear window defroster
⑭ Air recirculation
⑮ Interior temperature sensor
⑯ Climate control on/off

The climate control is operational whenever the engine is running. You can operate the climate control system in either the automatic or manual mode. The system cools or heats the interior depending on the selected interior temperature and the current outside temperature.

Warning!

When operating the climate control, the air that enters the passenger compartment through the air vents can be very hot or very cold (depending on the set temperature). This may cause burns or frostbite to unprotected skin in the immediate area of the air vents.

Always keep sufficient distance between unprotected parts of the body and the air vents. If necessary, use the air distribution controls (▶page 206) to direct the air to air vents in the vehicle interior that are not in the immediate area of unprotected skin.

Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and odors are filtered out before outside air enters the passenger compartment through the air distribution system.

Warning!

Severe conditions (e.g. strong air pollution) may require replacement of the filter before its scheduled interval. A clogged filter will reduce the air volume to the interior and the windows could fog up, impairing visibility and endangering you and others. Have a clogged filter replaced as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

The air conditioning will not engage (no cooling) if the A/C mode is deactivated (▷page 214).

Warning!

Follow the recommended settings for heating and cooling given on the following pages. Otherwise the windows could fog up, impairing visibility and endangering you and others.

If the vehicle interior is hot, ventilate the interior before driving off, see “Summer opening feature” (▷page 237). The climate control will then adjust the interior temperature to the set value much faster.

Keep the air intake grille in front of the windshield free of snow and debris.

Controls in detail

Climate control

Deactivating the climate control system

Warning!

When the climate control system is switched off, the outside air supply and circulation are also switched off. Only choose this settings for a short time. Otherwise the windows could fog up, impairing visibility and endangering you and others.

Deactivating

▶ Press button OFF (▷ page 206). The indicator lamp on the button comes on.

Reactivating

▶ Press button AUTO (▷ page 206).

You can also press button OFF (▶page 206) on the climate control panel. If you press button ☑ (▶page 206) to reactivate the climate control system, the defrosting mode is activated.

Operating the climate control system in automatic mode

When operating the climate control system in automatic mode, you will only rarely need to adjust the temperature, air volume and air distribution.

In automatic mode, cooling with dehumidify is switched on. This function can be switched off if necessary (▷page 215).

Activating

▶ Press button AUTO (▷ page 206) while the engine is running.

The indicator lamp on the button comes on. The air volume and air distribution are adjusted automatically.

▶ Use temperature controls ① and ⑦ (▷page 206) to separately adjust the air temperature on each side of the passenger compartment.

The interior air temperature is adjusted automatically.

i The settings for the passenger side are also used for the rear passenger compartment.

Deactivating

▶ Press button ⚙ or ⚙ (▷page 206).

The indicator lamp on button AUTO goes out. The automatic operation of air volume switches off. The selected blower speed is shown in the air volume display ⑪ (▶page 206).

or

▶ Press air distribution button ⑤, ⑨, or ⑩ (▶page 206).

The indicator lamp on button AUTO goes out. The automatic operation of air distribution switches off.

Setting the temperature

Use temperature controls ① and ⑦ (>page 206) to separately adjust the air temperature on each side of the passenger compartment. You should raise or lower the temperature setting in small increments, preferably starting at 72°F (22°C). The climate control will adjust to the set temperature as fast as possible.

Increasing

▶ Turn temperature control ① and/or ⑦ (▷page 206) slightly clockwise.

The climate control system will correspondingly adjust the interior air temperature.

Decreasing

▶ Turn temperature control ① and/or ⑦ (▷page 206) slightly counterclockwise.

The climate control system will correspondingly adjust the interior air temperature.

Adjusting air distribution

Press air distribution button ⑤, ⑨, or ⑩ (▶page 206) to adjust the air distribution.

The following symbols are found on the controls:

Symbol Function

Directs air through the center and side air vents

Directs air to the windshield and side air vents

Directs air to the footwells and side air vents

▶Press the desired air distribution button ⑤, ⑨, or ⑩ (▶page 206).

The indicator lamp on button AUTO goes out.

Controls in detail

Climate control

Adjusting air volume

Five blower speeds are available.

▶ Press button ✉ to decrease or button ✉ to increase air volume (▷page 206) to the desired level.
The indicator lamp on button AUTO (▷page 206) goes out. The automatic operation of air volume switches off. The selected blower speed is shown in the air volume display ⑪ (▷page 206).

Adjusting air volume for the center and side air vents

Opening the center air vents

▶ Turn thumbwheels ⑤ and ⑧ (▷page 204) to the right.

The corresponding center air vents on the left and right are open.

Closing the center air vents

▶ Turn thumbwheels ⑤ and ⑧ (▶page 204) to the left.
The corresponding center air vents on the left and right are closed.

Opening the side air vents

▶ Turn thumbwheels ③ and ⑪ (▷page 204) to the right.
The corresponding side air vents on the left and right are open.

Closing the side air vents

▶ Turn thumbwheels ③ and ⑪ (▷page 204) to the left.
The corresponding side air vents on the left and right are closed.

Front defroster

You can use this setting to defrost the windshield, for example if it is iced up. You can also use it to defog the windshield and door windows.

Keep this setting selected only until the windshield or the door windows are clear again.

Activating

▶ Press button 📄 (▷ page 206). The indicator lamp on the button comes on.

The climate control switches to the following functions automatically:

• most efficient blower speed and heating power, depending on outside temperature
• air flows onto the windshield and the front door windows (side air vents must be open)
• the air conditioning compressor switches on at outside temperatures above approximately 41^ (5°C) for air-drying

Adjustments

You can adjust the air volume and the temperature when the front defroster is switched on. The air flow will remain on the windshield and front door windows.

▶ Press button ☑ to decrease or button ☑ to increase air volume (▷page 206) to the desired level.

The air volume decreases/increases to the next lower/higher blower speed and heating switches to the temperature that was set before the front defroster was switched on.

The indicator lamp on button goes out. The indicator lamp on button A/C comes on.

or

▶ Turn temperature control ① and/or ⑦ (▷page 206) slightly in any direction.

Heating switches to the temperature that was set before the front defroster was switched on.

The indicator lamp on button goes out. The indicator lamp on button A/C comes on.

The air conditioning compressor remains on even if the indicator lamp in button goes out. This helps to prevent the windshield from fogging.

Controls in detail

Climate control

Deactivating

▶ Press button ☐ (▷ page 206) once more.

The indicator lamp on the button goes out. Defrosting is turned off.

The previous settings are in effect again. The air conditioning compressor remains switched on.

To switch off, you can also press button OFF or AUTO (▶page 206).

Windshield fogged on the outside

Keep this setting selected only until the windshield is clear again.
▶Switch the windshield wipers on (▷page 61).
▶ Press button 📄 (▷ page 206).

The indicator lamp on the button comes on.

The climate control switches automatically to the following functions:

• most efficient blower speed and heating power, depending on outside temperature
• air flows onto the windshield and the front door windows (side air vents must be open)
• the air conditioning compressor switches on at outside temperatures above approximately 41^ (5°C) for air-drying

If the automatic air distribution is switched off:

▶ Press air distribution button ⑨ or ⑩ (▷page 206).

Air recirculation mode

Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle from the outside (e.g. before driving through a tunnel). This setting cuts off the intake of outside air and recirculates the air in the passenger compartment.

Warning!

Fogged windows impair visibility, endangering you and others. If the windows begin to fog on the inside, switching off the air recirculation mode immediately should clear interior window fogging. If interior window fogging persists, make sure the air conditioning (▷page 206) is activated, or press button ☐.

Activating

▶ Press button 📄 (▷ page 206).

The indicator lamp on the button comes on.

The air recirculation mode is activated automatically at high outside temperatures.

The indicator lamp on button is not lit when the air recirculation mode is switched on automatically.

A quantity outside air is added after approximately 30 minutes.

If you have turned off the air conditioning ( page 214) or the outside temperature is below 41^ F ( 5^ C), the air recirculation mode will not switch on automatically.

To cool the interior as fast as possible, the climate control automatically switches to air recirculation. The indicator lamp on button is not lit when the air recirculation mode has been switched on automatically.

Deactivating

▶ Press button

The indicator lamp on the button goes out.

i The air recirculation mode is deactivated automatically

• after 5 minutes if the outside temperature is below approximately 41°F (5°C)

• after 5 minutes if the air conditioning and air-drying is turned off

• after 30 minutes if the outside temperature is above approximately 41^ F ( 5^ C)

Air recirculation mode with convenience closing and opening feature

Warning!

Never operate the windows and tilt/sliding sunroof if there is the possibility of anyone being harmed by the opening or closing procedure.

When using the air recirculation mode with convenience closing feature, should the upward movement of a window be blocked by some obstruction including but not limited to arms, hands, fingers, etc., the automatic reversal feature will not operate.

In case the procedure causes potential danger:

Vehicles with or without tilt/sliding sunroof: The closing of the windows can be immediately halted by pressing or pulling the respective window switch. The closing of the tilt/sliding sunroof can be immediately halted by moving the switch for the tilt/sliding sunroof in any direction.

▶▶

Controls in detail

Climate control

The closing of the windows and the tilt/sliding sunroof can be reversed by again pressing and holding the 📄 button.

Convenience closing

▶ Press button 📄 for approximately 2 seconds.

The windows and/or tilt/sliding sun-roof will close. You can release button once the closing procedure has begun. The windows and tilt/sliding sunroof continue closing until they are fully closed. The indicator lamp on the button comes on. The air recirculation mode is activated.

Convenience opening

▶ Press button 📄 for approximately 2 seconds.

The windows and/or tilt/sliding sun-roof will return to their previous positions. You can release button once the opening procedure has begun. The windows and tilt/sliding sun-roof continue opening until they have reached their previous positions. The indicator lamp on the button goes out. The air recirculation mode is deactivated.

A window or the tilt/sliding sunroof will only return to its previous position if it has not been moved to another position using the respective window switch or tilt/sliding sunroof switch after it was closed with button 📄.

Air conditioning

The air conditioning is operational while the engine is running and cools the interior air to the temperature set by the operator. In addition, the air conditioning dehumidifies the interior air at outside temperatures above 41^ F ( 5^ C) and helps prevent window fogging.

i Condensation may drip out from underneath the vehicle. This is normal and not an indication of a malfunction.

Warning!

If you turn off the cooling function, the interior air is not dried. The windows can fog up more quickly. Window fogging may impair visibility and endanger you and others.

Controls in detail

Climate control

Deactivating

It is possible to deactivate the air conditioning (cooling) function of the climate control system. The air in the vehicle will then no longer be cooled or dehumidified.

▶ Press button A/C (▷ page 206).

The indicator lamp on the button goes out.

Activating

Moist air can fog up the windows. You can dehumidify the air with the air conditioning.

▶ Press button A/C (▷ page 206) again.

The indicator lamp on the button comes on.

The air conditioning uses the refrigerant R134a. This refrigerant is free of CFCs which are harmful to the ozone layer.

! If the air conditioning cannot be turned on again, this indicates that the air conditioning is losing refrigerant. The compressor has turned off.

Have the air conditioning checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

Residual heat and ventilation

With the engine switched off, it is possible to continue to heat or ventilate the interior for up to 30 minutes. This feature makes use of the residual heat produced by the engine.

How long the system will provide heating depends on

• the coolant temperature

• the battery voltage

Regardless of the temperature and air volume set on the climate control panel, the interior temperature is set to 72^ F ( 22^ C) and the blower runs on low speed to protect the vehicle battery.

Activating

▶ Switch off the ignition (▷ page 40).
▶ Press button A/C (▷ page 206).

The indicator lamp on the button comes on.

Deactivating

▶ Press button A/C (▷ page 206).

The indicator lamp on the button goes out.

The residual heat is automatically turned off:

• when the ignition is switched on
  • after about 30 minutes
• if the coolant temperature is too low
• if the battery voltage drops

Controls in detail

Climate control

Rear climate control\*

The rear climate control panel is only available if your vehicle is equipped with seat heating* for the rear seats or Rear Audio feature* (see separate COMAND System operating instructions).

The control panel is located on the rear of the front center console.

1 2 3 AUTO OFF 4 5 6 P83.30-4256-31

① Left rear center air vent, adjustable
② Right rear center air vent, adjustable
③ Rear climate control on (automatic mode)
④ Air distribution (directs air through the center air vents)
⑤ Air distribution (directs air through the footwells and side air vents)
⑥ Rear air conditioning off

Activating rear climate control

The climate control must be switched on (▷page 217).

▶ Press button AUTO.

The indicator lamp on the button comes on. The air volume and air distribution are adjusted automatically.

The temperature is adjusted according to the settings for the front passenger side made on the front climate control panel (▷page 209).

Deactivating rear climate control

▶ Press button OFF.

The indicator lamp on the button comes on.

The cooling function switches off after a short delay.

i Switch off the rear climate control for improved cooling or heating output in the front passenger compartment.

You can also switch off the rear climate control from the front passenger compartment (>page 217).

Operating from the front

Deactivating

▶ Press button REAR DIFF on the front climate control panel (▷page 206).

The indicator lamp on the button comes on.

Reactivating

▶ Press button REAR on the front climate control panel (▷page 206).

The indicator lamp on the button goes out. The rear climate control is adjusted automatically.

Adjusting air distribution

Use the air distribution controls ④ or ⑤ to adjust the air distribution for the rear passenger compartment.

The following symbols are found on the controls:

Symbol Function

Directs air to the center air vents

Directs air to the footwells and the side air vents

Adjusting manually

▶Press the desired air distribution control ④ or ⑤.

The indicator lamp in the AUTO button goes out.

Adjusting automatically

▶ Press button AUTO (▷ page 216).

The indicator lamp on the button comes on. The air distribution is adjusted automatically.

Adjusting air volume

The air volume for the rear zone corresponds to the air volume settings for the front passenger side. You can switch off the air supply for the rear zone.

You can switch off the supplied amount of air volume.

▶ Press button OFF (▷ page 216).

The indicator lamp on the button comes on.

Controls in detail

3-zone automatic climate control\*

Diagram of a car dashboard with numbered air conditioning units and directional arrows indicating airflow or traffic flow.

Controls in detail

3-zone automatic climate control\*

① Driver's door air vent, fixed
② Left side air vent, adjustable
③ Thumbwheel for air volume control for left side and door air vent
④ Windshield air vents
⑤ Thumbwheel for air volume control for left center air vent
⑥ Left center air vent, adjustable
⑦ Right center air vent, adjustable
⑧ Thumbwheel for air volume control for right center air vent
⑨ Thumbwheel for air volume control for right side and door air vent
⑩ Right side air vent, adjustable
⑪ Front passenger door air vent, fixed
⑫ Automatic climate control panel
⑬ Footwell air vents

For draft-free ventilation, move the sliders for center air vents and side air vents to the middle position.

Controls in detail

3-zone automatic climate control\*

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 AUTO MOBO 20 19 17 15 13 11 10 P83.40:37/7-31

① Temperature control, left
② Air distribution and air volume (automatic, manual)
③ Air distribution, driver's side
④ Front defroster
⑤ Increasing air volume
⑥ Rear window defroster
⑦ Air distribution, passenger side
⑧ Rear automatic climate control on/off
REAR
USA only
[Non-Text]
Canada only
⑨ Temperature control, right

⑩ Automatic climate control on/off

⑪ Air distribution, passenger side

⑫ Air distribution, passenger side

⑬ AC cooling on/off Residual heat/ventilation

⑭ Display

⑮ Decreasing air volume

⑯ Air recirculation

⑰ Air distribution, driver's side

⑱ Air distribution, driver's side

⑲ Interior temperature sensor

⑳ Adopting driver's side settings for all zones

Controls in detail

3-zone automatic climate control\*

Warning!

When operating the automatic climate control, the air that enters the passenger compartment through the air vents can be very hot or very cold (depending on the set temperature). This may cause burns or frostbite to unprotected skin in the immediate area of the air vents.

Always keep sufficient distance between un-protected parts of the body and the air vents. If necessary, use the air distribution controls ( page 220) to direct the air to air vents in the vehicle interior that are not in the immediate area of unprotected skin.

The automatic climate control is a 3-zone intelligent automatic climate control system. Your vehicle interior is divided into 3 zones.

Top-down architectural rendering of a car showing four seats and three chairs (no text or symbols)

With the help of a sun sensor, the automatic climate control determines the relation of the sun to the vehicle and automatically adjusts the inside temperature for every individual zone.

The automatic climate control is operational whenever the engine is running. It cools the vehicle's interior according to the angle and intensity of the sun's rays, the outside temperature and the selected temperature. You can operate the automatic climate control in either the automatic or manual mode.

Controls in detail

3-zone automatic climate control\*

Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and odors are filtered out before outside air enters the passenger compartment through the air distribution system.

Warning!

Severe conditions (e.g. strong air pollution) may require replacement of the filter before its scheduled interval. A clogged filter will reduce the air volume to the interior and the windows could fog up, impairing visibility and endangering you and others. Have a clogged filter replaced as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

The air conditioning will not engage (no cooling) if the A/C mode is deactivated ( page 220).

Warning!

Follow the recommended settings for heating and cooling given on the following pages. Otherwise the windows could fog up, impairing visibility and endangering you and others.

If the vehicle interior is hot, ventilate the interior before driving off, see “Summer opening feature” ( page 237). The automatic climate control will then adjust the interior temperature to the set value much faster.

Keep the air intake grille in front of the wind-shield free of snow and debris.

Deactivating the automatic climate control system

Warning!

When the automatic climate control system is switched off, the outside air supply and circulation are also switched off. Only choose this settings for a short time. Otherwise the windows could fog up, impairing visibility and endangering you and others.

Deactivating

▶ Press button OFF (▷ page 220) until the display ⑭ (▷page 220) is cleared. The indicator lamp on the button comes on.

3-zone automatic climate control\*

Reactivating

▶ Press button AUTO (▷ page 220).

You can also press button OFF (>page 220) on the automatic climate control panel.

If you press button ☐ (>page 220) to reactivate the automatic climate control system, the defrosting mode is activated.

Operating the automatic climate control system in automatic mode

You can switch the automatic climate control system on and off separately for each zone as needed.

When operating the automatic climate control system in automatic mode, you will only rarely need to adjust the temperature, air volume and air distribution.

In automatic mode, cooling with dehumidify is switched on. This function can be switched off if necessary.

Activating

▶ Press button AUTO (▷ page 220) while the engine is running.

The indicator lamp on the button comes on. Air volume and air distribution are controlled separately for each zone.

▶ Use temperature controls ① and ⑨ (▷page 220) to separately adjust the air temperature on each side of the passenger compartment.

The temperature of the interior is adjusted automatically.

Deactivating

▶Press one button of the air distribution (▷ page 220) or press button ☐ or ☐ (▷page 220).

The indicator lamp on button AUTO goes out.

Depending on which button you press – the air distribution button or the air volume button 📊 or 🌐 – automatic control of either the air distribution or air volume is switched off.

Setting the temperature

Use temperature control ① and ⑨ (▶page 220) to separately adjust the air temperature on each side of the passenger compartment. You should raise or lower the temperature setting in small increments, preferably starting at 72°F (22°C). The automatic climate control will adjust to the set temperature as fast as possible.

Increasing

▶ Turn temperature control ① and/or ⑨ slightly clockwise.

The automatic climate control system will correspondingly adjust the interior air temperature.

Controls in detail

3-zone automatic climate control\*

Decreasing

▶ Turn the temperature control ① and/or ⑨ slightly counterclockwise.

The automatic climate control system will correspondingly adjust the interior air temperature.

Adjusting air distribution

Use the air distribution controls ③, ⑰, or ⑱ for the driver's side, or ⑦, ⑪, or ⑫ (▶page 220) for the passenger side to separately adjust the air distribution on each side of the passenger compartment.

The following symbols are found on the buttons:

Symbol Function
Driver's side	Passenger side
	Directs air to the windshield and side air vents
	Directs air through the center, side and rear passenger compartment air vents
	Directs air to the footwells and side air vents

▶Press the desired air distribution button (▷page 220).

The indicator lamp on the desired button goes out.

Adjusting the air distribution for the center and side air vents

Opening the center air vents

▶ Turn thumbwheels ⑤ and ⑧ (▶page 218) to the right. The corresponding center air vents on the left and right are open.

Closing the center air vents

▶ Turn thumbwheels ⑤ and ⑧ (▶page 218) to the left. The corresponding center air vents on the left and right are closed.

3-zone automatic climate control\*

Opening the side air vents

▶ Turn thumbwheels ③ and ⑪ (▷page 218) to the right.

The corresponding side air vents on the left and right are open.

Closing the side air vents

▶ Turn thumbwheels ③ and ⑪ (▶page 218) to the left.

The corresponding side air vents on the left and right are closed.

Adjusting air volume

Five blower speeds are available.

▶ Press button ☒ to decrease or button ☒ to increase air volume (▷page 220) to the desired level.

The indicator lamp on button AUTO goes out.

The automatic mode is switched off. The selected blower speed appears in the display ⑭ (▷page 220).

Front defroster

You can use this setting to defrost the windshield, such as when it is iced up. You can also use it to defog the windshield and door windows.

Keep this setting selected only until the windshield or the side windows are clear again.

Activating

▶ Press button 🎨 (▷ page 220). The indicator lamp on the button comes on.

The automatic climate control switches to the following functions automatically:

- most efficient blower speed and heating power, depending on outside temperature

- air flows onto the windshield and the front door windows (side air vents must be open)

- the air conditioning compressor switches on at outside temperatures above approximately 41^ (5°C) for air-drying

Adjustments

You can adjust the air volume and the temperature when the front defroster is switched on. The air flow will remain on the windshield and front door windows.

▶ Press button ☑ to decrease or button ☑ to increase air volume (>page 220) to the desired level.

The air volume decreases/increases to the next lower/higher blower speed and heating switches to the temperature that was set before the front defroster was switched on.

The indicator lamp on button goes out. The indicator lamp on button A/C comes on.

or

▷▷

Controls in detail

3-zone automatic climate control\*

▶▶▶ Turn temperature control ① and/or ⑦ (▶page 220) slightly in any direction.

Heating switches to the temperature that was set before the front defroster was switched on.

The indicator lamp on button goes out. The indicator lamp on button A/C comes on.

The air conditioning compressor remains on even if the indicator lamp in button ☐ goes out. This helps to prevent the windshield from fogging.

Deactivating

▶ Press button 📄 (▷ page 220).

The indicator lamp on the button goes out. Defrosting is turned off.

The previous settings are once again in effect.

To switch off, you can also press button OFF or AUTO (▶page 220).

Windshield fogged on the outside

Keep this setting selected only until the windshield is clear again.

▶Switch the windshield wipers on (▷page 61).

▶ Press button AUTO (▷ page 220). The indicator lamp on button AUTO goes out. Air volume and air distribution are controlled separately for each zone.

If the automatic air distribution and air volume are switched off:

▶ Press buttons 📄 and 🕒 (▶page 220).

Maximum cooling MAXCOOL

If the air distribution control as well as the airflow volume control are set to AUTO and there is a high need for cooling, the MAXCOOL function is activated.

"MAXCOOL" appears in the front and rear display.

This provides the fastest possible cooling of the vehicle interior (when windows and tilt/sliding sunroof are closed).

3-zone automatic climate control\*

Air recirculation mode

Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle from the outside (e.g. before driving through a tunnel). This setting cuts off the intake of outside air and recirculates the air in the passenger compartment.

Warning!

Fogged windows impair visibility, endangering you and others. If the windows begin to fog on the inside, switching off the air recirculation mode immediately should clear interior window fogging. If interior window fogging persists, make sure the air conditioning (▷page 229) is activated, or press button ☐.

Activating

▶ Press button 📄 (▷ page 220).

The indicator lamp on the button comes on.

The air recirculation mode is activated automatically at high outside temperatures.

The indicator lamp on button 📄 is not lit when the air recirculation mode is automatically switched on.

A quantity of outside air is added after approximately 30 minutes.

If you have turned off the air conditioning ( page 229) or the outside temperature is below 41^ ( 5^ ), the air recirculation mode will not switch on automatically.

To cool the interior as fast as possible, the automatic climate control automatically switches to air recirculation. The indicator lamp on button is not lit when the system switches to air recirculation automatically.

Deactivating

▶ Press button 📄 (▷ page 220). The indicator lamp on the button comes on.

i The air recirculation mode is deactivated automatically

• after 5 minutes if the outside temperature is below approximately 41^ F ( 5^ C)

• after 5 minutes if the air conditioning and air-drying is turned off

• after 30 minutes if the outside temperature is above approximately 41^ F ( 5^ C)

At outside temperatures above 79^ F ( 26^ C) the system will not automatically switch back to outside air. A quantity of outside air is added after approximately 30 minutes.

Controls in detail

3-zone automatic climate control\*

Air recirculation mode with convenience closing and opening feature

Warning!

Never operate the side windows and tilt/sliding sunroof if there is the possibility of anyone being harmed by the opening or closing procedure.

When using the air recirculation mode with convenience closing feature, should the upward movement of a window be blocked by some obstruction including but not limited to arms, hands, fingers, etc., the automatic reversal feature will not operate.

In case the procedure causes potential danger:

Vehicles with or without tilt/sliding sunroof: The closing of the windows can be immediately halted by pressing or pulling the respective window switch. The closing of the tilt/sliding sunroof can be immediately halted by moving the switch for the tilt/sliding sunroof in any direction.

The closing of the side windows and the tilt/sliding sunroof can be reversed by again pressing and holding the 📄 button.

Convenience closing

▶ Press button 📄 for approximately 2 seconds.

The windows and/or tilt/sliding sun-roof will close. You can release button once the closing procedure has begun. The windows and tilt/sliding sunroof continue closing until they are fully closed. The indicator lamp on the button comes on. The air recirculation mode is activated.

Convenience opening

▶ Press button 📄 for approximately 2 seconds.

The windows and/or tilt/sliding sun-roof will return to their previous positions. You can release button once the opening procedure has begun. The windows and tilt/sliding sun-roof continue opening until they have reached their previous positions. The indicator lamp on the button goes out. The air recirculation mode is deactivated.

A window or the tilt/sliding sunroof will only return to its previous position if it has not been moved to another position using the respective window switch or tilt/sliding sunroof switch after it was closed with button 📄.

3-zone automatic climate control\*

Air conditioning

The cooling function, only operational when the engine is running, cools the vehicle down to the selected interior temperature. The cooling function also dehumidifies the air in the vehicle interior, thereby preventing the windows from fogging up.

i Condensation may drip out from underneath the vehicle. This is normal and not an indication of a malfunction.

Warning!

If you turn off the cooling function, the interior air is not dried. The windows can fog up more quickly. Window fogging may impair visibility and endanger you and others.

Deactivating

It is possible to deactivate the air conditioning (cooling) function of the automatic climate control system. The air in the vehicle will then no longer be cooled or dehumidified.

▶ Press button A/C (▷ page 220).

The indicator lamp on the button goes out. The cooling function switches off after a short delay.

Activating

Moist air can fog up the windows. You can dehumidify the air with the air conditioning.

▶ Press button A/C reset again.

The indicator lamp on the button comes on.

The air conditioning uses the refrigerant R-134a. This refrigerant is free of CFCs which are harmful to the ozone layer.

! If the air conditioning cannot be turned on again, this indicates that the air conditioning is losing refrigerant. The compressor has turned off.

Have the air conditioning checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

Using driver-side settings for all temperature zones

You can use the settings of the driver's side, such as temperature, air volume and air distribution, for all temperature zones. These settings only need to be made once and the automatic climate control system will automatically regulate the settings for all temperature zones quickly and comfortably.

Controls in detail

3-zone automatic climate control\*

Activating

▶Adjust the temperature, air volume and air distribution (▷page 220).
▶ Press button MONO (▷ page 220).

The indicator lamp on the button comes on.

The driver-side settings are used for all temperature zones.

Deactivating

▶ Press button MONO (▷ page 220) again.

The indicator lamp on the button goes out.

If you manually set the temperature, air volume or air distribution for the passenger side or the rear passenger compartment when the MONO setting is active, the MONO setting will be switched off.

Residual heat and ventilation

With the engine switched off, it is possible to continue to heat or ventilate the interior for up to 30 minutes. This feature makes use of the residual heat produced by the engine.

How long the system will provide heating depends on

• the coolant temperature

• the battery voltage

Regardless of the temperature and air volume set on the automatic climate control panel, an interior temperature is aimed at by 72^ F ( 22^ C) and the blower runs on low speed to protect the vehicle battery.

Activating

▶ Switch off the ignition (▷ page 39).
▶ Press button A/C (▷ page 220).

The indicator lamp on the button comes on.

Deactivating

▶ Press button A/C BEST.

The indicator lamp on the button goes out.

The residual heat is automatically turned off:

• when the ignition is switched on
  • after about 30 minutes
• if the coolant temperature is too low
• if the battery voltage drops

3-zone automatic climate control\*

Rear automatic climate control

The control panel is located at the rear of the front center console.

Diagram of car air conditioning control panel with numbered labels pointing to fan, vent, and dashboard controls

① Left rear center air vent, adjustable
② Right rear center air vent, adjustable
③ Temperature control
④ Air distribution and air volume (automatic, manual)
⑤ Air distribution (directs air through the center air vents)
⑥ Air distribution (directs air through the footwells and side air vents)
⑦ Rear automatic climate control on/off
⑧ Decreasing air volume
⑨ Indicator lamps for air volume settings
⑩ Increasing air volume

The stored values for the rear automatic climate control are erased from memory after the ignition has been switched off for more than 30 minutes. Once the front automatic climate control is switched on again, the rear automatic climate control operates in automatic mode at a preset temperature of 72^ F ( 22^ C).

Activating rear automatic climate control

i The automatic climate control must be switched on (▶page 223).

▶ Press button AUTO.

The indicator lamp on the button comes on. The temperature, air volume, and air distribution are adjusted automatically.

Deactivating rear automatic climate control

▶ Press button OFF.

The indicator lamp on the button goes out.

The cooling function switches off after a short delay.

i Switch off the rear automatic climate control for improved cooling or heating output in the front passenger compartment.

You can also switch off the rear automatic climate control from the front passenger compartment (▷page 220).

Controls in detail

3-zone automatic climate control\*

Operating from the front

Deactivating

▶ Press button REAR (▷ page 220). The indicator lamp on the button goes out.

In display ⑭ (▶page 220), you will see the REAR symbol followed by MODE for approximately 3 seconds.

▶ Press button OFF (▷ page 220). In display ⑭ (▷page 220), you will see the REAR symbol followed by OFF.

The rear automatic climate control is switched off.

Reactivating

▶ Press button REAR (▷ page 220).

The indicator lamp on the button comes on.

In display ⑭ (▶page 220), you will see the REAR symbol followed by ON and MODE. The MODE display is cleared and the indicator lamp on button REAR goes out after approximately 3 seconds.

The rear automatic climate control switches on.

Setting the temperature

▶ Press button REAR (▷ page 220). The indicator lamp on the button comes on. In display ⑭ (▷page 220), you will see the REAR symbol followed by MODE.

▶Set the desired temperature for the rear passenger compartment using temperature control ③ (>page 231). After approximately 3 seconds after the last adjustment, the display switches back to its standard display and the indicator lamp on button REAR goes out.

You can also press the REAR button once more to switch back to the standard display.

3-zone automatic climate control\*

Adjusting air distribution

Use the air distribution controls ⑤ or ⑥ to adjust the air distribution for the rear passenger compartment.

The symbols on the controls represent the following functions:

Symbol Function

Directs air to the center air vents

Directs air to the footwells and the side air vents

Adjusting manually

▶Press the desired air distribution control.

The indicator lamp on button AUTO goes out.

Adjusting automatically

▶ Press button AUTO while the engine is running.

The indicator lamp on the button comes on. The air distribution is adjusted automatically.

Setting the temperature

Use temperature control ③ ( page 231) to separately adjust the air temperature of the rear passenger compartment.

You should raise or lower the temperature setting in small increments, preferably starting at 72^ F ( 22^ C). The automatic climate control will adjust to the set temperature as fast as possible.

The rear automatic climate control will not cool the air when the air conditioning is switched off ( page 229).

Increasing the temperature

▶ Turn temperature control ③ (▶page 231) slightly clockwise.

The rear automatic climate control will correspondingly adjust the interior air temperature for the rear passenger compartment.

Decreasing the temperature

▶ Turn temperature control ③ (▶page 231) slightly counterclockwise.

The rear automatic climate control will correspondingly adjust the interior air temperature for the rear passenger compartment.

Controls in detail

3-zone automatic climate control\*

Adjusting air volume

Adjusting manually

Five blower speeds are available.

▶ Press button ☑ to decrease or button ☑ to increase air volume to the desired level.

The indicator lamp on the button AUTO goes out. The selected blower speed is shown by the indicator lamps for air volume settings ⑨ (▶page 231).

Adjusting automatically

▶ Press button AUTO.

The indicator lamp on the button comes on. The air volume is adjusted automatically.

Controls in detail

Power windows

▼Power windows

The door windows are opened and closed electrically. The switches for all door windows are located on the driver's door control panel. The switches for the respective door windows are located on the front passenger door and the rear doors.

Warning!

When closing the windows, make sure that there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the closing procedure.

Activate the override switch ( page 96) when children are riding in the back seats of the vehicle. The children could otherwise injure themselves, e.g. by becoming trapped in the window opening.

The closing of a door window can be immediately halted by releasing the switch or, if switch was pulled past the resistance point and released, by either pressing or pulling the respective switch.

If a door window encounters an obstruction that blocks its path in a circumstance where you pulled the switch past the resistance point and released it to close the door window, the automatic reversal function will stop the window and open it slightly.

If a door window encounters an obstruction that blocks its path in a circumstance where you are closing a door window by pulling and holding the switch, or by pressing and holding button 📄 on the SmartKey, by pressing and holding the lock button (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*) on a door handle, the automatic reversal function will not operate.

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury.

You can also open or close the windows using the SmartKey, see “Summer opening feature” (▷page 237) and see “Convenience closing feature” (▷page 238).

Depending on the current position, the power windows may also open or close when the air recirculation button 📄 on the control panel of the climate control (▷page 206) or automatic climate control* (▷page 220) is pressed and held.

i After switching off the ignition (▷ page 39) or removing the SmartKey from the starter switch, the windows can be operated

• until you open the driver's or front passenger door
  • for at least 5 minutes if nor door was opened
  ▶ Switch on the ignition (▷ page 39).

Controls in detail

Power windows

Door windows

① ② ③ ④

① Left front door window
② Right front door window
③ Right rear door window
④ Left rear door window

Opening the door windows

▶ Press switch ①, ②, ③, or ④ (▷page 236) to the resistance point. The corresponding door window moves downwards until you release the switch.

Closing the door windows

▶ Pull switch ①, ②, ③, or ④ (▷page 236) to the resistance point. The corresponding door window moves upwards until you release the switch.

Warning!

If you pull and hold the switch up when closing the door window, and upward movement of the door window is blocked by some obstruction including but not limited to arms, hands, fingers, etc., the automatic reversal will not operate.

Fully opening the door windows (Express-open)

▶ Press switch ①, ②, ③, or ④ (▷page 236) past the resistance point and release. The corresponding door window opens completely.

Fully closing the door windows (Express-close)

▶ Pull switch ①, ②, ③, or ④ (>page 236) past the resistance point and release. The corresponding door window closes completely.

Warning!

Driver's door only:

If within 5 seconds switch is again pulled past the resistance point and released, the automatic reversal will not function.

Controls in detail

Power windows

If the upward movement of a door window is blocked during the closing procedure, the door window will stop and open slightly.
▶Remove the obstruction.
▶ Pull the respective door window switch past the resistance point again and release.
If the door window still does not close when there is no obstruction, pull and hold the respective power window switch. The door window will then close without the obstruction sensor function.

Stopping door windows during Express-operation

▶Press or pull the respective door window switch again.

Synchronizing the door windows

The door windows must be resynchronized

•after the battery was disconnected
- if the door windows cannot be fully opened (Express-open) or closed (Express-close)

i Each door window must be resynchronized separately.

▶Close all doors.

▶ Switch on the ignition (▷ page 40).
▶ Pull and hold switch ①, ②, ③, or ④ (▷page 236).

Once a door window is closed completely, hold the respective switch for approximately 3 seconds.

The door window is synchronized.

Summer opening feature

If the weather is warm, you can ventilate the vehicle before driving off by simultaneously:

• opening the door windows
• opening the tilt/sliding sunroof
• switching on the seat ventilation* for the driver's seat

Red car interior with sensor probe and antenna (no visible text or symbols)

P80.45-2065-31

Controls in detail

Power windows

▶▶▶Aim transmitter eye of the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* at the driver's outside door handle.

The SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* must be in close proximity to the driver's outside door handle.

▶ Press and hold button 📁 on the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* until the windows and the tilt/sliding sunroof have reached the desired position.
▶ Release button 📊 on the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* to interrupt the opening procedure.

Convenience closing feature

When locking the vehicle, you can simultaneously close

• the door windows
• the tilt/sliding sunroof

Warning!

When closing the windows and the tilt/sliding sunroof, make sure that there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the closing procedure.

If potential danger exists, proceed as follows:

- Release button 🔒 to stop the closing procedure. To open, press and hold button 🔒. To continue the closing procedure after making sure that there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the closing procedure, press and hold button 🔒.

Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO\*:

• Release the lock button (▷ page 69) on the driver's outside door handle to stop the closing procedure.
• Immediately pull on the same outside door handle and hold firmly. The windows and the tilt/sliding sunroof will open for as long as the door handle is held but the door is not opened.

Aim transmitter eye of the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* at the driver's outside door handle (page 238).

The SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* must be in close proximity to the driver's outside door handle.

Controls in detail

Power windows

▶ Press and hold button 🔒 on the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* until the windows and the tilt/sliding sunroof are completely closed.
▶ Release button 🔒 on the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* to interrupt the closing procedure.

Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:

▶Press and hold the lock button on an outside door handle (▷page 69) until the windows and the tilt/sliding sun-roof are completely closed.
▶ Release the lock button on the outside door handle to interrupt the closing procedure.

Controls in detail

Power tilt/sliding sunroof

Opening and closing

Warning!

When closing the tilt/sliding sunroof, make sure that there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the closing procedure.

If the tilt/sliding sunroof encounters an obstruction that blocks its path in a circumstance where you are closing the tilt/sliding sunroof by moving the tilt/sliding sunroof switch past the resistance point, or by pressing and holding button on the SmartKey, by pressing and holding the lock button (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*) on the door handle, the automatic reversal function will not operate.

The opening/closing procedure of the tilt/sliding sunroof can be immediately halted by releasing the switch or, if the switch was moved past the resistance point and released, by moving the switch in any direction.

The tilt/sliding sunroof is made out of glass. In the event of an accident, the glass may shatter. This may result in an opening in the roof.

In a vehicle rollover, occupants not wearing their seat belts or not wearing them properly may be thrown out of the opening. Such an opening also presents a potential for injury for occupants wearing their seat belts properly as entire body parts or portions of them may protrude from the passenger compartment.

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock your vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury.

! To avoid damaging the seals, do not transport any objects with sharp edges which can stick out of the tilt/sliding sunroof.

Do not open the tilt/sliding sunroof if there is snow or ice on the roof, as this could result in malfunctions.

! Please keep in mind that weather conditions can sometimes change rapidly. Make sure to close the tilt/sliding sunroof when leaving the vehicle. If water enters the vehicle interior, vehicle electronics could be damaged which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

When the tilt/sliding sunroof is open, resonance noises may result in addition to the usual wind noises. They are caused by minimal pressure changes in the passenger compartment. To reduce or eliminate these noises, change the position of the tilt/sliding sunroof or open a side window slightly.

You can also open or close the tilt/sliding sunroof using the SmartKey or the KEYLESS-GO* function, see "Summer opening feature" (▶page 237) and see "Convenience closing feature" (▶page 238).

Controls in detail

Power tilt/sliding sunroof

Depending on the current position, the tilt/sliding sunroof may also open or close when the air recirculation button 📄 on the control panel of the climate control (▷page 206) or automatic climate control* (▷page 220) is pressed and held.

The tilt/sliding sunroof is opened and closed electrically. The switch for the tilt/sliding sunroof is located on the overhead control panel.

① ② ③ ④ P54.25-5538-31

Sunroof switch

① Push back to slide sunroof open
② Push forward to slide sunroof closed
③ Push up to raise sunroof at rear
④ Pull down to lower sunroof at rear

With the sunroof closed or tilted open, a screen can be slid into the roof opening to guard against sun rays. When sliding the sunroof open, the screen will also retract.

Interior view of a car showing the back panel with a green arrow pointing to a display screen (no text or symbols visible)

▶ Switch on the ignition (▷ page 40).

Opening and closing

▶To open, close, raise, or lower the tilt/sliding sunroof, move the sunroof switch to the resistance point in the required direction of arrows ① to ④ (▶page 241).
▶Release the sunroof switch when the tilt/sliding sunroof has reached the desired position.

Controls in detail

Power tilt/sliding sunroof

Fully opening (Express-open) and closing (Express-close)

▶To fully open or close the tilt/sliding sunroof, move the sunroof switch past the resistance point in the required direction of arrows ① to ② (▶page 241) and release.

The tilt/sliding sunroof opens or closes completely.

Stopping the power tilt/sliding sunroof during Express-open

▶Move the sunroof switch in any direction.

The movement of the tilt/sliding sun-roof stops.

If the movement of the tilt/sliding sunroof is blocked during the closing procedure, the tilt/sliding sunroof will stop and reopen slightly.

Warning!

If the tilt/sliding sunroof encounters an obstruction that blocks its path in a circumstance where you are closing the tilt/sliding sunroof by moving the tilt/sliding sunroof switch past the resistance point, or by pressing and holding button 📄 on the SmartKey, by pressing and holding the lock button (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*) on the door handle, the automatic reversal function will not operate.

The opening/closing procedure of the tilt/sliding sunroof can be immediately halted by releasing the switch or, if the switch was moved past the resistance point and released, by moving the switch in any direction.

Synchronizing

The tilt/sliding sunroof must be synchronized

• after the battery has been disconnected or discharged

• after a malfunction

- if the tilt/sliding sunroof does not open smoothly

! If the tilt/sliding sunroof cannot be closed or synchronized, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center or call Road-side Assistance (>page 298).

▶ Switch off the ignition (▷ page 40).
▶Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch.

Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:

▶ Switch off the ignition (▷ page 41).
▶Open the driver's door (this puts the starter switch in position 0, same as with the SmartKey removed from the starter switch). The driver's door then can be closed again.

▶Remove the fuse for the tilt/sliding sunroof from the fuse box (▶page 504).

For information on which fuse box contains the fuse for the power tilt/sliding sunroof, see the fuse chart provided with the vehicle tool kit (▶page 448).

▶ Reinsert the fuse in the main box.
▶ Switch on the ignition (▷ page 40).
▶Press and hold the sunroof switch in the direction of arrow ③ (▷page 241) until the tilt/sliding sunroof is fully raised at the rear.
▶Hold the sunroof switch in the direction of arrow ③ for approximately 1 second.
▶Open the tilt/sliding sunroof using the Express-open feature ( page 242). If the tilt/sliding sunroof opens completely, it is synchronized.
If the tilt/sliding sunroof does not open completely:
▶ Repeat the above steps.

Controls in detail

Driving systems

The driving systems of your vehicle are described on the following pages:

• Cruise control (▷ page 244), with which the vehicle can maintain a preset speed.
• Downhill Speed Regulation (DSR) (▷page 249), which supports you when you are driving downhill.
• Off-road driving program (▷ page 253), which supports you when you are driving off-road.

• Air suspension program* The system consists of two components.
- Adaptive Damping System (ADS)* (▶page 255), which adjusts the vehicle suspension characteristics.
- Vehicle level control* (>page 255), which controls the vehicle level.
- Parktronic* (▷page 259) and rear view camera* (▷page 264), which serve as a parking aid.

For information on the ABS, BAS, EBP, ESP ^® , and 4-ETS, see “Driving safety systems” (▶page 98).

Cruise control

The cruise control automatically maintains the speed you set for your vehicle.

The use of cruise control is recommended for driving at a constant speed for extended periods of time. You can set or resume cruise control at any speed above 20 mph (30 km/h).

The cruise control function is operated by means of the cruise control lever.

The cruise control lever is the uppermost lever on the left-hand side of the steering column (▷page 24).

The cruise control should not be activated during off-road driving.

Warning!

The cruise control is a convenience system designed to assist the driver during vehicle operation. The driver is and must always remain responsible for the vehicle's speed and for safe brake operation.

Only use the cruise control if the road, traffic and weather conditions make it advisable to travel at a constant speed.

•The use of the cruise control can be dangerous on winding roads or in heavy traffic because conditions do not allow safe driving at a constant speed.
•The use of the cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads. Rapid changes in tire traction can result in wheel spin and loss of control.
- Deactivate the cruise control when driving in fog.

The "Resume" function should only be operated if the driver is fully aware of the previously set speed and wishes to resume this particular preset speed.

Warning!

The cruise control brakes automatically so that the set speed is not exceeded. The brake pedal depresses when the cruise control engages the brakes.

Keep driver's foot area clear at all times, including the area under the brake pedal. Objects stored in this area may impair pedal movement which could interfere with the braking ability of the cruise control system.

Do not place your foot under the brake pedal – your foot could become caught.

Keep in mind that the cruise control is a convenience system designed to assist the driver during vehicle operation. The driver is and must always remain responsible for the vehicle's speed and for safe brake operation.

① ③ ② ④ P54:25-5881-31

① Setting current or higher speed Adjustment in 1 mph increments (to the resistance point) or 5 mph increments (past the resistance point) (Canada: 1 km/h or 10 km/h)
② Setting current or lower speed Adjustment in 1 mph increments (to the resistance point) or 5 mph increments (past the resistance point) (Canada: 1 km/h or 10 km/h)
③ Canceling cruise control
④ Resume to last set speed

Controls in detail

Driving systems

Activating cruise control

You can activate the cruise control when the vehicle speed is above 20 mph (30 km/h).

In the following cases you cannot activate the cruise control:

• when you brake
• when you have set the parking brake
• when the automatic transmission is set to position P , R , or N
• if the ESP ^ is switched off
• if the ESP ^ has switched off due to a malfunction

The vehicle speed displayed in the speedometer can briefly vary from the speed setting for the cruise control system.

Setting current speed

▶Accelerate or decelerate to the desired speed.
▶Briefly lift the cruise control lever in direction of arrow ① or depress in direction of arrow ②.

The current speed is set.

▶Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.

The cruise control is activated.

The currently set speed appears in the status indicator of the multifunction display:

• USA only:

Cruise XXX Miles

- Canada only:

On uphill grades, the cruise control may not be able to maintain the set speed. Once the grade eases, the set speed will be resumed.

On downhill grades, the cruise control maintains the set speed by braking with the vehicle's braking system. In addition, on longer downhill grades the automatic transmission will downshift automatically.

Canceling cruise control

There are several ways to cancel the cruise control:

▶Step on the brake pedal.

The cruise control is canceled. The last speed set is stored for later use.

or

▶Briefly push the cruise control lever in direction of arrow ③ (▶page 245).

The cruise control is canceled. The last speed set is stored for later use.

The last stored set speed is canceled when the engine is turned off.

i The cruise control switches off automatically when

• you step on the brake pedal
• you depress the parking brake pedal

The cruise control switches off automatically and an acoustic warning will sound when

• the vehicle speed is below 20 mph (30 km/h)
• the ESP ^® is in operation
- the ESP ^ is switched off with the ESP ^ switch (▷page 102)
- the ESP ^ has switched off due to a malfunction (▶page 405)
- you set the automatic transmission to N while driving

Observe additional messages in the multifunction display that may appear.

Setting the automatic transmission to N while driving cancels the cruise control. However, the automatic transmission should not be set to N while driving except to coast when the vehicle is in danger of skidding (e.g. on icy roads).

i Depressing the accelerator pedal does not deactivate the cruise control. After a brief acceleration (e.g. for passing), the cruise control will resume the last set speed.

Setting a higher speed

Warning!

If you increase the set vehicle speed, keep in mind that it may take a brief moment until the vehicle has reached the set speed.

Increase the set vehicle speed to a value that the prevailing road conditions and legal speed limits permit. Otherwise, sudden and unexpected acceleration of the vehicle could cause an accident and/or serious injury to you and others.

You can increase the speed in two ways.

Adjustment in 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h) increments

The set value is increased in 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h) increments each time you lift the cruise control lever up to the resistance point.

▶Briefly lift the cruise control lever up to the resistance point in direction of arrow ① (▶page 245).
▶Release the cruise control lever.

The vehicle speed increases in increments of 1 mph (Canada: 1km/h).

Adjustment in 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h) increments

The set value is increased in 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h) increments each time you lift the cruise control lever past the resistance point.

Controls in detail

Driving systems

▶Briefly lift the cruise control lever up past the resistance point in direction of arrow ① (▶page 245).
▶Release the cruise control lever.

The vehicle speed increases in increments of 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h).

The new speed is set and the vehicle will accelerate. Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment until the vehicle has reached the set speed.

Setting a lower speed

Warning!

If you decrease the set vehicle speed, keep in mind that it may take a brief moment until the vehicle has reached the set speed.

Decelerate the set vehicle speed to a value that the prevailing road conditions and legal speed limits permit. Otherwise, sudden and unexpected deceleration of the vehicle could cause an accident and/or serious injury to you and others.

You can reduce the speed in two ways.

When you use the cruise control lever to decelerate, the brake system will automatically brake the vehicle if the engine's braking power does not brake the vehicle sufficiently.

Adjustment in 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h) increments

The set value is decreased in 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h) increments each time you press the cruise control lever down to the resistance point.
▶Briefly press the cruise control lever down to the resistance point in direction of arrow ② (▶page 245).
▶Release the cruise control lever. The vehicle speed decreases in increments of 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h).

Adjustment in 5 mph

(Canada: 10 km/h) increments

The set value is decreased in 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h) increments each time you press the cruise control lever down past the resistance point.

▶Briefly press the cruise control lever down past the resistance point in direction of arrow ② (▶page 245).
▶Release the cruise control lever.

The vehicle speed decreases in increments of 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h).

The new speed is set and the vehicle will decelerate. Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment until the vehicle has reached the set speed.

Setting to last stored speed ("Resume" function)

Warning!

The set speed stored in memory should only be set again if prevailing road conditions permit. Possible acceleration or deceleration differences arising from returning to the preset speed could cause an accident and/or serious injury to you and others.

▶Briefly pull the cruise control lever in direction of arrow ④ (▶page 245).
The cruise control resumes to the last set speed, or if no speed is stored, it will set and store the current speed.
▶Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.

The last set speed appears in the multifunction display for approximately 5 seconds.

Downhill Speed Regulation (DSR)

Warning!

Downhill Speed Regulation is a convenience system designed to assist the driver during vehicle operation. The system must be set to be appropriate for the topographical and weather conditions encountered which can change quickly. The driver is and must remain at all times responsible for the vehicle speed and for safe brake operation.

Depending on the programmed speed ( page 178), actual vehicle speed and gradient, switching on the DSR while driving can cause the vehicle to slow down rapidly and you may hear a sound which is caused by the activation of the vehicle's brake system through the DSR. Sudden and unexpected deceleration can result in loss of vehicle control, causing an accident and/or serious personal injury to you and others. Do not switch on the DSR in a circumstance where rapid deceleration could result in a loss of vehicle control.

For more information, see "Off-road driving" (▷page 319).

The DSR is an aid for driving downhill. DSR regulates your vehicle's speed when driving downhill to the value set in the control system ( page 178). The steeper the downhill gradient is, the greater the brake application. On flat road surfaces, DSR brakes only slightly or not at all.

DSR regulates the vehicle's speed in automatic transmission positions D, or R.

In addition, make use of the engine's braking effect by shifting the automatic transmission into a lower gear.

You can drive slower or faster than the set speed at any time by braking the vehicle or depressing the accelerator pedal.

Controls in detail

Driving systems

i Whenever DSR is switched on, DSR will use the programmed default speed to regulate the vehicle's speed. The default speed programmed at the factory is 4 mph (Canada: 6 km/h). The default speed can be reprogrammed using the control system (▶page 178). The next time DSR is switched on, DSR will use the newly programmed default speed to regulate the vehicle's speed.

Once DSR is switched on, you can adjust the set speed using the cruise control lever (>page 245). Keep in mind that adjusting the set speed using the cruise control lever with DSR switched on will not change the programmed default speed. If DSR is switched off and then switched on again, DSR will use the programmed default speed.

Depending on the road surface and level of downhill grade, the DSR may not be able to maintain the set speed. To maintain the set speed, apply the brakes if necessary.

Switching the Downhill Speed Regulation on/off

The switch is located on the upper part of the center console.

1 DSR 2 P54.25-5802-31

① DSR on/off
② Indicator lamp

Warning!

If the accelerator pedal is depressed while the Downhill Speed Regulation is activated, the vehicle can drive faster than the programmed set speed. You should therefore drive downhill with particular caution as it could otherwise lead to an accident and/or serious injury to you or others. Keep in mind that as soon as you remove the foot from the accelerator pedal with the DSR switched on, the DSR will start regulating the vehicle's speed including use of brakes if required. Depending on the programmed set speed, actual vehicle speed and gradient, the DSR can cause the vehicle to slow down rapidly. Sudden and unexpected deceleration can result in loss of vehicle control, causing an accident and/or serious personal injury to you and others.

Controls in detail

Driving systems

Switching Downhill Speed Regulation on

The DSR can only be switched on if the vehicle speed is below 18 mph (Canada: 30 km/h).

▶ Press DSR switch ① (▷ page 250).

The indicator lamp ② comes on.

The message DSR and the set speed appear in the multifunction display.

+76°F DSR 4MPH R N P D P54.32-4783-91

If the DSR is switched on at a speed above 18 mph (Canada: 30 km/h), the message DSR Max. Speed 18 mph (Canada: 30 km/h) appears in the multifunction display.

For information on how to program the set speed while driving, see “Adjusting Downhill Speed Regulation speed with DSR switched on” (▶page 251).

Switching Downhill Speed Regulation off

▶ Press DSR switch ① (▷ page 250).

The indicator lamp ② goes out.

The message DSR Off appears in the multifunction display.

At a speed above approximately 21 mph (Canada approximately: 35 km/h), the DSR is automatically switched off. The message DSR Off appears in the multifunction display and an acoustic signal sounds. For information on how to switch DSR on again, see "Switching Downhill Speed Regulation on" (▶page 251).

Adjusting Downhill Speed Regulation speed with DSR switched on

With the DSR switched on (▷page 250), the speed setting can be changed using the cruise control lever.

The cruise control lever is the uppermost lever on the left-hand side of the steering column.

① ②

Cruise control lever

① Increase set speed
② Reduce set speed

You can change the set speed between 3-10 mph (Canada: 4-18 km/h).

Controls in detail

Driving systems

You can increase or reduce the set speed in two ways.

Adjustment in 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h) increments

The set value is increased or decreased in 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h) increments each time you lift or depress the cruise control lever to the resistance point.

Increase set speed:

▶Briefly lift the cruise control lever up to the resistance point in direction of arrow ① (▶page 251).

▶Release the cruise control lever.

The vehicle speed increases in increments of 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h).

Reduce set speed:

▶Briefly press the cruise control lever down to the resistance point in direction of arrow ② (▶page 251).

▶Release the cruise control lever.

The vehicle speed decreases in increments of 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h).

Each time the set speed is changed, DSR will appear in the multifunction display and the changed set speed is shown.

The set speed is canceled when DSR is switched off. If DSR is switched on again, DSR will use the programmed default speed ( page 178).

Adjustment in 5 mph

(Canada: 10 km/h) increments

The set value is increased or decreased in 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h) increments each time you lift or depress the cruise control lever past the resistance point.

Increase set speed:

▶Briefly lift the cruise control lever up past the resistance point in direction of arrow ① (▶page 251).

▶Release the cruise control lever.

The vehicle speed increases in increments of 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h).

Reduce set speed:

▶Briefly press the cruise control lever down past the resistance point in direction of arrow ② (▶page 251).

Controls in detail

Driving systems

▶ Release the cruise control lever.

The vehicle speed decreases in increments of 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h).

Each time the set speed is changed, DSR will appear in the multifunction display and the newly set speed is shown.

The new speed is set and the vehicle will accelerate or decelerate. Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment until the vehicle has reached the new set speed.

The set speed is canceled when DSR is switched off. If DSR is switched on again, DSR will use the programmed default speed ( page 178).

Off-road driving program

The off-road driving program is designed to assist the driver when driving off-road in terrain and crossing water. The off-road driving program adjusts the engine power and shifting of the automatic transmission to be more suitable for the off-road use of the vehicle. In addition, the ABS, ESP ^® , and 4-ETS designed for off-road use are automatically activated.

In the following situations you should switch to the off-road driving program:

• during off-road driving
• when crossing water (▷ page 324)
- when towing up or down on steep gradients

The switch is located on the upper part of the center console.

In the ML 63 AMG, the off-road driving program is switched on and off via the control system ( page 159).

① ② P54.25-5803-31

① Switch for off-road driving program
② Indicator lamp

Controls in detail

Driving systems

Switching Off-road driving program on

▶ Press switch ① (▷ page 253). Indicator lamp ② comes on. The symbol 📄 appears in the lower multifunction display.

+76°F R N P D3 P54.32-3935-31

Switching Off-road driving program off

▶ Press switch ① again. Indicator lamp ② goes out. The symbol 📄 disappears.

Air suspension program\*

The system consists of two components. The vehicle level control* regulates the ride height of the vehicle. The Adaptive Damping System (ADS)* optimizes your vehicle's suspension tuning.

• Suspension tuning: Adaptive Damping System (ADS)* (▷page 255)
  • Vehicle level control* (▷ page 255)

ML 63 AMG

The Air suspension program is part of the standard equipment range. Due to the vehicle's sportier suspension tuning, in comparison with standard vehicles, the level positions in the ADS settings as well as the speed thresholds for raising and lowering the vehicle have been modified.

From the Highway/High-speed level, the vehicle is lowered to the ADS Sport level approximately 20 seconds after it is locked.

From the raised level, the vehicle is not lowered after it is locked.

When the engine is started, the previously selected setting, e.g. ADS COMF, is selected again.

! Be sure to observe this vehicle's differing values for ground clearance and vehicle height in comparison to standard vehicles. You could otherwise damage the vehicle. The values for

• opening the tailgate (▷ page 119)
• driving off-road (▷ page 319)
- the vehicle's main dimensions can be found in the "Technical data" section ( page 520)

Adaptive Damping System (ADS) ^*

The fine tuning of the damping and suspension is dependent on:

• your driving style
  • road surface conditions
• your personal ADS settings
• your personal vehicle level settings

The ADS switch is located on the upper part of the center console.

SPORT COMF ① ② ③ P54.25-5804-31

① ADS switch
② Indicator lamp for SPORT setting
③ Indicator lamp for COMF setting

The following settings are available:

• AUTO (for normal driving situations) Indicator lamps ② and ③ are off.
• SPORT (for sporty driving) Indicator lamp ② comes on. With the ADS SPORT setting, the vehicle is lowered approximately 0.6 in (15 mm). ML 63 AMG: The vehicle is lowered approximately 0.3 in (8 mm).
• COMF (for comfort driving) Indicator lamp ③ comes on. ML 63 AMG: The vehicle is raised approximately 0.28 in (7 mm).
  ▶ Start the engine (▷ page 39).
  ▶ Press ADS switch ① repeatedly until the desired suspension tuning is reached.

The setting is stored when you turn off the engine.

Vehicle level control\*

The vehicle level control automatically regulates the ride height to

• reduce fuel consumption
• improve driving stability by lowering the center of gravity

The vehicle automatically regulates its ride height based on the set vehicle height and the current speed:

- As your driving speed increases, the vehicle is lowered by increments until it reaches high-speed level.

Vehicles with ADS*:

• If you are driving with the ADS setting COMF or AUTO, the vehicle is raised back to highway level as your driving speed decreases.
• You can select the high-speed level via the ADS setting SPORT. In ADS Sport, the vehicle is lowered directly to high-speed level as your driving speed increases.

Controls in detail

Driving systems

The parked vehicle begins adjusting to the set vehicle level as soon the doors and tailgate are

• unlocked
  or
• opened or closed with the vehicle unlocked

In order to operate the vehicle level control switch ( page 257), however, the engine must be running.

Warning!

Make sure that no one is near the wheel housing or under the vehicle when you lower the vehicle while it is standing still. Limbs could become wedged into or under the vehicle.

For safety reasons, the vehicle can only be lowered with all doors and the tailgate closed. Lowering is interrupted if a door or the tailgate is opened and will continue after the door is closed again.

Warning!

Please be aware that by raising the vehicle level, the center of gravity also rises. Therefore, always ensure that the vehicle level is as low as possible. With higher ride height the ESP® may activate earlier in certain situations.

Adapt your speed and driving to possible changed driving behavior of the vehicle after changing the vehicle level. The ESP ^® cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed. The ESP ^® cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle.

! Keep in mind that in rough or uneven terrain, adjusting the vehicle to a lower level may cause the vehicle underbody to come in contact with the ground and result in damage to the vehicle underbody. Always make sure the vehicle has sufficient ground clearance before adjusting it to a lower level.
! Before jacking up the vehicle with equipment that lifts one or more of the wheels completely off of the ground, remove the SmartKey from the starter switch.
! Please also note the information in the section on towing (▷page 499).

For information on off-road driving, see "Off-road driving" (▷page 319).

Controls in detail

Driving systems

Setting the vehicle level

The switch is located on the upper part of the center console.

1 2 PS4.25-5805-31

① Vehicle level switch
② Indicator lamp

Basic settings (all models, except ML 63 AMG)

The following vehicle chassis ride heights can be selected using the vehicle level switch in the center console:

Level Driving situation

Raised For off-road driving or driving in rough terrain. The indicator lamp is on.

Highway For driving on paved roads in fair or better condition. The indicator lamp is off.

The third available level is the high-speed level that is set automatically.

The following is the approximate change in ride height for each of the level settings:

Level Ride height

Raised + 3.1 in (80 mm)

Highway +/- 0 in (0 mm)

High-speed - 0.6 in (-15 mm)

i Vehicles with ADS*:
Depending on the ADS setting ( page 255), the vehicle will be lowered to the high-speed level when traveling at higher speeds. At speeds below 40 mph (64 km/h) at the latest, it will be returned to the highway level.
The high-speed level is not available if towing a trailer. For more information on towing a trailer, see "Trailer towing" ( page 328).

Controls in detail

Driving systems

Basic settings (ML 63 AMG only)

The following vehicle chassis ride heights can be selected using the vehicle level switch in the center console:

Level Driving situation

Raised For off-road driving or driving in rough terrain. The indicator lamp is on.

Highway For driving on paved roads in fair or better condition. The indicator lamp is off.

The third available level is the high-speed level that is set automatically.

How much the vehicle is lowered or raised depends on the ADS setting selected. At the raised level, the vehicle is 2.9 in (73 mm) higher than at the Highway level with ADS AUTO.

Raised level

Only select the raised level if appropriate for the driving situation encountered. Otherwise:

• Fuel consumption may increase.
- Handling characteristics of the vehicle may be unfavorable.

You can select the raised level at speeds up to 40 mph (64 km/h). At higher speeds, the message Level Selection Not Permitted appears in the multifunction display.

▶ Start the engine (▷ page 40). If indicator lamp ② (▷page 257) is off.
▶ Press switch ① (▷ page 257). Indicator lamp ② flashes. The vehicle adjusts to the raised level.

The following message appears in the multifunction display while the level is being set:

Rising Compass NE F$4.32-4593-91

The message can be cleared by pressing the 📄 or button on the multifunction steering wheel.

When the raised level is reached, indicator lamp ② (▶page 257) comes on continuously and the following message appears in the multifunction display for 5 seconds:

Raised Level Compass NE 754.32-4594-31

Highway level

! Keep in mind that in rough or uneven roads, adjusting the vehicle to a lower level may cause the vehicle underbody to come in contact with the road and result in damage to the vehicle underbody. Always make sure the vehicle has sufficient ground clearance before adjusting it to a lower level.

▶ Start the engine (▷ page 40).
If indicator lamp ② (▷page 257) is on.
▶ Press switch ① (▷ page 257).

Indicator lamp ② flashes. The vehicle adjusts to the highway level.

The following message appears in the multifunction display while the level is being set:

Being lowered Compass NE P34 32-4595-91

The message can be cleared by pressing the 📄 or button 🔒 on the multifunction steering wheel.

When the highway level is reached, indicator lamp ② (▶page 257) goes out. and the following message appears in the multifunction display for 5 seconds:

AIRMATIC Compass NE PS4.32-3571-31

The vehicle is lowered automatically to the highway level if:

• the vehicle speed is above 55 mph (88 km/h)
• the speed stays between 40 mph (64 km/h) and 55 mph (88 km/h) for approximately 20 seconds

Parktronic system\*

Warning!

Parktronic is a supplemental system. It is not intended to, nor does it replace, the need for extreme care. The responsibility during parking and other critical maneuvers always remains with the driver.

Special attention must be paid to objects with smooth surfaces or low silhouettes (e.g. trailer couplings, painted posts, or road curbs). Such objects may not be detected by the system and can damage the vehicle.

▶▶

Controls in detail

Driving systems

The operational function of the Parktronic system can be affected by dirty sensors, especially at times of snow and ice. See "Cleaning the Parktronic system sensors" ( page 394).

Interference caused by other ultrasonic signals (e.g. working jackhammers, car wash, or the air brakes of trucks) can cause the system to send erratic indications, and should be taken into consideration.

Warning!

Make sure no persons or animals are in the area in which you are maneuvering. You could otherwise injure them.

The Parktronic system is an electronic parking aid and designed to assist the driver during parking maneuvers. It visually and audibly indicates the relative distance between the vehicle and an obstacle.

The Parktronic system is automatically activated when you

- switch on the ignition or start the engine

and

- release the parking brake and

- set the automatic transmission to position D, R, or N

The Parktronic system deactivates at vehicle speeds exceeding approximately 11 mph (18 km/h). At lower vehicle speeds the Parktronic system turns on again.

The Parktronic system also deactivates when you set the automatic transmission to position P or depress the parking brake pedal.

The Parktronic system monitors the surroundings of your vehicle with six sensors in the front bumper and four sensors in the rear bumper.

Close-up of a red car's front bumper with numbered points and a circular marker (no text or symbols on the car itself)

① Sensors in the front bumper

Range of the sensors

To function properly, the sensors must be free of dirt, ice, snow and slush. Clean the sensors regularly, being careful not to scratch or damaging the sensors, see "Cleaning the Parktronic* system sensors" (page 394).

! During parking maneuvers, pay special attention to objects located above or below the height of the sensors (e.g. planters or trailer hitches). The Parktronic system will not detect such objects at close range and damage to your vehicle or the object may result.

Ultrasonic signals from outside sources (e.g. working jackhammers, car wash or the air brakes of trucks) may impair the operation of the Parktronic system.

100 50 0 (cm) 40 20 0 (in) 0 60 120 (cm) 0 24 48 (in ) P54.65-2837-31

Top-down view of a red car with gray shadow shapes and measurement scale (no text or symbols on the car itself)

Front sensors

Center approx. 40 in (100 cm)

Corners approx. 24 in (60 cm)

Rear sensors

Center approx. 48 in (120 cm)

Corners approx. 32 in (80 cm)

Minimum distance

Center approx. 8 in (20 cm)

Corners approx. 6 in (15 cm)

If the system detects an obstacle in this range, all the distance warning segments illuminate and you hear a warning signal. If the obstacle is closer than the minimum distance, the actual distance may no longer be indicated by the system.

Controls in detail

Driving systems

Warning indicators

Visual signals indicate to the driver the relative distance between the sensors and an obstacle. The warning indicator for the front area is located above the center air vents in the dashboard. The warning indicator for the rear area is located in the rear passenger compartment under the roof.

① ② ③ P54 65-3265-31

Front area warning indicator

① Left side of the vehicle
② Right side of the vehicle
③ Readiness indicators

Each warning indicator is divided into five yellow and two red distance segments for either side of the vehicle. The Parktronic system is operational when the readiness indicators ③ are illuminated.

The current transmission position determines which warning indicator will be activated.

Transmission position	Warning indicator
D Front area activated
R or N Front and rear area activated
P Neither activated

As your vehicle approaches an object, one or more distance segments will illuminate, depending on the distance. When the red distance segment illuminates, you have reached the minimum distance.

- Front area: An intermittent acoustic warning lasting a maximum of 2 seconds will sound as the first red distance segment illuminates and a constant acoustic warning lasting a maximum of 2 seconds will sound for the second red distance segment. The signal is canceled when the automatic transmission is set to position P, or the parking brake is set.

- Rear area: An intermittent acoustic warning lasting a maximum of 2 seconds will sound as the first red distance segment illuminates and a constant acoustic warning lasting a maximum of 2 seconds will sound for the second red distance segment. The signal is canceled when the automatic transmission is set to position D, P, or the parking brake is set.

Controls in detail

Driving systems

Switching the Parktronic system\* on/off

You can switch off the Parktronic system manually.

The Parktronic switch is located in the upper part of the center console.

OFF P3/21 ① ② P54.26-5806-31

① Parktronic switch ② Indicator lamp

Switching off

▶ Press Parktronic switch ①.
Indicator lamp ② comes on.

Switching on

▶ Press Parktronic switch ① once more. Indicator lamp ② goes out.

The Parktronic system switches on automatically when you switch on the ignition ( page 40).

Vehicles with original equipment Mercedes-Benz Trailer Hitch Kit:

The rear Parktronic sensor will automatically disengage when towing a trailer.

Parktronic system\* malfunction

If only the red distance segments illuminate and an acoustic warning sounds, there is a malfunction in the Parktronic system. The Parktronic system will automatically switch off after 20 seconds and the indicator lamp in the Parktronic switch comes on.

▶Have the Parktronic system checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center as soon as possible.

If only the red distance segments illuminate and no acoustic warning sounds, the Parktronic system sensors are dirty (e.g. slush, snow or ice) or there is an interference from other radio or ultrasonic signals (e.g. working jackhammers, car wash or the air brakes of trucks). The Parktronic system will automatically switch off after 20 seconds and the indicator lamp in the Parktronic switch comes on.

Controls in detail

Driving systems

▶ Switch off the ignition (▷ page 40).
▶Clean the Parktronic system sensors (▷page 394).
▶ Switch on the ignition (▷ page 40).
or
▶Check the Parktronic system operation at another location to rule out interference from outside radio or ultrasonic signals.

Rear view camera\*

Warning!

The rear view camera is only an aid and may display obstacles from a distorted perspective or inaccurately, or may not display obstacles at all. The rear view camera does not relieve you of the responsibility to be cautious, take care and pay careful attention. The rear view camera may not show objects which are:

•very close to the rear bumper
• under the rear bumper
• above the tailgate handle

You are responsible for safety at all times and must continue to pay attention to the immediate surroundings when parking and maneuvering. This includes the area behind, in front of and beside the vehicle. Otherwise you could endanger yourself or others.

Warning!

Make sure that no persons or animals are in or near the area in which you are parking/maneuvering. Otherwise, they could be injured.

Warning!

The rear view camera either will not function or will not function to its full capability if:

• the tailgate is open
• it is raining very hard, snowing or foggy
• it is night or you are parking/maneuvering your vehicle in an area where it is very dark
• the camera is exposed to a very bright white light
• the immediate surroundings are illuminated with fluorescent light (the display may flicker)

Controls in detail

Driving systems

• there is a sudden change in temperature, e.g. if you drive into a heated garage from the cold (lens condensation)
  • the camera lens is dirty or covered
  • the rear of your vehicle is damaged

In this case, have the position and setting of the camera checked by a qualified specialist workshop.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you visit a Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center for this purpose.

Do not use the rear view camera in these situations. Otherwise you could injure yourself or others and/or damage property including your vehicle while parking/maneuvering.

The rear view camera is an optical parking aid. It shows you the area behind the vehicle in the COMAND system display when reverse gear R is engaged, for example during parallel parking.

The rear view camera is located near the tailgate handle.

Red car rear view with a close-up inset showing a device labeled '1' (no readable text or symbols)

① Rear view camera

Switching the rear view camera on and off

▶ Switch on the ignition (▷ page 40).
▶Shift the automatic transmission in position R (▷page 185).

The area behind the vehicle appears in the COMAND system display.

The area behind the vehicle is shown in the COMAND system display as a mirror image, like in the rear view mirror.
The image from the rear view camera will no longer be displayed if you select another function on the COMAND system while reverse gear R is engaged. To display the image again, disengage and reengage reverse gear R.
▶Shift the automatic transmission into P, N or D to switch off the rear view camera.

Controls in detail

Loading

Carriers\*

Warning!

Only use carriers* when the basic carrier bars* have been completely mounted. The left and right roof rails are only stabilized by means of the basic carrier bars* mounted.

Follow the manufacturer's installation instructions. Otherwise, an improperly attached carrier system or its load could become detached from the vehicle.

Do not exceed the maximum roof load of 220 lb (100 kg).

Take into consideration that when the roof is loaded, the handling characteristics are different from those when operating the vehicles without a roof loaded.

! Load the carriers * in such a way that the vehicle cannot be damaged while driving.

Make sure

• the tailgate can be completely opened
• the tilt/sliding sunroof can be completely raised at the rear

Side view of a red SUV car (no visible text or symbols)

Roof rails

For further information, contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

Loading instructions

Warning!

Always fasten items being carried as securely as possible using cargo tie-down rings and fastening materials appropriate for the weight and size of the load.

In an accident, during hard braking or sudden maneuvers, loose items will be thrown around inside the vehicle, and can cause injury to vehicle occupants unless the items are securely fastened in the vehicle.

To help avoid personal injury during a collision or sudden maneuver, always use tie down rings, and if so equipped, always use the cargo net* when transporting cargo.

Never drive vehicle with the tailgate open. Deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases may enter vehicle interior resulting in unconsciousness and death.

Controls in detail

Loading

Two-sectional line drawings of a car showing two interior compartments with people inside, no text or symbols present.

Load distribution

The gross vehicle weight which is the weight of the vehicle including fuel, tools, spare wheel, installed accessories, passengers and luggage/cargo must never exceed the load limit and Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) for your vehicle as specified on the placard located on the driver's door B-pillar ( page 510). In addition, the load must be distributed in such a way so that the weight on each axle never exceeds the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axle. The GVWR and GAWR for your vehicle are indicated on the certification label which can be found on the driver's door B-pillar (▷page 510).

For more information, see "Tire and Loading Information" (▷page 352).

The handling characteristics of a fully loaded vehicle depend greatly on the load distribution. It is therefore recommended to load the vehicle according to the illustrations shown, with the heaviest items being placed towards the front of the vehicle.

Please pay attention to and comply with the following instructions when loading the vehicle and transporting cargo:

•Always place items being carried against front or rear seat backrests, and fasten them as securely as possible.

•The heaviest portion of the cargo should always be kept as low as possible against front or rear seat backrests.

For additional safety when transporting cargo while the rear seats are unoccupied, fasten the outer seat belts crosswise into the opposite side buckles.

Interior view of a car showing rear seats and a black tie with straps (no visible text or symbols)

The cargo compartment is the preferred place to carry objects. The expanded cargo compartment ( page 269) should only be used for items which do not fit in the cargo compartment alone.

Controls in detail

Loading

Cargo tie-down rings

Your vehicle is equipped with six cargo tie-down rings.

Carefully secure cargo by applying even load on all rings with rope of sufficient strength to hold down the cargo.

While the cargo net* (> page 272) will help protect you from smaller objects, it cannot prevent the movement of large, heavier objects into the passenger compartment in an accident, during hard braking or sudden maneuvers. Such items must be properly secured using the cargo tie-down rings in the cargo compartment floor.

Cargo compartment

Four cargo tie-down rings are located in the cargo compartment.

Close-up of a mechanical component with a circular hole and star-shaped base, labeled with number 1 (no readable text or symbols beyond label)

① Cargo tie-down ring

Behind front seats

Two cargo tie-down rings are located in the footwell behind the driver's and passenger seat.

Close-up of a car's front wheel and dashboard with a magnified inset showing a key component (no text or symbols visible)

① Cargo tie-down ring

Controls in detail

Loading

Hooks

Four hooks are located on the rear compartment trim panels, two on each side.

P68.00-3894-31 ①

① Hook

Use the hooks to secure light weight items only. The maximum permissible weight per hook is 9 lb (4 kg).

Expanding cargo compartment

You can separately fold the left and right rear seat backrests to expand the cargo compartment.

Warning!

When expanding the cargo compartment, always fully fold the corresponding seats and, if so equipped, always use the cargo net* (>page 272) when transporting cargo.

Unless you are transporting cargo, the back-rests must remain properly locked in the up-right position.

In an accident, during hard braking or sudden maneuvers, loose items will be thrown around inside the vehicle, and can cause injury to vehicle occupants unless the items are securely fastened in the vehicle.

Always use the cargo tie down rings ( page 268).

Warning!

Never drive the vehicle with the tailgate open. Deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases may enter vehicle interior resulting in unconsciousness and death.

Folding the rear seat backrest forward

! Always release the seat cushion and fold it up before folding the seat backrest forward. The covering on the seat backrest may otherwise be damaged.

When the seat backrest are folded forward, the front seats may not be moved to the rearmost position. Otherwise you could damage the front and second-row seats.

△△

Controls in detail

Loading

△△

Interior view of a car showing seatbelt and dashboard, with numbered annotations (1 and 2) highlighting mechanical components (no readable text or symbols)

① Release loop
② Seat cushion

▶ Pull release loop ①.
▶ Fold seat cushion ② forward.

Diagram of car engine components with numbered parts and directional arrows indicating flow or movement

③ Release handle
④ Seat backrest

▶ Make sure the rear seat head restraints are in the lowermost position (▷page 127).
▶ Pull release handle ③.

A red indicator ⑤ will be visible and the seat backrest ④ is released.

Close-up of a car's side panel showing a red belt with a numbered inset (no text or symbols on the main subject)

⑤ Indicator
▶ Fold seat backrest ④ forward.

Controls in detail

Loading

Returning the rear seat backrest to original position

P91.14-3036-31

① Seat backrest
② Seat cushion

▶ Fold seat backrest ① rearward until it engages.

The red indicator ⑤ (▷page 270) should no longer be visible.

▶ Fold seat cushion ② rearward until it locks into position.
▶Check for secure locking by pushing and pulling on the seat backrest.

Warning!

If a red indicator is visible with the backrest up, then the backrest is not properly locked into position.

Always lock backrest in its upright position when the rear seats are occupied, or the extended cargo compartment is not in use. Check for secure locking by pushing and pulling on the backrest.

Cargo compartment cover blind

The cargo compartment cover blind can be installed behind the rear seats.

! With the cargo compartment cover blind installed, do not pile luggage higher than the lower edges of the rear side windows.

① ② P68.50-2354-31

① Handle
② Mount

Rolling out blind

▶ Pull blind on handle ① across the cargo compartment.
▶ Guide blind into mounts ② and release.

Rolling up blind

▶Disengage blind and guide retraction by its handle ①.

Controls in detail

Loading

Installing blind

Before installing cargo compartment cover blind behind the front seats, fold the rear seats forward.

▶ Place left side of blind ② in left mount.
▶ Position right side of blind ② over right mount.
▶ Press release button ① and guide cover ② into mount.
▶Make sure the cargo compartment cover blind is securely fastened.

Removing blind

Interior view of a car showing a numbered component with a magnified inset (no visible text or symbols)

① Release button
② Blind

▶ Roll the blind up (▷ page 271).
Before removing cargo compartment cover blind behind the rear seats, fold the left or right rear seat forward. Afterwards, return the left or right rear seat into its original position.

▶ Push release button ①.
▶ Pull blind ② to the left against the spring pressure until the spring in the cover audibly engages.
▶Remove the blind.

Cargo net\*

Warning!

Make sure the cargo net is properly engaged at top and bottom position and the tightening belts are securely fastened.

Never use a damaged cargo net.

To help avoid personal injury from smaller objects being thrown around in the occupant compartment during a collision or sudden maneuver, always use cargo net when transporting cargo.

The cargo net cannot prevent the movement of large, heavier objects into the passenger compartment in an accident. Such items must be properly secured using the cargo tie-down rings ( page 268) in the cargo compartment floor.

Passenger use of seats behind installed cargo net is restricted because of the footwell being taken up by the net.

Controls in detail

Loading

Use of the cargo net is a particularly important safety factor when the vehicle is loaded higher than the top of the seat backrests with smaller objects. For your safety, always use the cargo net when transporting cargo.

The cargo net can be installed in two locations:

Interior view of a car showing two labeled compartments (① and ②) with a highlighted orange object inside the lower compartment (no text or symbols on the main subject)

① Holder in B-pillar
② Holder in C-pillar

• Without the cargo compartment expanded (▶page 269), use holders above C-pillars ② and the cargo tie-down rings in the cargo compartment (▶page 268).
• With the cargo compartment expanded (▷page 269), use holders above B-pillars ① and the cargo tie-down rings behind the front seats (▷page 268).
  ▶Open the hook and loop fasteners on the cargo net package.
  ▶Roll out the cargo net.
  ▶Unfold the cargo net.

The cargo net bars must audibly engage.

Installing the cargo net

① ② P68.50-2310-31

Cargo net bar hung up behind the C-pillar

① Holder
② Cargo net bar

▶ Hang cargo net bar ② on holder ① as indicated by the arrow.
▶ Push cargo net bar ② forward into holder ① in direction of arrow.

Controls in detail

Loading

Pulling the cargo net tight

1 2 3 P68-50-2376-31

Belt hook attached behind the front seats

① Belt hook
② Cargo tie-down ring
③ Tightening belt

▶ Hook belt hook ① into cargo tie-down ring ② in direction of arrow.
▶ Pull tightening belt ③ by the loose end in direction of arrow until the cargo net is pulled tight.
▶After driving a short distance, make sure the cargo net is still tight and, if necessary, pull it tight again.

Loosening the cargo net

Diagram showing three labeled parts of a mechanical device with an inset magnified view highlighting a green component.

Belt hook attached behind the front seats

①Buckle
② Belt hook
③ Cargo tie-down ring

▶Loosen the tightening belt by pulling buckle ① upward in direction of arrow.
▶ Remove belt hook ② from cargo tie-down ring ③.

Removing and storing the cargo net

Take cargo net bar ② out of holder ①, see "Installing the cargo net" (▶page 273).
▶Press the red button on the upper and lower cargo net bar.
▶Fold the cargo net.
▶Roll up the cargo net.
▶Close the hook and loop fasteners on the cargo net package.

Controls in detail

Loading

Cargo management system\*

Your vehicle may be equipped with a cargo management system and accompanying accessories which enables you to utilize your cargo compartment in a variety of ways. You can store the cargo management system in the pouch that comes with the vehicle.

The pouch and the telescoping rod are located under the cargo compartment floor.

Top-down view of a car trunk with a circular component labeled '1' and part number P58.00-4638-31 (no text or symbols on the main body)

① Cargo rails

Inserting the mounting elements into the cargo rails

① ② P68.00-3902-31

① Cargo rail ② Mounting element

You can move the mounting element ② to various engaging points on the cargo rail ① and fix it in place.

These engaging points are located 2 inches apart from one another on the cargo rail and are indicated by markings.

You can turn the mounting element in the cargo rail to four positions:

To lock the mounting element. To insert or remove the cargo tie-down ring, the belt reel or the telescoping rod. To insert or remove the mounting element.

To move the mounting element to the next engaging point.

▶ Turn mounting element ② to
▶ Insert mounting element ② in cargo rail ①.
▶ Turn mounting element ② until it engages in the 🔒 position.

You should be able to feel the mounting element engage in the cargo rail.

Controls in detail

Loading

Inserting the cargo tie-down ring in the mounting element

Diagram showing a mechanical component with labeled parts and a green arrow indicating direction, likely from an engineering or manufacturing context.

① Cargo tie-down ring
② Mounting element

Warning!

The cargo tie-down rings should be subject to equal loads. Make sure to comply with the information provided in the loading instructions ( page 266).

▶ Turn mounting element ② in the cargo rail to 📄.

▶ Insert cargo tie-down ring ① into mounting element ②.
▶ Turn mounting element ② until it engages in the 🔒 position.
You should be able to feel the mounting element engage in the cargo rail.

Belt reel

1 2 3 2 P68.00-3904-31

① Belt reel
② Mounting element
③ Locking button

The belt reel can be used to tighten light-weight loads against the side wall of the cargo compartment, thus securing them from slipping.

▶ Insert two mounting elements ② into a cargo rail.
▶ Turn mounting element ② in the cargo rail to ■.
▶ Insert belt reel ① into mounting element ②.
▶ Turn mounting element ② in the cargo rail until it engages in the 🔒 position.
You should be able to feel the mounting element engage in the cargo rail.
▶ Press locking button ③ on the belt reel ① and pull cargo net out in direction of arrow.

Controls in detail

Loading

▶ Place load between the cargo net and the side wall of the cargo compartment.
▶ Press locking button ③ on belt reel ①. With the other hand, slowly pull net over load until it is taut.

Telescoping rod

① ② ② P88.00-4649-31

① Telescoping rod

② Mounting element

The telescoping rod can be used to tighten the load against the rear seats so as to secure it from slipping.

▶ Insert one mounting element ② into each cargo rail.
▶ Turn mounting element ② in cargo rail to 📄.
▶ Insert telescoping rod ① into mounting element ②.
▶ Turn mounting element ② in cargo rail until it engages in the 🔒 position.
You should be able to feel the mounting element engage in the cargo rail.

Removing rear seat cushions

If your vehicle is equipped with the cargo management system* you can remove the rear seat cushions.

Removing the rear seat cushions will provide you with a larger cargo compartment.

▶Fold the seat cushions forward (▷page 269).

① ② P91.12-3063-31

Example illustration passenger-side

① Release lever
② Plug for seat heating*

▶▶

Controls in detail

Loading

▶▶! Vehicles with rear seat heating*: Depending on vehicle production date your vehicle may equipped with a plug connection for the rear seat heating*. In this case, the electrical contact on the bottom of the seat cushion must be disconnected before removing the rear seat cushions.

▶Press the plug connection on the checkered surface and pull plug ② for the seat heating out of the seat cushion.

When placing the seat cushion back in, guide the plug connection back together until the plug engages.

▶ Pull seat cushion release lever ① and remove the seat cushion by pulling it upward.

▶Remove the head restraints (▷page 128).

! Leave the seat cushion hinge in this position. The upholstery could be damaged if you fold the hinge back.

Interior view of a car showing a black plastic enclosure with a green arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols visible)

▶Fold the seat backrest forward (▷page 270).

▼Useful features

Storage compartments Glove box/CD changer\*

Warning!

To help avoid personal injury during a collision or sudden maneuver, exercise care when storing objects in the vehicle. Put luggage or cargo in the cargo compartment if possible. Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the seat backs.

If so equipped, always use the cargo net* when transporting cargo. The cargo net* cannot secure hard or heavy objects.

Parcel nets cannot secure hard or heavy objects.

Keep compartment lids closed. This will help to prevent stored objects from being thrown about and injuring vehicle occupants during

• braking
- vehicle maneuvers
- an accident

Depending on vehicle equipment, a CD changer* and an AUX-socket are located in the glove box.

Car infotainment panel with numbered labels pointing to the dashboard and a green checkmark indicator

① Glove box lid release ② Glove box lid

Opening the glove box

▶ Pull lid release ① in direction of arrow. Glove box lid ② opens downward.

Closing the glove box

▶ Push glove box lid ② up to close.

Releasing CD changer*

① ② ③ F82.64-2903-31

① Release button ② AUX-socket (Vehicles without Rear Seat Entertainment System*) ③ CD changer
▶ Open the glove box (▷ page 279).
▶ Press release button ①. CD changer ③ is released and swings down automatically.

For information on CD changer operation, see separate COMAND system operating instructions.

Controls in detail

Useful features

Closing CD changer*

① P82.64-2904-31

① CD changer
▶ Gently push CD changer ① up in direction of arrow until it engages.
For information on CD changer operation, see separate COMAND system operating instructions.

Locking and unlocking the glove box separately

You can lock the glove box separately, e.g. when the vehicle is in the shop for service.

▶Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* (▶page 455).

1 2 PBO-00-2128-31

1 Unlocking glove box
2 Locking glove box

▶Insert mechanical key into glove box lock.

▶ Turn mechanical key to position ③ to lock the glove box.

▶ Turn mechanical key to position ② to unlock the glove box.

The glove box can only be locked or unlocked with the mechanical key (▶page 455).

Controls in detail

Useful features

Storage compartment in front center console

Depending on vehicle configuration, the lower storage compartment contains an ashtray ( page 285).

Photo of a car air conditioner unit with warning labels and a green arrow pointing to the interior area.

▶Briefly press the front of the cover. The cover opens automatically.

Depending on vehicle configuration your vehicle may not equipped with an upper storage compartment.

Control panel display showing warning signs and a green arrow pointing to a red-brown patterned area, with alphanumeric codes and numbers visible.

▶Briefly press the front of the cover. The cover opens automatically.

Storage/telephone\* compartment under front center armrest

Interior view of a car showing a hand pressing a button on the side of the seat, with a green arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols present)

① Button to open storage/telephone* compartment

The mobile phone cradle * (▶page 292), the Roadside Assistance button 📋 (▶page 298) and the Information button 🌐 (▶page 299) are located in the storage/telephone* compartment.

Controls in detail

Useful features

P68.00-4692-31

② Storage/telephone* compartment
③ Coin holder

Opening the storage/telephone\* compartment

▶ Pull button ① and lift up armrest.

The coin holders ③ are located in front of storage/telephone* compartment ②.

Rear storage compartments

Depending on the vehicle configuration, your vehicle may be equipped with three storage compartments in the front of the rear seats.

Interior view of a vehicle dashboard with two seats and side-mounted fans (no visible text or symbols)

Depending on vehicle equipment, the upper storage compartment may be replaced by a control panel, for example in vehicles with rear climate control* (▶page 216) or rear automatic climate control* (▶page 231).

① ② P68-00-48-13-31

① Storage compartment cover
② Release button

▶ Briefly press release button ② on storage compartment cover ①.

The storage compartment opens automatically.

Depending on vehicle configuration, the middle storage compartment contains an ashtray (▷page 286).

Controls in detail

Useful features

Parcel nets Parcel net in front passenger footwell

Warning!

Do not place objects with a combined weight of more than 4.4 lb (2 kg) into the parcel net on the back of the front passenger seat. Otherwise, the Occupant Classification System OCS (>page 79) may not be able to properly approximate the occupant weight category.

Parcel nets are intended for storing light-weight items only.

Heavy objects, objects with sharp edges or fragile objects may not be transported in the parcel nets. In an accident, during hard braking, or sudden maneuvers, they could be thrown around inside the vehicle and cause injury to vehicle occupants.

Parcel nets cannot protect transported goods in the event of an accident.

A small convenience parcel net is located in the front passenger footwell. It is intended for small and light items, such as road maps, mail, etc.

3D diagram of a meshed structure with numbered label (1) and reference number P68.00-4195-31, no readable text or symbols beyond labels.

① Parcel net

Parcel nets on front seat backrests

A small convenience parcel net is located on each of the front seat backrests. It is intended for small and light items, such as road maps, mail, etc.

Interior view of a car showing two seats with mesh grilles and a numbered component (1), no visible text or symbols.

① Parcel net

Controls in detail

Useful features

Cup holders

Warning!

In order to help prevent spilling liquids on vehicle occupants and/or vehicle equipment, only use containers that fit into the cup holder. Use lids on open containers and do not fill containers to a height where the contents, especially hot liquids, could spill during braking, vehicle maneuvers, or an accident. Liquids spilled on vehicle occupants may cause serious personal injury. Liquids spilled on vehicle equipment may cause damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

When not in use, keep rear cup holder closed. An open cup holder may cause injury to you or others when contacted during braking, vehicle maneuvers, or in an accident.

Keep in mind that objects placed in a cup holder may come loose during braking, vehicle maneuvers, or an accident and be thrown around in the vehicle interior. Objects thrown around in the vehicle interior may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury.

Cup holder in front of armrest

A cup holder and a card/ticket holder are located in the front center console.

Close-up of a car interior showing a mechanical component with a numbered annotation (1), no readable text or symbols present.

① Cup holder

The front cup holder can be removed for cleaning purposes (▷page 285).

Cup holder in rear armrest

Interior view of a car showing the rear seat, dashboard, and seatbelt (no visible text or symbols)

① Cup holder

▶ Pull the armrest down by its top.

! Close the cup holder before folding the arm-rest upwards.

Removing and reinstalling cup holder

The front cup holder can be removed for cleaning purposes.

① ② P68.00-4434-31

① Cup holder
② Bridge with card, ticket holder

▶ Hold cup holder at its bridge ② and pull out bridge in direction of arrow.
▶ Pull cup holder ① out in direction of arrow.
▶ First, insert the cup holder ① and then insert bridge ②.

Ashtrays

Depending on vehicle configuration, your vehicle is equipped with an ashtray and a cigarette lighter (▶page 287) located in the front center console and an ashtray located in front of the rear seats (▶page 286).

If your vehicle is not equipped with an ash-tray, it has a storage compartment (▷page 281) with a power outlet (▷page 288) instead.

Ashtray in the center console

Cropped image showing a car air conditioner panel with labeled parts, including warning labels and part number P68.00-4125-31.

① Ashtray insert
② Cover plate

Opening the ashtray

▶ Briefly touch cover plate ②. The ashtray opens automatically.

Removing ashtray insert

Warning!

Remove ashtray only with vehicle standing still. Set the parking brake to secure vehicle from movement. Set automatic transmission to P. With the automatic transmission set to P, turn off the engine.

▶ Grip the ashtray insert ① on the sides and pull it out upwards.

Reinstalling ashtray insert

▶ Install ashtray insert ①.
▶ Close ashtray cover plate ②.

Controls in detail

Useful features

Rear center console ashtray (front of rear seats)

! Close the ashtray when not in use and before folding the rear seats

① ② P68.00-4315-31

① Ashtray
② Ashtray cover

Opening rear ashtray

▶ Briefly press ashtray cover ②. The ashtray ① opens automatically.

Removing rear ashtray insert

▶Grip the insert on the sides and pull it out upwards.

Reinstalling rear ashtray insert

▶Install ashtray insert.
▶Close the ashtray.

Cigarette lighter

▶ Switch on the ignition (▷ page 40).
▶Push in cigarette lighter.

The cigarette lighter will pop out automatically when hot.

Cigarette lighter

Depending on vehicle configuration your vehicle is equipped with a cigarette lighter and an ashtray (▶page 285) located in the front center console and an ashtray located in front of the rear seats (▶page 286).

Warning!

Never touch the heating element or sides of the cigarette lighter; they are extremely hot. Hold the knob only.

Make sure that any children traveling with you do not injure themselves or start a fire with the hot cigarette lighter.

When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury.

Controls in detail

Useful features

▶ Switch on the ignition (▷ page 40).

Control panel interface with warning symbol and numbered label, showing vehicle status indicators and a dial indicator.

① Cigarette lighter

▶ Open the ashtray (▷ page 285).
▶ Push in cigarette lighter ①.

The cigarette lighter will pop out automatically when hot.

! The lighter socket can accommodate 12V DC electrical accessories (up to a maximum of 180 W) designed for use with the standard "cigarette lighter" plug type. Keep in mind, however, that connecting accessories to the lighter socket (for example extensive connecting and disconnecting, or using plugs that do not fit properly) can damage the lighter socket. With the socket damaged, the lighter may no longer be able to be placed in the heating (pushed-in) position, or the lighter may pop out too early with the lighter not hot enough.

To help avoid damaging the cigarette lighter socket, we recommend connecting 12V DC electrical accessories designed for use with the standard "cigarette lighter" plug type to the 12V power outlets (▶page 287) in your vehicle whenever possible.

If the engine is off, and the cigarette lighter is being used extensively, the vehicle battery may become discharged.

Power outlets

! If you use all power outlets in the vehicle, make sure that the maximum current drawn does not exceed 55 A.
The power outlets can be used to accommodate 12V DC electrical accessories (e.g. air pump, auxiliary lamps) up to a maximum of 240 W.
If the engine is off, the battery may become discharged if used for long periods of time.
You can use the power outlets, except for the power outlet in the front center console, even if the ignition is switched off.

An emergency shut-off feature ensures that the vehicle's electrical voltage does not fall below a minimum level. If the voltage drops to this minimum level, the power outlets are automatically switched off. This ensures that enough power remains to start the engine.

Controls in detail

Useful features

Power outlets are located

• in the front center console (▷page 288)
  • in the front passenger footwell (▷page 288)
  • in the rear center console (▷ page 288)
  • on the right-hand side of the cargo compartment (▷page 289)

Power outlet in front center console

Control panel interface with labeled button and warning symbol, showing vehicle status indicators and a dial indicator.

① Power outlet cover

▶ Switch on the ignition (▷ page 40).

▶Open cover plate (▷page 281).
▶ Pull out cover ① and insert electrical plug (cigarette lighter type).
Depending on vehicle configuration, the storage compartment contains an ashtray with cigarette lighter ( page 287) instead.

Power outlet in front passenger footwell

12 V MAX. 20A PB2.00-2541-31

▶ Switch on the ignition (▷ page 40).
▶Flip up cover and insert electrical plug (cigarette lighter type).

Power outlet in rear center console

12 V MAX. 20A 10 V P54.10-2763-31

▶ Switch on the ignition (▷ page 40).
▶Flip up cover and insert electrical plug (cigarette lighter type).

Power outlet in cargo compartment

12 V MAX. 20A P12.00-2542-31

▶ Switch on the ignition (▷ page 40).
▶Flip up cover and insert electrical plug (cigarette lighter type).

Floormats

Warning!

Whenever you are using floormats, make sure there is enough clearance and that the floormats are securely fastened.

Floormats should always be securely fastened using eyelets ② and retainer pins ① (▶page 289).

Before driving off, check that the floormats are securely in place and adjust them if necessary. A loose floormat could slip and hinder proper functioning of the pedals.

Do not place several floormats on top of each other as this may impair pedal movement.

To install or remove the floormat more easily, move the driver's seat or front passenger seat as far to the rear as possible (▶page 44).

1 2 2 P68.00-3964-31

① Retainer pin
② Eyelet

Removing

▶ Pull floormat off of retainer pins ①.
▶Remove the floormat.

Installing

▶Lay down the floormat in the respective footwell.
▶ Press the floormat eyelets ② onto retainer pins ①.

Controls in detail

Useful features

Heated steering wheel\*

The steering wheel heating warms up the leather area of the steering wheel.

The stalk is on the lower left-hand side of the steering wheel.

Diagram of car steering wheel with numbered parts and a magnified inset showing the wheel's dial and steering wheel.

① Switching on
② Indicator lamp
③ Switching off

Switching on

▶ Switch on the ignition (▷ page 39).
▶Turn switch at the tip of stalk in the direction of arrow ①.

The steering wheel is heated. Indicator lamp ② comes on.

The steering wheel heating is turned off temporarily and the indicator lamp ② remains on when
• the temperature of the vehicle interior is above 86^ F ( 30^ C)
- the temperature of the steering wheel is above 95^ (35°C)

When these conditions do not apply anymore, steering wheel heating continues.

Switching off

▶Turn switch at the tip of stalk in the direction of arrow ③.

The heated steering wheel is switched off. Indicator lamp ② goes out.

i Indicator lamp ② flashes or goes out
• in case of power surge or undervoltage
- in case of a steering wheel heating malfunction
The steering wheel heating switches off automatically when you remove the SmartKey from the starter switch or, on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*, when you switch off the ignition (▶page 39) and open the driver's door.

For information on the steering wheel, see "Multifunction steering wheel" (▷page 148).

Telephone\*

Warning!

Never operate radio transmitters equipped with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. without being connected to an external antenna) from inside the vehicle while the engine is running. Doing so could lead to a malfunction of the vehicle's electronic system, possibly resulting in an accident and/or serious personal injury.

Radio transmitters, such as a portable telephone or a citizens band unit, should only be used inside the vehicle if they are connected to an antenna that is installed on the outside of the vehicle.

The external antenna must be approved by Mercedes-Benz. Please contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center for information on the installation of an approved external antenna. Refer to the radio transmitter operation instructions regarding use of an external antenna.

Warning!

Please do not forget that your primary responsibility is to drive the vehicle. A driver's attention to the road must always be his/her primary focus when driving. For your safety and the safety of others, we recommend that you pull over to a safe location and stop before placing or taking a telephone call.

If you choose to use the telephone ^1 while driving, please use the hands-free device and only use the telephone when road, weather and traffic conditions permit. Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a cellular telephone while driving a vehicle.

Only operate the COMAND system ^1 if road, weather and traffic conditions permit.

Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) every second.

Various mobile phone cradles can be installed in the front center armrest, see separate installation instructions for the mobile phone cradle. These mobile phone cradles can be obtained from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

The functions and services available to you while using the mobile phone depend on your service provider and the type of mobile phone you are using. See also separate operating manual for instructions on how to use your mobile phone.

When the mobile phone is inserted in the cradle, you can operate the telephone using the following devices:

• mobile phone keypad
  •COMAND system (see separate operating instructions)
• buttons 📞 and 📞 on the multifunction steering wheel (▶page 148)
• Voice Control System* (see separate operating instructions)

Please note that these functions are only available with Mercedes-Benz approved mobile phones.

Controls in detail

Useful features

Please contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center for information on features available for your mobile phone of choice.

The contact plate for the mobile phone cradle is located in the front center arm-rest.

▶Open storage/telephone compartment (▷page 281).

Interior view of a car showing a car's side panel with a highlighted green arrow pointing to the dashboard (no text or symbols visible)

① Cover for contact plate

▶ Pull cover for contact plate ① in direction of arrow.

You can now access the contact plate.

Inserting mobile phone in mobile phone cradle

Once the mobile phone has been inserted in the mobile phone cradle, you have to use the hands-free device to respond during phone calls.

! Do not try to remove the mobile phone along with the cradle. You could otherwise damage the mobile phone cradle.

If applicable, remove the cover for the external antenna connection from the back of the mobile phone and store it in a safe place. Be sure to comply with the mobile phone's operating instructions as well.

① ② ③ P82:70-5734-31

Example illustration

① Insert the mobile phone
② Connector contact
③ Mobile phone cradle

▶Slide the lower end of the mobile phone into connector contact ② on cradle ③.
▶Push the top of the mobile phone in direction of arrow ①, until the lug on the mobile phone release button engages. The mobile phone is connected to the network via the external antenna.

Controls in detail

Useful features

The mobile phone is linked to the hands-free device and the multifunction steering wheel.

The battery is charged depending on its charge status and the position of the SmartKey in the starter switch. The charge procedure will be indicated in the mobile phone's display.

You can place or receive phone calls. You can control other functions of the mobile phone via the control system ( page 180), the Voice Control System ^* (see separate operating instructions), or the COMAND system (see separate operating instructions).

When you take the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* out of the starter switch, the mobile phone remains switched on for approximately 10 minutes. If you place or receive a call during this time, the mobile phone switches off 10 minutes after the call has been completed.

Removing mobile phone from mobile phone cradle

Illustration of a flip phone with labeled parts (1 and 2), showing no text or symbols beyond labels

Example illustration

① Release catch for mobile phone
② Mobile phone cradle

When using a flip-style mobile phone, open flip top before removing from the cradle while a call is connected. Otherwise, the call will be disconnected.

▶Press release catch in direction of arrow ① and take mobile phone out of mobile phone cradle ②.

Changing mobile phone cradle

If you require a different cradle for your mobile phone, remove the present cradle before installing a new one.

Removing an existing mobile phone cradle

① ② ③ P82.70-5736-31

Example illustration

① To release the mobile phone cradle
② To remove the mobile phone cradle
③ Mobile phone cradle

▶Press release button in direction of arrow ① and take mobile phone cradle ③ out in direction of arrow ②.

Controls in detail

Useful features

Installing a different mobile phone cradle

① ② ③ P82,70-5737-31

Example illustration

① Contact plate
② Recesses
③ Mobile phone cradle

▶ Insert mobile phone cradle ③ into recesses ② of contact plate ①.
▶ Push mobile phone cradle ③ forward until it engages.

Tele Aid

! The initial activation of the Tele Aid system may only be performed by completing the subscriber agreement and placing an acquaintance call using the button. Failure to complete either of these steps will result in a system that is not activated.

If you have any questions regarding activation, please call the Response Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada).

Shortly after the completion of your Tele Aid acquaintance call, you will receive a user ID and password. By visiting www.mbusa.com and selecting "Tele Aid" (USA only), you will have access to account information, remote door unlock and more.

The Tele Aid system

(Telematic Alarm Identification on Demand)

The Tele Aid system consists of three types of response:

• automatic and manual emergency
•roadside assistance
•information

The Tele Aid system is operational providing that the vehicle's battery is charged, properly connected, not damaged and cellular and GPS coverage is available.

The speaker volume of a Tele Aid call can be adjusted by using the volume control on the COMAND system or on the multifunction steering wheel. To raise, turn the rotary volume control on COMAND system clockwise or press button + on the multifunction steering wheel. To lower, turn the rotary volume control on COMAND system control counterclockwise or press button - on the multifunction steering wheel.

▶To activate, press the SOS button, the Roadside Assistance button √ or the Information button ⏻, depending on the type of response required.

i The SOS button is located in the overhead control panel (▷page 33).

The Roadside Assistance button ↗ (▷ page 298) and the Information button ↘ (▷page 299) are located below the center arm-rest cover.

! The Tele Aid system utilizes the cellular network for communication and the GPS (Global Positioning System) satellites for vehicle location. If either of these signals are unavailable, the Tele Aid system may not function and if this occurs, assistance must be summoned by other means.

When a Tele Aid call has been initiated, the COMAND system audio is muted and the selected mode (radio, CD etc.) pauses. The optional cellular phone (if installed) inserted in cradle switches off. If you must use this phone, we recommend that you use it only with the vehicle at a standstill in a safe location. Remove the phone from the cradle and place the call. The navigation* system (if engaged) will continue to run. The display in the instrument cluster is available for use, and spoken commands are only available by pressing the RPT button on the COMAND system. A pop-up window will appear in the COMAND system display to indicate that a Tele Aid call is in progress. After the Tele Aid call has ended, the optional cellular phone inserted in the cradle switches on again. A PIN entry might be necessary.

System self-check

Initially, after switching on the ignition, malfunctions are detected and indicated (the indicator lamps in the SOS button, the Roadside Assistance button 📋 and the Information button ⚡ stay on longer than 10 seconds or do not come on).

The message Tele Aid - Inoperative appears in the multifunction display.

Controls in detail

Useful features

Warning!

If the indicator lamps on the SOS button, on the Roadside Assistance button, and/or on the Information button remain illuminated continuously in red and/or the message Tele Aid - Inoperative is displayed in the multifunction display after the system self-check, a malfunction in the system has been detected.

If a malfunction is indicated as outlined above, the system may not operate as expected. Have the system checked at the nearest Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center as soon as possible.

Emergency calls

An emergency call is initiated automatically following an accident in which the emergency tensioning devices (ETDs) or air bags deploy.

An emergency call can also be initiated manually by opening the cover next to the interior rear view mirror labeled SOS, then briefly pressing the button located under the cover. See (▶page 297) for instructions on initiating an emergency call manually.

Once the emergency call is in progress, the indicator lamp on the SOS button will begin to flash. The message

Connecting Call appears in the multifunction display. When the connection is established, the message Call Connected appears in the multifunction display. All information relevant to the emergency, such as the location of the vehicle (determined by the GPS satellite location system), vehicle model, identification number and color are generated.

A voice connection between the Response Center and the occupants of the vehicle will be established automatically soon after the emergency call has been initiated. The Response Center will attempt to determine more precisely the nature of the accident provided they can speak to an occupant of the vehicle.

The Tele Aid system is available if

• it has been activated and is operational. Activation requires a subscription for monitoring services, connection and cellular air time
• vehicle battery power is available
  • the relevant cellular phone network and GPS signals are available and pass the information on to the Response Center

i Location of the vehicle on a map is only possible if the vehicle is able to receive signals from the GPS satellite network and pass the information on to the Response Center.

Warning!

If the indicator lamp in the SOS button is flashing continuously and there was no voice connection to the Response Center established, then the Tele Aid system could not initiate an emergency call (e.g. the relevant cellular phone network is not available). The message Call Failed appears in the multifunction display for approximately 10 seconds.

Should this occur, assistance must be summoned by other means.

Initiating an emergency call manually

① ② P82.95-2638-31

① Cover
② SOS button

▶ Briefly press on cover ①.
The cover opens.
▶ Press SOS button ② briefly.
The indicator lamp in SOS button ② will flash until the emergency call is concluded.
▶Wait for a voice connection to the Response Center.
▶ Close cover ① after the emergency call is concluded.

Controls in detail

Useful features

Warning!

If you feel at any way in jeopardy when in the vehicle (e.g. smoke or fire in the vehicle, vehicle in a dangerous road location), please do not wait for voice contact after you have pressed the emergency button. Carefully leave the vehicle and move to a safe location. The Response Center will automatically contact local emergency officials with the vehicle's approximate location if they receive an automatic SOS signal and cannot make voice contact with the vehicle occupants.

Roadside Assistance button

The Roadside Assistance button is located below the center armrest cover.

1 P82.95-2685-31

① Roadside Assistance button

▶Open the storage compartment (▷page 282).
▶ Press and hold button ① (for longer than 2 seconds).

A call to a Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance dispatcher will be initiated. The button will flash while the call is in progress. The message

Connecting Call will appear in the multifunction display.

When the connection is established, the message Call Connected appears in the multifunction display. The Tele Aid system will transmit data generating the vehicle identification number, model, color and location (subject to availability of cellular and GPS signals).

While the call is connected you can change to the navigation menu by pressing the NAV button on the COMAND system unit.

A voice connection between the Roadside Assistance dispatcher and the occupants of the vehicle will be established.

▶Describe the nature of the need for assistance.

The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance dispatcher will either dispatch a qualified Mercedes-Benz technician or arrange to tow your vehicle to the nearest Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. For services such as labor and/or towing, charges may apply. Refer to the Roadside Assistance Manual for more information.

The following is only available in the USA:

- Sign and Drive services: Services such as jump start, a few gallons of fuel or the replacement of a flat tire with the vehicle spare tire are obtainable.

The indicator lamp on the Roadside Assistance button remains illuminated in red for approximately 10 seconds during the system self-check after switching on the ignition (together with the SOS button and the Information button).

See system self-check (▷page 295) if the indicator lamp does not come on in red or stays on longer than approximately 10 seconds.

If the indicator lamp on the Roadside Assistance button is flashing continuously and there was no voice connection to the Response Center established, then the Tele Aid system could not initiate a Roadside Assistance call (e.g. the relevant cellular phone network was not available). The message Call Failed appears in the multifunction display.

Roadside Assistance calls can be terminated using the 📞 button on the multifunction steering wheel or the END Button on the COMAND system.

Information button

The Information button is located below the center armrest cover.

P82.95-2686-31

① Information button

▶Open the storage compartment (▷page 282).

▶ Press and hold button ① (for longer than 2 seconds).

A call to the Customer Assistance Center will be initiated. The button will flash while the call is in progress. The message Connecting Call will appear in the multifunction display.

Controls in detail

Useful features

When the connection is established, the message Call Connected appears in the multifunction display. The Tele Aid system will transmit data generating the vehicle identification number, model, color and location (subject to availability of cellular and GPS signals).

While the call is connected, you can change to the navigation menu by pressing the NAV button on the COMAND system.

A voice connection between the Customer Assistance Center representative and the occupants of the vehicle will be established. Information regarding the operation of your vehicle, the nearest Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center or Mercedes-Benz USA products and services is available to you.

For more details concerning the Tele Aid system, please visit www.mbusa.com and use your ID and password (sent to you separately) to learn more (USA only).

The indicator lamp in the Information button remains illuminated in red for approximately 10 seconds during the system self-check after switching on the ignition (together with the SOS button and the Roadside Assistance button).

See system self-check ( page 295) if the indicator lamp does not come on in red or stays on longer than approximately 10 seconds.

If the indicator lamp in the Information button is flashing continuously and there was no voice connection to the Response Center established, then the Tele Aid system could not initiate an Information call (e.g. the relevant cellular phone network is not available). The message Call Failed appears in the multifunction display.

Information calls can be terminated using the button on the multifunction steering wheel or the END button on the COMAND system.

! If the indicator lamps do not start flashing after pressing one of the buttons or remain illuminated (in red) at any time, the Tele Aid system has detected a malfunction or the service is not currently active, and may not initiate a call. Visit your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center and have the system checked or contact the Response Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada) as soon as possible.

Call priority

If other service calls such as a Roadside Assistance call or Information call are active, an Emergency call is still possible. In this case, the Emergency call will take priority and override all other active calls.

The indicator lamp in the respective button flashes until the call is concluded. Emergency calls can only be terminated by a Response Center or Customer Assistance Center representative, whereas Roadside Assistance and Information calls can also be terminated by pressing button on the multifunction steering wheel or using the END button on the COMAND system.

! If the indicator lamp continues to flash or the system does not reset, contact the Response Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada), or Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) in the USA or Customer Service at 1-800-387-0100 in Canada.

Remote door unlock

In case you have locked your vehicle unintentionally (e.g. SmartKey inside vehicle), and the reserve SmartKey is not handy:

▶Contact the Mercedes-Benz Response Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada).

You will be asked to provide your password which you provided when you completed the subscriber agreement.

▶Then return to your vehicle and pull the tailgate recessed handle for minimum of 20 seconds until the SOS button is flashing.

The message Connecting Call appears in the multifunction display.

As an alternative, you may unlock the vehicle via Internet using the ID and password sent to you shortly after the completion of your acquaintance call.

The Response Center will then unlock your vehicle with the remote door unlocking feature.

The remote door unlock feature is available if the relevant cellular phone network is available.

The SOS button will flash and the message Connecting Call will appear in the multifunction display to indicate receipt of the door unlock command.

Once the vehicle is unlocked, a Response Center specialist may attempt to establish voice contact with the vehicle occupants.

If the tailgate recessed handle was pulled for more than 20 seconds before door unlock authorization was received by the Response Center, you must wait 15 minutes before pulling the tailgate recessed handle again.

Stolen Vehicle Recovery services

In the event your vehicle was stolen:

▶Report the incident to the police.

The police will issue a numbered incident report.

▶Pass this number on to the

Mercedes-Benz Response Center along with your password issued to you when you subscribed to the service.

The Response Center will then attempt to covertly contact the vehicle's Tele Aid system. Once the vehicle is located, the Response Center will contact the local law enforcement and you. The vehicle's location will only be provided to law enforcement.

If you have any questions, please call the Response Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada).

When the anti-theft alarm stays on for more than 30 seconds, a call is initiated automatically to the Response Center. See anti-theft alarm system (▷page 106).

Controls in detail

Useful features

Garage door opener

The integrated remote control is capable of operating up to three separately controlled devices. It provides a convenient way to replace up to three hand-held remote controls used to operate devices such as garage door openers, gate openers, or other devices compatible with HomeLink® or some other systems.

Before the integrated remote control can be used, it must be programmed to the garage door opener, gate operator or other device you wish to operate. See the following instructions for programming information.

1 2 3 4 6 5 P68.00-4314-31

Interior rear view mirror with integrated remote control

① Indicator lamp
② ③ ④ Signal transmitter button
Needed for programming (not part of vehicle equipment):
⑤ Hand-held remote control of garage door opener, gate operator or other device
⑥ Hand-held remote control button

Warning!

Before programming the integrated remote control to a garage door opener or gate operator, make sure people and objects are out of the way of the device to prevent potential harm or damage. When programming a garage door opener, the door moves up or down. When programming a gate operator, the gate opens or closes.

Do not use the integrated remote control with any garage door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by U.S. federal safety standards (this includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1, 1982).

A garage door that cannot detect an object - signaling the door to stop and reverse - does not meet current U.S. federal safety standards.

When programming a garage door opener, park the vehicle outside the garage.

Do not run the engine while programming the integrated remote control. Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can cause unconsciousness and possible death.

Programming the integrated remote control

Step 1:

▶ Switch on the ignition (▷ page 40).

Step 2:

▶If you have previously programmed a signal transmitter button and wish to retain its programming, proceed to step 3.

If you are programming the integrated remote control for the first time, press and hold the two outer signal transmitter buttons ② and ④ and release them only when indicator lamp ① begins to flash after approximately 20 seconds (do not hold the button for longer than 30 seconds). This procedure erases any previous settings for all three channels and initializes the memory.

If you later wish to program a second and/or third hand-held transmitter to the remaining two signal transmitter buttons, do not repeat this step and begin directly with step 3.

Step 3:

▶Hold end of the hand-held remote control ⑤ of the device you wish to train approximately 2 to 5 in (5 to 12 cm) away from the signal transmitter button (②, ③ or ④) to be programmed, while keeping the indicator lamp ① in view.

Step 4:

▶Using both hands, simultaneously press hand-held remote control button ⑥ and the desired signal transmitter button (②, ③ or ④). Do not release the buttons until step 5 is completed.

Indicator lamp ① will flash, first slowly and then rapidly.

Indicator lamp ① flashes immediately the first time the signal transmitter button is programmed. If this button has already been programmed, the indicator lamp will only start flashing after 20 seconds.

▷▷

Controls in detail

Useful features

▷▷Step 5:

▶ After indicator lamp ① changes from a slow to a rapidly flashing light, release the hand-held remote control button and the signal transmitter button.

Step 6:

▶Press and hold the just-trained signal transmitter button (②, ③ or ④) and observe indicator lamp ①. If indicator lamp ① stays on constantly, programming is complete and your device should activate when the respective signal transmitter button (②, ③ or ④) is pressed and released.

If indicator lamp ① flashes rapidly for about 2 seconds and then turns to a constant light, continue with programming steps 8 through 12 as your garage door opener may be equipped with the “rolling code” feature.

Step 7:

▶To program the remaining two signal transmitter buttons, repeat the steps above starting with step 3.

Rolling code programming

To train a garage door opener (or other rolling code devices) with the rolling code feature, follow these instructions after completing the “Programming” portion (steps 1 through 6) of this text. (A second person may make the following training procedures quicker and easier.)

Step 8:

- Locate "training" button on the garage door opener motor head unit.

Exact location and color of the button may vary by garage door opener brand. Depending on manufacturer, the "training" button may also be referred to as "learn" or "smart" button. If there is difficulty locating the transmitting button, refer to the garage door opener Operator's Manual.

Step 9:

▶Press the “training” button on the garage door opener motor head unit. The “training light” is activated.

You have 30 seconds to initiate the following two steps.

Step 10:

▶Return to the vehicle and firmly press, hold for 2 seconds and release the programmed signal transmitter button (②, ③ or ④).

Step 11:

▶Press, hold for 2 seconds and release same signal transmitter button a second time to complete the training process.

i Some garage door openers (or other rolling code equipped devices) may require you to press, hold for 2 seconds and release the same signal transmitter button a third time to complete the training process.

Controls in detail

Useful features

Step 12:

▶Confirm the garage door operation by pressing the programmed signal transmitter button (②, ③ or ④).

Step 13:

▶To program the remaining two signal transmitter buttons, repeat the steps above starting with step 3.

Gate operator/Canadian programming

Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) after several seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for the integrated signal transmitter to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to “time-out” in the same manner.

If you live in Canada or if you are having difficulties programming a gate operator (regardless of where you live) by using the programming procedures, replace step 4 with the following:

Step 4:

▶Press and hold the signal transmitter button (②, ③ or ④). Do not release this button until it has been successfully trained.

▶While still holding down the signal transmitter button (②, ③ or ④), “cycle” your hand-held remote control button ⑥ as follows: Press and hold button ⑥ for 2 seconds, then release it for 2 seconds, and again press and hold it for 2 seconds. Repeat this sequence on the hand-held remote control until the frequency signal has been learned. Upon successful training, indicator lamp ① will flash slowly and then rapidly after several seconds.

▶Proceed with programming step 5 and step 6 to complete.

Upon completion of programming the integrated remote control, make sure you retain the hand-held remote control that came with the garage door opener, gate operator or other device. You may need it for use in other vehicles, for future programming of an integrated remote control, or simply for continued use as a hand-held remote control to operate the respective device in other situations.

Reprogramming a single signal transmitter button

To program a device using a signal transmitter button previously trained, follow these steps:

▶ Switch on the ignition (▷ page 40).

▶Press and hold the desired signal transmitter button (②, ③ or ④). Do not release the button.

▶ Indicator lamp ① will begin to flash after 20 seconds. Without releasing the signal transmitter button, proceed with programming starting with step 3.

Controls in detail

Useful features

Operation of integrated remote control

▶ Switch on the ignition (▷ page 40).
▶Select and press the appropriate integrated signal transmitter button (②, ③ or ④) to activate the remote controlled device.

The integrated remote control transmitter continues to send the signal as long as the button is pressed – up to 20 seconds.

Erasing the integrated remote control memory

▶ Switch on the ignition (▷ page 40).
▶ Simultaneously press and hold outer signal transmitter buttons ② and ④, for approximately 20 seconds, until indicator lamp ① flashes rapidly. Do not hold for longer than 30 seconds.
The codes of all three channels are erased.

If you sell your vehicle, erase the codes of all three channels.

Programming tips

If you are having difficulty programming the integrated remote control, here are some helpful tips:

• Check the frequency of hand-held remote control ⑤ (typically located on the reverse side of the remote). The integrated remote control is compatible with radio-frequency devices operating between 280-390 MHz.
• Put a new battery in hand-held remote control ⑤. This will increase the likelihood of the hand-held remote control sending a faster and more accurate signal to the integrated remote control.

• While performing step 3, hold hand-held remote control ⑤ at different lengths and angles from the signal transmitter button (②, ③ or ④) you are programming. Attempt varying angles at the distance of 2 to 5 in (5 to 12 cm) away or the same angle at varying distances.

• If another hand-held remote control is available for the same device, try the programming steps again using that other hand-held remote control. Make sure new batteries are in the hand-held remote control before beginning the procedure.

• Straighten the antenna wire from the garage door opener assembly. This may help improve transmitting and/or receiving signals.

Certain types of garage door openers are incompatible with the integrated remote control. If you should experience further difficulties with programming the integrated remote control, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center, or call Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (in the USA only) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer Service (in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100.

Controls in detail

Useful features

i USA only:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

i Canada only:

This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

Compass

Calling up the compass

▶ Press button 📄 or 📋 repeatedly until the AIRMATIC/Compass menu appears in the multifunction display.

The compass displays the direction into which the vehicle is currently traveling: N, NE, E, SE, S, SW, W, or NW.

AIRMATIC Compass NE P54.32-3571-31

If your vehicle is not equipped with the air suspension program*, the multifunction display will show the compass only.

The presence of buildings, bridges, power lines and large antenna masts can influence the displayed values. Metallic or magnetic objects in or on the vehicle can influence the accuracy of the compass.

To make sure the display is correct, the compass must be set to the proper geographic zone (▷page 173). It may also be necessary to calibrate the compass (▷page 174).

If the compass is not calibrated or its function is impaired by outside influences, the message Compass - - - appears in the multifunction display.

Controls in detail

Useful features

Infrared reflecting windshield*

Interior view of a red car with visible dashboard and steering wheel (no text or symbols)

① Infrared transparent areas

Infrared reflecting glass reduces the amount of radiated heat entering the vehicle interior through the windows.

The infrared reflecting glass also prevents the transmission of signals through the glass by in-vehicle electronic devices, e.g. electronic toll collection devices.

To allow the use of these devices in the vehicle, three infrared transparent areas ① are placed in the windshield.

Operation

The first 1000 miles (1500 km)

Driving instructions

At the gas station

Engine compartment

Tires and wheels

Winter driving

Maintenance

Vehicle care

Simple orange icon of a fuel pump (no text or symbols)

Operation

The first 1000 miles (1500 km)

In the “Operation” section you will find detailed information on operating, maintaining and caring for your vehicle.

The more cautiously you treat your vehicle during the break-in period, the more satisfied you will be with its performance later on.

• Drive your vehicle during the first 1000 miles (1500 km) at varying but moderate vehicle and engine speeds.
• During this period, avoid heavy loads (full throttle driving) and excessive engine speeds (no more than ^2/_3 of maximum rpm in each gear).
• Shift gears in a timely manner.
• Avoid accelerating by kick-down.
• Do not attempt to slow the vehicle down by shifting to a lower gear using the gear selector lever.
• Select gear ranges 3, 2 or 1 (▷page 192) only when driving at moderate speeds (for hill driving).

After 1000 miles (1500 km) you may gradually increase vehicle and engine speeds to the permissible maximum.

! Additional instructions for ML 63 AMG:

• During the first 1000 miles (1500 km), do not exceed a speed of 85 mph (140 km/h).
• During this period, avoid engine speeds above 4500 rpm in each gear.
• Shift gears at the correct time.
• Select C as the preferred shift program (▷ page 194) for the first 1000 miles (1500 km).

All of the above instructions, as may apply to your vehicle type, also apply when driving the first 1000 miles (1500 km) after the engine, the transfer case, the front differential or the rear differential has been replaced.

i Always obey applicable speed limits.

▼Driving instructions

Drive sensibly - save fuel

Fuel consumption, to a great extent, depends on driving habits and operating conditions.

To save fuel you should:

• Keep tires at the recommended inflation pressures.
• Remove unnecessary loads.
• Remove carriers* when not in use.
• Allow engine to warm up under low load use.
• Avoid frequent acceleration and deceleration.
• Have all maintenance work performed at the intervals specified in the Maintenance Booklet and as required by the Maintenance System. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

Fuel consumption is also increased by driving in cold weather, in stop-and-go traffic, on short trips and in hilly areas.

Drinking and driving Pedals

Warning!

Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs and driving are a very dangerous combination. Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can affect your reflexes, perceptions and judgment.

The possibility of a serious or even fatal accident are greatly increased when you drink or take drugs and drive.

Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow anyone to drive who has been drinking or taking drugs.

Warning!

Make sure that absolutely no objects are obstructing the pedal's range of movement. Keep the driver's footwell clear of all obstacles. If there are any floormats or carpets in the footwell, make sure that the pedals still have sufficient clearance.

During sudden driving or braking maneuvers, the objects could get caught between the pedals. You could then no longer brake or accelerate. This could lead to accidents and injury.

Operation

Driving instructions

Power assistance

Warning!

With the engine not running, there is no power assistance for the brake and steering systems. In this case, it is important to keep in mind that a considerably higher degree of effort is necessary to brake and steer the vehicle.

Brakes

Warning!

After driving in heavy rain for some time without applying the brakes or through water deep enough to wet brake components, the first braking action may be somewhat reduced and increased pedal pressure may be necessary to obtain expected braking effect. Maintain a safe distance from vehicles in front.

Resting your foot on the brake pedal will cause excessive and premature wear of the brake pads.

It can also result in the brakes overheating, thereby significantly reducing their effectiveness. It may not be possible to stop the vehicle in sufficient time to avoid an accident.

! Operational or performance test must only be conducted on a two-axle dynamometer. If such tests are necessary, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. You could otherwise seriously damage the brake system or the transfer case which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

Because the ESP ^ operates automatically, the engine and ignition must be shut off (SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or 1 or KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button in position 0 or 1) when testing the parking brake on a brake test dynamometer and such testing should be no longer than 10 seconds.

Active braking action through the ESP® may otherwise seriously damage the brake system which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

To help prevent brake disk corrosion after driving on wet road surfaces (particularly salted roads), it is advisable to brake the vehicle with considerable force prior to parking. The heat generated serves to dry the brakes.

If your brake system is normally only subjected to moderate loads, you should occasionally test the effectiveness of the brakes by applying above-normal braking pressure at higher speeds. This will also enhance the grip of the brake pads.

Operation

Driving instructions

Warning!

Make sure not to endanger any other road users when carrying out these braking maneuvers.

Refer to the description of the Brake Assist System (BAS) (▷page 100).

Brake pad wear or a leak in the system may be the reason for low brake fluid in the reservoir.

The brake fluid level in the reservoir may be too low if the brake warning lamp in the instrument cluster comes on and an acoustic warning sounds although the parking brake is released (▶page 401). Observe additional messages in the multifunction display that may appear (▶page 430).

Have the brake system inspected immediately. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

All checks and service work on the brake system should be carried out by qualified technicians only. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

Only install brake pads and brake fluid recommended by Mercedes-Benz.

Warning!

If other than recommended brake pads are installed, or other than recommended brake fluid is used, the braking properties of the vehicle can be degraded to an extent that safe braking is substantially impaired. This could result in an accident.

When driving down long and steep grades, relieve the load on the brakes by shifting into a lower gear to use the engine's braking power. This helps prevent overheating of the brakes and reduces brake pad wear.

When using the engine's braking power, a drive wheel may not spin for an extended period of time, e.g. on slippery road surfaces. This may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

After hard braking, it is advisable to drive on for some time, rather than immediately park, so that the air stream will cool down the brakes faster.

Operation

Driving instructions

High-performance brake system (ML 63 AMG only)

The high-performance brake system is designed to operate under the extremely high operating demands required to accommodate the performance capabilities of the vehicle. The brakes may produce a squeaking-type noise depending on the

• vehicle speed
• brake force applied
• ambient conditions, e.g. temperature and humidity

As with any brake system, the wear of individual brake system components such as brake pads or disks strongly depends on your driving style and the conditions under which you operate the vehicle. Thus, a driving style calling for high demand braking will cause your vehicle's brakes to wear more quickly.

Warning!

New vehicle brake pads and discs, and replacement brake pads and discs may take several hundred miles of driving until they provide optimum braking efficiency. Until that time, you may need to use increased brake pedal pressure while braking. Please be aware of this and adjust your driving and braking accordingly during this break-in period.

Excessive high demand braking will cause correspondingly high brake wear. Please be attentive to the brake warning lamp in the instrument cluster and brake condition messages in the multifunction display. Especially for high performance driving, it is important to maintain and have the brake system checked regularly.

Parking brake

When driving on wet roads or dirt covered surfaces, road salt and/or dirt can get into the parking brake. To prevent corrosion and a reduction in the braking power of the parking brake, observe the following:

▶From time to time, lightly engage the parking brake before driving off.
▶Drive a distance of approximately 110 yds (100 m) at a maximum speed of 12 mph (20 km/h).

Warning!

While performing this procedure, please assure that the vehicle is stopped before applying the parking brake. Otherwise the rear wheels could lock up. You could lose control of the vehicle and cause an accident. In addition, the vehicle's brake lights do not light up when the parking brake is engaged. Make sure not to endanger any other road users when you engage the parking brake.

Driving off

Apply the brakes to test them briefly after driving off. Perform this procedure only when the road is clear of other traffic.

Warm up the engine smoothly. Do not place full load on the engine until the operating temperature has been reached.

When driving off on a slippery surface, do not allow a drive wheel to spin for an extended period with the ESP® switched off. Doing so may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

! Simultaneously depressing the accelerator pedal and applying the brake reduces engine performance and causes premature brake and drivetrain wear.

Parking

Warning!

Do not park this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as grass, hay or leaves can come into contact with the hot exhaust system, as these materials could be ignited and cause a vehicle fire.

To reduce the risk of personal injury or damage to the vehicle drivetrain as a result of vehicle movement, before turning off the engine and leaving the vehicle always:

• Keep right foot on brake pedal.
  • Firmly depress parking brake pedal.
• Set the automatic transmission to position P.
• Slowly release brake pedal.

• When parked on an incline, turn front wheel towards the road curb.

• Turn the SmartKey or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* to starter switch position 0 and remove, or press KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*).
  •Take the SmartKey or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you and lock vehicle when leaving.

Tires

Warning!

If you feel a sudden significant vibration or ride disturbance, or you suspect that possible damage to your vehicle has occurred, you should turn on the hazard warning flashers, carefully slow down, and drive with caution to an area which is a safe distance from the road.

▶▶

Operation

Driving instructions

Inspect the tires and the vehicle underbody for possible damage. If the vehicle or tires appear unsafe, have the vehicle towed to the nearest Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center or tire dealer for repairs.

Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by law. These indicators are located in six places on the tread circumference and become visible at a tread depth of approximately 116 in (1.6 mm), at which point the tire is considered worn and should be replaced.

The treadwear indicator appears as a solid band across the tread.

Warning!

Although the applicable federal motor vehicle safety laws consider a tire to be worn when the treadwear indicators (TWI) become visible at approximately 116 in (1.6 mm), we recommend that you do not allow your tires to wear down to that level.

As tread depth approaches ^1/_8 in (3 mm), the adhesion properties on a wet road are sharply reduced.

Depending upon the weather and/or road surface (conditions), the tire traction varies widely.

Specified tire inflation pressures must be maintained. This applies particularly if the tires are subjected to high loads (e.g. high speeds, heavy loads, high ambient temperatures).

Warning!

Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You may lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire or driving at high speed with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.

For more information, see “Tires and wheels” (▷page 348).

Hydroplaning

Depending on the depth of the water layer on the road, hydroplaning may occur, even at low speeds and with new tires. Reduce vehicle speed, avoid track grooves in the road and apply brakes cautiously in the rain.

Tire traction

The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icy road is always lower than on a dry road. You should pay particular attention to the condition of the road whenever the outside temperatures are close to the freezing point.

Warning!

If ice has formed on the road, tire traction will be substantially reduced. Under such weather conditions, drive, steer and brake with extreme caution.

Mercedes-Benz recommends winter tires ( page 384) with a minimum tread depth of approximately ^1/_6 in (4 mm) on all four wheels for the winter season to make sure normal balanced handling characteristics. On packed snow, they can reduce your stopping distance compared to summer tires.

Stopping distance, however, is still considerably greater than when the road is not covered with snow or ice. Exercise appropriate caution.

Avoid spinning of a drive wheel. This may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

Tire speed rating

Regardless of the tire speed rating, local speed limits should be obeyed. Use prudent driving speeds appropriate to prevailing conditions.

Warning!

Even when permitted by law, never operate a vehicle at speeds greater than the maximum speed rating of the tires.

Exceeding the maximum speed for which tires are rated can lead to sudden tire failure, causing loss of vehicle control and possibly resulting in an accident and/or serious injury and possible death, for you and for others.

An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehicle from exceeding a speed of:

- ML 320 CDI

ML 350

ML 550

ML 320 CDI (with Sport Package*)

ML 350 CDI (with Sport Package*)

ML 550 CDI (with Sport Package ^* ): 130 mph (210 km/h)

- ML 63 AMG:

155 mph (250 km/h)

- ML 63 AMG with increased top speed*:

171 mph (275 km/h)

The factory equipped tires on your vehicle may have a tire speed rating above the maximum speed permitted by the electronic speed limiter.

Make sure your tires have the required tire speed rating as specified for your vehicle in the "Technical data" section (▷page 515), for example when purchasing new tires.

For information on how to identify the tire speed rating on a tire's sidewall, see "Tire size designation, load and speed rating" (▷page 370).

If you are uncertain about the correct reading of the information given on a tire's sidewall, any authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center will be glad to assist you.

Operation

Driving instructions

For information on speed ratings for winter tires, see "Winter tires" (▷page 384).

For additional general information on tire speed markings on the tire sidewall, see "Tire speed rating" (▷page 382).

Winter driving instructions

The most important rule for slippery or icy roads is to drive sensibly and to avoid abrupt acceleration, braking and steering maneuvers. Do not use the cruise control system under such conditions.

When the vehicle is in danger of skidding, shift the automatic transmission to position N. Try to keep the vehicle under control by corrective steering action.

For information on driving with snow chains, see “Snow chains” (▷page 385).

Warning!

On slippery road surfaces, never downshift in order to obtain braking action. This could result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control. Your vehicle's ABS will not prevent this type of control loss.

Road salts and chemicals can adversely affect braking efficiency. Increased pedal force may become necessary to produce the normal brake effect.

Depressing the brake pedal periodically when traveling at length on salt-strewn roads can bring road-salt-impaired braking efficiency back to normal.

If the vehicle is parked after being driven on salt-treated roads, the braking efficiency should be tested as soon as possible after driving is resumed.

Warning!

Make sure not to endanger any other road users when carrying out these braking maneuvers.

Warning!

If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, make sure that snow is kept clear of the exhaust pipe and from around the vehicle with the engine running. Otherwise, deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases may enter vehicle interior resulting in unconsciousness and death.

To assure sufficient fresh air ventilation, open a window slightly on the side of the vehicle not facing the wind.

Warning!

The outside temperature indicator is not designed to serve as an ice-warning device and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. Indicated temperatures just above the freezing point do not guarantee that the road surface is free of ice.

For more information, see "Winter driving" (▷page 384).

Standing water For more information, see "Driving through

water" (▷page 324).

! Do not drive through flooded areas or water of unknown depth. Before driving through water, determine its depth. Never accelerate before driving into water. The bow wave could force water into the engine and auxiliary equipment, thus damaging them.

If you must drive through standing water, drive slowly to prevent water from entering the passenger compartment or the engine compartment.

Water in these areas could cause

• damage to electrical components

- wiring of the engine or transmission or could result

- in water being ingested by the engine through the air intake, causing severe internal engine damage.

Any such damage is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

i Vehicles with air suspension program*:

Select the raised level (▷page 255) before driving through standing water.

Off-road driving

Warning!

Do not load items on the basic carrier bars*. It may cause instability during some maneuvers which could result in an accident.

Drive slowly in unknown terrain. This will make it easier to recognize unexpected obstacles and avoid damage to the vehicle.

To help avoid the vehicle rolling over, never turn it around on steep inclines. If the vehicle cannot complete the attempted climb, back it down in reverse gear.

Do not drive along the side of a slope. The vehicle might otherwise rollover. If in doing so the vehicle begins to show a tendency to roll, immediately steer into a line of gravity (straight up or downhill).

Operation

Driving instructions

Never let the vehicle roll backwards in idle. You may lose control of the vehicle if you use only the service brake. For information on driving downhill, see "Driving downhill" (▶page 324).

Warning!

Sand, dirt, mud and other material having friction property can cause exceptional wear and tear as well as brake failure.

Have the brakes checked for dirt build-up and cleaned. There is otherwise a risk that full braking power may not be available in an emergency.

Warning!

Vehicles with air suspension program*:

Please be aware that by raising the vehicle level, the center of gravity also rises. Therefore, always ensure that the vehicle level is as low as possible. With higher ride height the ESP ^® may activate earlier in certain situations.

Read this chapter carefully before you begin off-road travel.

Familiarize yourself with the vehicle characteristics and gear changing before you attempt any difficult terrain off-road driving. We recommend that you start out with easy off-road travel.

Special driving features for off-road driving

The following driving features are available for specific kind of operation:

• Off-road - ABS (▷ page 99)
• Off-road - ESP ^ (▷page 103)
  • Off-road - 4-ETS (▷ page 105)
  • Hill start assist system (▷ page 191)
• Downhill Speed Regulation (DSR) (▷page 249)
  • Off-road driving program (▷ page 253)
  • Air suspension* (▷ page 254)

Operation

Driving instructions

Off-road driving rules

• Engage the off-road driving program (▶page 253) before driving under off-road conditions.
• Vehicles with air suspension program*: Make sure you select a vehicle level (▶page 255) appropriate to the topographical conditions. Always make sure the vehicle has enough ground clearance.
• Fasten items being carried as securely as possible (▶page 266).
• Always navigate gradients with the engine on and with the transmission engaged in a gear. Switch on the DSR (▶page 250) to help maintain a preset speed.

! Observe the following during off-road driving:

• Keep doors, tailgate, windows, and tilt/sliding sunroof closed whenever driving off-road.
• Adjust vehicle speed to condition of terrain. The more uneven, rutty and steeper the terrain, the lower the speed should be. Drive through water slowly at an even speed, avoiding a bow wave.
• Be especially careful when driving in unknown territory. It may be necessary to get out of the vehicle and scout the path you intend to take.
• Watch out for obstacles, such as rocks, holes, tree stumps and ruts.
• Before driving through water, determine its depth.

• Do not stop vehicle while immersed in water, and do not shut off the engine.

• In sandy soil, drive at a steady speed as allowed by conditions. This helps overcome the vehicle rolling resistance and reduces the likelihood of the vehicle sinking into the ground.

• Do not initiate jumps with the vehicle. It interrupts the forward momentum of the vehicle.
  • Always drive onto slopes with the engine running and the vehicle in gear.
• Do not shift automatic transmission to position N .

Warning!

Do not reduce the tire inflation pressure before driving through sand. However, if you do so, remember to correct the tire inflation pressure ( page 359) before continuing your trip. Driving with reduced tire inflation pressure increases the risk of losing control of the vehicle and rolling over.

Operation

Driving instructions

Checklist before off-road driving

Engine oil level

- Check the engine oil level with the oil dipstick ( page 343).

Only with a proper oil level can the vehicle obtain a trouble-free oil supply, even on steep gradients.

! If the engine oil level warning lamp (>page 434) comes on while driving, stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon at is safe to do so. Check the engine oil level (>page 343).

The engine oil level warnings should not be ignored. Extended driving with the symbol displayed could result in serious engine damage that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

Tires

• Check the tread depth and maintain specified tire inflation pressure (a placard with the recommended tire inflation pressures is located on the driver's door B-pillar (▷page 352)).
• Check tires for possible damage and remove foreign objects.
• Replace missing valve caps.

Rims

- Dented or bent rims can cause tire inflation pressure loss and damage the tire beads. For this reason, check and, if necessary, change rims before driving off-road.

Vehicle tool kit

• Check if the vehicle jack (▷ page 450) is functional.
  • In all cases take the vehicle tool kit, a strong tow rope, a shovel and a small plank (to put under the vehicle jack on sandy soil) with you.

Driving in steep terrain

Red SUV driving on a dirt path with two numbered arrows indicating directions (no text or symbols on the vehicle itself)

Slope angle

① Overhang angle, front
② Overhang angle, rear

Vehicles with steel suspension	1	1^1	2
	31° 22° 29°

^1 Vehicles with AMG Sport-Package*

Operation

Driving instructions

Vehicles with air suspension pro-gram*	1	11	2
Raised level 34° 29° 31°
Highway 29° 22° 27°

^1 Vehicles with AMG Sport-Package*

ML 63 AMG 1 2

Raised level 28° 29°

Highway 23° 24°

• Comply with the warnings ( page 319) and rules for off-road driving ( page 321).

• Driving on embankments, slopes and other steep inclines should only be done straight up or downhill, i.e. in the line of gravity. Maximum vehicle climbing ability is a 100% grade which is equivalent to a slope angle of 45 degrees. Keep in mind that the climbing ability of the vehicle depends on terrain conditions.

• Shift automatic transmission to position 1 (▷page 192).

• Drive slowly.
• Avoid excessive engine speeds – drive with moderate engine speeds (max. 3000 rpm).
• Utilize the engine's braking power when descending a slope, observe the engine speed (do not overrev the engine). Apply the service brake as needed.

For maximum engine speed, see "Instrument cluster" (▷page 26) and see "Engine" (▷page 513).

- Check the brakes after a lengthy downgrade drive.

Warning!

Never turn the vehicle around on steep inclines. The vehicle might roll over. If the vehicle cannot complete the attempted climb, back it down in reverse gear.

The hill start assist system supports you when driving uphill.

For more information, see "Hill start assist system" (▷page 191).

Traction in steep terrain

The maximum vehicle climbing ability is a 100% grade which is equivalent to a slope angle of 45 degrees. Keep in mind that the climbing ability of the vehicle depends on terrain conditions.

Be easy on the accelerator and watch for continuous wheel traction when driving in steep terrain.

The 4-ETS helps greatly when starting out on a steep incline when the front wheels have then the tendency to slip due to the weight shifting towards the rear axle.

The 4-ETS recognizes the situation and limits the torque for the front wheels by braking them.

Simultaneously the torque for the rear wheels is increased.

Operation

Driving instructions

Driving across a hilltop

Decelerate just ahead of a hilltop (do not shift automatic transmission to position N), to prevent the vehicle from speeding up too much after climbing a hill.

Use the momentum of the vehicle to drive across the hilltop.

After climbing a hill, driving in this manner prevents the vehicle from:

• losing ground contact when cresting hills
• losing its forward momentum
  • speeding up too much after climbing the hill

Driving downhill

• Drive slowly.

• Do not drive at an angle to the incline. Steer into the line of gravity and drive with the front wheels pointing straight downhill. Otherwise, the vehicle may slide sideways off the path and roll over.

• Shift automatic transmission to position 1 (▷page 192).

• On steep inclines, use the Downhill Speed Regulation (▶page 249).
• Utilize the engine's braking power to reduce vehicle speed.

If this is insufficient, apply the brakes gently. Make sure the vehicle is moving in the line of gravity.

- Check the brakes after a lengthy down-grade drive.

The special Off-road - ABS (▷ page 99) setting allows for precise and brief (cyclical) blocking of the front wheels, permitting them to dig into loose ground.

Remember that, when stopped, the front wheels slide across a surface and thus lose their ability to steer the vehicle.

Driving through water

Illustration of a red SUV driving on a road with a blue water channel and green hills in the background (no text or symbols)

① Fording depth

Vehicles with steel suspension	1
	20.00 in (50 cm)

Vehicles with air suspension program* or ML 63 AMG	1
Raised level 20.00 in (50 cm)

• Before driving through water, determine its depth.
  ! The water depth must not exceed the respective value listed in the table. The ground under the water might not be firm which could result the water being deeper than expected when driving the vehicle through it. Please note that the water level is correspondingly lower for flowing water.
• Vehicles with air suspension program*: Select the highest vehicle level possible (▷page 255).
• Switch to off-road driving program (▶page 253) before driving through water.
• Shift automatic transmission to position 1 or 2 (▶page 192).
• Avoid high engine speeds.
• Enter and leave the water only at a shallow spot, driving at walking speed.

! Never accelerate before driving into the water. The bow wave could force water into the engine and auxiliary equipment, thus damaging them.

• Drive through the water slowly and at a constant speed.
• Do not stop vehicle while immersed in water, and do not shut off the engine.

Do not open any of the vehicle's doors while driving through water. Water could otherwise enter the vehicle interior and damage the vehicle's electronics, as well as the interior equipment.

• There is a very high level of driving resistance in water. The surface is slippery and may not be firm, making pulling away in water difficult and dangerous.
• Make sure that only small bow waves are formed when driving the vehicle through water.
• Clean mud off the tire tread after driving through water.
  • To dry the brakes, apply pressure to the brake pedal several times while driving after leaving the water.

Crossing obstacles

Illustration of a red Mercedes-Benz SUV driving on a dirt road with green hills in the background (no text or symbols)

Obstacles can damage the vehicle underbody or suspension components. If possible use the assistance of a second person outside the vehicle to scout the path you intend to take and check for adequate ground clearance when you cross obstacles with your vehicle. The person assisting you outside the vehicle should always be a safe distance away from the vehicle and positioned so that he or she cannot get hurt in case of any unexpected vehicle movement.

After off-road driving or crossing obstacles, inspect vehicle for any damage, especially vehicle underbody and suspension components. Failure to do so can adversely affect the vehicle's future performance, including increased chance of an accident.

Operation

Driving instructions

When driving over tree stumps, big rocks and other obstacles, observe the following rules:

• Make sure the off-road driving program (▷page 253) is switched on.
• Avoid high engine speeds.
• Shift automatic transmission to position 1 (▷page 192).
• Check the vehicle clearance before crossing obstacles.
• Cross obstacles (e.g. tree stumps or big rocks) very slowly by aiming one of the front wheels at the center of the obstacle, and repeat same with the rear wheel.

! Special attention is needed when you cross obstacles on a steep incline.

The vehicle could slide sideways as a result of its possible slanted position which in turn may result in the vehicle tipping or rolling over.

Driving on sand

Warning!

Do not reduce the tire inflation pressure before driving through sand. However, if you do so, remember to correct the tire inflation pressure (▷page 359) before continuing your trip. Driving with reduced tire inflation pressure increases the risk of losing control of the vehicle and rolling over.

When driving on sand, observe the following rules:

• Vehicles with air suspension program*: Set the raised level (▷page 255).
• Avoid high engine speeds.

• Shift automatic transmission into a gear range that is appropriate for the terrain.

• In sandy soil, drive at a steady speed as conditions permit. This helps overcome the vehicle rolling resistance and reduce the likelihood of the vehicle sinking into the ground.

• Drive in tracks of other vehicles if they are not too deep and you have sufficient clearance.

Ruts

A number of off-road tracks or other by-ways have deep ruts which can cause the underbody to come in contact with the ground.

• Make sure the off-road driving program (▷page 253) is switched on.
• Vehicles with air suspension program*: Set the raised level (▷page 255).

! Check that the ruts are not too deep and your vehicle's clearance is sufficient. Otherwise:

• your vehicle may be damaged
  • the underbody of the vehicle may come in contact with the ground and you may get stuck
• Avoid high engine speeds.
• Shift automatic transmission to position 1 (▷page 192).
• Drive next to the ruts rather than through them if at all possible.
• If the ruts are too deep to drive in, drive with one side of the vehicle on the grassy center strip if the route permits.

Returning from off-road driving Off-road driving increases strain on the

Warning!

If you feel a sudden significant vibration or ride disturbance, or you suspect that possible damage to your vehicle has occurred, you should turn on the hazard warning flashers, carefully slow down, and drive with caution to an area which is a safe distance from the roadway.

Inspect the tires and under the vehicle for possible damage. If the vehicle or tires appear unsafe, have it towed to the nearest Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center or tire dealer for repairs.

Damage to the vehicle may influence driving comfort and pose the risk of accident to you and other drivers.

vehicle.

We recommend that you inspect the vehicle for possible damage after each off-road trip. Recognizing any damage and a subsequent timely repair reduces the chance of a possible breakdown or accident later on.

Proceed as follows:

• Switch off the off-road driving program (▶page 253).
• Switch off the DSR (▷ page 250).
• Vehicles with air suspension program*: Lower the vehicle back to a level suitable for road conditions, e.g. Highway/High-speed level (▶page 255).
• Clean all exterior lamps and check for possible damage.

- Clean the front and rear license plate.

Operation

Driving instructions

• Remove excessive dirt from tires, wheels, wheel housings, and underbody.
  For instance, after driving in mud, clean the radiator, chassis, engine, brakes, and wheels from extreme dirt using a strong jet of water.
• Check tires for possible damage.
• Inspect vehicle underbody, oil pan, brake hoses, etc., as well as vehicle underbody for possible damage.
• Check for brush or branches caught in the underbody.

! Brush or branches could increase the possibility of a fire, as well as cut fuel and/or brake lines, puncture rubber bellows of the axles or drive shafts.

• After continued operation in mud, sand, water or other dirty conditions clean the brake discs, wheels, brake pads and check and clean axle joints.
- Conduct a brake test.

Trailer towing Trailer hitch\*

Warning!

Failure to use proper equipment and driving technique can result in a loss of vehicle control when towing a trailer.

Improper towing or failure to follow the instructions in this manual can result in vehicle damage and/or serious personal injury. Follow the guidelines below carefully to assure safe trailer operation.

Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center should you require an explanation of information contained in this manual.

• Only install a trailer hitch receiver approved for your vehicle.
  For information on availability and installation, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
• The bumpers on your vehicle are not designed for use with clamp-type hitches.
  Do not attach rental hitches or other bumper-type hitches to them.
• To reduce the possibility of damage, remove the hitch ball adaptor from the receiver when not in use.

Electrical connections

The vehicle is prewired to accept the seven-wire harness included in the Mercedes-Benz approved trailer hitch receiver kit.

A four-pole conversion plug is available from your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center as a spare part.

For further information, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

Vehicle and trailer weights and ratings

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) is the maximum permissible vehicle weight:

ML 350, ML 550, ML 320 CDI: 6235 lb (2830 kg)

ML 63 AMG: 6400 lb (2900 kg)

Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW): Comprises weight of vehicle including fuel, tools, spare wheel, installed accessories, passengers, cargo and trailer tongue. It must never exceed the GVWR.

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) is the maximum permissible axle weight:

ML 320 CDI

ML 350

ML 550

Front 3085 lb (1400 kg)

Rear 3525 lb (1600 kg)

ML 63 AMG

Front 3180 lb (1440 kg)

Rear 3525 lb (1600 kg)

The Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo, equipment, luggage etc. loaded on the trailer. The maximum permissible gross trailer weight to be towed: 7200 lb (3265 kg)

Trailer Tongue Weight Rating (TWR) is the maximum permissible weight on the trailer tongue:

576 lb (261 kg) limit for Mercedes-Benz approved hitch receiver.

Loading a trailer

- When loading a trailer, you should observe that neither the permissible GTW, nor the GVWR are exceeded.

Maximum permissible values are listed on the safety compliance certification labels for the vehicle and for the trailer to be towed.

The lowest value listed must be selected when determining how the vehicle and trailer are loaded.

• The tongue weight at the hitch ball must be added to the GVW to prevent exceeding your Mercedes-Benz tow vehicle's rear GAWR.
  We recommend loading the trailer in such a manner that it has a Tongue Weight (TW) between 8% and 15% of the Gross Trailer Weight (GTW).
  i Maximum trailer weight ratings are calculated assuming the vehicle, plus driver. The weight of other accessories, passengers and cargo will reduce the maximum trailer weight and Tongue Weight (TW) your vehicle can tow.

Operation

Driving instructions

Checking weights of vehicle and trailer

• To assure that the tow vehicle and trailer are in compliance with the maximum permissible weight limits have the loaded rig (tow vehicle including driver, passengers and cargo, trailer fully loaded) weighed on a commercial scale.
• Check the vehicle's front and rear Gross Axle Weight (GAW), the Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) and Tongue Weight (TW).

The values as measures must not exceed the weight limits listed under "Vehicle and trailer weight and ratings" (▷page 329).

Attaching a trailer Observe maximum permitted trailer

Warning!

Vehicles with air suspension program*: While you are coupling or decoupling a trailer, make sure that you do not

• lock or unlock
• open or close

a vehicle door or the tailgate.

The vehicle's level could change and you could endanger yourself and/or others as a result.

Make sure that you do not operate the ADS button* (▷page 255) or the vehicle level control system* (▷ page 255) when coupling/decoupling the trailer.

dimensions (width and length).

Most states and all Canadian provinces require

- safety chains between your tow vehicle and the trailer.

The chains should be criss-crossed under the trailer tongue. They must be attached to the hitch receiver, and not to the vehicle's bumper or axle.

Make sure to leave enough slack in the chains to permit turning corners.

• a separate brake system at various trailer weights.
• a break-away switch on trailers with a separate brake system. Check with your local state laws for specific requirements.

The switch activates the trailer brakes in the possible event that the trailer might separate from the tow vehicle.

! Do not connect a trailer brake system (if trailer is so equipped) directly to the vehicle's hydraulic brake system, as your vehicle is equipped with antilock brakes. If you do, neither the vehicle's brakes nor the trailer's brakes will function properly.
The provided vehicle electrical wiring harness for trailer towing has a brake signal wire for hook-up to a brake controller.
You should consider using a trailer sway control system. For further information, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
▶Make sure the automatic transmission is set to P (▷page 185).
▶Set the parking brake for the vehicle (▷page 65).
▶ Start the engine (▷ page 54).
▶Vehicles with air suspension program*: Set the vehicle level to Highway (▷page 255).

▶ Vehicles with air suspension program*: Set the ADS* to AUTO or COMFORT (▷page 255).
▶ Turn off the engine (▷ page 66).
▶Close all doors and the tailgate.
▶Attach the trailer.
▶Plug in all electrical connectors.

i Vehicles with air suspension program*:

When you are towing a trailer, the vehicle level always remains in the Highway setting.

The following applies additionally when towing a trailer:

- The vehicle is lowered to the highway level when it reaches a speed of 5 mph (8 km/h) if not set to highway level.

• The high-speed level is not available.

The restrictions that apply to towing also apply when using accessories that are connected to the trailer power socket, such as a bicycle rack.

Towing a trailer

There are many different laws, including speed limit restrictions, having to do with trailer towing. Make sure your rig will be legal, not only for where you reside, but also for where you will be driving. A good source for this information can be the police or local authorities.

Note the following points, when driving with the trailer:

• In order to gain skill and an understanding of the vehicle's behavior, you should practice turning, stopping and backing up in an area which is free from traffic.
  • Before you start driving check the

• trailer hitch

• break-away switch
• safety chains
  •electrical connections
  • lighting and tires

Operation

Driving instructions

• Adjust the mirrors (▷ page 49) to permit unobstructed view beyond rear of trailer.
• If the trailer has electric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving slowly, and then apply only the trailer brake controller by hand to make sure the brakes are working properly.
  • Always secure items in the trailer to prevent load shifts while driving.

• When towing a trailer, check occasionally to make sure the load is secure, and that lighting and trailer brakes (if so equipped) are functioning properly.
  • Take into consideration that when towing a trailer, the handling characteristics are different and less stable from those when operating the vehicle without a trailer.
  It is important to avoid sudden maneuvers.

• The vehicle and trailer combination is heavier, and therefore is limited in acceleration and climbing ability, and requires longer stopping distances.
  It is more prone to reacting to cross wind gusts, and requires more sensitive steering input.

• If possible, do not brake abruptly, but rather engage the brake slightly at first to permit the trailer to activate its brake. Then increase the braking force.

! If the trailer should begin to sway, reduce the vehicle's speed immediately.

In no case attempt to straighten out the tow vehicle and trailer by increasing the speed.

- If the transmission repeatedly shifts between gears on inclines, manually shift to a lower gear (select 4, 3, 2 or 1) (▷page 192).

A lower gear and reduction of speed reduces the chance of engine overloading and/or overheating.

• On very steep inclines, not manageable with automatic transmission in 1, switch on off-road driving program (▷page 253).
• When going down a long hill, shift into a lower gear and use the engine's braking effect.
  Avoid riding the brakes, thus overheating the vehicle and trailer brakes.
• If the engine coolant rises to an extremely high temperature (coolant temperature needle approaching the red zone) when the air conditioning is on, turn off the air conditioning system.
  Engine coolant heat can be additionally vented by opening the windows, switching the climate control fan speed to high and setting the temperature control to the maximum hot position.

Operation

Driving instructions

- Extreme care must be exercised since your vehicle with a trailer will require additional passing distance ahead than when driving without a trailer.

Because your vehicle and trailer is longer than your vehicle alone, you will also need to go much farther ahead of the passed vehicle before you can return to your lane.

Uncoupling the trailer

Warning!

Vehicles with air suspension program*:

While you are coupling or decoupling a trailer, make sure that you do not

• lock or unlock
• open or close

a vehicle door or the tailgate.

The vehicle's level could change and you could endanger yourself and/or others as a result.

Make sure that you do not operate the ADS button* (▷page 255) or the vehicle level control system* (▷page 255) when coupling/decoupling the trailer.

▶ Make sure the automatic transmission is set to P (▷page 185).
▶Set the parking brake for the vehicle (▷page 65).

▶ Start the engine (▷ page 54).
▶Close all doors and the tailgate.
▶Set the parking brake for the trailer.

Warning!

Vehicles with air suspension program*:

As soon as you disconnect the electrical connection between the trailer and the vehicle, the vehicle will lower. To help avoid personal injury, make sure no one is near the wheel housing or underneath the vehicle before the electrical connection is disconnected.

When you uncouple the trailer, the vehicle is temporarily raised because the springs are relieved of load. Be especially careful during this process, as you could otherwise injure yourself and/or others. Make sure that any persons remaining in the vehicle do not press the switches for vehicle level control or the ADS*.

▶Disconnect all electrical plug connectors.
▶Uncouple the trailer.
▶ Make sure that the trailer coupling is free of load.
▶ Turn off the engine (▷ page 66).

Operation

Driving instructions

Passenger compartment Driving abroad

Warning!

Always fasten items being carried as securely as possible.

In an accident, during hard braking or sudden maneuvers, loose items will be thrown around inside the vehicle, and cause injury to vehicle occupants unless the items are securely fastened in the vehicle.

The rear cargo compartment is the preferred place to carry objects. Always use tie down rings, and if so equipped, always use the cargo net* when transporting cargo. The cargo net* cannot secure hard or heavy objects. Always fasten items being carried as securely as possible using the cargo tie-down rings in the cargo floor area and fastening materials.

Abroad, there is an extensive Mercedes-Benz service network at your disposal. If you plan to drive into areas which are not listed in the index of your Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center directory, you should request pertinent information from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

Control and operation of radio transmitters

COMAND system, radio and telephone\*

Warning!

Do not forget that your primary responsibility is to drive the vehicle. Only operate the COMAND system, radio or telephone ^1 if road, weather and traffic conditions permit.

Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) every second.

Telephones and two-way radios

Warning!

Never operate radio transmitters equipped with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. without being connected to an external antenna) from inside the vehicle while the engine is running. Doing so could lead to a malfunction of the vehicle's electronic system, possibly resulting in an accident and/or personal injury.

Radio transmitters, such as a portable telephone or a citizens band unit should only be used inside the vehicle if they are connected to an antenna that is installed on the outside of the vehicle.

Refer to the radio transmitter operation instructions regarding use of an external antenna.

Catalytic converter (gasoline engine)

Your Mercedes-Benz is equipped with monolithic-type catalytic converters, an important element in conjunction with the oxygen sensors to achieve substantial control of the pollutants in the exhaust emissions. Keep your vehicle in proper operating condition by following our recommended maintenance instructions as outlined in your Maintenance Booklet.

! To prevent damage to the catalytic converters, use only premium unleaded gasoline in this vehicle.

Any noticeable irregularities in engine operation should be repaired promptly. Otherwise, excessive unburned fuel may reach the catalytic converter, causing it to overheat and potentially start a fire.

Warning!

As with any vehicle, do not idle, park or operate this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as grass, hay or leaves can come into contact with the hot exhaust system, as these materials could be ignited and cause a vehicle fire.

Oxidation catalyst (diesel engine)

Your vehicle is equipped with an oxidation catalyst, an important element in conjunction with the oxygen sensors to achieve substantial control of the pollutants in the exhaust emissions. Keep your vehicle in proper operating condition by following our recommended maintenance instructions as outlined in your Maintenance Booklet.

Warning!

As with any vehicle, do not idle, park or operate this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as grass, hay or leaves can come into contact with the hot exhaust system, as these materials could be ignited and cause a vehicle fire.

Emission control

Certain engine systems serve to keep the toxic components of the exhaust gases within permissible limits required by law.

These systems, of course, will function properly only when maintained strictly according to factory specifications. Any adjustments on the engine should, therefore, be carried out only by qualified Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center authorized technicians.

Operation

Driving instructions

Engine adjustments should not be altered in any way. Moreover, the specified service jobs must be carried out regularly according to Mercedes-Benz servicing requirements. For details refer to the Maintenance Booklet.

Warning!

Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can cause unconsciousness and possible death.

Do not run the engine in confined areas (such as a garage) which are not properly ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas fumes are entering the vehicle while driving, have the cause determined and corrected immediately. If you must drive under these conditions, drive only with at least one window fully open at all times.

Coolant temperature

During severe operating conditions, e.g. stop-and-go traffic, the coolant temperature may rise close to approximately 248^ F ( 120^ C).

The engine should not be operated with the coolant temperature above 248^ F ( 120^ C). Doing so may cause serious engine damage which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

Warning!

• Driving when your engine is overheated can cause some fluids, which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. You could be seriously burned.
• Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns which can occur just by opening the engine hood. Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it.

Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until the engine has cooled down.

Operation

At the gas station

▼ At the gas station

Refueling

Warning!

Gasoline and diesel fuels are highly flammable and poisonous. They burn violently and can cause serious personal injury.

Never allow sparks, flame or smoking materials near gasoline or diesel fuel!

Turn off the engine before refueling.

Whenever you are around gasoline or diesel fuel, avoid inhaling fumes and skin or clothing contact, extinguish all smoking materials.

Direct skin contact with gasoline or diesel fuels and the inhalation of gasoline or diesel fuel vapors are damaging to your health.

Warning!

Do not fill diesel tanks with gasoline. Do not mix diesel fuel with gasoline. Otherwise the fuel system and engine could be damaged. In addition, the vehicle could catch fire.

! Damage resulting from mixing gasoline with diesel is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

! Diesel engine: When filling the diesel fuel tank using fuel containers, place a filling filter, a suede cloth or a clean flannel cloth as a filter. Otherwise, particles from the fuel container could clog the fuel lines and/or the diesel injection system.

The fuel filler flap is located on the right-hand side of the vehicle towards the rear. Locking/unlocking the vehicle with the SmartKey or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* automatically locks/unlocks the fuel filler flap.

In case the central locking system does not release the fuel filler flap, see "Fuel filler flap" ( page 457).

Illustration of a red circular object with a white triangular shape inside, labeled with number 1 (no text or symbols on the object itself)

② ① P88.60-2180-31

① Fuel filler flap ② Fuel filler cap

▶Turn off the engine.

▶ Vehicles with SmartKey: Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch.

Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: Open the driver's door (this puts the starter switch in position 0, same as with the SmartKey removed from the starter switch). The driver's door then can be closed again.

Operation

At the gas station

▶▶▶ Briefly push on fuel filler flap ① at the position indicated by the arrow.

Fuel filler flap ① opens slightly.

▶ Open fuel filler flap ① completely.
▶ Turn fuel filler cap ② counterclockwise and hold on to it until possible pressure is released.
▶ Take off fuel filler cap ②.

! The fuel filler cap is tethered to the fuel filler neck. Do not drop the cap. It could damage the vehicle paint finish.

▶ Set fuel filler cap ② on fuel filler flap ① as shown.
▶To prevent fuel vapors from escaping into open air, fully insert filler nozzle unit.
▶Only fill your tank until the filler nozzle unit cuts out – do not top off or overfill.

Warning!

Overfilling of the fuel tank may create pressure in the system which could cause a gas discharge. This could cause the gas to spray back out when removing the fuel pump nozzle, which could cause personal injury.

▶ Replace fuel filler cap ② by turning it clockwise until it audibly engages.
i Make sure to close the fuel filler flap before locking your vehicle as the flap locking pin prevents closing after you have locked the vehicle.
▶ Close fuel filler flap ①.

You should hear the latch close shut.

Leaving the engine running and the fuel cap open can cause the yellow fuel tank reserve warning lamp to flash and the CHECK ENGINE malfunction indicator lamp (USA only) or the malfunction indicator lamp (Canada only) comes on.

For more information, see "Practical hints" (▷page 403).

i Gasoline engine:

Only use premium unleaded gasoline with a minimum Posted Octane Rating of 91 (average of 96 RON/86 MON). Information on gasoline quality can normally be found on the fuel pump. Please contact gas station personnel in case labels on the pump cannot be found.

For more information on gasoline, see "Premium unleaded gasoline (gasoline engine)"

(>page 526), see “Fuel requirements” (>page 526), and the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet (USA only) or contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

i Diesel engine:

Only use commercially available vehicular ULTRA-LOW SULFUR HIGHWAY DIESEL FUEL (15 ppm SULFUR MAXIMUM). Information on diesel quality can normally be found on the fuel pump. Please contact gas station personnel in case labels on the pump cannot be found.

For more information on diesel fuels, refer to the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet (USA only) or contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

Operation

At the gas station

i Diesel engine:

If you have driven the vehicle until the tank is empty, the fuel system needs to be bled (▶page 488).

! Diesel engine:

The engine is more susceptible to wear and damage if you use

• marine diesel fuel
• heating oil
- additives

The exhaust aftertreatment device will be seriously damaged if you use

• LOW SULFUR HIGHWAY DIESEL FUEL (500 ppm SULFUR MAXIMUM)
  • any other diesel fuel with a sulfur content of above 15 ppm

The use of such non-approved fuels and/or special additives is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

Low outside temperatures (diesel engine)

To prevent malfunctions, diesel fuel with improved cold flow characteristics is offered in the winter months. Check with your fuel retailer.

Do not fill the tank with gasoline. Do not blend diesel fuel with gasoline or kerosine. The fuel system and engine will otherwise be damaged, which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

Check regularly and before a long trip

▶ Open the hood (▷ page 341).

① ② ③ P00 40-2022-31

Example illustration ML 320 CDI (ML 350, ML 550, ML 63 AMG similar)

① Brake fluid
② Coolant level
③ Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system*

Engine oil level

For more information on engine oil, see "Engine oil" (▷page 343).

Operation

At the gas station

Brake fluid

! If you find that the brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark or below, have the brake system checked for brake pad thickness and leaks immediately. Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center immediately. Do not add brake fluid as this will not solve the problem. For more information, see "Brake fluid" ( page 525).

Coolant

For normal replenishing, use water (potable water quality).

For more information, see “Coolant level” (▷page 345) and see “Fuels, coolants, lubricants” (▷page 522).

Windshield/rear window washer system and headlamp cleaning system\*

For more information on refilling the washer reservoir, see "Windshield/rear window washer system and headlamp cleaning system*" (▷page 346).

Vehicle lighting

Check function and cleanliness. For information on replacing light bulbs, see “Replacing bulbs” (▶page 463).

For more information, see "Exterior lamp switch" (▷page 135).

Tire inflation pressure

For more information, see “Checking tire inflation pressure” (▷page 359).

▼Engine compartment

Hood

Warning!

Do not pull the release lever while the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise the hood could be forced open by passing air flow.

This could cause the hood to come loose and injure you and/or others.

Opening

Warning!

If you see flames or smoke coming from the engine compartment, or if the coolant temperature display indicates that the engine is overheated, do not open the hood. Move away from vehicle and do not open the hood until the engine has cooled. If necessary, call the fire department.

Warning!

You could be injured when the hood is open – even when the engine is turned off.

Parts of the engine can become very hot. To prevent burns, let the engine cool off completely before touching any components on the vehicle. Comply with all relevant safety precautions.

Warning!

To help prevent personal injury, stay clear of moving parts when the hood is open and the engine is running.

The radiator fan may continue to run for approximately 30 seconds or may even restart after the engine has been turned off. Stay clear of fan blades.

Warning!

Vehicles with gasoline engine:

The engine is equipped with a transistorized ignition system. Because of the high voltage it is dangerous to touch any components (ignition coils, spark plug sockets, diagnostic socket) of the ignition system

• with the engine running
•while starting the engine
- if ignition is "on" and the engine is turned manually

Operation

Engine compartment

Warning!

Vehicles with diesel engine:

The engine is equipped with a high-voltage electronic control unit for the injection system. Because of the high voltage it is dangerous to touch any components of the injection system (injectors, electrical wires)

• with the engine running
• while starting the engine
- when the ignition is switched on

The hood lock release lever is located in the driver's footwell.

Close-up of a mechanical component with an inset showing a red arrow and orange motion indicator (no text or symbols)

① Release lever

▶ Pull release lever ① downwards.

The hood is unlocked. Handle ② protrudes slightly from the radiator grille. If not, lift the hood slightly.

! To avoid damage to the windshield wipers or hood, never open the hood if the wiper arms are folded forward away from the windshield.

Close-up of a red Mercedes-Benz car showing the steering wheel and keyway (no text or symbols visible)

② Handle for opening the hood

▶ Press and hold handle ②.

The hood is unlocked.

▶Pull up on the hood in direction of arrow and then release it.

The hood will be automatically held open at shoulder height by gas-filled struts.

Operation

Engine compartment

Closing

Warning!

When closing the hood, use extreme caution not to catch hands or fingers. Be careful that you do not close the hood on anyone.

Make sure that the hood is securely engaged before driving off. Do not continue driving if the hood can no longer engage after an accident, for example. The hood could otherwise come loose while the vehicle is in motion and injure you and/or others.

▶Let the hood drop from a height of approximately 1 ft (30 cm).

The hood will lock audibly.

▶Check to make sure the hood is fully closed.

If you can raise the hood at a point above the headlamps, then it is not properly closed. Open it again and let it drop with somewhat greater force.

Engine oil

The amount of oil your engine needs will depend on a number of factors, including driving style. Increased oil consumption can occur when

• the vehicle is new
• the vehicle is driven frequently at higher engine speeds

Engine oil consumption checks should only be made after the vehicle break-in period.

! Do not use any special lubricant additives, as these may damage the drive assemblies. Using special additives not approved by Mercedes-Benz may cause damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

More information on this subject is available at any Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

Checking engine oil level

When checking the oil level

• the vehicle must be parked on level ground
• the vehicle must have been stationary for at least 5 minutes with the engine turned off

Diagram of engine dashboard with numbered parts and a magnified inset showing engine components

Example illustration ML 350 (ML 320 CDI, ML 550, ML 63 AMG similar)

① Oil dipstick
② Upper mark
③ Lower mark

Operation

Engine compartment

▷▷▶ Open the hood (▷ page 341).

▶ Pull out oil dipstick ①.
▶ Wipe oil dipstick ① clean.
▶ Fully insert oil dipstick ① into the dipstick guide tube.
▶ Pull out oil dipstick ① again after approximately 3 seconds to obtain accurate reading.

The oil level is correct when it is between lower mark ③ (min.) and upper mark ② (max.) of the oil dipstick.

All models (except ML 63 AMG):

The filling quantity between the upper and lower marks on the oil dipstick is approximately 2.1 US qt. (2.0 l).

ML 63 AMG:

The filling quantity between the upper and lower marks on the oil dipstick is approximately 1.6 US qt. (1.5 l).

▶If necessary, add engine oil (▷page 344).

For more information on engine oil, see "Technical data" section (▷page 522) and (▷page 525).

Adding engine oil

! Only use approved engine oils and oil filters required for vehicles with Maintenance System. For a listing of approved engine oils and oil filters, refer to the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet (USA only) in your vehicle literature portfolio, or contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

Using engine oils and oil filters of specification other than those expressly required for the Maintenance System, or changing of oil and oil filter at change intervals longer than those called for by the Maintenance System will result in engine or emission control system damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

Close-up of a car hood with a magnified inset showing a component detail (no visible text or symbols)

Example illustration ML 320 CDI (ML 350, ML 550 similar)

① Filler cap

Close-up of a car hood with a magnified inset showing a dial indicator (no text or symbols visible)

ML 63 AMG

① Filler cap

▶ Unscrew filler cap ① from filler neck.
▶Add engine oil as required. Never overfill with oil.

Be careful not to spill any oil when adding. Avoid environmental damage caused by oil entering the ground or water.

Excess oil must be siphoned or drained off. It could cause damage to the engine and/or catalytic converter (gasoline engine) or the oxidation catalyst (diesel engine) not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
▶ Screw filler cap ① back on filler neck.

For more information on engine oil, see "Technical data" section (▷page 522) and (▷page 525).

Transmission fluid level

The transmission fluid level does not need to be checked. If you notice transmission fluid loss or gear shifting malfunctions, have an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center check the automatic transmission.

Coolant level

The engine coolant is a mixture of water and anticorrosion/antifreeze.

When checking the coolant level

• the vehicle must be parked on level ground
• the coolant temperature must be below 158^ F ( 70^ C)

Warning!

In order to avoid potentially serious burns:

• Use extreme caution when opening the hood if there are any signs of steam or coolant leaking from the cooling system, or if the coolant temperature display indicates that the coolant is overheated.
• Do not remove pressure cap on coolant reservoir if coolant temperature is above 158^ (70°C). Allow engine to cool down before removing cap. The coolant reservoir contains hot fluid and is under pressure.
• Using a rag, slowly open the cap approximately 1/2 turn to relieve excess pressure. If opened immediately, scalding hot fluid and steam will be blown out under pressure.
• Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts. Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which may burn if it comes into contact with hot engine parts.

Operation

Engine compartment

The coolant expansion tank is located on the driver's side of the engine compartment.

① ② ③ ④ P20.30-2255-31

① Cap
② Coolant expansion tank
③ Indicator wall
④ Coolant level

▶ Using a rag, turn cap ① slowly approximately one half turn counterclockwise to release any excess pressure.

▶ Continue turning cap ① counterclockwise and remove it.

Coolant level ④ is correct if the level:

• for cold coolant: reaches the top of indicator wall ③ visible through the filling opening
  • for warm coolant: is approximately 0.6 in (1.5 cm) higher

▶Add coolant as required.
▶ Replace and tighten cap ①.

For more information on coolant, see "Coolants" (▷page 528).

Windshield/rear window washer system and headlamp cleaning system\*

The windshield washer reservoir is located in the engine compartment.

① P82.35-2396-31

① Cap for windshield washer reservoir

Fluid for the windshield/rear window washer system and the headlamp cleaning system* is supplied from the windshield washer reservoir. It has a capacity of 8.1 US qt (7.7 l).

Operation

Engine compartment

During all seasons, add MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “MB SummerFit” to water. Premix the windshield washer fluid in a suitable container.

Warning!

Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flammable. Do not spill washer solvent/antifreeze on hot engine parts, because it may ignite and burn. You could be seriously burned.

▶ Use the tab to pull cap ① upwards.

▶Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “MB SummerFit” and water (or commercially available premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze, depending on ambient temperatures).

! Always use washer solvent/antifreeze where temperatures may fall below freezing point. Failure to do so could result in damage to the washer system/reservoir.

! Only use washer fluid which is suitable for plastic lenses. Improper washer fluid can damage the plastic lenses of the headlamps.

For more information, see “Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system*” (▶page 530).

Operation

Tires and wheels

Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center for information on tested and recommended rims and tires for summer and winter operation. They can also offer advice concerning tire service and purchase.

Warning!

Replace rims or tires with the same designation, manufacturer and type as shown on the original part. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center for further information. If incorrectly sized rims and tires are mounted:

• The wheel brakes or suspension components can be damaged.
• The operating clearance of the wheels and the tires may no longer be correct.

Warning!

Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the tire tread is badly worn, or if the tires have sustained damage, replace them.

When replacing rims, only use genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts specified for the particular rim type. Failure to do so can result in the bolts loosening and possibly an accident.

Retreaded tires are not tested or recommended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous damage cannot always be recognized on retreads. The operating safety of the vehicle cannot be assured when such tires are used.

Important guidelines

• Only use sets of tires and rims of the same type and make.
• Tires must be of the correct size for the rim.
• Break in new tires for approximately 60 miles (100 km) at moderate speeds.
• Regularly check the tires and rims for damage. Dented or bent rims can cause tire inflation pressure loss or damage to the tire beads.
• If vehicle is heavily loaded, check tire inflation pressure and correct as required.
• Do not allow your tires to wear down too far. Adhesion properties on wet roads are sharply reduced at tread depths of less than 1/8 in (3 mm).
• When replacing individual tires, you should mount new tires on the front wheels first (on vehicles with same-sized wheels all around).

Tire care and maintenance

Warning!

Regularly check the tires for damage. Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pressure loss. As a result, you could lose control of your vehicle.

Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the tire tread is badly worn, or if the tires have sustained damage, replace them.

Regularly check your tire inflation pressure at least once a month. For more information on checking tire inflation pressure, see “Recommended tire inflation pressure” ( page 357).

Tire inspection

Every time you check your tire inflation pressure, you should also inspect your tires for the following:

• excessive treadwear (▷ page 350)
- cord or fabric showing through the tire's rubber
- bumps, bulges, cuts, cracks or splits in the tread or side of the tire

Replace the tire if you find any of the above conditions.

Make sure you also inspect the spare tire periodically for condition and inflation. Spare tires will age and become worn over time even if never used, and thus should be inspected and replaced when necessary.

Life of tire

The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to:

- Driving style

•Tire inflation pressure

- Distance driven

Warning!

Tires and spare tire should be replaced after 6 years, regardless of the remaining tread.

Operation

Tires and wheels

Tread depth

Do not allow your tires to wear down too far. Adhesion properties on wet roads are sharply reduced at tread depths of less than 18 in (3 mm).

Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by law. These indicators are located in six places on the tread circumference and become visible at a tread depth of approximately 116 in (1.6 mm), at which point the tire is considered worn and should be replaced.

Recommended minimum tire tread depth:

• Summer tires ^1/B in (3 mm)
• Winter tires ^1/6 in (4 mm)

Warning!

Although the applicable federal motor safety laws consider a tire to be worn when the treadwear indicators (TWI) become visible at approximately 116 in (1.6 mm), we recommend that you do not allow your tires

to wear down to that level. As tread depth approaches 18 in (3 mm), the adhesion properties on a wet road are sharply reduced.

Depending upon the weather and/or road surface (conditions), the tire traction varies widely.

① TWI P40.10-3136-31

① TWI (Tread Wear Indicator)

The treadwear indicator appears as a solid band across the tread.

Storing tires

! Keep unmounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact with oil, grease and gasoline.

Cleaning tires

! Never use a round nozzle to power wash tires. The intense jet of water can result in damage to the tire.

Always replace a damaged tire.

Direction of rotation

Unidirectional tires offer added advantages, such as better hydroplaning performance. To benefit, however, you must make sure the tires rotate in the direction specified.

An arrow on the sidewall indicates the intended direction of rotation (spinning) of the tire.

i Spare wheels may be mounted against the direction of rotation (spinning) even with a unidirectional tire for temporary use only until the regular drive wheel has been repaired or replaced. Always observe and follow applicable temporary use restrictions and speed limitations indicated on the spare wheel.

Loading the vehicle

Two labels on your vehicle show how much weight it may properly carry.

1) The Tire and Loading Information placard can be found on the driver's door B-pillar. This placard tells you important information about the number of people that can be in the vehicle and the total weight that can be carried in the vehicle. It also contains information on the proper size and recommended tire inflation pressures for the original equipment tires on your vehicle.

2) The certification label, also found on the driver's door B-pillar tells you about the gross weight capacity of your vehicle, called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and cargo. The certification label also tells you about the front and rear axle weight capacity, called the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). The GAWR is the total allowable weight that can be carried by a single axle (front or rear). Never exceed the GVWR or GAWR for either the front axle or rear axle.

Operation

Tires and wheels

Interior view of a car showing the rear side of a red car with a numbered component (no text or symbols visible)

① Driver's door B-pillar

Following is a discussion on how to work with the information contained on the Tire and Loading Information placard with regards to loading your vehicle.

Tire and Loading Information

Warning!

Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit as indicated on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver's door B-pillar. Overloading the tires can overheat them, possibly causing a blowout. Overloading the tires can also result in handling or steering problems, or brake failure.

Tire and Loading Information placard

Data shown on Tire and Loading Information placard example are for illustration purposes only. Load limit data are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in the illustration below. Refer to Tire and Loading Information placard on vehicle for actual data specific to your vehicle.

TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL 5 FRONT 2 REAR 3 The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.* TIRE SIZE COLD TIRE PRESSURE SEE OWNER'S FRONT P195/70R14 200KPA, 29PSI MANUAL FOR REAR P195/70R14 200KPA, 29PSI ADDITIONAL SPARE T125/70D15 420KPA, 60PSI INFORMATION P40.00-2062-31

① Load limit information on the Tire and Loading Information placard

The Tire and Loading Information placard showing the load limit information is located on the driver's door B-pillar (▷page 352).

▶Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kilograms or XXX lbs." on the Tire and Loading Information placard.

The combined weight of all occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer tongue load (if applicable) should never exceed the weight referenced in that statement.

Operation

Tires and wheels

Seating capacity

The seating capacity gives you important information on the number of occupants that can be in the vehicle. Observe front and rear seating capacity. The Tire and Loading Information placard showing the seating capacity is located on the driver's door B-pillar (▷page 352).

Data shown on Tire and Loading Information placard example are for illustration purposes only. Seating data are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in the illustration below. Refer to Tire and Loading Information placard on vehicle for actual data specific to your vehicle.

TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION SEATING CAPACITY 1 TOTAL 5 * FRONT 2 * REAR 3 The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lg or XXX lbs.* TIRE SIZE COLD TIRE PRESSURE SEE OWNER'S FRONT P195/70R14 200KPA, 29PSI MANUAL FOR REAR P195/70R14 200KPA, 29PSI ADDITIONAL SPARE T125/70D15 420KPA, 60PSI INFORMATION P40.00-2063-31

① Seating capacity information on the Tire and Loading Information placard.

Steps for determining correct load limit

The following steps have been developed as required of all manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the "National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966".

Step 1

▶Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard.

Step 2

▶Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

Step 3

▶Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX lbs.

▷▷

Operation

Tires and wheels

▷▷Step 4

The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals 1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lbs passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (1400-750 (5 × 150) = 650 lbs).

Step 5

▶Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4.

Step 6 (if applicable)

▶If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle (▷page 356).

The following table shows examples on how to calculate total and cargo load capacities with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. The following examples use a load limit of 1500 lbs. This is for illustration purposes only. Make sure you are using the actual load limit for your vehicle stated on the vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard (>page 352).

Operation

Tires and wheels

Example	Combined weight limit of occu-pants and cargo from placard	Number of occupants (driver and passengers)	Seating configura-tion	Occupants weight	Combined weight of all occupants	Available cargo/luggage and trailer tongue weight (total load limit from placard minus combined weight of all occupants)
1	1500 lbs 5 front: 2		rear: 3	Occupant 1: 150 lbs	750 lbs	1500 lbs - 750 lbs = 750 lbs
				Occupant 2: 180 lbs
				Occupant 3: 160 lbs
				Occupant 4: 140 lbs
				Occupant 5: 120 lbs
2	1500 lbs 3 front: 1		rear: 2	Occupant 1: 200 lbs	540 lbs	1500 lbs - 540 lbs = 960 lbs
				Occupant 2: 190 lbs
				Occupant 3: 150 lbs
3	1500 lbs	1	front:1	Occupant 1: 150 lbs	150 lbs	1500 lbs - 150 lbs = 1350 lbs

The higher the weight of all occupants, the less cargo and luggage load capacity is available.
For more information, see "Trailer tongue load" (▷page 356).

Operation

Tires and wheels

Certification label

Even after careful determination of the combined weight of all occupants, cargo and the trailer tongue load (if applicable) ( page 356) as to not exceed the permissible load limit, you must make sure that your vehicle never exceeds the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for either the front or rear axle. You can obtain the GVWR and GAWR from the certification label. The certification label can be found on the driver's door B-pillar, see “Technical data” ( page 507).

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR): The total weight of the vehicle, all occupants, all cargo, and the trailer tongue load ( page 356) must never exceed the GVWR.

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): The total allowable weight that can be carried by a single axle (front or rear).

To assure that your vehicle does not exceed the maximum permissible weight limits (GVWR and GAWR for front and rear axle), have the loaded vehicle (including driver, passengers and all cargo and, if applicable, trailer fully loaded) weighed on a suitable commercial scale.

Trailer tongue load

The tongue load of any trailer is an important weight to measure because it affects the load you can carry in your vehicle. If a trailer is towed, the tongue load must be added to the weight of all occupants riding and any cargo you are carrying in the vehicle. The tongue load typically is between 8% and 15% of the trailer weight and everything loaded in it.

For more information on trailer tongue load, see "Loading a trailer" (▶page 329).

Recommended tire inflation pressure

Warning!

Follow recommended tire inflation pressures.

Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from being overheated.

Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can adversely affect handling and ride comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping distance, and result in sudden deflation (blowout) because they are more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris, potholes etc.

Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit as indicated on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver's door B-pillar. Overloading the tires can overheat them, possibly causing a blowout. Overloading the tires can also result in handling or steering problems, or brake failure.

Your vehicle is equipped with the Tire and Loading Information placard located on the driver's door B-pillar (▷page 352).

The tire inflation pressure should be checked regularly and should only be adjusted on cold tires. The tires can be considered cold if the vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km).

Follow recommended cold tire inflation pressures listed on Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver's door B-pillar.

Keeping the tires properly inflated provides the best handling, tread life and riding comfort.

In addition to the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver's door B-pillar, also consult the tire inflation pressure label (if available) on the fuel filler flap ( page 337) for any additional information pertaining to special driving situations. For more information, see "Important notes on tire inflation pressure" ( page 358).

Operation

Tires and wheels

Data shown on Tire and Loading Information placard example are for illustration purposes only. Tire data are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in the illustration below. Refer to Tire and Loading Information placard on vehicle for actual data specific to your vehicle.

TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION STATING CAPACITY TOTAL 5", FRONT 2", REAR 3 The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.* TIRE SIZE COLD TIRE PRESSURE FRONT P195/70R14 200KPA, 29PSI REAR P195/70R14 200KPA, 29PSI SPARE T126/70D15 420KPA, 60PSI SEE OWNER'S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION P40.00-2064-31

① Tire and Loading Information placard with recommended cold tire inflation pressures

The Tire and Loading Information placard lists the recommended cold tire inflation pressures for maximum loaded vehicle weight. The tire inflation pressures listed apply to the tires installed as original equipment.

Important notes on tire inflation pressure

Warning!

If the tire inflation pressure drops repeatedly:

• Check the tires for punctures from foreign objects.
• Check to see whether air is leaking from the valves or from around the rim.

Tire temperature and tire inflation pressure are also increased while driving, depending on the driving speed and the tire load.

If you will be driving your vehicle at high speeds of 100 mph (160 km/h) or higher, where it is legal and conditions allow, consult the tire inflation pressure label on the inside of the fuel filler flap (if available) on how to adjust the cold tire inflation pressure. If you do not adjust the tire inflation pressure, excessive heat can build up and result in sudden tire failure.

If your vehicle is not equipped with the tire inflation pressure label on the inside of the fuel filler flap, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center for proper tire inflation pressure.

Driving comfort may be reduced when the tire inflation pressure is adjusted to the value for speeds above 100 mph (160 km/h) as specified on the tire inflation pressure label located on the inside of the fuel filler flap.

Be sure to readjust the tire inflation pressure for normal driving speeds. You should wait until the tires are cold before adjusting the tire inflation pressure.

Some vehicles may have supplemental tire inflation pressure information for vehicle loads less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition. If such information is provided, it can be found on the tire inflation pressure label located on the inside of the fuel filler flap ( page 337).

Tire inflation pressure changes by approximately 1.5 psi (0.1 bar) per 18^ F ( 10^ C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind when checking tire inflation pressure where the temperature is different from the outside temperature.

Checking tire inflation pressure

Regularly check your tire inflation pressure at least once a month.

Check and adjust the tire inflation pressure when the tires are cold. The tires can be considered cold if the vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km).

If you check the tire inflation pressure when the tires are warm (the vehicle has been driven for several miles or sitting less than 3 hours), the reading will be approximately 4 psi (0.3 bar) higher than the cold reading. This is normal. Do not let air out to match the specified cold tire inflation pressure. Otherwise, the tire will be underinflated.

Warning!

Follow recommended tire inflation pressures.

Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from being overheated.

Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can adversely affect handling and ride comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping distance, and result in sudden deflation (blowout) because they are more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris, potholes etc.

Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit as indicated on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver's door B-pillar. Overloading the tires can overheat them, possibly causing a blowout. Overloading the tires can also result in handling or steering problems, or brake failure.

Checking tire inflation pressure manually

Follow the steps below to achieve correct tire inflation pressure:

▶Remove the cap from the valve on one tire.
▶ Firmly press a tire gauge onto the valve.
▶Read tire inflation pressure on tire gauge and check against the recommended tire inflation pressure on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver's door B-pillar (▶page 352) or, if available, the inside of the fuel filler flap. If necessary, add air to achieve the recommended tire inflation pressure.

Operation

Tires and wheels

▶▶ i If you have overfilled the tire, release tire inflation pressure by pushing the metal stem of the valve with e.g. a tip of a pen. Then recheck the tire inflation pressure with the tire gauge.

▶Install the valve cap.
▶ Repeat this procedure for each tire.

Run Flat Indicator (Canada only)

While the vehicle is being driven, the Run Flat Indicator monitors the set tire inflation pressures by evaluating each wheel's rotational speed. This allows the system to detect a significant loss of pressure in a tire. If a wheel's rotational speed changes due to falling tire inflation pressure, you will see a corresponding warning message in the multifunction display.

The Run Flat Indicator may function in a restricted manner or with a delay

• if snow chains are mounted to the vehicle
  • in presence of ice and snow
• if you are driving on a loose surface (e.g. sand or gravel)
• if you are driving in a very sporty manner (involving rapid acceleration or high speeds in curves)

Warning!

When the multifunction display shows the message Tire Pressure Check Tires, one or more of your tires is significantly underinflated. You should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper tire inflation pressure as indicated on the vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard or, if available, on the tire inflation pressure label. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Each tire, including the spare, should be checked monthly when cold and set to the recommended tire inflation pressure as specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver's door B-pillar ( page 352) or, if available, on the tire inflation pressure label located on the inside of the fuel filler flap ( page 337).

Operation

Tires and wheels

Warning!

The Run Flat Indicator does not provide a warning for wrongly selected tire inflation pressures. Always adjust tire inflation pressure according to the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver's door B-pillar ( page 352) or, if available, on the tire inflation pressure label located on the inside of the fuel filler flap ( page 337).

The Run Flat Indicator does not replace regular checks of the tire inflation pressures since a gradual pressure loss in more than one tire cannot be detected by the Run Flat Indicator.

The Run Flat Indicator is not able to issue a warning due to a sudden dramatic loss of tire inflation pressure (e.g. tire blowout caused by a foreign object). In this case bring the vehicle to a halt by carefully applying the brakes and avoiding abrupt steering maneuvers.

Restarting the Run Flat Indicator

The Run flat indicator must be restarted in the following situations:

• If you have changed the tire inflation pressure
• If you have replaced the wheels or tires
• If you have installed new wheels or tires

Using the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver's door B-pillar or, if available, the tire inflation pressure label on the inside of the fuel filler flap, make sure the tire inflation pressure of all four tires is correct.

Warning!

The Run Flat Indicator can only warn you in a reliable manner if you have set the correct tire inflation pressures for each tire.

If an incorrect tire inflation pressure was set, the system will monitor the pressure according to the incorrect value.

▶ Switch on the ignition (▷ page 40).
Make sure the standard display menu appears in the multifunction display ( page 147).
▶ Press button 🏠 or 🏠 repeatedly until the following message appears in the multifunction display:

Run Flat Indicator Refive Menu: R-Button

▶Press the reset button on the instrument cluster (▷page 145).

The following message will appear in the multifunction display:

Restart

Run Flat Indicator?

Yes

Cancel

Operation

Tires and wheels

If you wish to confirm activation:

▶ Press button + .

The following message will appear in the multifunction display:

Run Flat Indicator

Restarted

After a certain “learning phase”, the Run Flat Indicator checks the set pressure values for all four tires.

If you wish to cancel activation:

▶ Press button —.

or

▶Wait until the message

Restart

Run Flat Indicator?

Yes

Cancel

disappears.

Checking tire pressure electronically with the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS), (USA only)

The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) is equipped with a combination low tire pressure/TPMS malfunction telltale in the instrument cluster ( page 27). Depending on how the telltale illuminates, it indicates a low tire pressure condition or a malfunction in the TPMS system itself:

• If the telltale illuminates continuously, one or more of your tires is significantly underinflated. There is no malfunction in the TPMS.
• If the telltale flashes for 60 seconds and then stays illuminated, the TPMS system itself is not operating properly.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

The TPMS only functions on wheels that are equipped with the proper electronic sensors. It monitors the tire inflation pressure, as selected by the driver, in all four tires. A warning is issued to alert you to a decrease in pressure in one or more of the tires.

Warning!

The TPMS does not indicate a warning for wrongly selected inflation pressures. Always adjust tire inflation pressure according to the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver's door B-pillar or, if available, the supplemental tire inflation pressure information on the inside of the fuel filler flap.

The TPMS is not able to issue a warning due to a sudden dramatic loss of pressure (e.g. tire blowout caused by a foreign object). In this case bring the vehicle to a halt by carefully applying the brakes and avoiding abrupt steering maneuvers.

Warning!

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver's door B-Pillar or, if available, the tire inflation pressure label on the fuel filler flap. If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the Tire and Loading Information placard or, if available, the tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to

overheat and can lead to tire failure.

Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if underinflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately 1 minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.

▶▶

Operation

Tires and wheels

TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

If a condition causing the TPMS to malfunction develops, it may take up to 10 minutes for the system to signal a malfunction using the TPMS telltale flashing and illumination sequence.

The telltale extinguishes after a few minutes driving if the malfunction has been corrected.

i Operating radio transmission equipment (e.g. wireless headsets, two-way radios) in or near the vehicle could cause the TPMS to malfunction.

Tire inflation pressure warnings

If the system detects a significant loss of tire inflation pressure in one or more than one tire, a message appears in the multifunction display.

Tire Pressure Check Tires P54 32-4891-31

Example illustration

In addition, a warning signal sounds.

Reactivating the TPMS

Warning!

It is the driver's responsibility to calibrate the TPMS on the recommended cold inflation pressure. Underinflated tires affect the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You might lose control over the vehicle.

The TPMS must be restarted when you have adjusted the tire inflation pressure to a new level (e.g. because of different load or driving conditions). The TPMS is then recalibrated to the current tire inflation pressures.

▶Using the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver's door B-pillar (▷page 352) or, if available, the supplemental tire inflation pressure information on the inside of the fuel filler flap (▷page 337), make sure the tire inflation pressure of all four tires is correct.

i Restart the TPMS after adjusting the tire inflation pressure to the inflation pressure recommended for the vehicle operating condition. Tire pressure should only be adjusted on cold tires. Observe the recommended tire inflation pressure on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver's door B-pillar (▷page 352). Some vehicles may have supplemental tire inflation pressure information for driving at high speeds (▷page 358) or for vehicle loads less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition (▷page 358). If such information is provided, it can be found on the inside of the fuel filler flap.

▶ Switch on the ignition (▷ page 40).
▶ Press button 📄 or 📄 on the multifunction steering wheel repeatedly until the standard display menu appears in the multifunction display (▷page 147).

▶ Press button 🏠 or 🖼 repeatedly until you see the following message:

Tire Pressure Monitor

Active

Menu: R-Button

▶ Press the reset button (▷ page 145).
The following message will appear in the multifunction display:
Restart tire pressure monitor?

▶ Press button + .

The following message will appear in the multifunction display:

Tire Pressure Monitor Restarted

After driving a few minutes the system verifies that the current tire inflation pressures are within the system's specified range. Afterwards the current tire inflation pressures are accepted as reference pressures and then monitored.

If you wish to cancel activation:

▶ Press button —.

Checking tire pressure electronically with the Advanced Tire Pressure Monitoring System (Advanced TPMS) ^* , (Canada only)

This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

The TPMS only functions on wheels that are equipped with the proper electronic sensors. It monitors the tire inflation pressure, as selected by the driver, in all four tires. A warning is issued to alert you to a decrease in pressure in one or more of the tires.

Tire pressure inquiries are made using the multifunction display. The present inflation pressures are displayed only after a few minutes' travel time.

Operation

Tires and wheels

Possible differences between the readings of a tire pressure gauge of an air hose, e.g. gas station equipment, and the vehicle's control system can occur. Usually the readings issued by the control system are more precise.

▶ Switch on the ignition (▷ page 40).
▶ Press button ▲ or ▼ on the multifunction steering wheel until the current inflation pressures for each tire appear in the multifunction display.

Tire Pressure 30 33 32 34 [psi] PS4.32-4568-31

When the vehicle has been parked for longer than 20 minutes, the message Tire pressure displayed after driving for a few minutes. appears in the multifunction display.

Warning!

It is the driver's responsibility to calibrate the TPMS on the recommended cold inflation pressure. Underinflated tires affect the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You might lose control over the vehicle.

With a spare wheel without wheel sensor mounted, the system may still indicate the tire inflation pressure of the removed wheel for some minutes. If this happens, keep in mind that the indicated value where the spare wheel is mounted does not reflect the actual spare tire inflation pressure.

Warning!

The TPMS does not indicate a warning for wrongly selected inflation pressures. Always adjust tire inflation pressure according to the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver's door B-pillar or, if available, the supplemental tire inflation pressure information on the inside of the fuel filler flap.

The TPMS is not able to issue a warning due to a sudden dramatic loss of pressure (e.g. tire blowout caused by a foreign object). In this case bring the vehicle to a halt by carefully applying the brakes and avoiding abrupt steering maneuvers.

Operation

Tires and wheels

Warning!

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver's door B-Pillar or, if available, the tire inflation pressure label on the fuel filler flap. If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or the tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires are significantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.

Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may effect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

i Operating radio transmission equipment (e.g. wireless headsets, two-way radios) in or near the vehicle could cause the TPMS to malfunction.

Tire inflation pressure warnings

If the system detects a significant loss of tire inflation pressure in one or more than one tire, a message appears in the multifunction display.

Check Tire(s) 30 93 32 [pai] 20 754.32-4596-31

Example illustration

The respective tire is indicated by a red rectangle. In addition, a warning signal sounds.

Operation

Tires and wheels

Restarting Advanced TPMS\*

The TPMS usually recognizes new reference values automatically, for example when you have

• adjusted the tire inflation pressure
• changed wheels or tires
  • mounted new wheels or tires

Warning!

It is the driver's responsibility to calibrate the TPMS on the recommended cold inflation pressure. Underinflated tires affect the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You might lose control over the vehicle.

If you want to set new reference values manually:

▶ Using the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver's door B-pillar (▷page 352) or, if available, the supplemental tire inflation pressure information on the inside of the fuel filler flap (▷page 337), make sure the tire inflation pressure of all four tires is correct.

i Reactivate the TPMS after adjusting the tire inflation pressure to the inflation pressure recommended for the vehicle operating condition. Tire pressure should only be adjusted on cold tires. Observe the recommended tire inflation pressure on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver's door B-pillar (▷page 352). Some vehicles may have supplemental tire inflation pressure information for driving at high speeds (▷page 358) or for vehicle loads less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition (▷page 358). If such information is provided, it can be found on the inside of the fuel filler flap.

▶ Press button 📄 or 📋 on the multifunction steering wheel repeatedly until the standard display menu appears in the multifunction display (▷page 147).
▶ Press button or repeatedly until

- the current inflation pressures for each tire appear in the multifunction display

or

• the following message appears in the multifunction display

Tire pressure displayed after driving for a few minutes.

▶ Press the reset button (▷ page 145).

The following message will appear in the multifunction display:

Restart tire pressure monitor?

Operation

Tires and wheels

▶ Press button

The following message will appear in the multifunction display:

Tire Pressure Monitor Restarted

After a few minutes driving, the current tire inflation pressure values are accepted as reference values and then monitored.

If you wish to cancel activation:

▶ Press button

Potential problems associated with underinflated and overinflated tires

Underinflated tires

Underinflated tires can:

• cause excessive and uneven tire wear
  •adversely affect fuel economy
• lead to tire failure from being overheated
  •adversely affect handling characteristics

Warning!

Follow recommended tire inflation pressures.

Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from being overheated.

Overinflated tires

Overinflated tires can:

•adversely affect handling characteristics

- cause uneven tire wear

- be more prone to damage from road hazards

•adversely affect ride comfort

•increase stopping distance

Warning!

Follow recommended tire inflation pressures.

Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can adversely affect handling and ride comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping distance, and result in sudden deflation (blowout) because they are more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris, potholes etc.

Operation

Tires and wheels

Tire labeling

Besides tire name (sales designation) and manufacturer name, a number of markings can be found on a tire.

Following are some explanations for the markings on your vehicle's tires:

1 2 3 MANUFACTURER 4 5 6 7 8 9 TIRE NAME P40.10-3561-31

① Uniform Quality Grading Standards (▷page 377)
② DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) (▷page 374)
③ Maximum tire load (▷page 376)
④ Maximum tire inflation pressure ( page 376)
⑤ Manufacturer
⑥ Tire ply material (▷page 379)
⑦ Tire size designation, load and speed rating (▷page 370)
⑧ Load identification (▷page 374)
⑨ Tire name

For illustration purposes only. Actual data on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in above illustration.

For more information, see "Rims and tires" (▷page 515).

Tire size designation, load and speed rating

225/55 R 16 95 H ① ② ③ ④ ⑤ ⑥ F40:10-3562-31

① Tire width
② Aspect ratio in %
③ Radial tire code
④ Rim diameter
⑤ Tire load rating
⑥ Tire speed rating

For illustration purposes only. Actual data on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in above illustration.

General:

Depending on the design standards used, the tire size molded into the sidewall may have no letter or a letter preceding the tire size designation.

No letter preceding the size designation (as illustrated above): Passenger car tire based on European design standards.

Letter “P” preceding the size designation: Passenger car tire based on U.S. design standards.

Letter "LT" preceding the size designation: Light Truck tire based on U.S. design standards.

Letter “T” preceding the size designation: Temporary spare tires which are high pressure compact spares designed for temporary emergency use only.

Tire width

The tire width ① (▷page 370) indicates the nominal tire width in mm.

Aspect ratio

The aspect ratio ② (▶page 370) is the dimensional relationship between tire section height and section width and is expressed in percentage. The aspect ratio is arrived at by dividing section height by section width.

Tire code

The tire code ③ (▶page 370) indicates the tire construction type. The "R" stands for radial tire type. Letter "D" means diagonal or bias ply construction; letter "B" means belted-bias ply construction.

At the tire manufacturer's option, any tire with a speed capability above 149 mph (240 km/h) can include a "ZR" in the size designation (for example: 245/40 ZR 18). For additional information, see "Tire speed rating" (▶page 372).

Rim diameter

The rim diameter ④ (▶page 370) is the diameter of the bead seat, not the diameter of the rim edge. Rim diameter is indicated in inches (in).

Tire load rating

The tire load rating ⑤ (▷page 370) is a numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can support.

For example, a load rating of 91 corresponds to a maximum load of 1356 lbs (615 kg) the tire is designed to support. See also “Maximum tire load” (▶page 376) where the maximum load associated with the load index is indicated in kilograms and lbs.

Operation

Tires and wheels

Warning!

The tire load rating must always be at least half of the GAWR ( page 380) of your vehicle. Otherwise, tire failure may be the result which may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury to you or others.

Always replace rims and tires with the same designation, manufacturer and type as shown on the original part.

Warning!

Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit as indicated on the Tire and Loading Information placard located on the driver's door B-pillar. Overloading the tires can overheat them, possibly causing a blowout. Overloading the tires can also result in handling or steering problems, or brake failure.

For additional information on tire load rating, see "Load identification" (▷page 374).

Tire load rating ⑤ ( page 370) and Tire speed rating ⑥ ( page 370) are also referred to as “service description”.

Tire speed rating

The tire speed rating ⑥ (▷page 370) indicates the approved maximum speed for the tire.

Warning!

Even when permitted by law, never operate a vehicle at speeds greater than the maximum speed rating of the tires.

Exceeding the maximum speed for which tires are rated can lead to sudden tire failure, causing loss of vehicle control and possibly resulting in an accident and/or personal injury and possible death, for you and for others.

Tire load rating ⑤ (▷ page 370) and Tire speed rating ⑥ (▷page 370) are also referred to as "service description".

Summer tires

Index Speed rating

Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h)

R up to 106 mph (170 km/h)

S up to 112 mph (180 km/h)

T up to 118 mph (190 km/h)

H up to 130 mph (210 km/h)

V up to 149 mph (240 km/h)

W up to 168 mph (270 km/h)

Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)

(Y) above 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR above 149 mph (240 km/h)

- At the tire manufacturer's option, any tire with a speed capability above 149 mph (240 km/h) can include a "ZR" in the size designation (for example: 245/40 ZR18). To determine the maximum speed capability of the tire, the service description for the tire must be referred to. The service description is comprised of the tire load rating ⑤ (▶page 370) and the tire speed rating ⑥ (▶page 370).

If your tire includes "ZR" in the size designation and no service description ⑤ and ⑥ (▶page 370) is given, the tire manufacturer must be consulted for the maximum speed capability.

If a service description ⑤ and ⑥ (▶page 370) is given, the speed capability is limited by the speed symbol in the service description.

Example: 245/40 ZR18 97Y.

In this example, “97Y” is the service description. The letter “Y” designates the speed rating and the speed capability of the tire is limited to 186 mph (300 km/h).

- Any tire with a speed capability above 186 mph (300 km/h) must include a "ZR" in the size designation AND the service description must be placed in parenthesis. Example: 275/40 ZR 18 (99Y). The "(Y)" speed rating in parenthesis designates the maximum speed capability of the tire as being above 186 mph (300 km/h). Consult the tire manufacturer for the actual maximum permissible speed of the tire.

All-season and winter tires

Index Speed rating

Q	M+S ^1	up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
T	M+S ^1	up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
H	M+S ^1	up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
V	M+S ^1	up to 149 mph (240 km/h)

^1 or M+S 🌐 for winter tires

i Not all M+S rated tires provide special winter performance. Make sure the tires you use show M+S and the mountain/snowflake marking on the tire sidewall. These tires meet specific snow traction performance requirements of the Rubber Manufacturers Association (RMA) and the Rubber Association of Canada (RAC) and have been designed specifically for use in snow conditions.

Operation

Tires and wheels

Load identification

275/16 R 16 95 H ① P40:10-3560-31

① Load identification
For illustration purposes only. Actual data on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in above illustration.

In addition to tire load rating, special load identification ① may be molded into the tire sidewall following the letter designating the tire speed rating (▷page 370).

No specification given: absence of any text (like in above example) indicates a standard load (SL) tire.

XL or Extra Load: designates an extra load (or reinforced) tire.

Light Load: designates a light load tire.

C, D, E: designates load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure.

DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)

U.S. tire regulations require each new tire manufacturer or tire retreader to mold a TIN into or onto a sidewall of each tire produced.

The TIN is a unique identifier which facilitates efforts by tire manufactures to notify purchasers in recall situations or other safety matters concerning tires and gives purchasers the means to easily identify such tires.

The TIN is comprised of "Manufacturer's identification mark", "Tire size", "Tire type code" and "Date of manufacture".

Operation

Tires and wheels

1 DOT HW A7 2 3 4 AMCW 5 1500 P40.10-3139-31

① DOT
② Manufacturer's identification mark
③ Tire size
④ Tire type code (at the option of the tire manufacturer)
⑤ Date of manufacture

For illustration purposes only. Actual data on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in above illustration.

DOT (Department of Transportation)

A tire branding symbol ① ( page 375 ) which denotes the tire meets requirements of the U.S. Department of Transportation.

Manufacturer's identification mark

The manufacturer's identification mark ② (▶page 375) denotes the tire manufacturer.

New tires have a mark with two symbols.

Retreaded tires have a mark with four symbols. For more information on retreaded tires, see (▷page 348).

Tire size

The code ③ (▷page 375) indicates the tire size.

Tire type code

The code ④ (▷page 375) may, at the option of the manufacturer, be used as a descriptive code for identifying significant characteristics of the tire.

Date of manufacture

The date of manufacture ⑤ (▷page 375) identifies the week and year of manufacture.

The first two figures identify the week, starting with "01" to represent the first full week of the calendar year. The second two figures represent the year.

For example, "3202" represents the 32nd week of 2002.

Operation

Tires and wheels

Maximum tire load

MAX. LOADRATING 710 KG (1565 LBS) M P40.10-3138-31

① Maximum tire load rating

For illustration purposes only. Actual data on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in above illustration.

The maximum tire load is the maximum weight the tires are designed to support.

Warning!

Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit as indicated on the Tire and Loading Information placard located on the driver's door B-pillar. Overloading the tires can overheat them, possibly causing a blowout. Overloading the tires can also result in handling or steering problems, or brake failure.

For more information on tire load rating (▷page 371).

For information on calculating total and cargo load capacities (▷page 353).

Maximum tire inflation pressure

MAX. PERMISS. INFLAT. PRESS. 420 KPA ( 60 PSI ) P40.10-3137-31

① Maximum permissible tire inflation pressure
For illustration purposes only. Actual data on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in above illustration.

This is the maximum permissible tire inflation pressure for the tire.

Operation

Tires and wheels

Always follow the recommended tire inflation pressure ( page 357) for proper tire inflation.

Warning!

Never exceed the max. tire inflation pressure. Follow recommended tire inflation pressures.

Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from being overheated.

Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can adversely affect handling and ride comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping distance, and result in sudden deflation (blowout) because they are more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris, potholes etc.

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards (U.S. vehicles)

Tire manufacturers are required to grade tires based on three performance factors: treadwear, traction and temperature resistance.

TREADWEAR 240 TRACTION B TEMPERATURE A ① ② ③ P40:10-3559-31

① Treadwear

② Traction

③ Temperature resistance

For illustration purposes only. Actual data on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in above illustration.

Quality grades can be found, where applicable, on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example:

Treadwear Traction Temperature

200 AA A

All passenger car tires must conform to federal safety requirements in addition to these grades.

Operation

Tires and wheels

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half ( 1^1/_2 ) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

Warning!

The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

Temperature

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

Warning!

The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause excessive heat build-up and possible tire failure.

Tire ply material

SIDEWALL : 2 PUES POLYESTER 5 PUES UNDER TREAD : 2 PUES POLYESTER + 2 PUES STEEL + 1 PLY NYLONE P40.10-3559-31

① Plies in sidewall

② Plies under tread

For illustration purposes only. Actual data on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in above illustration.

This marking tells you about the type of cord and number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.

Tire and loading terminology

Accessory weight

The combined weight (in excess of those standard items which may be replaced) of automatic transmission, power steering, power brakes, power windows, power seats, radio, and heater, to the extent that these items are available as factory-installed equipment (whether installed or not).

Air pressure

The amount of air inside the tire pressing outward on each square inch of the tire. Air pressure is expressed in pounds per square inch (psi), or kilopascal (kPa) or bars.

Aspect ratio

Dimensional relationship between tire section height and section width expressed in percentage.

Operation

Tires and wheels

Bar

Another metric unit for air pressure. There are 14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi) to 1 bar; there are 100 kilopascals (kPa) to 1 bar.

Bead

The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.

Cold tire inflation pressure

Tire inflation pressure when your vehicle has been sitting for at least 3 hours or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).

Curb weight

The weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant, and, if so equipped, air conditioning and additional optional equipment, but without passengers and cargo.

DOT (Department of Transportation)

A tire branding symbol which denotes the tire meets requirements of the U.S. Department of Transportation.

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)

The GAWR is the maximum permissible axle weight. The gross vehicle weight on each axle must never exceed the GAWR for the front and rear axle indicated on the certification label located on the driver's door B-pillar.

GTW (Gross Trailer Weight)

The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo, equipment, luggage etc. loaded on the trailer.

GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)

The GVW comprises the weight of the vehicle including fuel, tools, spare wheel, installed accessories, passengers and cargo and, if applicable, trailer tongue load. The GVW must never exceed the GVWR indicated on the certification label located on the driver's door B-pillar.

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)

This is the maximum permissible vehicle weight of the fully loaded vehicle (weight of the vehicle including all options, passengers, fuel, and cargo and, if applicable, trailer tongue load). It is indicated on certification label located on the driver's door B-pillar.

Kilopascal (kPa)

The metric unit for air pressure. There are 6.9 kPa to 1 psi; another metric unit for air pressure is bars. There are 100 kilopascals (kPa) to 1 bar.

Maximum load rating

The maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be carried by the tire.

Maximum loaded vehicle weight

The sum of curb weight, accessory weight, total load limit and production options weight.

Maximum tire inflation pressure

This number is the greatest amount of air pressure that should ever be put in the tire under normal driving conditions.

Normal occupant weight

The number of occupants the vehicle is designed to seat, multiplied by 68 kilograms (150 lbs).

Occupant distribution

The distribution of occupants in a vehicle at their designated seating positions.

Production options weight

The combined weight of those installed regular production options weighing over 5 lbs (2.3 kilograms) in excess of those standard items which they replace, not previously considered in curb weight or accessory weight, including heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty battery, and special trim.

PSI (Pounds per square inch)

A standard unit of measure for air pressure -> bar, kilopascal (kPa).

Recommended tire inflation pressure

Recommended tire inflation pressure for normal driving conditions is listed on the Tire and Loading Information placard located on driver's door B-pillar. Provides best handling, tread life and riding comfort. If so equipped, supplemental information pertaining to special driving situations can be found on the tire inflation pressure label on the inside of the fuel filler flap.

Rim

A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated.

Sidewall

The portion of a tire between the tread and the bead.

TIN (Tire Identification Number)

Unique identifier which facilitates efforts by tire manufacturers to notify purchasers in recall situations or other safety matters concerning tires and gives purchases the means to easily identify such tires. The TIN is comprised of “Manufacturer’s identification mark”, “Tire size”, “Tire type code” and “Date of manufacture”.

Tire load rating

Numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can support.

Operation

Tires and wheels

Tire ply composition and material used

This indicates the number of plies or the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread and sidewall. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply materials in the tire and sidewall, which include steel, nylon, polyester, and others.

Tire speed rating

Part of tire designation; indicates the speed range for which a tire is approved.

Total load limit

Rated cargo and luggage load plus 68 kilograms (150 lbs) times the vehicle's designated seating capacity.

Traction

Force exerted by the vehicle on the road via the tires. The amount of grip provided.

Tread

The portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road.

Treadwear indicators

Narrow bands, sometimes called "wear bars" that show across the tread of a tire when only 1 / 16 in (1.6 mm) of tread remains.

TWR (Tongue Weight Rating)

Maximum permissible weight on trailer tongue.

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards

A tire information system that provides consumers with ratings for a tire's traction, temperature and treadwear. Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using government testing procedures. The ratings are molded into the sidewall of the tire.

Vehicle maximum load on the tire

Load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of the maximum loaded vehicle weight and dividing it by two.

Rotating tires

Warning!

Rotate front and rear wheels only if they are of the same dimension.

If your vehicle is equipped with mixed-size tires (different tire dimensions front vs. rear), tire rotation is not possible.

Tire rotation can be performed on vehicles with tires of the same dimension all around. If your vehicle is equipped with tires of the same dimension all around, tires can be rotated, observing a front-to-rear rotation pattern that will maintain the intended rotation (spinning) direction of the tire ( page 351).

In some cases, such as when your vehicle is equipped with mixed-size tires (different tire dimension front vs. rear), tire rotation is not possible.

If applicable to your vehicle's tire configuration, tires can be rotated according to the tire manufacturer's recommended intervals in the tire manufacturer's warranty pamphlet located in your vehicle literature portfolio. If none is available, tires should be rotated every 3000 to 6000 miles (5000 to 10000 km), or sooner if necessary, according to the degree of tire wear. The same rotation (spinning) direction must be maintained (▶page 351).

Rotate tires before the characteristic tire wear pattern becomes visible (shoulder wear on front tires and tread center wear on rear tires).

Thoroughly clean the mounting face of wheels and brake disks, i.e. the inner side of the wheels/tires, during each rotation. Check for and ensure proper tire inflation pressure.

Warning!

Have the tightening torque checked after changing a wheel. Wheels could become loose if not tightened with a torque of 110 lb-ft (150 Nm).

Only use genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts specified for your vehicle's rims.

For information on wheel change, see the "Practical hints" section (▷page 448) and (▷page 478).

Operation

Winter driving

Before the onset of winter, have your vehicle winterized at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. This service includes:

• Check of anticorrosion and antifreeze concentration.
• Addition of cleaning concentrate to the water of the windshield and headlamp cleaning system. Add MB Concentrate "MB SummerFit" to a premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze which is formulated for temperatures below freezing point (▶page 530).
• Battery test. Battery capacity drops with decreasing ambient temperature. A well charged battery helps to make sure that the engine can be started even at low ambient temperatures.
• Tire change. Mercedes-Benz recommends M+S rated radial-ply tires with a minimum tread depth of approximately 1/6 in (4 mm) on all four wheels for the winter season.

Winter tires

Always use winter tires at temperatures below 45^ F ( 7^ C) and whenever wintry road conditions prevail. Not all M+S rated tires provide special winter performance. Make sure the tires you use show the mountain/snowflake marking on the tire sidewall. These tires meet specific snow traction performance requirements of the Rubber Manufacturers Association (RMA) and The Rubber Association of Canada (RAC) and have been designed specifically for use in snow conditions. Use of winter tires is the only way to achieve the maximum effectiveness of the ABS, ESP ^® , 4-ETS, and EBP in winter operation.

For safe handling, make sure all mounted winter tires are of the same make and have the same tread design.

Warning!

Winter tires with a tread depth of less than 16 in (4 mm) must be replaced. They are no longer suitable for winter operation.

Always observe the speed rating of the winter tires installed on your vehicle. If the maximum speed for which your tires are rated is below the speed rating of your vehicle, you must place a notice to this effect where it will be seen by the driver. Such notices are available from your tire dealer or from any authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

Warning!

If you use your spare tire when winter tires are fitted on the other wheels, be aware that the difference in tire characteristics may very well impair turning stability and that overall driving stability may be reduced. Adapt your driving style accordingly.

Have the spare tire replaced with a winter tire at the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

Block heater (Canada only)

The engine is equipped with a block heater.

The electrical cable may be installed at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

Snow chains

! Even on vehicles with all-wheel-drive use snow chains on rear tires only.

Some tire sizes do not leave adequate clearance for snow chains. To help avoid serious damage to your vehicle or tires, use of snow chains is not permissible with the spare wheel.

! Vehicles with ADS ^* : When driving with snow chains, do not select SPORT mode (▷page 255).

When driving with snow chains, you may wish to deactivate the ESP ^ (▷page 102) before setting the vehicle in motion. This will improve the vehicle's traction.

Snow chains should only be driven on snow-covered roads at speeds not to exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). Remove chains as soon as possible when driving on roads without snow.

Please observe the following guidelines when using snow chains:

• Use of snow chains is not permissible with all wheel/tire combinations (▶page 515).
• Snow chains should only be used on the rear wheels. Follow the manufacturer's mounting instructions.
• Only use snow chains that are approved by Mercedes-Benz. Any authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center will be glad to advise you on this subject.
• Use of snow chains may be prohibited depending on location. Always check local and state laws before installing snow chains.
• Do not use snow chains on the spare wheel ( page 518).

Operation

Maintenance

We strongly recommend that you have your vehicle serviced by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center, in accordance with the Maintenance Booklet at the times called for by the maintenance service indicator display.

! Failure to have the vehicle maintained in accordance with the Maintenance Booklet and maintenance service indicator at the designated times/mileage will result in vehicle damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

Maintenance service indicator message

The maintenance service indicator message will notify you when the next maintenance service is due.

Starting approximately 1 month before the next maintenance service is due, one of the following messages will appear in the multifunction display while you are driving or when you switch on the ignition (example service A):

Service A In XXXXX Miles (Km)

The maintenance services will be indicated by showing a service type A through type H in the multifunction display. Types A through H are classified based on estimated time needed to perform the maintenance service, ranging:

from Service A (approximately 1 hour)

to Service H (approximately 8 hours)

Service A In 2730 Miles

Refer to Maintenance Booklet for a listing of maintenance services and intervals they need to be performed at.

The Maintenance System in your vehicle tracks distance driven and the time elapsed since the last maintenance service and calculates other maintenance service work required.

Operation

Maintenance

Clearing the maintenance service indicator message

The maintenance service indicator message is automatically cleared

• after approximately 10 seconds when you switch on the ignition or when reaching the maintenance service threshold while driving
  • after approximately 30 seconds, once the suggested maintenance service term has passed

You can also clear it yourself:

R 1 P54.20-9428.31

① Reset button

▶ Press reset button ① on the instrument cluster.

The maintenance service indicator message is cleared and the standard display appears in the multifunction display (▷page 154).

Maintenance service term exceeded

If you have exceeded the suggested maintenance service term, you will see the following message in the multifunction display:

Service A Exceeded By XXXXX Miles (Km) Service A Exceeded By XXX Days Service A Exceeded By X Day

In addition, a signal sounds when the message appears.

Any authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center will reset the maintenance service indicator following a completed maintenance service.

Operation

Maintenance

Calling up the maintenance service indicator display

You can call up the maintenance service indicator display at any time to check when the next maintenance service is due.

▶ Switch on the ignition (▷ page 40).
▶ Press button 📋 or 📋 on the multifunction steering wheel repeatedly until the standard display appears in the multifunction display (▶page 154).
▶ Press button 🧑 or 🏠 until the maintenance service indicator display with the service symbol ✗ and the service deadline appears in the multifunction display.
If the battery is disconnected, the days of disconnection will not be included in the count shown by the maintenance service indicator.

To arrive at the true maintenance service deadline, you will need to subtract these days from the days shown in the maintenance service indicator message or maintenance service indicator display.

Do not confuse the maintenance service indicator with the engine oil level indicator.

Resetting the maintenance service indicator

In the event that the maintenance service on your vehicle is not carried out by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center, you can have the maintenance service indicator reset. The automotive maintenance facility carrying out the maintenance service will find the information for resetting the maintenance service indicator in the maintenance-relevant information for your vehicle. Such information is available from any authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center or directly from Mercedes-Benz.

! If the maintenance service indicator was inadvertently reset, have an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center correct it.

Only reset if the proper maintenance service has been performed. Resetting the system without performing the proper service as called for by the maintenance service indicator will result in engine damage and/or other vehicle damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

Operation

Vehicle care

▼Vehicle care

Cleaning and care of the vehicle

Regular and proper care will help to maintain the value of your vehicle. The best way to protect your vehicle from harmful environmental influences is to wash it and use protective treatments regularly.

Warning!

Many cleaning products can be hazardous. Some are poisonous, others are flammable. Always follow the instructions on the particular container. Always open your vehicle's doors or windows when cleaning the inside.

Never use fluids or solvents that are not designed for cleaning your vehicle.

Always lock away cleaning products and keep them out of reach of children.

While in operation, even while parked, your vehicle is subjected to varying external influences which, if gone unchecked, can attack the paintwork as well as the underbody and cause lasting damage.

Such damage is caused not only by extreme and varying climatic conditions, but also by:

• Air pollution
- Road salt
•Tar
- Gravel and stone chipping

To avoid paint damage, you should immediately remove:

• Grease and oil
  •Fuel
  •Coolant
• Brake fluid
• Bird droppings
• Insects
• Tree resins, etc.

Frequent washing reduces and/or eliminates the aggressiveness and potency of the above adverse influences.

More frequent washings are necessary to deal with unfavorable conditions:

• near the ocean
  • in industrial areas (smoke, exhaust emissions)
  •during winter operation

You should check your vehicle from time to time for stone chipping or other damage. Any damage should be repaired as soon as possible to prevent corrosion.

In doing so, do not neglect the underbody of the vehicle. A prerequisite for a thorough check is a washing of the underbody followed by a thorough inspection. Damaged areas need to be re-undercoated.

Operation

Vehicle care

Your vehicle has been treated at the factory with a wax-base rustproofing in the body cavities which will last for the lifetime of the vehicle. Post-production treatment is neither necessary nor recommended by Mercedes-Benz because of the possibility of incompatibility between materials used in the production process and others applied later.

We have selected car-care products and compiled recommendations which are specially matched to our vehicles and which always reflect the latest technology. You can obtain Mercedes-Benz approved car-care products at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

Scratches, corrosive deposits, corrosion or damage due to negligent or incorrect care cannot always be removed or repaired with the car-care products recommended here. In such cases it is best to seek aid at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

The following topics deal with the cleaning and care of your vehicle and give important "how-to" information as well as references to Mercedes-Benz approved car-care products.

Power washer

! Follow the instructions provided by the power washer manufacturer on maintaining a distance between the vehicle and the nozzle of the power washer.

Never use a round nozzle to power-wash tires. The intense jet of water can result in damage to the tire.

Always replace a damaged tire.

Always keep the jet of water moving across the surface. Do not aim directly at electrical parts, electrical connectors, seals, or other rubber parts.

i Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO ^ : If a door handle is hit by a strong jet of water, and a SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO ^ is in close proximity, i.e. within approximately 3 ft (approximately 1 m), the vehicle could be inadvertently locked or unlocked.

Tar stains

Quickly remove tar stains before they dry and become more difficult to remove. A tar remover is recommended.

Paintwork, painted body components

! Affixing stickers, adhesive tape or similar materials to painted body components may damage the paintwork.

Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Care should be applied when water drops on the paint surface do not “bead up”. This should normally be done every 3 to 5 months, depending on the climate and washing detergent used.

Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Cleaner should be applied if the paint surface shows signs of dirt embedding (i.e. loss of gloss).

Operation

Vehicle care

Do not apply any of these products or wax if your vehicle is parked in the sun or if the hood is still hot.

▶Use the appropriate MB-Touch-Up Stick for quick and provisional repairs of minor paint damage (i.e. chips from stones, vehicle doors, etc.).

Engine cleaning

Prior to cleaning the engine compartment make sure to protect electrical components and connectors from the intrusion of water and cleaning agents.

Corrosion protection, such as MB Anticorrosion Wax, should be applied to the engine compartment after every engine cleaning. Before applying, all control linkage bushings and joints should be lubricated. The poly-V-belt and all pulleys should be protected from any wax.

Vehicle washing

In the winter, thoroughly remove all traces of road salt as soon as possible.

When washing the vehicle underbody, do not forget to clean the inner sides of the wheels.

i Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO ^ : If a door handle is hit by a strong jet of water, and a SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO ^ is in close proximity, i.e. within approximately 3 ft (approximately 1 m), the vehicle could be inadvertently locked or unlocked.

Hand-wash

Do not use hot water or wash your vehicle in direct sunlight.

▶Only use a mild car wash detergent, such as Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo.

▶Thoroughly spray the vehicle with a dif- fused jet of water. Direct only a very weak spray towards the ventilation intake.

▶Use plenty of water and rinse the sponge and chamois frequently.

▶Rinse with clean water and thoroughly dry with a chamois. Do not allow cleaning agents to dry or the finish.

! Do not use scouring agents on these parts. Never apply strong force and only use a soft, non-sratching cloth when cleaning the vehicle. Do not attempt to wipe the surface with a dry cloth or sponge.

Otherwise you may scratch or damage the paint.

Operation

Vehicle care

Automatic car wash

You can have your car washed in an automatic car wash from the start. Automatic car washes without brushes are preferable.

▶To protect the filter system, switch the climate control system (▷page 206) or the automatic climate control system* (▷page 220) to air recirculation mode.

! Do not clean your vehicle in an automatic touchless car wash which use caustic spray. Otherwise the caustic spray will damage the paint or ornamental moldings.

If the vehicle is very dirty, prewash it before running it through the automatic car wash.

! Make sure that the windshield wiper switch is set to 0 (▷page 61). Otherwise, e.g. the rain sensor could activate and cause the wipers to move unintentionally. This may lead to vehicle damage.

Due to the width of the vehicle, fold in exterior rear view mirrors prior to running the vehicle through an automatic car wash to prevent damage to the mirrors.

When taking the vehicle through an automatic conveyor type car wash, observe the following instructions.

Warning!

When leaving the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* in the starter switch, do not leave children unattended in the vehicle. It is possible for children to switch on the ignition which could result in unsupervised use of vehicle equipment.

A child's unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury.

Vehicles with SmartKey:

▶With the vehicle at a standstill and the ignition switched on shift the automatic transmission to neutral position N.
▶If engaged, release the parking brake (▷page 57).
▶Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey in the starter switch.

Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:

▶With the vehicle at a standstill, depress the brake pedal and keep it pressed.
▶With the ignition switched on shift the automatic transmission to park position P.
▶Release the brake pedal.
▶Remove the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button from the starter switch (▷page 41).
▶Insert the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* into the starter switch.
▶Switch on the ignition.
▶Depress the brake pedal.

▶Shift the automatic transmission to neutral position N.
▶ Release the brake pedal.
▶If engaged, release the parking brake (▷page 57).
▶Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* in the starter switch.

i After running the vehicle through an automatic car wash, wipe any wax off of the windshield ( page 395). This will prevent smears and reduce wiping noise which can be caused by residual wax on the windshield.

When leaving the car wash, make sure that the mirrors are folded out. Otherwise they may vibrate.

Ornamental moldings

For regular cleaning and care of ornamental moldings, use a damp cloth.

! Do not use chrome cleaner on ornamental moldings. Although ornamental moldings may have chrome appearance, they could be made of anodized aluminum that will be damaged when cleaned with chrome cleaner. Instead, use a damp cloth to clean those ornamental moldings.

For very dirty ornamental moldings of which you are sure are chrome-plated, use a chrome cleaner. If in doubt whether an ornamental molding is chrome-plated, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

Headlamps, brake lamps, tail lamps, side markers, turn signal lenses

▶Use a mild car wash detergent, such as Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo, with plenty of water.

! Only use window cleaning solutions that are suitable for plastic lamp lenses. Window cleaning solutions which are not suitable may damage the plastic lamp lenses of the headlamps. Therefore, do not use abrasives, solvents or cleaners that contain solvents.

Never apply strong force and only use a soft, non-scratching cloth when cleaning the lenses. Do not attempt to wipe dirty lenses with a dry cloth or sponge.

Otherwise you may scratch or damage the lens surface.

Operation

Vehicle care

Cleaning the Parktronic* system sensors

Front view of a red car with visible grille and dashboard, marked with numbered points (1) and no text or symbols on the car itself.

① Parktronic* system sensors in front bumper
▶ Use a mild car wash detergent, such as Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo, with plenty of water and a soft, non-scratching cloth to clean sensors ① on the bumpers.

! Do not apply strong pressure to the sensor covers. Applying strong pressure may damage the sensor covers.
Follow the instructions provided by the power washer manufacturer on maintaining a distance between the vehicle and the nozzle of the power washer.
To prevent scratches, never apply strong force and only use a soft, non-scratching cloth when cleaning the sensors. Do not attempt to wipe dirty sensors with a dry cloth or sponge.

Cleaning the Rear View Camera lens*

Red car rear view with a close-up inset showing a black sensor or sensor device (no text or symbols visible)

① Camera lens

▶Only use clean water and a soft, non-scratching cloth to clean the camera lens ①.

Be careful not to apply wax to camera lens ① when waxing the vehicle. If necessary, remove the wax using the Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo with plenty of water.

Operation

Vehicle care

! Do not clean the camera and the area around the camera:

• with a high-pressure cleaner
• with a dry cloth and high pressure
• with aggressive cleaning agents

You could otherwise damage the camera.

Cleaning the windows and the wiper blades

Warning!

For safety reasons, switch off wipers and remove SmartKey from starter switch (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: Make sure the vehicle's on-board electronics have status 0) before cleaning the windshield and/or the wiper blades. Otherwise, the wiper motor could suddenly turn on and cause injury.

▶Fold the wiper arms forward until they engage.
! Do not pull on the wiper blade inserts. They could tear.
▶Clean the wiper blade inserts with a clean cloth and detergent solution.

▶Use a soft, clean cloth and a mild window cleaning solution on all outside and inside glass surfaces.

An automotive glass cleaner is recommended.

! Fold the windshield wiper arms back onto the windshield before turning the SmartKey in the starter switch or pressing the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO ^* ). Hold on to the wiper when folding the wiper arm back. If released, the force of the impact from the tensioning spring could crack the windshield.
To clean the window interior, do not use a dry cloth, abrasives, solvents or cleaners containing solvents. Do not touch the inside of the front, rear or side windows and the power tilt/sliding sunroof or rear panorama roof with hard objects such as an ice scraper or ring. Doing so may damage the windows.

Operation

Vehicle care

Light alloy wheels

If possible, clean wheels once a week.

▶Use Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel Care, a soft bristle brush and a strong spray of water for cleaning the light alloy wheels.

! Only use acid-free cleaning materials. Acid may cause corrosion or damage the clear coat.

! The vehicle should not be parked for an extended period of time immediately after it has been cleaned, especially not after the wheel rims have been cleaned with wheel rim cleaner. Wheel rim cleaners can lead to increased corrosion of the brake disks and brake pads. Non-approved wheel cleaners may also damage the wheel paint if the car is not driven after cleaning. Therefore, the vehicle's brake system should always be warmed-up before it is parked after cleaning. To do so, please drive your vehicle for several minutes to allow the brakes to dry. When applying Mercedes-Benz approved Tire Care and Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel Care products, take care not to spray them on the brake disks.

Plastic and rubber parts

▶ Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or mild detergent for delicate fabrics as a washing solution.
▶Wipe with a cloth moistened in a lukewarm solution.

The surface may temporarily change color. If this is the case, wait for it to dry.

Warning!

Do not use cleaners or cockpit care sprays containing solvents to clean the cockpit or the steering wheel. Cleaners containing solvents will make the surface porous and vehicle occupants could suffer serious injuries from plastic parts coming loose in the event of air bag deployment.

! Do not use oil, wax or scouring agents on these parts.

Never apply strong force and only use a soft, non-scratching cloth when cleaning the surface. Do not attempt to wipe the surface with a dry cloth or sponge.

Otherwise you may scratch or damage the surface.

Hard plastic trim items

▶Use Mercedes-Benz approved Interior Care, a soft, lint-free cloth and apply with light pressure.
! Never apply strong force and only use a soft, non-scratching cloth when cleaning the surface. Do not attempt to wipe the surface with a dry cloth or sponge.

Otherwise you may scratch or damage the surface.

Operation

Vehicle care

Steering wheel

▶Wipe with a damp cloth and dry thoroughly or clean with Mercedes-Benz approved Leather Care.

Carpets

▶Use Mercedes-Benz approved Carpet and Fabric Care for cleaning the carpets.

Headliner

▶ Use a soft bristle brush or a dry-shampoo cleaner in case of excessive dirt.

Seat belts

▶Only use clear, lukewarm water and soap.

! The seat belts must not be treated with chemical cleaning agents. Do not dry the seat belts at temperatures above 176^ F ( 80^ C) or in direct sunlight.

Warning!

Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may severely weaken them. In a crash they may not be able to provide adequate protection.

Upholstery

Using aftermarket seat covers or wearing clothing that have the tendency to give off coloring (e.g. when wet, etc.) may cause the upholstery to become permanently discolored. By lining the seats with a proper intermediate cover, contact-discoloration will be prevented.

Warning!

Only use seat or head restraint covers which have been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle model. Using other seat or head restraint covers may interfere with or prevent

• deployment of the front side impact air bags
• deployment of the rear side impact air bags*

- activation of the active head restraints

Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center for availability.

Operation

Vehicle care

Leather upholstery\*

Please not that leather upholstery is a natural product and is therefore subject to a natural aging process. Leather upholstery may also react to certain ambient influences such as high humidity or high temperature by showing wrinkles for example.

▶Wipe leather upholstery with a damp cloth and dry thoroughly or clean with Mercedes-Benz approved Leather Care.

! To avoid damage to leather upholstery:

• Wipe with light pressure only.
• Do not clean with abrasive cleaning agents such as scouring milk or powder.
• Do not soak the leather upholstery. As leather is a natural product, it could otherwise harden or become porous.
  • Exercise particular care when cleaning perforated leather as its underside should not become wet.

MB Tex upholstery

▶Use Mercedes-Benz approved Interior Care onto a soft, lint-free cloth and apply with light pressure for cleaning the upholstery.

Wood trims

▶Dampen cloth using water and use damp cloth to clean wood trims in your vehicle.

! Do not use solvents like tar remover or wheel cleaner nor polishes or waxes as these may be abrasive.

Practical hints

What to do if ...

Where will I find ...?

Unlocking/locking in an emergency

Resetting activated head restraints

Replacing SmartKey batteries

Replacing bulbs

Replacing wiper blades

Flat tire

Bleeding the fuel system

(diesel engine only)

Battery

Jump starting

Towing the vehicle

Fuses

Red wrench icon with no text or symbols

Practical hints

What to do if ...

Lamps in instrument cluster General information:
If any of the following lamps in the instrument cluster fails to come on during the
bulb self-check when switching on the ignition, have the respective bulb checked and replaced if necessary.

Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solution
	The yellow ABS indicator lamp comes on while the engine is running.	ABS has detected a malfunction and has switched off. The BAS, ESP®, EBP, and 4-ETS are also switched off (see messages in multifunction display).The brake system is still functioning normally but without the ABS available.If the ABS control unit is malfunctioning, other systems such as the navigation system* or the automatic transmission may also be malfunctioning.
		The charging voltage has fallen below 10 volts. The ABS has switched off.The battery might not be charged sufficiently.
		When the voltage is above this value again, the ABS is operational again and the ABS indicator lamp should go out.If the ABS indicator lamp does not go out:Have the generator (alternator) and the battery checked.

Practical hints

What to do if ...

Problem Possible cause/conse-			quence	Suggested solution
	The yellow ABS indicator lamp comes on while the engine is running.		The self-diagnosis has not yet been completed yet.	The display will clear after driving a short distance at a vehicle speed of above 12 mph (20 km/h).
BRAKE	(USA only)	The red brake warning lamp comes on while driving and an acoustic warning sounds.	You are driving with the parking brake set.	►Release the parking brake (▷page 57).
	(Canada only)
			There is insufficient brake fluid in the reservoir.	►Risk of accident! Carefully stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon as it is safe to do so.►Apply the parking brake (▷ page 65).►Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. Do not add brake fluid! This will not solve the problem.

Warning!

Driving with the brake warning lamp illuminated can result in an accident. Have your brake system checked immediately if the brake warning lamp stays on.

Do not add brake fluid before checking the brake system. Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire. You can be seriously burned.

! If you find that the brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark or below, have the brake system checked for brake pad thickness and leaks.

Practical hints

What to do if ...

Problem Possible cause/conse-			quence	Suggested solution
BRAKE (USA only)	(Canada only)	The red brake warning lamp comes on while driving. In addition, the yellow ABS malfunction indicator lamp, and the yellow ESP® warning lamp come on and an acoustic warning sounds.	The Electronic Brake Proportioning (EBP) has switched off due to a malfunction.The ABS, the BAS, and the ESP® are also switched off.	▶Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center as soon as possible.Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident.

Practical hints

What to do if ...

Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solution

CHECK ENGINE

(USA only) (Canada only)

The yellow engine malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving.

There is a malfunction in:·The fuel management system·The ignition system·The emission control system·Systems which affect emissionsSuch malfunctions may result in excessive emissions values and may switch the engine to its limp-home (emergency operation) mode.

▶Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. An on-board diagnostic connector is used by the service station to link the vehicle to the shop diagnostics system. It allows the accurate identification of system malfunctions through the readout of diagnostic trouble codes. It is located in the front left area of the footwell next to the parking brake pedal.

i Some states may by law require you to visit a workshop as soon as the engine malfunction indicator lamp comes on. Check local requirements.

Practical hints

What to do if ...

Problem Possible cause/conse-		quence	Suggested solution
CHECK ENGINE(USA only)(Canada only)	The yellow engine malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving.	A loss of pressure has been detected in the fuel system. The fuel cap may not be closed properly or the fuel system may be leaky.	▶ Check the fuel cap (▷ page 337).If it is not closed properly:▶Close the fuel cap.If it is closed properly:▶Have the fuel system checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
		Vehicles with diesel engine: Your fuel tank is empty.	▶After refueling start, turn off and restart the engine three or four times in succession.The limp-home mode is canceled. You do not need to have your vehicle checked.

Practical hints

What to do if ...

Problem Possible cause/consequence	Suggested solution
The yellow ESP® warning lamp comes on while the engine is running.	The ESP® has been switched off with the ESP® switch or has switched off due to a malfunction.Risk of accident!Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road, weather, and traffic conditions.	►Switch the ESP® back on (▷page 103).Exceptions: (▷page 102).If the ESP® cannot be switched back on:►Continue driving with added caution.►Observe additional messages in the multifunction display that may appear.►Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center as soon as possible.
The yellow ESP® warning lamp flashes while driving.	The ESP® or the 4-ETS has come into operation because of detected traction loss of at least one tire.	►When driving off, apply as little throttle as possible.►While driving, ease up on the accelerator.►Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road and weather conditions.►Do not deactivate the ESP®.Exceptions: (▷page 102).Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident.

Practical hints

What to do if ...

Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solution
	The red seat belt telltale comes on for a maximum of 6 seconds after starting the engine.	The seat belt telltale reminds you and your passengers to fasten your seat belts before driving off.
	You hear a warning chime for a maximum of 6 seconds after starting the engine.	You have forgotten to fasten your seat belt.
	The red seat belt telltale comes on while the vehicle is standing still and the engine is running or during driving.	You and/or your front passenger have forgotten to fasten your seat belts.
		There are items placed on the front passenger seat and therefore the system senses the front passenger seat as being occupied.

Practical hints

What to do if ...

Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solution

During driving the red seat belt telltale flashes and you additionally hear an intermittent warning chime with increasing intensity.	The vehicle’s speed once exceeded 15 mph (25 km/h) and you and/or your front passenger have forgotten to fasten your seat belts.	▶Fasten your seat belts.The seat belt telltale goes out and the warning chime stops sounding.
	There are items placed on the front passenger seat and therefore the system senses the front passenger seat as being occupied.	▶Remove the items from the front passenger seat and put them in a safe place.The seat belt telltale goes out and the warning chime stops sounding.

After 60 seconds with an unfastened seat belt on one of the front seats, the warning chime stops sounding and the seat belt telltale illuminates continuously. The seat belt telltale will only go out if both, the driver and front passenger's seat belt are fastened, or the vehicle is standing still and a front door is opened.

Practical hints

What to do if ...

Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solution
	USA only:Combination low tire pressure/TPMS malfunction telltale for the TPMS illuminates continuously.Canada only:Low tire pressure telltale for the Advanced TPMS* illuminates continuously.	The TPMS (USA only) or Advanced TPMS* (Canada only) detects a loss of pressure in at least one tire.	►Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt steering and braking maneuvers. Observe the traffic situation around you.►Read and observe messages in the multifunction display.If the tire inflation pressure in the respective tire(s) has (have) been corrected, the combination low tire pressure/TPMS malfunction telltale goes out after few minutes driving.
	USA only:Combination low tire pressure/TPMS malfunction telltale for the TPMS flashes 60 seconds and then stays illuminated.	There is a malfunction in the TPMS.	►Read and observe messages in the multifunction display.►Have the TPMS checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.After the malfunction has been remedied the combination low tire pressure/TPMS malfunction telltale goes out after few minutes driving.

Warning!

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver's door B-Pillar or, if available, the tire inflation pressure label on the fuel filler flap. If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the Tire and Loading Information placard or, if available, the tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire too overheat and can lead to tire failure.

Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if underinflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

USA only:

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately 1 minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.

TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of incompatible replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

Practical hints

What to do if ...

Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solution

	The yellow fuel tank reserve warning lamp in the fuel gauge comes on while driving.	The fuel level has gone below the reserve mark.	▶ Refuel at the next gas station (▷page 337).
SRS	The red SRS indicator lamp comes on while driving.	There is a malfunction in the restraint systems. The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Device (ETDs) could deploy unexpectedly or fail to deploy unexpectedly in an accident.	▶Drive with added caution to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

Warning!

In the event a malfunction of the SRS is indicated as outlined above, the SRS may not be operational. For your safety, we strongly recommend that you visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center immediately to have the system checked, otherwise

the SRS may not be activated when needed in an accident, which could result in serious or fatal injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily which could result in an accident and/or injury to you or to others.

Lamp in center console

Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solution

PASS AIR BAG OFF

The front passenger front air bag off indicator lamp illuminates and remains illuminated with the weight of a typical adult or someone larger than a small individual on the front passenger seat.

The system is malfunctioning.

▶ Have the system checked as soon as possible by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
▶Also read and observe any messages in the multifunction display and follow corrective steps (▶page 421).

Warning!

If the PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp illuminates and remains illuminated with the weight of a typical adult or someone larger than a small individual on the front passenger seat, do not have any passenger use the front passenger seat until the system has been repaired.

Practical hints

What to do if ...

Problem Possible			cause/consequence	Suggested solution
	PASS AIR BAG OFF	The front passenger front air bag off indicator lamp does not illuminate and/or does not remain illuminated with the weight of a typical 12-month-old child in a standard child restraint or less on the front passenger seat.	The system is malfunctioning.	Make sure there is nothing between seat cushion and child seat and check installation of the child seat.Make sure no objects applying supplemental weight onto the seat are present.Make sure no objects which apply forces to the seat are present (e.g. objects such as books, briefcases etc. lodged behind or around the seat, head restraints pushing against roof etc.). The system may recognize such forces as supplemental weight.If the front passenger front air bag off indicator lamp remains out, have the system checked as soon as possible by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. Do not transport a child on the front passenger seat until the system has been repaired.Also note any messages in the multifunction display and follow corrective steps ( page 421 ).

If the ✉2 PASS AIR BAC OFF indicator lamp does not illuminate or remains out with the

weight of a typical 12-month-old child in a standard child restraint or less on the front passenger seat, do not transport a child on

the front passenger seat until the system has been repaired.

Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display

Warning and malfunction messages appear in the multifunction display located in the instrument cluster.

Certain warning and malfunction messages are accompanied by an audible signal.

Address these messages accordingly and follow the additional instructions given in this Operator's Manual.

Selecting the vehicle status message memory menu in the control system ( page 162) displays both cleared and uncleared messages.

High-priority messages appear in the multifunction display in red color.

Certain messages of high priority cannot be cleared from the multifunction display using the reset button (▶page 145) or button ▲, ▼, □, or □ on the multifunction steering wheel.

Other messages of high priority and messages of less immediate priority can be cleared from the multifunction display using the reset button (▶page 145) or button 📁, 🌐, 📅, or 📄 on the multifunction steering wheel. They are then stored in the vehicle status message memory (▶page 162). Remember that clearing a message will only make the message disappear. Clearing a message will not correct the condition that caused the message to appear.

Warning!

All categories of messages contain important information which should be taken note of and, where a malfunction is indicated, addressed as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

Failure to repair condition noted may cause damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty, or result in property damage or personal injury.

Practical hints

What to do if ...

Warning!

No messages will be displayed if either the instrument cluster or the multifunction display is inoperative.

As a result, you will not be able to see information about your driving conditions, such as speed or outside temperature, warning/indicator lamps, malfunction/warning messages or the failure of any systems. Driving characteristics may be impaired.

If you must continue to drive, please do so with added caution. Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center as soon as possible.

Switching on the ignition causes all instrument cluster lamps (except high beam headlamp indicator lamp, and turn signal indicator lamps unless activated) as well as the multifunction display to come on. Make sure the lamps and multifunction display are in working order before starting your journey.

On the pages that follow, you will find a compilation of the most important warning and malfunction messages that may appear in the multifunction display.

For your convenience the messages are divided into two sections:

• Text messages (▷ page 415)

• Symbol messages (▷ page 427)

Text messages

Display message Possible cause/consequence Possible solution
ABS	ABS, ESP InoperativeSee Operator's Manual	The ABS and the ESP ^ have been switched off due to a malfunction.The BAS is also switched off.The brake system is still functioning normally but without the ABS available.	►Continue driving with added caution.Wheels may lock during hard braking,reducing steering capability.►Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center as soon as possible.Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident.
	ABS, ESP UnavailableSee Operator's Manual	The ABS and the ESP ^ have been switched off because of insufficient power supply. The charging voltage has fallen below 10 volts.The BAS is also switched off.The brake system is still functioning normally but without the ABS available.	When the voltage is above this value again, the ABS is operational again and the message in the multifunction display should disappear.If the message in the multifunction display does not disappear:►Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center as soon as possible.

Practical hints

What to do if ...

Display message Possible cause/consequence Possible solution
ABS	UnavailableSee Operator's Manual	The self-diagnosis has not yet been completed yet.	The display will clear after driving a short distance at a vehicle speed of above 12 mph (20 km/h).
Cruise Control And SPEEDTRONIC	Inoperative	The cruise control is malfunctioning.	▶ Have cruise control checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
Cruise Control	--- MPH	You have attempted to set a speed while driving below 20 mph (30 km/h).	▶Accelerate to a speed exceeding 20 mph (30 km/h) and set the speed (▶page 244).
		The ESP® is switched off. ▶Switch on the ESP® (▶page 100).
		The automatic transmission is set to position P, R, or N.	▶Set the automatic transmission to position D (▶page 185).
		The vehicle is secured with the parking brake.	▶Release the parking brake (▶page 57).

Display message Possible cause/consequence Possible solution
	Depress brake to shift out of P.	You have tried to shift the automatic transmission into position D, R or N using the gear selector lever without depressing the brake pedal.
	Door Open Vehicle Not In Park	You have opened the driver's door and the automatic transmission is still in position D, R or N.
	Drive to workshop without shifting gears.	The automatic transmission cannot be shifted out of the set position because of a malfunction.

Practical hints

What to do if ...

Display message Possible cause/consequence Possible solution
ESP	InoperativeSee Operator's Manual	In addition, the yellow ESP® warning lamp [IMAGE] comes on.The ESP® has detected a malfunction and switched off.The ABS may still be operational.	►Continue driving with added caution.►Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center as soon as possible.Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident.
		In addition, the yellow ESP® warning lamp [IMAGE] comes on.The ESP® or the ESP® display is malfunctioning.	►Continue driving with added caution.►Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center as soon as possible.Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident.
		In addition, the yellow ESP® warning lamp [IMAGE] comes on.The ESP® is deactivated because of a malfunction or interrupted power supply.	►Continue driving with added caution.►Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center as soon as possible.Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident.

Practical hints

What to do if ...

Display message Possible cause/consequence Possible solution
ESP	UnavailableSee Operator's Manual	The ESP® was deactivated because of insufficient power supply. The charging voltage has fallen below 10 volts.The brake system is still functioning normally but without the ESP® available.	When the voltage is above this value again, the ESP® is operational again and the message in the multifunction display should disappear.If the message in the multifunction display does not disappear:Have the generator (alternator) and the battery checked.Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center as soon as possible.
		If the yellow ESP® warning lampflashes while driving and this message appears, the 4-ETS has switched off to prevent overheating of the drive wheel brakes.	As soon as the brakes have cooled off, the 4-ETS switches on again.The message in the multifunction display disappears and the ESP® warning lamp goes out.
		The self-diagnosis has not been completed yet.	The display will clear after driving a short distance at a vehicle speed of above 12 mph (20 km/h).

Practical hints

What to do if ...

Display message Possible cause/consequence Possible solution
P	Shift to P or N to start engine.	You have attempted to start the engine with the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button while the automatic transmission was set to position R or D.	▶Set the automatic transmission to position P or N.Make sure the brake pedal is depressed when attempting to start the engine with the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button.
	Only shift to P when vehicle is at a standstill.	You have tried to shift the automatic transmission into position P using the gear selector lever although the vehicle is still in motion.	▶Stop the vehicle.▶Apply the parking brake (▷ page 65).
SRS	Restraint Sys. Malfunction Service Required	The system is malfunctioning.	▶Drive with added caution to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

Warning!

In the event a malfunction of the SRS is indicated as outlined above, the SRS may not be operational. For your safety, we strongly recommend that you contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center immediately to have the system checked; otherwise

the SRS may not be activated when needed in an accident, which could result in serious or fatal injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily which could also result in injury.

Practical hints

What to do if ...

Display message Possible cause/consequence		Possible solution
Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's Manual	Front passenger front air bag is activated while driving even though a child, small individual, or object below the system's weight threshold is on the front passenger seat, or the front passenger seat is empty. Objects on the seat or forces acting on the seat may make the system sense supplemental weight.	Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as possible and check the front passenger seat for the following:Apply the parking brake (▷ page 65).Switch off the ignition (▷ page 40).Remove child and child restraint from front passenger seat and properly secure the child in rear seat employing the child restraint if necessary.Remove any other items from on and around the front passenger seat and make sure the storage bag on the back of the front passenger seat is empty.Make sure that no objects which apply forces to the seat are present (e.g. objects such as books, briefcases etc. lodged behind or around the seat, head restraints pushing against roof etc.). The system may recognize such forces as supplemental weight and sense that an occupant on the front passenger seat is of a greater weight than actually present.Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front passenger door and switch on the ignition (▷page 40).(Continued on next page)

Practical hints

What to do if ...

Display message Possible cause/consequence

Possible solution

Monitor the Pass AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp on the center console (▷ page 83) and the multifunction display in the instrument cluster (▷page 26) for the following:With the seat unoccupied and the ignition turned on,the PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp on the center console should illuminate and remain illuminated, indicating that the OCS (▷page 79) has deactivated the air bag.the message Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's Manual or the message Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Operator's Manual should not appear in the multifunction display at any time the seat is unoccupied. Wait at least 60 seconds for the system to complete the necessary check cycles and to make sure neither message appears in the multifunction display.If above conditions are met, you can occupy the front passenger seat again. Depending on the front passenger classification sensed by the OCS (▷page 79),the PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp will remain illuminated or go out.If above conditions are not met, the system is not working properly. Have the system checked as soon as possible by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

If the ✕PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp

remains out even after performing the above corrective steps, do not have any children 12 years old and under and other small

individuals use the front passenger seat until the system has been repaired.

Practical hints

What to do if ...

Display message Possible cause/consequence		Possible solution
Front Passenger Airbag DisabledSee Operator's Manual	Front passenger front air bag is deactivated while driving even though an adult or someone larger than a small individual is occupying the front passenger seat. Forces acting on the seat may make the system sense a decrease in weight.	Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as possible and check the front passenger seat for the following:Apply the parking brake (▷ page 65).Switch off the ignition (▷ page 40).Have the front passenger vacate the seat and exit the vehicle.Adjust the seat in a height position (▷ page 44).Make sure that no objects which apply forces to the seat are present (e.g. objects such as books, briefcases etc. lodged underneath, behind or around the seat). Such forces may cause the system to sense that an occupant of a lesser weight than actually present is on the front passenger seat.Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front passenger door and switch on the ignition (▷page 40).(Continued on next page)

Practical hints

What to do if ...

Display message Possible cause/consequence

Possible solution

Monitor the PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp on the center console (▷ page 83) and the multifunction display in the instrument cluster (▷page 26) for the following:With the seat unoccupied and the ignition turned on,the PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp on the center console should illuminate and remain illuminated, indicating that the OCS (▷page 79) has deactivated the air bag.the message Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's Manual or the message Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Operator's Manual should not appear in the multifunction display at any time the seat is unoccupied. Wait at least 60 seconds for the system to complete the necessary check cycles and to make sure neither message appears in the multifunction display.If above conditions are met, you can occupy the front passenger seat again. Depending on the front passenger classification sensed by the OCS (▷page 79), the PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp will remain illuminated or go out.If above conditions are not met, the system is not working properly. Have the system checked as soon as possible by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

If the ✕PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp

remains illuminated with an adult occupant on the front passenger seat even after performing the above corrective steps, do not

have any passenger use the front passenger seat until the system has been repaired.

Practical hints

What to do if ...

Display message Possible cause/consequence Possible solution
Check tires, then restartRun Flat Indicator.	There was a warning message about a loss in the tire inflation pressure and the Run Flat Indicator has not been restarted yet.	Make sure that the correct tire inflation pressure is set for each tire.Then restart the Run Flat Indicator (▷ page 361).
Run Flat Indicator Inoperative	The Run Flat Indicator is malfunctioning.	Have the Run Flat Indicator checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
Tire Pressure Check Tires	The Run Flat Indicator indicates that the pressure is too low in one or more tires.	Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt steering and braking maneuvers. Observe the traffic situation around you.Check and adjust tire inflation pressure as required (▷page 359).If necessary, replace the wheel (▷ page 478).Reactivate the Run Flat Indicator after adjusting the tire inflation pressure values (▷page 361).
Tire pressure displayed after driving for a few minutes.	Vehicles with Advanced TPMS*: The tire inflation pressure is being checked.	Drive the vehicle for a few minutes.

Practical hints

What to do if ...

Display message Possible cause/consequence Possible solution
Tire Pressure Monitor Inoperative	The TPMS or Advanced TPMS* is malfunctioning.	▶Have the TPMS or Advanced TPMS* checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
Tire Pressure Monitor Inoperative No Wheel Sensors	There are wheels without appropriate wheel sensors mounted (e.g. winter tires).	▶Have the TPMS or Advanced TPMS* checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. ▶Have the wheel sensors installed by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
Tire Pressure Monitor Wheel Sensor Missing	Vehicles with Advanced TPMS*: One or more sensors are defect (e.g. battery is empty). The respective tire is indicated by - - - instead of the tire inflation pressure in the multifunction display.	▶Have the Advanced TPMS* checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. ▶Have the wheel sensors installed by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
	Vehicles with Advanced TPMS*: One or more wheels without appropriate wheel sensors mounted (e.g. spare tire). The respective tire is indicated by - - - instead of the tire inflation pressure in the multifunction display.	▶Have the Advanced TPMS* checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. ▶Have the wheel sensors installed by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
Tire Pressure Monitor Currently Unavailable	The TPMS or Advanced TPMS* is unable to monitor the tire pressure due to a nearby radio interference source.	▶As soon as the causes of the malfunction have been removed, the TPMS or Advanced TPMS* automatically becomes active again after a few minutes driving.

Symbol messages

Display symbol	Display message	Possible cause/consequence	Possible solution
	Replace air filter.	The air filter is clogged.	Have the air filter checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
The battery is no longer charging.		Possible causes:alternator malfunctioningbroken poly-V-beltDo not forget that the brake system requires electrical energy and may be operating with restricted capability. Considerably greater brake pedal force is required and the stopping distance is increased.	Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon as it is safe to do so.Apply the parking brake (▷ page 65).Check the poly-V-belt.If it is broken:Do not continue to drive. Otherwise the engine will overheat due to an inoperative water pump which may result in damage to the engine. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.If it is intact:Drive immediately to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. Adjust driving to be consistent with reduced braking responsiveness.

Practical hints

What to do if ...

Display symbol	Display message	Possible cause/consequence	Possible solution
	Battery/Alternator Stop Vehicle	The battery is defective.	► Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon as it is safe to do so.► Apply the parking brake (▷ page 65).► Do not continue to drive.► Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
	Inoperative	Downhill Speed Regulation is malfunctioning.	► Have the Downhill Speed Regulation checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
	Brake Wear	The brake pads have reached their wear limit.	► Have the brake pads replaced as soon as possible.

! Brake pad thickness must be visually inspected by a qualified technician at the intervals specified in the Maintenance Booklet.

Practical hints

What to do if ...

Display symbol		Display message	Possible cause/consequence	Possible solution
BRAKE	(USA only)	Release	You are driving with the parking brake set.	▸ Release the parking brake (▷ page 57).
(P)	(Canada only)	Parking Brake
BRAKE	(USA only)	EBV, ABS, ESP Inoperative	The EBP, the ABS, and the ESP® have switched off due to a malfunction. The BAS is also switched off.	▸Continue driving with added caution.Wheels may lock during hard braking, reducing steering capability.
(I)	(Canada only)	See Operator's Manual	The brake system is still functional but without the EBP, the ABS, and the ESP® available.	▸Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center as soon as possible.Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident.

Practical hints

What to do if ...

Display symbol	Display message	Possible cause/consequence	Possible solution
BRAKE (USA only)	Check	There is insufficient brake fluid in the reservoir.	Risk of accident! Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon at is safe to do so.Apply the parking brake (▷ page 65).Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. Do not add brake fluid! This will not solve the problem.
(C) (Canada only)	Brake Fluid Level

Warning!

Driving with the message Check Brake Fluid Level displayed can result in an accident. Have your brake system checked immediately. Do not add brake fluid before checking the brake system. Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire. You could be seriously burned.

! If you find that the brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark or below, have the brake system checked for brake pad thickness and leaks.

Practical hints

What to do if ...

Display symbol	Display message	Possible cause/consequence	Possible solution
	Coolant LevelStop car, switch engine off.	The coolant is too hot.Among other possible causes (the cooling fan could be malfunctioning), the poly-V-belt could be broken.	►Stop the vehicle in safe location or as soon as it safe to do so.►Apply the parking brake (▷ page 65).►Turn off the engine.►Check the poly-V-belt.If it is broken:►Do not continue to drive. Otherwise, the engine will overheat due to an inoperative water pump which may result in damage to the engine. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.If it is intact:►Do not continue to drive the vehicle with this message displayed. Doing so could result in serious engine damage that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.(Continued on next page)

Practical hints

What to do if ...

Display symbol	Display message	Possible cause/consequence	Possible solution
			▶Observe the coolant temperature in the multifunction display (▷page 154).If the temperature raises again:▶Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center immediately.

Warning!

• Driving when your engine is overheated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. You could be seriously burned.
• Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns which can occur just by opening the hood. Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it.

Stop the vehicle in a safe location away from other traffic. Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until the engine has cooled down.

During severe operation conditions and stop-and-go city traffic, the coolant temperature may rise close to 248^ F ( 120^ C).

! The engine should not be operated with the coolant temperature above 248°F (120°C). Doing so may cause serious damage which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

Practical hints

What to do if ...

Display symbol	Display message	Possible cause/consequence	Possible solution
	Top Up CoolantSee Operator's Manual	The coolant level is too low.	► Add coolant (▷ page 345).►If you have to add coolant frequently,have the cooling system checked by anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

Warning!

Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts. Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which may burn if it comes into contact with hot engine parts. You could be seriously burned.

! Do not ignore the low engine coolant level warning. Extended driving with the message and symbol displayed may cause serious engine damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

Do not drive without sufficient amount of coolant in the cooling system. The engine will overheat causing major engine damage.

Practical hints

What to do if ...

Display symbol	Display message	Possible cause/consequence	Possible solution
	Check engine oil level at next refueling.	The engine oil level is too low.	▶ Check the engine oil level (▷ page 343) and add engine oil as required (▷page 344).

When the message Check engine oil level at next refueling, appears while the engine is running and at operating temperature, the engine oil level has dropped to approximately the minimum level.

When this occurs, the warning will first come on intermittently and then stay on if the oil level drops further.

Visually check for oil leaks. If no obvious oil leaks are noted, drive to the nearest service station where the engine oil should be topped to the required level with an approved engine oil.

For information on approved engine oils, refer to the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet (USA only) or contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

! The engine oil level warning should not be ignored. Extended driving with the symbol displayed could result in serious engine damage that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

Practical hints

What to do if ...

Display symbol	Display message	Possible cause/consequence	Possible solution
	You are driving with one or more	doors open.	►Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon as it is safe to do so.►Close the door(s).
	CleanFuel Filter		►Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
	Gas Cap Open	A loss of pressure has been detected in the fuel system. The fuel cap may not be closed properly or the fuel system may be leaky.	►Check the fuel cap (▷ page 337).If it is not closed properly:►Close the fuel cap.If it is closed properly:►Have the fuel system checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
	You are driving with the hood or	the tailgate open.	►Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt as soon as it is safe to do so in a safe location.►Close the hood (▷ page 341) or the tailgate (▷page 119).
		You are trying to lock the vehicle with the KEYLESS-GO* function with a door or the tailgate open.	►Close all doors and/or the tailgate (▷page 119).

Practical hints

What to do if ...

Display symbol	Display message	Possible cause/consequence	Possible solution
	KeyNot Detected	The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is not detected while the engine is running because•the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is not in the vehicle•there is strong radio-frequency interference	►Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon as it is safe to do so.►Apply the parking brake (▷ page 65).►Search for the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*.Otherwise the vehicle cannot be centrally locked nor can the engine be started again after the engine is stopped.
		The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is momentarily not detected.	►Change the position of the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* in the vehicle.►Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the starter switch if necessary.
	KeyNot Detected	The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is not detected while the ignition is switched on (▷page 40) and a door is opened or closed and the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is not in the vehicle.	►Search for the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*.Otherwise the vehicle cannot be locked nor can the engine be started.►Change the position of the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* in the vehicle.

Practical hints

What to do if ...

Display symbol	Display message	Possible cause/consequence	Possible solution
	Key DetectedIn Vehicle	A SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* left in the vehicle was detected while trying to lock the vehicle from the outside.	►Take the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* out of the vehicle.
	Remove Key	You have forgotten to remove the SmartKey.	►Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch.
	You need a new key.	There is no additional code available for SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*.	►Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center as soon as possible.
	KeyDoes Not Belong to Vehicle	The SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* in the starter switch does not belong to the vehicle.	►Find the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* that belongs to the vehicle to operate the vehicle.
	ChangeKey Batteries	The batteries in the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* are discharged.	►Replace the batteries (▷ page 461).
	Don’t ForgetYour Key	This message appears for a maximum of 60 seconds if the driver’s door is opened with the engine shut off and no SmartKey in the starter switch.This message is only a reminder.	►Insert the SmartKey in the starter switch (▷page 40).or►Take the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you when leaving the vehicle.

Practical hints

What to do if ...

Display symbol	Display message	Possible cause/consequence	Possible solution
	3rd Brake Lamp	The high mounted brake lamp is malfunctioning. This message will only appear if a critical number of LEDs have stopped working.	►Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center as soon as possible.
	Active Headlamps Inoperative	The active Bi-Xenon* headlamp system is malfunctioning.	►Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center as soon as possible.
	AUTO Light Inoperative	The light sensor is malfunctioning. The headlamps switch on automatically.	►Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center as soon as possible.To switch off the headlamps (U. S. vehicles only):►In the control system, set lamp operation to manual mode (▷page 136).►Switch off the headlamps using the exterior lamp switch (▷page 135).
	Brake Lamp Left	The left brake lamp is malfunctioning. A substitute bulb is being used.	►Replace the bulb as soon as possible (▷page 471).
	Brake Lamp Right	The right brake lamp is malfunctioning. A substitute bulb is being used.	►Replace the bulb as soon as possible (▷page 471).

Practical hints

What to do if ...

Display symbol	Display message	Possible cause/consequence	Possible solution
	Cornering Lamp Left	The left corner-illuminating front fog lamp is malfunctioning.	►Replace the bulb as soon as possible (▷page 469).
	Cornering Lamp Right	The right corner-illuminating front fog lamp is malfunctioning.	►Replace the bulb as soon as possible (▷page 469).
	Front Foglamp Left	The left front fog lamp is malfunctioning.	►Replace the bulb as soon as possible (▷page 469).
	Front Foglamp Right	The right front fog lamp is malfunctioning.	►Replace the bulb as soon as possible (▷page 469).
	High Beam Left	The left high beam lamp is malfunctioning.	Halogen headlamp:►Replace the bulb as soon as possible (▷page 467).Bi-Xenon* headlamp:►Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center as soon as possible.
	High Beam Right	The right high beam lamp is malfunctioning.	Halogen headlamp:►Replace the bulb as soon as possible (▷page 467).Bi-Xenon* headlamp:►Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center as soon as possible.

Practical hints

What to do if ...

Display symbol	Display message	Possible cause/consequence	Possible solution
	License Plate Lamp Left	The left license plate lamp is malfunctioning.	►Replace the bulb as soon as possible (▷page 473).
	License Plate Lamp Right	The right license plate lamp is malfunctioning.	►Replace the bulb as soon as possible (▷page 473).
	Low Beam Left	The left low beam lamp is malfunctioning.	Halogen headlamp:►Replace the bulb as soon as possible (▷page 466).Bi-Xenon* headlamp:►Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center as soon as possible.
	Low Beam Right	The right low beam lamp is malfunctioning.	Halogen headlamp:►Replace the bulb as soon as possible (▷page 466).Bi-Xenon* headlamp:►Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center as soon as possible.

Practical hints

What to do if ...

Display symbol	Display message	Possible cause/consequence	Possible solution
	Marker LampFront Left	The left front side marker lamp is malfunctioning.	►Replace the bulb as soon as possible (▷page 469).
	Marker LampFront Right	The right front side marker lamp is malfunctioning.	►Replace the bulb as soon as possible (▷page 469).
	Parking LampFront Left	The front left parking lamp is malfunctioning. A substitute bulb is being used.	►Replace the bulb as soon as possible (▷page 468).
	Parking LampFront Right	The right front parking lamp is malfunctioning. A substitute bulb is being used.	►Replace the bulb as soon as possible (▷page 468).
	FoglampRear Left	The left rear fog lamp is malfunctioning.	►Replace the bulb as soon as possible (▷page 471).
	Reverse LampLeft	The left backup lamp is malfunctioning.	►Replace the bulb as soon as possible (▷page 471).
	Reverse LampRight	The right backup lamp is malfunctioning.	►Replace the bulb as soon as possible (▷page 471).

Practical hints

What to do if ...

Display symbol	Display message	Possible cause/consequence	Possible solution
	Switch Off Lights	You have removed the SmartKey from the starter switch and opened the driver's door or removed the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* from the vehicle and left the parking lamps or the rear fog lamp on.	▶ Turn the exterior lamp switch to ▶ (▶page 135).
	Tail Lamp Left	The left tail lamp is malfunctioning. A substitute bulb is being used.	▶Replace the bulb as soon as possible (▶page 471).
	Tail Lamp Right	The right tail lamp is malfunctioning. A substitute bulb is being used.	▶Replace the bulb as soon as possible (▶page 471).

Practical hints

What to do if ...

Display symbol	Display message	Possible cause/consequence	Possible solution
	Turn SignalRear Left	The left rear turn signal lamp is malfunctioning. A substitute bulb is being used.	►Replace the bulb as soon as possible (▷page 471).
	Turn SignalRear Right	The right rear turn signal lamp is malfunctioning. A substitute bulb is being used.	►Replace the bulb as soon as possible (▷page 471).
	Turn SignalFront Left	The left front turn signal lamp is malfunctioning. A substitute bulb is being used.	►Replace the bulb as soon as possible (▷page 468).
	Turn SignalFront Right	The right front turn signal lamp is malfunctioning. A substitute bulb is being used.	►Replace the bulb as soon as possible (▷page 468).
	Turn SignalLeft Mirror	The turn signal in the left exterior rear view mirror is malfunctioning. This message will only appear if a critical number of LEDs have stopped working.	►Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center as soon as possible.
	Turn SignalRight Mirror	The turn signal in the right exterior rear view mirror is malfunctioning. This message will only appear if a critical number of LEDs have stopped working.	►Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center as soon as possible.

Practical hints

What to do if ...

Display symbol	Display message	Possible cause/consequence	Possible solution
	Reserve Fuel	The fuel level has gone below the reserve mark.	►Refuel at the next gas station (▷page 337).
	Ultra Low-sulfur Diesel Fuel Only	Vehicles with diesel engine only: The fuel level has gone below the reserve mark.	►Refuel at the next gas station (▷page 337). ►Only use commercially available vehicular ULTRA-LOW SULFUR HIGHWAY DIESEL FUEL (15 ppm SULFUR MAXIMUM).
SOS	Tele Aid Inoperative	One or more main functions of the Tele Aid system are malfunctioning.	►Have the Tele Aid system checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
	Tele Aid Battery	The emergency power battery for the Tele Aid system is malfunctioning. If the vehicle battery is also malfunctioning or drained, Tele Aid will not be operational.	►Have the Tele Aid system checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
	Function unavailable	This display appears if button or on the multifunction steering wheel is pressed and the vehicle is not equipped with a telephone.
	Top Up Washer Fluid	The fluid level has dropped to about ^1/_3 of total reservoir capacity.	►Add washer fluid (▷ page 346).

Practical hints

What to do if ...

Display symbol	Display message	Possible cause/consequence	Possible solution
	Tire Pressure(s)Please Correct	Vehicles with Advanced TPMS*: The pressure is too low in one or more tires.	▶Check and correct tire inflation pressure as required.
	Tire PressureCaution - Tire Defect	One or more tires are deflating. ▶Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt steering and braking maneuvers. ▶If necessary, change the wheel.
	Caution: Tire Defect	One or more tires are deflating.Vehicles with Advanced TPMS*: The respective tire is indicated in the multifunction display.	▶Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt steering and braking maneuvers. ▶If necessary, change the wheel.

Warning!

Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You may lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.

Practical hints

What to do if ...

Display symbol	Display message	Possible cause/consequence	Possible solution
	Tire PressureCheck Tires	The tire pressure in one or more tires is already below the minimum value.	►Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt steering and braking maneuvers.►Check and adjust tire pressure as required (▷page 359).►If necessary, change the wheel (▷page 478).
	Check Tires	The tire pressure in one or more tires is already below the minimum value.Vehicles with Advanced TPMS*:The respective tire is indicated in the multifunction display.	►Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt steering and braking maneuvers.►Check and adjust tire pressure as required (▷page 359).►If necessary, change the wheel (▷page 478).

Warning!

Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.

You may lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.

Practical hints

What to do if ...

Display symbol	Display message	Possible cause/consequence	Possible solution
	Level SelectionNot Permitted	The selected vehicle level cannot adjusted, becauseyou are driving too fast for the desired vehicle levelyou are towing a traileryou are using accessories that are connected to the trailer power socket, e.g. a bicycle rack	►Reduce vehicle speed.►Set the desired vehicle level again (▷page 257).
	Malfunction	The air suspension* is malfunctioning.	► Do not drive faster than 50 mph (80 km/h) depending on the set vehicle level.►Have the vehicle checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
	CompressorCooling Down	You have selected a higher vehicle level*. Due to frequent level changes within a short period, the compressor must first cool down.	►Let the compressor cool until the message disappears.The selected level will be set once the compressor has cooled down.

When the message Compressor Cooling Down appears in the multifunction display, driving is still possible. Keep in mind that the
ride height of the vehicle is not yet reached, so you can damage the underbody of the vehicle.
The selected level will be set once the compressor has cooled.

Practical hints

Where will I find ...?

First aid kit

Check expiration dates and contents for completeness at least once a year and replace missing/expired items.

The first aid kit is located on the driver's side in the cargo compartment behind the cover.

P58.10-2141-31 ① ②

① Cover in left side trim panel
② Lock

▶ Turn lock ① 90° in direction of arrow.
▶Fold down cover ②.

The first aid kit can be removed.

Vehicle tool kit

The vehicle tool kit is stored under the cargo compartment floor.

The vehicle tool kit includes:

• Towing eye bolt
- Wheel wrench
- Alignment bolt
- Vehicle jack
- Fuse chart
• Collapsible wheel chock
- Wheel bolts for spare wheel

① ② P68.00-4639-31

① Cargo compartment floor, lowered
② Handle cover

▶ Open the tailgate (▷ page 119).
▶ Push in handle cover ② and pull handle in direction of arrow.
▶ Lift cargo compartment floor ①.

Practical hints

Where will I find ...?

P68.00-4133-31 ③

③ Securing hook

▶ Release securing hook ③ (located below the floor handle) from holder.

3 4 5 P68.0-4193-31

③ Securing hook
④ Cargo compartment floor, raised
⑤ Upper cargo compartment lip
▶ Engage securing hook ③ on upper cargo compartment lip ⑤.

! With the cargo compartment cover blind installed behind the rear seats ( page 271), disengage cargo compartment cover blind and flip it forward. Otherwise the strap of the securing hook could damage the cargo compartment cover blind.

▶Remove the Minispare wheel (▷page 453).

or

ML 63 AMG:

▶Remove the collapsible tire (▶page 454).

You can now access the vehicle tool kit.

Practical hints

Where will I find ...?

6 7 8 9 10 11 12 P58.10-217-31

Example illustration ^1

⑥ Wheel wrench
⑦ Vehicle jack ^2
⑧ Collapsible wheel chock
⑨ Fuse chart
⑩ Towing eye bolt
⑪ Alignment bolt
⑫ Spare wheel bolts

1 Depending on production date, your vehicle may be equipped with a scissors-type vehicle jack. Thus, appearance and alignment of the items may vary.
2 If your vehicle is equipped with a scissors-type vehicle jack, a reversible ratchet is also included.
1 Depending on production date, your vehicle may be equipped with a scissors-type vehicle jack. Thus, appearance and alignment of the items may vary.
2 If your vehicle is equipped with a scissors-type vehicle jack, a reversible ratchet is also included.

Depending on vehicle production date your vehicle may be equipped with a scissors-type jack (located under the cargo compartment floor). If so equipped, only use this jack when jacking up the vehicle as otherwise the vehicle's underbody can be damaged. See separate instructions for scissors-type jack.
To prevent damage, always disengage the strap of the securing hook and lower the cargo compartment floor (▶page 448) before closing the tailgate.

Vehicle jack

Warning!

Only use the jack supplied with your vehicle to lift the vehicle briefly for wheel changes. If you use the jack for any other purpose, you or others could be injured, as the jack is designed only for the purpose of changing a wheel.

When using the jack, observe the safety notes in the "Mounting the spare wheel" section (▷page 479) and the notes on the jack.

The vehicle jack is located underneath the cargo compartment floor.

▶ Remove vehicle jack (▷ page 450).

Practical hints

Where will I find ...?

Screw-type vehicle jack

Mechanical component diagram showing a piston-like structure with a red arrow indicating motion (no text or symbols)

Storage position

▶Turn crank handle in the direction of arrow as far as it will go.

Mechanical component diagram showing a lever and bracket assembly (no text or symbols)

Operational position

▶Turn crank handle clockwise.

Before storing the vehicle jack in its storage compartment:

• The vehicle jack should be fully collapsed.
- The handle must be folded in (storage position).

Scissors-type vehicle jack

Mechanical linkage component with articulated arms and mounting base (no text or symbols visible)

Storage position

▶Take the reversible ratchet out of the vehicle tool kit.

① ② P40.10-4903-31

Operational position

① Scissors-type vehicle jack
② Reversible ratchet
▶ Attach reversible ratchet ② to vehicle jack in such a way that the word UP can be seen.

Before storing the vehicle jack in its storage compartment:

• It should be fully collapsed (storage position).
  •The ratchet must be removed.

Practical hints

Where will I find ...?

Setting up the collapsible wheel chock

The collapsible wheel chock serves to additionally secure the vehicle, e.g. while changing the wheel.

① Tilt the plate upward
② Fold the lower plate outward
③ Insert the plate

▶ Tilt both plates upward ①.
▶ Fold the lower plate outward ②.
▶Guide the tabs of the lower plate all the way into the openings of base plate ③.

For information on where to place wheel chocks when changing a wheel, see "Lifting the vehicle" (▷page 479).

Minispare wheel (except ML 63 AMG)

Warning!

The dimensions of the Minispare wheel are different from those of the road wheels. As a result, the vehicle handling characteristics change when driving with a Minispare wheel mounted. Adapt your driving style accordingly.

The Minispare wheel is for temporary use only. When driving with a Minispare wheel mounted, ensure proper tire inflation pressure and do not exceed a vehicle speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).

Drive to the nearest Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center as soon as possible to have the Minispare wheel replaced with a regular road wheel.

Never operate the vehicle with more than one spare wheel mounted.

Do not switch off the ESP ^® when a Minispare wheel is mounted.

The Minispare wheel is located underneath the cargo compartment floor ( page 448).

For information on how to mount the Minispare wheel, see "Mounting the spare wheel" (▷page 479).

Removing Minispare wheel

① ② ③ P58.10-2142-31

① Retaining screw
② Storage well casing
③ Minispare wheel

Remove Minispare wheel to gain access to remaining tools in the vehicle tool kit (▶page 448).

For access the Minispare wheel, see "Vehicle tool kit" (▷page 448).

▶ Loosen retaining screw ① by turning it counterclockwise.
▶ Remove storage well casing ②.
▶Remove Minispare wheel ③.

Collapsible tire (ML 63 AMG only)

Warning!

The dimensions of the collapsible tire are different from those of the road wheels. As a result, the vehicle handling characteristics change when driving with a collapsible tire mounted. Adapt your driving style accordingly.

The collapsible tire is for temporary use only. When driving with a collapsible tire mounted, ensure proper tire inflation pressure and do not exceed a vehicle speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).

Drive to the nearest Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center as soon as possible to have the collapsible tire replaced with a regular road wheel.

Never operate the vehicle with more than one collapsible tire mounted.

Do not switch off the ESP ^® when a collapsible tire is mounted.

Practical hints

Where will I find ...?

The collapsible tire is located underneath the cargo compartment floor (>page 448).

For information on how to mount the collapsible tire, see "Mounting the spare wheel" ( page 479).

Removing the collapsible tire

① ② ③ ④ ⑤ ⑥ P68.00-4436-31

① Electric air pump
② Collapsible tire
③ Vehicle tool kit storage well casing
④ Alignment bolt
⑤ Towing eye bolt
⑥ Wheel wrench

i Remove collapsible tire to gain access to remaining tools in the vehicle tool kit (▷page 448).

For access the collapsible tire, see "Vehicle tool kit" (▷page 448).

▶Remove the vehicle tool kit storage well casing ③.

Close-up of a car wheel assembly with numbered component (7), no visible text or symbols on the main subject area.

⑦ Retaining screw

▶ Loosen retaining screw ⑦ by turning it counterclockwise.
▶ Remove collapsible tire ②.

Unlocking/locking in an emergency

▼Unlocking/locking in an emergency

Unlocking the vehicle

If you cannot unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO*, open the driver's door using the mechanical key.

i Unlocking the driver's door with the mechanical key will trigger the anti-theft alarm system.

To cancel the alarm, insert the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* in the starter switch.

Removing the mechanical key

① ② P80.20-2725-31

① Mechanical key locking tab
② Mechanical key

▶ Move locking tab ① in direction of arrow.

The mechanical key ② comes out.

▶ Slide mechanical key ② out of the housing.

Unlocking the driver's door

1 2 P80.20-2947-31

1 Unlocking

② Mechanical key

Insert mechanical key ② into the driver's door lock until it stops.
▶ Turn mechanical key ② counterclockwise to position ① and hold it there.
▶Pull the door handle until the locking knob moves up (▶page 118).
The driver's door is unlocked.
▶ Pull the door handle once more to open the driver's door.

Practical hints

Unlocking/locking in an emergency

Locking the vehicle

If you cannot lock the vehicle with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO*, lock the vehicle carrying out the following steps.

▶Close the front passenger door, the rear right door and the tailgate.
▶Open the driver's door and the rear left door.
▶Press the central locking switch on the driver's door (▷page 126).

The locking knobs of the front passenger door and the rear doors move down.

If the vehicle battery is disconnected or drained:

▶Press down the locking knobs of the front passenger door and the rear doors manually.

▶Exit the vehicle.
▶Close the driver's door.
▶Enter the vehicle through the rear left door.
▶Press down the locking knob of the driver's door.

! To prevent inadvertent lockout, make sure to have the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you before proceeding with the next step. The next step will lock the vehicle.

▶Exit the vehicle.

▶Close the rear left door. The vehicle is locked.

This procedure does not arm the anti-theft alarm system, nor does it lock the fuel filler flap.

Unlocking and opening the tailgate

A minimum height clearance of 7.2 ft (2.20 m) is required to open the tailgate.

If the tailgate can no longer be unlocked and opened using the 📤 button on the SmartKey or the KEYLESS-GO* function, use the emergency release lever to unlock and open the tailgate.

The emergency release lever is located on the inside of the tailgate.

Technical diagram showing a red mechanical component with labeled parts and a magnified inset view

① Emergency release lever
② Cover
▶ Remove cover ② from the trim on the tailgate.
▶ Push release lever ① all the way to the left.
▶Lift the tailgate.

Unlocking/locking in an emergency

! Always make sure there is sufficient over-head clearance.

If the vehicle has previously been locked from the outside using the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO*, opening the tailgate from the inside using the emergency release lever will trigger the anti-theft alarm system.

To cancel the alarm, do one of the following:

- Insert the SmartKey or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* in the starter switch.

- Press button 📋 or 🔍 on the SmartKey or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*.

In vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:

- Pull an outside door handle. The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* must be within 3 ft (1 m) of the vehicle.

- Press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button ( page 41). The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be inside the vehicle.

Fuel filler flap

▶ Open the tailgate (▷ page 119).

The fuel filler flap release is located behind a cover in the right side trim panel of the cargo compartment.

Diagram showing a car interior with labeled parts and a magnified inset highlighting a component labeled '1' and part '2'.

① Lock ② Cover

▶Insert a suitable object such as a coin into the slot of lock ①.

▶ Turn lock ① by 90^ in direction of arrow.

▶ Remove cover ②.

Car interior photo with highlighted car component and red arrow indicating location, showing vehicle details and timestamp

③ Fuel filler flap release

▶ Pull yellow fuel filler flap release ③ in direction of arrow.

The fuel filler flap is unlocked.

▶ Open the fuel filler flap (▷ page 337).

Practical hints

Resetting activated head restraints

If the active head restraints have been triggered in a rear-end collision, the active head restraints must be reset. Otherwise, the active head restraints cannot offer any additional protection in the event of another rear-end collision.

You can tell that the head restraints have been activated when they have been moved forward and cannot be adjusted.

Warning!

For safety reasons, have the active head restraints checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center after a rear-end collision.

Warning!

When pushing back the head restraint cushion, take care that your fingers do not become caught between the head restraint cushion and the cover. Failing to do so may lead to injury.

! Be careful not to damage upholstery.

For your convenience, we recommend that you have this work carried out by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

Vehicles without Rear seat entertainment system\*

i Pressing the head restraint cushion back requires high force. If you encounter difficulties when pushing the head restraint back please have the procedure performed at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

① ② ③ P91.16-2545-31

① Pull
② Adjust downward
③ Press

▶Pull the top of the head restraint cushion in direction of arrow ① as far as it will go.
▶Adjust the head restraint cushion downward in direction of arrow ② as far as it will go.
▶ Firmly press the top of the active head restraint cushion towards the head restraint cover in direction of arrow ③ until it engages.

Practical hints

Resetting activated head restraints

▶ Repeat this procedure on the active head restraint for the second front seat.

For information on active head restraints, see "Active head restraint" (▷page 88).

For information on head restraint adjustment, see "Seats" (▷page 43).

Vehicles with Rear seat entertainment system\*

▶Take the reset tool out of the Mercedes-Benz vehicle literature pouch.

Diagram showing car seat assembly with labeled parts and directional arrows indicating movement or rotation

① Reset tool

② Active head restraint

① ② ③ P91.16-2547-31

① Reset tool
② Active head restraint
③ Rectangular opening

▶ Guide reset tool ① into rectangular opening ③ of active head restraint ②.
▶ Press reset tool ① downward in direction of arrow until you hear the head restraint release mechanism audibly disengage.
▶ Pull out reset tool ①.

Practical hints

Resetting activated head restraints

▶▶▶ Firmly press the active head restraint cushion backward towards the head restraint cover in direction of arrow until it engages.

▶ Repeat this procedure on the active head restraint for the second front seat.
▶After resetting the active head restraints store reset tool ① in the Mercedes-Benz vehicle literature pouch.

For information on active head restraints, see "Active head restraint" (▷page 88).

For information on head restraint adjustment, see "Seats" (▷page 43).

Practical hints

Replacing SmartKey batteries

▼Replacing SmartKey batteries

If the batteries in the SmartKey or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* are discharged, the vehicle can no longer be locked or unlocked. It is recommended to have the batteries replaced at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

Warning!

Keep the batteries out of reach of children. If a battery is swallowed, seek medical help immediately.

Batteries contain materials that can harm the environment if disposed of improperly. Recycling of batteries is the preferred method of disposal. Many states require sellers of batteries to accept old batteries for recycling.

When inserting the batteries, make sure they are clean and free of lint.

When replacing batteries, always replace both batteries.

The required replacement batteries are available at any Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

Replacement batteries: Lithium, type CR 2025 or equivalent.

Remove mechanical key ① from the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* (▶page 455).

P80.35-2283-31

① Mechanical key

② Battery compartment

▶ Insert mechanical key ① into opening.

▶ Press mechanical key ① in direction of arrow.

The battery compartment ② is unlatched.

▶ Pull battery compartment ② out of the SmartKey housing.

Practical hints

Replacing SmartKey batteries

△△

P80.35-2284-31

③ Batteries
④ Contact spring

▶ Pull out batteries ③.
▶ Using a line-free cloth, insert new batteries ③ under contact springs ④ with the positive terminal (+) side facing up.
▶ Return battery compartment ② into housing until it locks into place.
▶ Slide mechanical key ① back into the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*.
▶Check the operation of the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*.

Practical hints

Replacing bulbs

▼Replacing bulbs

Bulbs

Safe vehicle operation depends on proper exterior lighting and signaling. It is therefore essential that all bulbs and lamp assemblies are in good working order at all times.

Correct headlamp adjustment is extremely important. Have headlamps checked and readjusted at regular intervals and when a bulb has been replaced. See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center for headlamp adjustment.

If the headlamps or front fog lamps are fogged up on the inside as a result of high humidity, driving the vehicle a distance with the lights on should clear up the fogging.

i Substitute bulbs will be brought into use when the following lamps malfunction:

• Turn signal lamps
• Brake lamps
• Parking lamps
• Tail lamps

Read and observe the messages in the multifunction display (▷page 438).

Practical hints

Replacing bulbs

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 P82.10-3669-31

Front lamps

Lamp Type
1 Parking and standing lamp	W 5 W
2 Headlamps:High beam/high beam flasher	H7 (55 W)
Bi-Xenon headlamps*:High beam/high beam flasher spot lamp	H7 (55 W)
3 Headlamps:Low beam	H7 (55 W)
Bi-Xenon headlamps*:Low beam ^1	D1S-35 W
4 Additional turn signal lamp	LED
5 Side marker lamp	WY 5 W

1 Vehicles with Bi-Xenon* headlamps: Do not replace the Bi-Xenon bulbs yourself. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

Lamp Type
6 Turn signal lamp 3457 AK	S-8(30/2.2 cp bulb)
7 Front fog lamp H11 (55 W)
Corner-illuminatingfront fog lamp*	H11 (55 W)

Rear lamps

	Lamp Type
8	High mounted brake lamp	LED
9	Brake lamp P 2 1 W
10	Backup lamp P 2 1 W
11	Turn signal lamp	PY 21 W
12	Side marker lamp	P 21/4 W
13	Tail, parking, standing lamp, rear fog lamp (driver's side only)	P 21/4 W
14	License plate lamps C 5 W

Practical hints

Replacing bulbs

Warning!

Bulbs and bulb sockets can be very hot.

Allow the lamp to cool down before changing a bulb.

Keep bulbs out of reach of children.

Halogen lamps contain pressurized gas.

A bulb can explode if you:

• touch or move it when hot
• drop the bulb
• scratch the bulb

Wear eye and hand protection.

Because of high voltage in Xenon lamps, it is dangerous to replace the bulb or repair the lamp and its components. We recommend that you have such work done by a qualified technician.

Notes on bulb replacement

• Only use 12-volt bulbs of the same type and with the specified watt rating.
• Switch lights off before changing a bulb to prevent short circuits.
  • Always use a clean lint-free cloth when handling bulbs.
• Your hands should be dry and free of oil and grease.
• If the newly installed bulb does not come on, visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

Have the LEDs and bulbs for the following lamps replaced by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center:

• the additional turn signal lamps in the exterior rear view mirrors
  • the high mounted brake lamp
  • the Bi-Xenon* low beam lamps
  • the Bi-Xenon high beam flasher spot-light*

Do not replace the LEDs yourself. You could otherwise damage the LEDs or parts of the vehicle. Only have the LEDs replaced by a an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
Replacing the bulbs for the front lamps is a technically complex process. For your convenience, we recommend that you have this work carried out by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

Have the headlamp adjustment checked regularly.

Practical hints

Replacing bulbs

Replacing bulbs for front lamps

Before you start to replace a bulb for a front lamp, do the following first:

▶Turn the exterior lamp switch to position 0 (▷page 135).
▶ Open the hood (▷ page 341).

① ② ③ ④ ⑤ P82.10-3670-31

① Housing cover for low beam halogen headlamp
② Housing cover for high beam halogen bulb (high beam and high beam flasher)
③ Bulb socket for parking and standing lamp bulb
④ Bulb socket for turn signal lamp bulb
⑤ Bulb socket for side marker lamp bulb

Low beam bulb (halogen headlamp)

Interior view of a mechanical component with labeled parts (no readable text or symbols)

① Low beam headlamp cover

Interior view of a vehicle head with visible engine components and a numbered component (no text or symbols)

② Bulb socket for low beam headlamp

Practical hints

Replacing bulbs

▶ Turn cover ① counterclockwise.
▶ Remove cover ①.
▶ Turn bulb socket ② counterclockwise.
▶ Pull bulb socket ② out of the headlamp housing.
▶Pull the low beam bulb out of bulb socket ②.
▶Insert the new low beam bulb into bulb socket ②.
▶ Insert bulb socket ② into the headlamp housing.
▶ Turn bulb socket ② clockwise until it engages.
▶ Place cover ① on the opening in the headlamp housing.
▶ Turn cover ① clockwise until it engages.

Bi-Xenon\* low beam/high beam headlamp

Warning!

Do not remove the low beam/high beam cover for the Bi-Xenon* headlamp. Because of high voltage in Xenon* lamps, it is dangerous to replace the bulb or repair the lamp and its components. We recommend that you have such work done by a qualified technician.

High beam bulb (halogen headlamp)

Close-up of a mechanical component with a circular dial and labeled section (1), no readable text or symbols beyond the label.

① High beam headlamp cover

Internal view of a car head assembly with labeled component (no readable text or symbols)

② Bulb socket for high beam headlamp

Practical hints

Replacing bulbs

▶ Turn cover ① counterclockwise.
▶ Remove cover ①.
▶ Turn bulb socket ② counterclockwise.
▶ Pull bulb socket ② out of the headlamp housing.
▶ Pull the high beam bulb out of bulb socket ②.
▶Insert the new high beam bulb into bulb socket ②.
▶ Insert bulb socket ② into the headlamp housing.
▶ Turn bulb socket ② clockwise until it engages.
Place cover ① on the opening in the headlamp housing.
▶ Turn cover ① clockwise until it engages.

Turn signal lamp bulb

Technical diagram of a mechanical component with labeled parts (no readable text or symbols)

① Bulb socket for turn signal lamp

▶ Turn bulb socket ① counterclockwise.
▶ Pull bulb socket ① out of the headlamp housing.
▶ Pull the turn signal bulb out of bulb socket ①.
▶Insert the new turn signal bulb into bulb socket ①.
▶ Insert bulb socket ① into the headlamp housing.
▶ Turn bulb socket ① clockwise until it engages.

Parking and standing lamp bulb

▶ Turn bulb socket ③ (▷ page 466) counterclockwise.
▶ Pull bulb socket ③ out of the headlamp housing.
▶ Pull the bulb out of bulb socket ③.
▶Insert the new bulb into bulb socket ③.
▶ Insert bulb socket ③ into the headlamp housing.
▶ Turn bulb socket ③ clockwise until it engages.

Practical hints

Replacing bulbs

Side marker lamp bulb

▶ Turn bulb socket ⑤ (▷ page 466) counterclockwise.
▶ Pull bulb socket ⑤ out of the headlamp housing.
▶Pull the side marker bulb out of bulb socket ⑤.
▶Insert the new side marker bulb into bulb socket ⑤.
▶ Insert bulb socket ⑤ into the headlamp housing.
▶ Turn bulb socket ⑤ clockwise until it engages.

Front fog lamp bulbs

! If not done carefully and properly, damage to the bumper can result. We therefore recommend that you have this work carried out by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

Removing front fog lamp cover:

1 2 PB2.10-4442-31

① Cover
② Front fog lamp or corner-illuminating front fog lamp*

▶Insert a suitable object (e.g. screwdriver) at point indicated by the arrow and pry out cover ①.

Cover ① is released.

▶ Swing cover ① outwards and take it off.

Removing front fog lamp cover (Vehicles with AMG Sport Package* or ML 63 AMG):

1 2 P82.10-4443-31

① Cover
② Front fog lamp

▶ Use a suitable object (e.g. hook or a screwdriver) and place the hook or screwdriver carefully between lower end of cover and bumper.

▶▶

Practical hints

Replacing bulbs

▶▶▶Turn the hook or screwdriver 90°.

▶ Hold the cover ① and pull the hook or screwdriver outwards.

You can now access the front fog lamp.

P82.10-3801/31

Example illustration ML 350 (Sport Package similar)

③ Retaining screws

▶ Turn retaining screws ③ counterclockwise.

Remove front fog lamp ② out of the bumper.

▶ Pull electrical connector off.

C8BRAM H110 264-0-4 H110 264-0-3 H110 264-0-3 ④ P82.10-3888-31

④ Bulb socket of front fog lamp bulb

▶ Turn bulb socket ④ counterclockwise.

▶ Pull bulb socket ④ out of the housing.

▶ Pull the front fog lamp bulb out of bulb socket ④.

▶Insert the new front fog lamp bulb into bulb socket ④.

▶ Insert bulb socket ④ into the housing.

▶ Turn bulb socket ④ clockwise until it engages.
▶Plug in the electrical connector.
▶ Insert front fog lamp ② back into bumper.
▶ Fasten retaining screws ③.
▶ Reinsert cover ① and press it in until it engages.

Additional turn signal lamps bulbs

The additional turn signal lamps in the exterior rear view mirrors have LEDs.

If a malfunction occurs or LEDs fail to function, the entire turn signal unit must be replaced. Have the turn signal unit replaced by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

Practical hints

Replacing bulbs

Replacing bulbs for rear lamps

Before you start to replace a bulb for a rear lamp, do the following first:

▶Turn the exterior lamp switch to position ☐ (▷page 135).

Tail lamp unit

To access the bulb socket, you have to remove the cover in the corresponding side trim panel of the cargo compartment.

▶ Open the tailgate (▷ page 119).

Opening the side trim panels

Opening the driver's side trim panel:

P58.10-2141-31 ① ②

① Cover in left side trim panel ② Lock

▶ Turn lock ① 90° in direction of arrow.

▶ Fold down cover ②.

Vehicles without sound system*:

▶Remove the storage compartment on the driver's side.

Diagram of a car interior showing labeled components and a close-up view with numbered annotations

① Lock

② Storage compartment

▶Insert a suitable object such as a coin into the slot of lock ①.

▶ Turn lock ① counterclockwise by 90°.

▶ Remove storage compartment ②.

Practical hints

Replacing bulbs

Opening the passenger side trim panel:

Diagram of a car interior showing labeled parts with numbered annotations

① Lock
② Cover in right side trim panel
▶Insert a suitable object such as a coin into the slot of lock ①.
▶ Turn lock ① counterclockwise by 90° in direction of arrow.
▶ Remove cover ②.

Replacing bulbs

1 2 3 4 5 P82, 10-3676-31

Example illustration rear lamp passenger-side

① Brake lamp
② Backup lamp
③ Rear fog lamp (only driver's side), tail lamp, parking and standing lamp
④ Side marker lamp
⑤ Turn signal lamp

▶Depending on which bulb needs to be replaced, turn the respective bulb socket ① - ⑤ counterclockwise.

▶Press gently onto the respective bulb and turn counterclockwise out of its bulb socket.
▶Press the new bulb gently into its bulb socket and turn clockwise until it engages.
▶Align the respective bulb socket ① - ⑤ and turn it clockwise.
▶ Make sure bulb socket is attached properly.
▶Close the respective cover in the cargo compartment.
▶ Close the tailgate (▷ page 119).

Practical hints

Replacing bulbs

License plate lamp

Diagram showing two labeled components (1 and 2) on a red vehicle surface with a textured floor below, likely illustrating a mechanical or electrical assembly.

① License plate lamp cover
② Screws

▶ Loosen screws ②.
▶ Remove license plate lamp cover ①.
▶Replace the tubular bulb.
▶ Reinstall license plate lamp cover ①.
▶ Retighten screws ②.

Adjusting headlamp aim

1 low beam V H P82.10-3018-31

V Vertical centerline
H Headlamp mounting height, measured from the center

i High beam adjustments simultaneously aim the low beam.

Vehicle should have a normal tailgate load.

Correct headlamp adjustment is extremely important. To check and readjust a headlamp, follow the steps described:

▶Park the vehicle on a level surface 25 feet (7.6 m) from a vertical test screen or wall.
▶Switch the headlamps on (▷page 135).

If the beam does not show a beam pattern as indicated in the figure left, then follow the steps below:

▶ Open hood (▷ page 341).

△△

Practical hints

Replacing bulbs

△△

P82.10-4015-31

Example illustration headlamp, driver's side

② Headlamp vertical adjustment screw
③ Headlamp vertical adjustment screw

▶ Always turn adjustment screws ② and ③ simultaneously for vertical adjustment until the headlamp is adjusted as shown ① (▷page 473). Turn clockwise for upward movement and counterclockwise for downward movement.

Graduations:

screw ②: 0.50° pitch

screw ③: 0.67° pitch

The left and right headlamps must be adjusted individually.

If it is not possible to obtain a proper headlamp adjustment, have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

Practical hints

Replacing wiper blades

▼Replacing wiper blades

Front wiper blades

Warning!

For safety reasons, switch off wipers and remove SmartKey from starter switch (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: Make sure the vehicle's on-board electronics have status 0) before replacing a wiper blade. Otherwise the motor could suddenly turn on and cause injury.

Warning!

Wiper blades are components that are subject to wear and tear. Replace the wiper blades twice a year, preferably in the spring and fall. Otherwise the windows will not be properly wiped. As a result, you may not be able to observe surrounding traffic conditions and could cause an accident.

! Never open the hood when the wiper arms are folded forward.

Hold on to the wiper when folding the wiper arm back. If released, the force of the impact from the tensioning spring could crack the windshield.

Do not allow the wiper arms to contact the wind-shield glass without a wiper blade inserted.

Make sure the wiper blades are properly installed. Improperly installed wiper blades may cause windshield damage.

For your convenience, we recommend that you have this work carried out by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

Removing

▶Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch.

Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:

▶Make sure the vehicle's on-board electronics have status 0 (▶page 42).

! Do not pull on the wiper blade inserts. They could tear.

▶Fold the wiper arms forward until they engage.

1 2 3 4 5 P82.30-2450-31

① Wiper blade
② Cover
③ Attachment
④ Tab
⑤ Removing

▶ Press tabs ④ together and tilt wiper blade ① to detach tabs ④ on both recesses of attachment ③.
Wiper blade ① is released on one end.

▶Maintaining its tilted position, slide wiper blade ① out of attachment ③ in direction of arrow ⑤.

Practical hints

Replacing wiper blades

Installing

Diagram showing a car's internal components with numbered parts and an arrow indicating direction, likely illustrating a gun or weapon system.

① Installing
② Tab
③ Attachment
④ Guide tab
⑤ Cover

▶Slide the wiper blade into attachment ③ in direction of arrow ①.

▶ Make sure guide tab ④ will be placed under cover ⑤ when fully inserting the wiper blade into attachment.
▶ Let tab ② latch into both recesses of attachment ③.

▶Check if the wiper blade is securely fastened.
▶Fold the wiper arm backward to rest on the windshield.

Make sure you hold on to the wiper arm when folding it back.

Rear wiper blade

Warning!

For safety reasons, switch off wipers and remove SmartKey from starter switch (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: Make sure the vehicle's on-board electronics have status 0) before replacing a wiper blade. Otherwise the motor could suddenly turn on and cause injury.

! Hold on to the wiper when folding the wiper arm back. If released, the force of the impact from the tensioning spring could crack the rear window.

Do not allow the wiper arm to contact the rear window glass without a wiper blade inserted.

Make sure the wiper blade is properly installed. Improperly installed wiper blades may cause rear window damage.

For your convenience, we recommend that you have this work carried out by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

Practical hints

Replacing wiper blades

Removing

▶Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch.

Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:

▶Make sure the vehicle's on-board electronics have status 0 (▷page 42).

! Do not pull on the wiper blade insert. It could tear.
▶ Fold wiper arm ① away from the rear window until it engages.

① ② P82.30-2483-31

① Wiper arm
② Wiper blade

▶ Turn wiper blade ② to form a right angle with wiper arm ① as shown.
▶ Hold wiper arm ① and disengage wiper blade ② by carefully sliding it in direction of arrow.
▶ Remove wiper blade ②.

Installing

Diagram showing a red car front view with labeled parts and a magnified inset highlighting a specific component.

① Wiper arm
② Wiper blade
▶ Insert wiper blade ② into wiper arm ①.

▶ Hold wiper arm ① and engage wiper blade ② by pushing it in direction of arrow until it locks into place.
▶Check whether the wiper blade is securely fastened.
▶Fold the wiper arm to rest on the rear window.

Make sure to hold on to the wiper when folding the wiper arm back.

Practical hints

Flat tire

Warning!

The dimensions of the spare wheel (Minispare wheel or collapsible tire) are different from those of the road wheels. As a result, the vehicle handling characteristics change when driving with a spare wheel mounted. Adapt your driving style accordingly.

The spare wheel is for temporary use only. When driving with a spare wheel mounted, ensure proper tire pressure and do not exceed a vehicle speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).

Drive to the nearest Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center as soon as possible to have the spare wheel replaced with a regular road wheel.

Never operate the vehicle with more than one spare wheel mounted.

Do not switch off the ESP ^® when a Minispare wheel is mounted.

Preparing the vehicle

▶ Vehicles with air suspension program*: Make sure the vehicle level is set to highway (▷page 257).

Warning!

Vehicles with air suspension program*: Do not open or close any doors or the tailgate while mounting a spare wheel. The vehicle could rise or lower to a previously selected level. You or others could be injured as a result.

▶Park the vehicle in a safe distance from moving traffic on a hard, flat surface when possible.

▶Turn on the hazard warning flasher (▷page 141).

▶Turn the steering wheel so that the front wheels are in a straight-ahead position.

▶ Set the parking brake (▷ page 57).

▶ Set the automatic transmission to park position P (▷page 185).

▶ Turn off the engine (▷ page 39).

▶Have any passenger exit the vehicle at a safe distance from the roadway.

Open door only when conditions are safe to do so.

▶ Vehicles with SmartKey: Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch.

Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: Open the driver's door (this puts the starter switch in position 0, same as with the SmartKey removed from the starter switch). The driver's door then can be closed again.

▶Remove the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button from the starter switch.

i Vehicles with collapsible tire (ML 63 AMG only):

You can use the power outlets, except for the power outlet in the front center console, to operate the electric air pump even when the ignition is switched off, e.g. in order to inflate the collapsible emergency spare tire ( page 485).

An emergency shut-off feature ensures that the vehicle's electrical voltage does not fall below a minimum level. If the voltage drops to this minimum level, the power outlets are automatically switched off. This ensures that enough power remains to start the engine.

Mounting the spare wheel

Preparing the vehicle

▶Prepare the vehicle as described (▷page 478).

Vehicles with Minispare wheel:

▶Take the Minispare wheel out of the cargo compartment (▷page 453).

▶Take the wheel wrench, the collapsible wheel chock, and the vehicle jack out of the cargo compartment (▷page 448).

Vehicles with collapsible tire (ML 63 AMG only):

▶Take the collapsible tire, wheel wrench, wheel bolts, jack, and electric air pump out of the cargo compartment (▷page 454).

! Depending on vehicle production date your vehicle may be equipped with a scissors-type jack (located under the cargo compartment floor). If so equipped, only use this jack when jacking up the vehicle as otherwise the vehicle's underbody can be damaged. See separate instructions for scissors-type jack.

Lifting the vehicle

Warning!

When jacking up the vehicle, only use the jack which has been specifically approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle.

The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up the vehicle at the jack take-up brackets built into both sides of the vehicle. Make sure the jack arm is fully seated in the jack take-up bracket.

The jack is intended only for lifting the vehicle briefly for wheel changes. It is not suited for performing maintenance work under the vehicle. To help avoid personal injury, use the jack only to lift the vehicle during a wheel change.

Never get beneath the vehicle while it is supported by the jack. Keep hands and feet away from the area under the lifted vehicle. Always lower the vehicle onto sufficient capacity jackstands before working under the vehicle.

Practical hints

Flat tire

Always firmly set parking brake and block wheels with wheel chocks or other sizeable objects before raising vehicle with jack. Do not disengage parking brake while the vehicle is raised.

Make sure that the ground on which the vehicle is standing and where you place the jack is solid, level and not slippery. If necessary, use a large underlay. On slippery surfaces, such as tiled floors, you should use a non-slip underlay, for example a rubber mat.

Do not use wooden blocks or similar objects to support the jack. Otherwise the jack may not be able to achieve its load-bearing capacity if it is not at its full height.

Never start the engine when the vehicle is raised.

Also observe the notes on the jack.

▶Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by blocking wheels with wheel chocks or other sizeable objects.

One collapsible wheel chock is included with the vehicle tool kit (▷page 448). For information on setting up the collapsible wheel chock, see (▷page 452).

Warning!

Only jack up the vehicle on level ground or on slight inclines/declines. Otherwise, the vehicle could fall off the jack and injure you or others.

Changing wheel on a level surface

Side profile illustration of a white SUV with red wheels on the ground, no text or symbols present

Changing rear wheel on passenger side (Example illustration)

▶ Place the wheel chock in front of and another sizeable object behind the wheel that is diagonally opposite to the wheel being changed.

Changing wheel on a slight decline

Always try lifting the vehicle using the jack on a level surface. However, should circumstances require you to do so on a slight decline, place the wheel chock and another sizeable object as follows:

Side profile illustration of a white SUV on a flat surface, no text or symbols present

Changing wheel on passenger side (Example illustration)

Practical hints

Flat tire

▶Place wheel chock (or another sizeable object) in front of both wheels on the side opposite to the side on which the wheel is to be changed.

Changing wheel on a slight incline

Always try lifting the vehicle using the jack on a level surface. However, should circumstances require you to do so on a slight incline, place the wheel chock and another sizeable object as follows:

Side profile illustration of a car with a parking wheel and a red tire, shown from front and side (no text or symbols)

Changing wheel on passenger side (Example illustration)

▶ Place wheel chock (or another sizeable object) behind both wheels on the side opposite to the side on which the wheel is to be changed.

Close-up of a car tire with red arrow indicating direction, no visible text or symbols

① Wheel wrench

▶On wheel to be changed, loosen but do not yet remove the wheel bolts (approximately one full turn with wheel wrench ①).

Side view of a red SUV with two red arrows pointing upward, no visible text or symbols on the vehicle itself.

The jack take-up brackets are located directly behind the front wheel housings and in front of the rear wheel housings as indicated by the arrows.

Practical hints

Flat tire

Warning!

The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up the vehicle at the jack take-up brackets. Make sure the jack arm is fully seated in the jack take-up bracket.

If you do not position the jack correctly in the jack take-up bracket, the vehicle can:

•fall off the jack

• seriously or fatally injure you or others

! Do not position the jack on the body of the vehicle, as this may cause damage to the vehicle.

Depending on production date, your vehicle may be equipped with either a screw-type vehicle jack or a scissors-type jack, see "Vehicle jack" (▶page 450).

Depending on vehicle production date your vehicle may be equipped with a scissors-type jack (located under the cargo compartment floor). If so equipped, only use this jack when jacking up the vehicle as otherwise the vehicle's underbody can be damaged. See separate instructions for scissors-type jack.

P40.10-4496-31

Screw-type jack

② Take-up bracket
③ Jack
④ Crank

P40.10-4905-31

Scissors-type jack

② Take-up bracket
③ Jack
④ Ratchet

▶Vehicles with scissors-type jack:

Attach reversible ratchet ④ to vehicle jack in such a way that the word UP can be seen.

▶ Place jack ③ on firm ground.
▶ Position jack ③ under the take-up bracket ② so that it is always vertical (plumb-line) as seen from the side, even if the vehicle is parked on an incline.

Practical hints

Flat tire

P40.00-2040-31

Screw-type jack (example illustration)

Diagram showing two mechanical linkage configurations with red X marks indicating failure or failure, no text or symbols present.

Scissors-type jack (example illustration)

▶Vehicles with screw-type jack: Turn crank ④ clockwise until jack ③ is fully seated in take-up bracket ② and the jack base evenly meets the ground.

▶Vehicles with scissors-type jack: Turn ratchet ④ up and down until jack ③ is fully seated in take-up bracket ② and the jack base evenly meets the ground.

▶ Continue to turn crank/ratchet ④ until the wheel is a maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the ground.

Removing the wheel

Close-up of a car tire mounted on a vehicle wheel, with a numbered annotation pointing to the wheel (no text or symbols on the tire itself)

① Alignment bolt

▶Unscrew upper-most wheel bolt and remove it.

▶Replace this wheel bolt with alignment bolt ① supplied with the tool kit (▶page 448).

▶Remove the remaining wheel bolts.

! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt. This could result in damage to the bolts and wheel hub threads.

▶Remove the wheel.

Practical hints

Flat tire

Mounting the new wheel

Two metallic bolts with hexagonal end caps, labeled 1 and 2 (no text or symbols on the bolts themselves)

① Wheel bolt for 18", 19" and 20" light alloy wheels and collapsible tire (AMG vehicles)
② Wheel bolt for 17" light alloy wheels or Minispare wheel (located in vehicle tool kit (▶page 448))

! Wheel bolts ② must be used when mounting 17" light alloy rims or the Minispare wheel. The use of any wheel bolts other than wheel bolts ② for 17" light alloy rims or the Minispare wheel will damage the vehicle's brakes.

▶Clean contact surfaces of wheel and wheel hub.

! To avoid paint damage, place wheel flat against hub and hold it there while installing first wheel bolt.

Warning!

Always replace wheel bolts that are damaged or rusted.

Never apply oil or grease to wheel bolts.

Damaged wheel hub threads should be repaired immediately. Do not continue to drive under these circumstances! Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center or call Roadside Assistance.

Incorrect wheel bolts or improperly tightened wheel bolts can cause the wheel to come off. This could cause an accident. Make sure to use the correct wheel bolts.

Close-up of a car tire with yellow and black components, showing red arrows indicating motion or repair direction (no text or symbols)

▶Guide spare wheel onto the alignment bolt and push it on the wheel hub.
▶Insert wheel bolts and tighten them slightly.
▶Unscrew the alignment bolt, install last wheel bolt and tighten slightly.

Warning!

Only use genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts. Other wheel bolts may come loose.

Do not tighten the wheel bolts when the vehicle is raised. Otherwise the vehicle could fall off the jack.

Practical hints

Flat tire

Inflating the collapsible tire (ML 63 AMG only)

Warning!

Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is properly mounted.

Inflate the collapsible tire using the electric pump (▷ page 485) before lowering the vehicle.

Warning!

Observe instructions on air pump label.

! Do not lower the vehicle before inflating the collapsible tire. Otherwise the rim may be damaged.

▶Take the electric air pump out of the cargo compartment (▶page 454).

1 2 3 4 5 P40.10-3307-31

Electric air pump

① Flap
② On/off switch
③ Electrical plug
④ Air hose with pressure gauge and vent screw
⑤ Union nut

▶ Open flap ① on electric air pump.
▶ Pull out electrical plug ③ and air hose with pressure gauge ④.
▶Remove the valve cap from the collapsible tire valve.

▶ Screw union nut ⑤ onto the collapsible tire valve.
▶ Insert electrical plug ③ into a power outlet (▶page 287).

The cigarette lighter* (▷ page 285) or the power outlet in the front center console (▷page 288) is not designed for use with the electric air pump. Use the power outlet in the rear center console or in the cargo compartment (▷page 288) for electric air pump operation.

▶Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 1.
or
▶Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button once without depressing the brake pedal.
▶ Press I on electric air pump switch ②. The electric air pump should now switch on and inflate the collapsible tire.

Practical hints

Flat tire

▶▶▶ Inflate the collapsible tire to the recommended tire inflation pressure given in the “Technical data” section (▶page 515).

This takes about 5 minutes for the collapsible tire.

Warning!

Air hose ④ and union nut ⑤ can become hot during inflation. Exercise proper caution to avoid burning yourself when using the equipment.

! Do not operate the electric air pump longer than 8 minutes without interruption. Otherwise it may overheat.

You may operate the electric air pump again after it has cooled off.

! Please compare the recommended tire inflation pressure for your vehicle with the tire inflation pressure on the yellow label located on the spare wheel rim.

If the tire inflation pressure on the yellow label on the spare wheel rim differs from the values given in this Operator's Manual, inflate the tire to the recommended tire inflation pressure given on the yellow label on the spare wheel rim.

▶ Press 0 on electric air pump switch ②.

▶Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 0.

or

▶Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button twice without depressing the brake pedal.

If the tire inflation pressure is above the recommended tire inflation pressure given in this Operator's Manual, release excess tire inflation pressure using the vent screw.

Warning!

Follow recommend inflation pressures.

Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can result in sudden deflation (blowout) because they are more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris, potholes, etc.

Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires wear unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from being overheated.

▶ Detach the electric air pump.

▶Store the electrical plug and the air hose behind the flap and place the electric air pump back in the cargo compartment.

Practical hints

Flat tire

Lowering the vehicle

Warning!

Vehicles with collapsible tire (ML 63 AMG only):

Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is properly mounted.

Inflate the collapsible tire using the electric pump (▷ page 485) before lowering the vehicle.

▶Vehicles with scissors-type jack:

Attach ratchet to vehicle jack in such a way that the word DOWN can be seen.

▶Lower the vehicle until its resting fully on its own weight.

▶ Vehicles with screw-type jack: Turn crank counterclockwise.

▶Vehicles with scissors-type jack: Turn ratchet in Direction of DOWN.

▶Remove the jack.

1 2 3 4 5 P40.10-3404-31

①-⑤ Wheel bolts

▶ Tighten the five wheel bolts evenly, following the diagonal sequence illustrated (1 to 5), until all bolts are tight. Observe a tightening torque of 110 lb-ft (150 Nm).

Warning!

Have the tightening torque checked after changing a wheel. The wheels could come loose if they are not tightened to a torque of 110 lb-ft (150 Nm).

▶Store jack and all other vehicle tool kit items back into the storage well.

The removed road wheel cannot be stored in the spare wheel well under the cargo compartment floor, but should be transported in the cargo compartment wrapped in a protective cover.

Vehicles with TPMS or Advanced TPMS*: Do not activate the tire inflation pressure monitor until a full size wheel/tire with functioning sensor has been placed back into service on the vehicle.

Practical hints

Bleeding the fuel system (diesel engine only)

Driving the vehicle until the fuel tank is empty is not recommended. Otherwise, air may be sucked into the fuel system. If this happens, the CHECK ENGINE malfunction indicator lamp (USA only) or the malfunction indicator lamp (Canada only) comes on and the engine may not start immediately after refueling the vehicle.

After refueling:

▶ Make sure the automatic transmission is set to P.

The gear position indicator in the multifunction display should be on P.

▶Do not depress the accelerator.

i Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: If necessary, remove the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button from the starter switch (▷page 40).

▶Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 2 for at least 10 seconds (▷page 40).

▶Return the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 0 (▶page 40).

▶Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 3 (▷page 40) and hold it there for a maximum of 40 seconds or until the engine runs surge-free.

If the engine does not start:

▶Wait for approximately 2 minutes.

▶Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 3 (▷page 40) and hold it there for a maximum of 40 seconds or until the engine runs surge-free.

If the engine still does not start, do not make any further attempts to start the engine. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center or call Roadside Assistance (▷page 298).

When the CHECK malfunction indicator lamp (USA only) or the malfunction indicator lamp (Canada only) has been illuminated for the above condition, it will remain illuminated until the engine was cycled on and off four times in a row.

Battery

The battery is located under the front passenger seat.

Mercedes-Benz recommends to have the battery replaced at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

The battery should always be sufficiently charged in order to achieve its rated service life.

If you use your vehicle mostly for short-distance trips, you will need to have the battery charge checked more frequently.

When replacing the battery, always use batteries approved by Mercedes-Benz.

If you do not intend to operate your vehicle for an extended period of time, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center about steps you need to observe.

Warning!

Observe all safety instructions and precautions when handling automotive batteries.

Risk of explosion.

Fire, open flames and smoking are prohibited when handling batteries. Avoid creating sparks.

Battery acid is caustic. Do not allow it to come into contact with skin, eyes or clothing.

Wear suitable protective clothing, especially gloves, apron and faceguard.

Wear eye protection.

Rinse any acid spills immediately with clear water. Contact a physician if necessary.

Keep children away.

Follow the instructions in this Operator's Manual.

Batteries contain materials that can harm the environment if disposed of improperly. Recycling of batteries is the preferred method of disposal. Many states require sellers of batteries to accept old batteries for recycling.

Practical hints

Battery

! The battery is a valve-regulated lead acid (VRLA) battery, also referred to as "fleece" battery. Such batteries do not require topping-up of the electrolyte level. VRLA batteries therefore do not have cell caps and the battery cover is non-removable. Do not attempt to open the battery as otherwise the battery will be damaged.

Even though VRLA batteries do not require topping-up of the electrolyte level and cannot be opened to check the electrolyte level, the battery condition must be checked periodically by performing a battery conductance test. Refer to Maintenance Booklet for battery condition testing intervals.

As with any other battery, the battery may discharge if the vehicle is not operated for an extended period of time. You can connect a battery maintenance charge unit tested and approved for use on your vehicle model or disconnect the battery to prevent battery discharge. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center for more information.

! The factory-equipped VRLA battery is leak-proofed. Only use a battery as replacement that has the same security features and is of identical size, voltage, and capacity as the factory-equipped battery.

The battery, the battery ventilation hose (▷ page 495) and the lateral plug (▷ page 495) must always be securely installed when the vehicle is in operation.

Warning!

Jump starting must only be done using the jump-start contacts located in the engine compartment (▷page 497).

Warning!

Failure to follow these instructions can result in severe injury or death.

Observe all safety instructions and precautions when handling automotive batteries ( page 489).

Never lean over batteries while connecting, you might get injured.

Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes, skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately flush affected area with water and seek medical help if necessary.

A battery will also produce hydrogen gas, which is flammable and explosive. Keep flames or sparks away from battery, avoid improper connection of jumper cables, smoking etc.

Practical hints

Battery

! Never loosen or detach battery terminal clamps while the engine is running or the SmartKey is in the starter switch. Otherwise the alternator and other electronic components could be severely damaged.

Have the battery checked regularly by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

Contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center for further information.

Warning!

Do not place metal objects on the battery as this could result in a short circuit.

Use leak-proof battery only to avoid the risk of acid burns in the event of an accident.

Disconnecting, removing, reinstalling and reconnecting the battery

Warning!

Disconnecting, removing, reinstalling and reconnecting the battery is a complicated and technically demanding procedure that also requires safety precautions to avoid the risk of injury. We strongly recommend that it be performed by a qualified technician or an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center only. Please read the instructions fully before beginning operation and only undertake it if you feel fully capable of performing all of the tasks involved as described in these instructions. Observe all safety instructions and precautions when handling automotive batteries ( page 489). Performing the tasks involved incorrectly can cause damage to the vehicle and impair the operating safety of the vehicle, and/or cause severe injury to you or others.

With a disconnected battery you will no longer be able to turn the SmartKey in the starter switch and pressing the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button will have no effect.

Step 1 (Disconnecting)

If your battery is discharged, the vehicle must be jump started ( page 497) using the jump start contacts in the engine compartment, or an accessory battery charge unit* approved by Mercedes-Benz must be connected using the jump start contacts in the engine compartment (see separate instructions for the accessory battery charge unit*) before any of the following steps can be performed. If the battery cannot be jumped or charged, please contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

▶ Set the automatic transmission to position P (▷page 185).
▶ Firmly depress the parking brake (▷page 65).
▶ Turn off the engine (▷ page 66).
▶Leave the ignition switched on (▷page 40).

▷▷

Practical hints

Battery

▶▶ i If the vehicle battery is discharged and you had the vehicle jump started:

• Leave the engine running.
• Complete step 1, starting with switching off all electrical consumers.
• Continue with step 2.
• When the front passenger seat is in the most forward position, turn off the engine.

▶Switch off all electrical consumers.

▶Read and observe safety instructions and precautions (▷page 489).

▶Open the front passenger door.

Open doors only when conditions are safe to do so.

▶Move the front passenger seat to the most forward position (▷page 44).

Step 2 (Disconnecting)

① P54, 10-2490-31

① Battery cover

▶Enter the rear passenger compartment and remove main battery cover ①.

Step 3 (Disconnecting)

Interior view of a car showing a black rectangular component with red arrows indicating movement or flow, no visible text or symbols.

② Perforated floor carpet

▶ Cut the floor carpet ② along the dotted white line (see illustration) until you reach the perforated part. Start cutting at the point indicated by the arrows. Cut carpet using a sharp object (knife etc.).
▶Enter the front passenger compartment.
▶Move the front passenger seat to the most rearward position (▷page 44).

Practical hints

Battery

Interior view of a vehicle showing a mechanical component with a red arrow indicating motion or force (no text or symbols visible)

② Perforated floor carpet, unfolded

▶ Fold the floor carpet piece ② in direction of the arrow.

▶Move the front passenger seat to the most forward and upward position again (▶page 44).

▶ Switch off the ignition (▷ page 40).

If the vehicle battery is discharged and you had the vehicle jump started, turn off the engine.

▶Remove SmartKey from starter switch. Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:

▶Make sure the vehicle's on-board electronics have status 0 (Turn off the engine or all electrical systems using the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button. Open the driver's door. With the driver's door open, the vehicle's on-board electronics have status 0, same as with the SmartKey removed from the starter switch).

▶Enter the rear passenger compartment again.

Step 4 (Disconnecting)

P54.10-2643-31

③ Air channel

④ Clip with pin insert

▶ Pull pin out of clip ④ in direction of arrow.

▶ Pull clip with pin ④ outwards.

▶ Remove air channel ③ by pulling it out in direction of arrow.

Practical hints

Battery

Step 5 (Disconnecting)

5 6 P54.10-2644-31

⑤ Protection cover

⑥ Battery

▶ Unclip protection cover ⑤ from battery ⑥ and remove it.

Step 6 (Disconnecting)

7 8 P54.10-2645-31

⑦ Positive terminal

⑧ Negative terminal

▶ Disconnect battery negative lead ⑧ from negative terminal.

▶Remove positive terminal cover.

▶Disconnect the battery positive lead ⑦.

Step 7 (Removing)

10 9 11 P54.10-2646-31

⑨ Battery ventilation hose

⑩ Attachment nut

⑪ Mounting

▶Remove the battery ventilation hose ⑨ by pulling it out.

▶Unfasten and remove attachment nuts ⑩.

▶ Remove mounting ⑪.

Practical hints

Battery

Step 8 (Removing)

12 P54 10-2647-31

⑫ Battery

▶ Tilt the battery ⑫ with the negative terminal side upwards.

▶Take out the battery maintaining its tilted position in the direction of the arrow.

Step 9 (Reinstalling)

▶Carry out step 8 in reverse order (▷page 495).

! The battery, the battery ventilation hose ⑨ and the lateral plug ⑬ (▶page 495) must always be securely installed when the vehicle is in operation.

9 13 P54.10-2682-31

Battery, shown removed for illustration

⑨ Battery ventilation hose

⑬ Vent plug

▶Carry out step 10 to reconnect the battery (▷page 495).
▶ Follow steps 5 to 1 in reverse order to completely reinstall the battery (▷ page 494) to (▷ page 491).

Step 10 (Reconnecting)

▶If the battery has been removed, first carry out step 8 in reverse order (▶page 495).
▶Open the driver's door.
▶Make sure all electrical consumers are turned off.
▶ Make sure the SmartKey is removed from the starter switch.

Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:

▶Make sure the vehicle's on-board electronics have status 0 (Open the driver's door. With the driver's door open, the vehicle's on-board electronics have status 0, same as with the SmartKey removed from the starter switch (>page 39)).

▶▶

Practical hints

Battery

▶▶▶Connect the positive lead to the positive terminal and fasten it's cover (▶page 494).

▶Connect the negative lead to the negative terminal (▷page 494).

! Never invert the terminal connections!

The following procedures must be carried out following any interruption of battery power (e.g. due to reconnection):

• Set the clock (▷ page 169).
  Vehicles with COMAND system with navigation module*: Time and date are set automatically.
• Synchronize the door windows (▷page 237).
• Synchronize the power tilt/sliding sunroof (▷page 242).
• Synchronize the power folding exterior rear view mirrors * (▷page 200).

Charging the battery

If the battery is discharged, the battery can be charged using the jump-start contacts located in the engine compartment (▷page 498).

Warning!

Never charge a battery while still installed in the vehicle unless the accessory battery charge unit approved by Mercedes-Benz is being used. Gases may escape during charging and cause explosions that may result in paint damage, corrosion or personal injury.

An accessory battery charge unit specially adapted for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz is available, permitting the charging of the battery in its installed position. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center for information and availability. Charge battery in accordance with the separate instructions for the accessory battery charger.

▶ Charge the battery in accordance with the instructions of the battery charger manufacturer.

Batteries contain materials that can harm the environment if disposed of improperly. Large 12-volt storage batteries contain lead. Recycling of batteries is the preferred method of disposal. Many states require sellers of batteries to accept old batteries for recycling.

Jump starting

Warning!

Failure to follow these directions will cause damage to the electronic components, and can lead to a battery explosion and severe injury or death.

Never lean over batteries while connecting or jump starting, you might get injured.

Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes, skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately flush affected area with water, and seek medical help if necessary.

A battery will also produce hydrogen gas, which is flammable and very explosive. Keep flames or sparks away from battery, avoid improper connection of jumper cables, smoking, etc.

Attempting to jump start a frozen battery can result in it exploding, causing personal injury.

Read all instructions before proceeding.

If the battery is discharged, the engine can be started with jumper cables and the battery of another vehicle. Observe the following:

- Jump starting should only be performed using the jump-start contacts located in the engine compartment (I>page 498).

- Jump starting should only be performed when the engine and catalytic converter ^1 are cold.

- Do not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw out first.

- Only jump start from batteries with the same voltage rating (12 V). Jump starting with a higher voltage battery could damage the vehicle's electrical system, which will not be covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

- Only use jumper cables with sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps.

• Always make sure the jumper cables are not on or near pulleys, fans or other parts that move when the engine is started or running.

! Do not tow-start the vehicle.

! Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts.

Do not attempt to start the engine using a battery quick charge unit.

If the engine does not run after several unsuccessful starting attempts, have it checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

Excessive unburned fuel generated by repeated failed starting attempts may damage the catalytic converter ^1 .

Make sure the jumper cables do not have loose or missing insulation.

Make sure the cable clamps do not touch any other metal part while the other end is still attached to a battery.

Practical hints

Jump starting

Warning!

Keep flames or sparks away from battery. Do not smoke.

Observe all safety instructions and precautions when handling automotive batteries ( page 489).

The jump-start contacts are located in the engine compartment.

Diagram showing a car interior with numbered parts and a magnified inset highlighting a red vehicle component.

① Negative (-) terminal
② Positive (+) terminal
③ Positive terminal cover
▶ Make sure the two vehicles do not touch.

▶Turn off all electrical consumers.
▶ Apply parking brake (▷ page 65).
▶Set automatic transmission to position P (▷page 185).
▶ Open the hood (▷ page 341).
▶Remove cover from negative terminal ①.
▶ Flip up cover ③ of positive terminal ② in direction of arrow.

Diagram showing car battery connected to a car with labeled parts and wiring, including numbered annotations.

① Negative terminal of discharged battery
② Positive terminal of discharged battery
④ Positive terminal of charged battery
⑤ Negative terminal of charged battery

Connect positive terminal ② and ④ with the jumper cable. Clamp cable to charged battery ④ first.
▶ Start engine of the vehicle with the charged battery and run at idle speed.
Connect negative terminals ① and ⑤ of the batteries with the second jumper cable. Clamp the cable to negative terminal ⑤ of the charged battery first.

! Never invert the terminal connections!

▶Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
You can now turn on the electrical consumers. Do not switch on the headlamps under any circumstances.
Remove the jumper cables first from negative terminals ① and ⑤ and then from positive terminals ② and ④.
You can now switch on the headlamps.
▶Have the battery checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

▼Towing the vehicle

Mercedes-Benz recommends that the vehicle be transported with all wheels off the ground using flatbed or appropriate wheel lift/dolly equipment. This method is preferable to other types of towing.

! Do not tow-start the vehicle.
! Use flatbed or wheel lift/dolly equipment, with the SmartKey in starter switch turned to position 0.

Do not tow with sling-type equipment. Towing with sling-type equipment over bumpy roads will damage radiator and supports.

To prevent damage during transport, do not tie down vehicle by its chassis or suspension parts. Use the towing eyes.

Switch off the ESP ^® (▷page 102) and the automatic central locking (▷page 125).

! Do not tow with one axle raised. Doing so could damage the transfer case, which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

All wheels must be on or off the ground. Observe instructions for towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground.

If circumstances do not permit the recommended towing methods, the vehicle may be towed with all wheels on the ground only so far as necessary to have the vehicle moved to a safe location where the recommended towing methods can be employed.

When towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground, the vehicle may be towed only for distances up to 30 miles (50 km) and at a speed not to exceed 30 mph (50 km/h).

Warning!

If circumstances require towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground, always tow with a tow bar if

• the engine will not run
- there is a malfunction in the brake system
- there is a malfunction in the power supply or in the vehicle's electrical system

This is necessary to adequately control the towed vehicle.

Prior to towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground, make sure the automatic transmission is in neutral position N.

Practical hints

Towing the vehicle

Warning!

With the engine not running, there is no power assistance for the brake and steering systems. In this case, it is important to keep in mind that a considerably higher degree of effort is necessary to brake and steer the vehicle. Adapt your driving accordingly.

When towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground, the automatic transmission must be in neutral position N.

If you turn off the engine

• using the SmartKey and

- remove the SmartKey from the starter switch

or

- open a front door

- or when using the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button and open a front door

the automatic transmission will shift to park position P automatically.

If you want the gear position to remain in neutral position N, observe the following instructions.

Warning!

When leaving the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* in the starter switch, do not leave children unattended in the vehicle. It is possible for children to switch on the ignition which could result in unsupervised use of vehicle equipment.

A child's unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury.

Vehicles with SmartKey:

▶With the vehicle at a standstill and the ignition switched on shift the automatic transmission to neutral position N.

▶If engaged, release the parking brake (▷page 57).

▶Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey in the starter switch.

Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:

▶With the vehicle at a standstill, depress the brake pedal and keep it pressed.

▶With the ignition switched on shift the automatic transmission to park position P.

▶Release the brake pedal.

Practical hints

Towing the vehicle

▶Remove the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button from the starter switch (▶page 41).
▶Insert the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* into the starter switch.
▶Switch on the ignition.
▶Depress the brake pedal.
▶Shift the automatic transmission to neutral position N.
▶ Release the brake pedal.
▶If engaged, release the parking brake (▷page 57).
▶Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* in the starter switch.

! Towing of the vehicle should only be done using the properly installed towing eye bolt. Never attach a tow cable, tow rope or tow rod to the vehicle chassis, frame or suspension parts.

To signal turns while being towed with hazard warning flasher in use, set the starter switch to position 2 and activate combination switch for left or right turn signal in usual manner - only the selected turn signal will operate.

Upon canceling the turn signal, the hazard warning flasher will operate again.

Installing towing eye bolt

Depending on whether you are towing a vehicle or you are being towed, the towing eye bolt can be screwed into threaded holes which are located behind covers on the right-hand side of each bumper.

Close-up of a red car's front bumper with a numbered marker (1) pointing to the bumper area, no visible text or symbols on the car itself.

① Cover

Practical hints

Towing the vehicle

Warning!

In order to avoid possible serious burns or injury, use extreme caution when removing the rear cover, because the rear exhaust pipe is extremely hot.

Diagram showing a car with a numbered marker and a red vehicle, no readable text or symbols present.

① Cover

Close-up of a car's side panel with a red arrow pointing to a component labeled '1', no visible text or symbols beyond the label.

Vehicles with Sport Package*

① Cover

Close-up of an orange car's front bumper with a small mark and number 2 annotation (no readable text or symbols beyond the label)

Example illustration front bumper
② Towing eye bolt

Removing cover

The cover ① is secured to the bumper by a plastic cord.

▶ Press mark on cover ① as indicated by the arrow.

Vehicles with Sport Package*:

▶ Pry cover ① with a screwdriver or similar tool at point indicated by the arrow.

▶ Lift off cover ① to reveal the threaded hole for towing eye bolt.

Installing towing eye bolt

▶Take the towing eye bolt and wheel wrench from the vehicle tool kit (▷page 448).

▶ Screw towing eye bolt ② in clockwise to its stop and tighten with wheel wrench.

Removing towing eye bolt

▶ Loosen towing eye bolt ② counterclockwise with wheel wrench.
▶ Unscrew towing eye bolt ②.
▶Store the towing eye bolt and wheel wrench back into the vehicle tool kit (▷page 448).

Installing cover

▶ Engage cover ① at top and press at bottom.

Stranded vehicle

Freeing a stranded vehicle, on which the wheels are dug into sand or mud, should be done with the greatest of care, especially if the vehicle is heavily loaded.

Avoid pulling the vehicle abruptly or diagonally, since it could result in damage to the chassis alignment.

Never try to free a vehicle that is still coupled to a trailer.

If possible, a vehicle equipped with trailer hitch receiver should be pulled backward in its own previously made tracks.

Practical hints

Fuses

The electrical fuses in your vehicle serve to switch off malfunctioning power circuits.

If a fuse is blown, the components and systems secured by that fuse will stop operating.

Warning!

Only use fuses approved by Mercedes-Benz with the specified amperage for the system in question and do not attempt to repair or bridge a blown fuse. Using other than approved fuses or using repaired or bridged fuses may cause an overload leading to a fire, and/or cause damage to electrical components and/or systems. Have the cause determined and remedied by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

A blown fuse must be replaced by an appropriate spare fuse (recognizable by its color or the fuse rating given on the fuse) of the amperage recommended in the fuse chart. Any Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center will be glad to advise you on this subject.

If a newly inserted fuse blows again, have the cause determined and rectified by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

A fuse chart explains the fuse allocation and fuse amperages. It is located in the cargo compartment with the vehicle tool kit ( page 448).

The electrical fuses are located in different fuse boxes:

• Fuse box in engine compartment (▷page 505)
• Fuse box in cargo compartment (▷page 505)
• Fuse box in passenger compartment (▷page 506)

Before replacing fuses:

▶ Apply parking brake (▷ page 65).
▶Make sure the automatic transmission is set to P (▷page 185).
The gear position indicator in the multifunction display should be on P.
▶Turn off all electrical consumers.
▶ Turn off the engine (▷ page 40).
▶Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch.

Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:

▶Open the driver's door (this puts the starter switch in position 0, same as with the SmartKey removed from the starter switch). The driver's door then can be closed again.

Practical hints

Fuses

Fuse box in engine compartment

The fuse box is located on the passenger side of the engine compartment.

▶ Open the hood (▷ page 341).

① ② ② F54.15-3011-31

Example illustration fuse box ML 350 (ML 320 CDI, ML 550, ML 63 AMG similar)

① Fuse box cover

② Clamps

▶ Pull clamps ② in direction of arrow.

▶ Lift fuse box cover ① up.

▶ Install fuse box cover in reverse order.

! The fuse box cover must be installed properly to prevent moisture and/or dirt from entering the fuse box and possibly impairing fuse operation.

▶Close the hood after checking or replacing fuses (▶page 343).

Fuse box in cargo compartment

The fuse box is located in the cargo compartment behind the passenger side trim panel.

Diagram of a car interior showing labeled components and a magnified view of the wheel assembly

① Lock

② Cover

Removing/installing cover

▶ Open the tailgate (▷ page 119).
▶Insert a suitable object such as a coin into the slot of lock ① (▶page 505).
▶ Turn lock ① counterclockwise by 90° in direction of arrow.
▶ Remove cover ②.
▶ Install cover ② in reverse order.

Practical hints

Fuses

Fuse box in passenger compartment

The fuse box is located behind a cover in the dashboard on the front passenger side.

Interior view of a car showing the side door and vent, with a numbered arrow pointing to the side panel (no text or symbols on the main body)

① Cover

! Do not use sharp objects such as a screw-driver to open the fuse box cover ① in the dashboard, as this could damage the fuse box cover or the dashboard.

Opening

▶Open the front passenger door.
▶ Open the glove box (▷ page 279).
▶Insert flat, blunt object as a lever into the edge of the cover ① at the position indicated by the arrow.
▶ Loosen cover ① from dashboard using lever.
▶ Using your hands, pull cover ① out and remove.

Closing

▶ Hook cover ① into the opening at the front.
▶ Press cover ① back on until it engages.

Emergency engine shut-down

If the engine cannot be turned off as described in the "Getting started" section (▷page 66), you may use the following emergency procedure.

▶Take the fuse chart from the vehicle tool kit (▶page 450).
▶Open the fuse box in engine compartment (▷page 505).
▶Remove fuse 120. Find its location in the fuse chart.

Technical data

Parts service

Warranty coverage

Identification labels

Layout of poly-V-belt drive

Engine

Rims and tires

Electrical system

Main Dimensions

Weights

Fuels, coolants, lubricants

Purple gear icon with an exclamation mark in the center, no text or symbols present.

Technical data

Parts service

The “Technical data” section provides the necessary technical data for your vehicle.

All authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Centers maintain a stock of Genuine Mercedes-Benz Parts required for maintenance and repair work. In addition, strategically located parts distribution centers provide quick and reliable parts service.

More than 300000 different parts for Mercedes-Benz models are available.

Genuine Mercedes-Benz Parts are subjected to stringent quality inspections. Each part has been specifically developed, manufactured or selected for and adapted to Mercedes-Benz vehicles.

Therefore, Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts should be installed.

! The use of non-genuine Mercedes-Benz parts and accessories not authorized by Mercedes-Benz could damage the vehicle, which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty, or could compromise the vehicle's durability or safety.

Technical data

Warranty coverage

Warranty coverage

Your vehicle is covered under the terms of the warranties printed in the Service and Warranty Information booklet. Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center will exchange or repair any defective parts originally installed on the vehicle in accordance with the terms of the following warranties:

• New Vehicle Limited Warranty
• Emission System Warranty
• Emission Performance Warranty
• California, Maine, Massachusetts, and Vermont Emission Control Systems Warranty

Replacement parts and accessories are covered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and Accessories warranties, copies of which are available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

Loss of Service and Warranty Information Booklet

Should you lose your Service and Warranty Information booklet, have an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center arrange for a replacement. It will be mailed to you.

Technical data

Identification labels

Close-up of a car's side panel showing the front wheel and internal components, with a numbered annotation pointing to a small electronic component (no text or symbols on the main body)

① Certification label (on driver's B-pillar)

The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) can be found in the following locations:

• on the certification label
- embossed underneath the passenger-side rear seat (▷page 511)
• on the lower edge of the windshield (▷page 511)

MFD BY MERCEDES-BENZ U.S. INTL., INC TUSCALOISA COUNTY, ALABAMA (USA) UNDER CONCEPT 06/05 FOR DAIMLERCHRYSLER AG. STUTTGART GERMANY 776 KG LB TIRES RED COLD KPA (PS) CAWR FRONT 1355 2985 255/55 R18 8.0x18 220(32) CAWR REAR 1475 3255 255/55 R18 8.0x18 220(32) OPWR 2830 6240 THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE FEDERAL MOTOR VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS IN EFFECT ON THE DATE OF MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE. 4JGCB65E06A00089 ———— MPV P99.00-3274-31

Example certification label (U.S. vehicles)

② Paintwork code
③ VIN

MERCEDES-BENZ U.S. INTL., INC KG TIRES RIM SIZE COLD KPA/PSU GWR/PHRE FRONT/AR 1470 265/60 R18 8.0x 18 220(32) GWR/PHRE NEAR/AR 1800 265/60 R18 8.0x 18 260(38) GWR/PHR/ TYPE: MPV/VTUM C776 MANUFACTURED UNDER CONTRACT FOR DAM.ERCHRONLER AG. 4JGCB65E06A00089 P99.00-3275-31

Example certification label (Canada vehicles)

② Paintwork code
③ VIN

Data shown on certification label are for illustration purpose only. These data are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in the illustration. Refer to certification label on vehicle for actual data specific to your vehicle.

Technical data

Identification labels

P00.10-4042-31

④ Seat cushion
⑤ Floor cover
⑥ VIN

▶ Fold the seat cushion ④ forward (▷page 270).
▶ Fold floor cover ⑤ in direction of the arrow.

The VIN ⑥ is now visible.

When ordering parts, please specify vehicle identification and engine numbers.

7 8 9 P30 16 4090-31

⑦ Emission control information label, includes both federal and California certification exhaust emission standards
⑧ Engine number (engraved on engine)
⑨ VIN (lower edge of windshield)

Technical data

Layout of poly-V-belt drive

ML 320 CDI

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 P13.22-2137-31

① Coolant pump
② Idler pulley
③ Automatic belt tensioner
④ Power steering pump
⑤ Air conditioning compressor
⑥ Crankshaft
⑦ Idler pulley
⑧ Generator (alternator)

ML 350, ML 550

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 P13.22-2096-31

① Idler pulley
② Idler pulley
③ Automatic belt tensioner
④ Power steering pump
⑤ Air conditioning compressor
⑥ Crankshaft
⑦ Coolant pump
⑧ Generator (alternator)

ML 63 AMG

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 P13.22-2132-31

① Idler pulley
② Idler pulley
③ Idler pulley
④ Automatic belt tensioner
⑤ Power steering pump
⑥ Air conditioning compressor
⑦ Crankshaft
⑧ Coolant pump
⑨ Generator (alternator)

Engine

Model ML 320 CDI (164.122)	1)	ML 350 (164.1861)
Engine 642 272
Mode of operation	Diesel 4-stroke engine	4-stroke engine, gasoline injection
No. of cylinders 6 6
Bore	3.27 in (83.00 mm)	3.66 in (92.90 mm)
Stroke	3.62 in (92.00 mm)	3.38 in (86.00 mm)
Total piston displacement	182 cu in (2987 cm3) 213 cu in (3498 cm3)
Compression ratio	17.7:1	10.7:1
Output acc. to SAE J 1349	215 hp/4000 rpm(160 kW/4000 rpm)	268 hp/6000 rpm2(200 kW/6000 rpm)
Maximum torque acc. to SAE J 1349	400 lb-ft/1600 - 2400 rpm(543 Nm/1600 - 2400 rpm)	258 lb-ft/2400 - 5000 rpm(350 Nm/2400 - 5000 rpm)
Maximum engine speed	4500 rpm	6500 rpm
Firing order	1-4-2-5-3-6	1-4-3-6-2-5
Poly-V-belt	2035 mm	2404 mm

^1 The quoted data apply only to the standard vehicle. See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center for the corresponding data of all special bodies and special equipment.
^2 Premium fuel required. Performance may vary with fuel octane rating.

Technical data

Engine

Model ML 550 (164.175)	1)	ML 63 AMG (164.1772)
Engine 273 156
Mode of operation	4-stroke engine, gasoline injection	4-stroke engine, gasoline injection
No. of cylinders 8 8
Bore	3.86 in (98.00 mm)	4.02 in (102.20 mm)
Stroke	3.56 in (90.50 mm)	3.72 in (94.60 mm)
Total piston displacement	333.2 cu in (5461 cm3)	378.8 cu in (6208 cm3)
Compression ratio 10.7:1 11.3:1
Output acc. to SAE J 1349	382 hp/6000 rpm3(285 kW/6000 rpm)	503 hp/6800 rpm3(375 kW/6800 rpm)
Maximum torque acc. to SAE J 1349	391 lb-ft/2800 - 4800 rpm(530 Nm/2800 - 4800 rpm)	465 lb-ft/5200 rpm(630 Nm/5200 rpm)
Maximum engine speed	6500 rpm	7200 rpm
Firing order	1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8	1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8
Poly-V-belt	2404 mm	2360 mm

1 All data preliminary. The quoted data apply only to the standard vehicle. See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center for the corresponding data of all special bodies and special equipment.
2 The quoted data apply only to the standard vehicle. See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center for the corresponding data of all special bodies and special equipment.
^3 Premium fuel required. Performance may vary with fuel octane rating.

Rims and tires

! Only use tires which have been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Tires approved by Mercedes-Benz are developed to provide best possible performance in conjunction with the driving safety systems on your vehicle such as ABS or ESP®. Tires specially developed for your vehicle and tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz can be identified by finding the following on the tire's sidewall:

• MO = Mercedes-Benz Original equipment tires

AMG vehicles:

Does not apply to all approved tires on AMG vehicles. For information on tested and approved tires for AMG vehicles, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

Using tires other than those approved by Mercedes-Benz may result in damage that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

! Using tires other than those approved by Mercedes-Benz can have detrimental effects, such as

• poor handling characteristics

- increased noise

• increased fuel consumption

Moreover, tires and rims not approved by Mercedes-Benz may, under load, exhibit dimensional variations and different tire deformation characteristics that could cause them to come into contact with the vehicle body or axle parts. Damage to the tires or the vehicle may be the result.

Further information on tires and rims is available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. A placard with the recommended tire inflation pressure is located on the driver's door B-pillar ( page 510). Some vehicles may have supplemental tire inflation pressure information for driving at high speeds ( page 358) or for vehicle loads less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition ( page 358). If such information is provided, it can be found on the placard located on the inside of the fuel filler flap.

The tire inflation pressure should be checked regularly and should only be adjusted on cold tires. Follow tire manufacturer's maintenance recommendation included with vehicle.

The following pages also list the approved wheel rim and tire sizes for equipping your vehicles with winter tires. Winter tires are not available as standard or optional factory equipment, but can be purchased from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

Depending on vehicle model and the standard or optional factory-equipped wheel rim/tire configuration on your vehicle (Appearance Package, Sport Package etc.), equipping your vehicle with winter tires approved for your vehicle model may also require the purchase of two or four wheel rims of the recommended size for use with these winter tires. See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center for more information.

Technical data

Rims and tires

Same size tires

Model ML 320 CDI	ML 350	ML 320 CDI*ML 350*	ML 320 CDI (Sport Package*)ML 350 (Sport Package*)ML 550
Rims (light alloy)	7.5 J x 17 H2	8 J x 18 H2	8 J x 19 H2
Wheel offset	2.20 in (56 mm)	2.36 in (60 mm)	2.36 in (60 mm)
All-season tires^1	235/65 R17 104H M+S 255/55 R18 105H M+S 255/50 R19 107H XL (Extra Load) M+S
Winter tires^1,2	235/65 R17 104H M+S	255/55 R18 105H M+S	255/50 R19 107H XL (Extra Load) M+S
All-terrain tires^1,2	- 255/55 R18 105H M+S -

^1 Radial-ply tires
^2 Not available as factory equipment.

Technical data

Rims and tires

Model	ML 63 AMG	ML 63 AMG*	ML 320 CDI (Sport Package*)ML 350 (Sport Package*)ML 550 (Sport Package*)
AMG rims (light alloy)	9.5 J x 19 H2	10 J x 20 H2	8.5 J x 19 H2
Wheel offset	1.81 in (46 mm)	1.81 in (46 mm)	2.28 in (58 mm)
All-season tires^1	-- 255/50 R19 107H XL (Extra Load) M+S
Summer tires^1,2	295/45 ZR19 109Y 295/40 ZR20 106Y -
Winter tires^1,3	285/45 R19 107V M+S	-	255/50 R19 107H XL (Extra Load) M+S

^1 Radial-ply tires
^2 Must not be used with snow chains.
^3 Not available as factory equipment.

Technical data

Rims and tires

Spare wheel

Model ML 320 CDI	ML 350ML 550	ML 63 AMG
Rim	4.0B x 18 H2	5.5 B x 19 H2
Wheel offset	1.58 in (40 mm)	0.51 in (13 mm)
Minispare tire^1	T 155/90 D18 113MorT 155/90 R18 113M	-
Collapsible tire^1	- 185/65-19 104P
Recommended tire inflation pressure	61 psi (4.2 bar)	51 psi (3.5 bar)

^1 Must not be used with snow chains.

! Please compare the recommended tire inflation pressure for your vehicle with the tire inflation pressure on the yellow label located on the spare wheel rim.

If the tire inflation pressure on the yellow label on the spare wheel rim differs from the values given in this Operator's Manual, inflate the collapsible tire to the recommended tire inflation pressure given on the yellow label on the spare wheel rim.

Please note that the tire inflation pressure of the spare tire differs from the tire inflation pressure of the road tires.

Technical data

Electrical system

Electrical system

Model	ML 350	ML 550	ML 63 AMG
Generator (alternator)	14 V/180 A	14 V/180 A	14 V/180 A
Starter motor	12 V/1.4 kW	12 V/1.7 kW	12 V/2.1 kW
Battery	12 V/70 Ah	12 V/95 Ah	12 V/95 Ah
Spark plugs	Bosch Y7MPP33	NGK PLKR7A	-1
Electrode gap	0.031 in (0.8 mm)	0.031 in (0.8 mm)	0.039 in (1.0 mm)
Tightening torque	15 – 19 lb-ft (20 – 25 Nm)	15 – 19 lb-ft (20 – 25 Nm)	15 – 22 lb-ft (20 – 30 Nm)

^1 Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

Model ML 320 CDI

Generator (alternator) 14 V/180 A

Starter motor 12 V/2.0 kW

Battery 12 V/95 Ah

Technical data

Main Dimensions

Model	ML 320 CDI, ML 350, ML 550	ML 63 AMG
Overall vehicle length	188.5 in (4788 mm)	189.5 in (4812 mm)
Vehicle width (exterior rear view mirrors folded out)	83.7 in (2127 mm)	83.7 in (2127 mm)
Vehicle width (exterior rear view mirrors folded in)	76.0 in (1930 mm)	76.8 in (1951 mm)
Overall vehicle height (vehicles with steel suspension)	71.5 in (1815 mm) -
Overall vehicle height, depending on set vehicle level (vehicles with air suspension program*)	69.8 in - 73.0 in(1774 mm - 1854 mm)	69.5 in - 72.6 in(1764 mm - 1844 mm)
Wheelbase	114.8 in (2915 mm)	114.8 in (2915 mm)
Ground clearance (vehicles with steel suspension)	8.3 in (210 mm)	-
Ground clearance, depending on set vehicle level (vehicles with air suspension program*)	7.1 in - 10.3 in (181 mm - 261 mm)	8.0 in - 10.9 in (203 mm - 276 mm)
Turning circle	39 ft (11.6 m)	39 ft (11.6 m)
Track, front	ML 320 CDI, ML 350:64.0 in (1627 mm)ML 550:63.7 in (1619 mm)	64.8 in - 65.5 in(1647 mm - 1664 mm)
Track, rear	ML 320 CDI, ML 350:64.1 in (1629 mm)ML 550:63.8 in (1621 mm)	64.9 in - 65.3 in(1649 mm - 1667 mm)

Technical data

Weights

Weights

Roof load max. 220 lb (100 kg)

Technical data

Fuels, coolants, lubricants

Capacities

Vehicle components and their respective lubricants must match. Therefore only use products tested and approved by Mercerdes-Benz.

Please refer to the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet (USA only), or inquire at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

Warning!

Comply with all valid regulations with respect to handling, storing and disposing of service fluids. Otherwise you could endanger persons or the environment.

Keep service fluids out of the reach of children.

For health reasons, you should prevent service fluids from coming into direct contact with your skin or clothing.

If a service fluid is swallowed, contact a physician immediately.

	Model Capacity Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Engine with oil filter	ML 320 CDI	9.0 US qt (8.5 l)	Approved engine oils
	ML 350	8.5 US qt (8.0 l)	Approved engine oils
	ML 550	9.5 US qt (9.0 l)	Approved engine oils
	ML 63 AMG	10.3 US qt (9.7 l)	Approved engine oils
Automatic transmission ML 320 CDI	9.5 US qt (9.0 l)		MB Automatic Transmission Fluid
ML 350, ML 550
	ML 63 AMG	9.7 US qt (9.2 l)	MB Automatic Transmission Fluid

Technical data

Fuels, coolants, lubricants

	Model Capacity Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Transfer case single speed	All models	0.53 US qt (0.5 l)	MB Automatic Transmission Fluid
Front axle	All models	1.2 US qt (1.1 l)	Hypoid gear oil
Rear axle	All models	1.2 US qt (1.1 l)	Hypoid gear oil
Power steering	ML 350	approx. 1.3 US qt (1.2 l)	MB Power Steering Fluid or approved Dexron III ATF
	ML 320 CDI ML 550^1	approx. 2.3 US qt (2.2 l)	MB Power Steering Fluid
Front wheel hubs	All models	approx. 1.5 oz (43 g) each	High temperature roller bearing grease
Brake system	All models	-	MB Brake Fluid (DOT 4+)
Cooling system ML 320 CDI, ML 350	ML 350	approx. 10.0 US qt (9.5 l)	MB Anticorrosion/Antifreeze
	ML 550^1	approx. 12.7 US qt (12.0 l)	MB Anticorrosion/Antifreeze
	ML 63 AMG	approx. 12.2 US qt (11.5 l)	MB Anticorrosion/Antifreeze

^1 Data preliminary.

Technical data

Fuels, coolants, lubricants

	Model Capacity Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Fuel tank	All models	25.1 US gal (95.0 l)	Gasoline engine:
including a reserve of	All except ML 63 AMG	approx. 3.5 US gal (13.0 l)	Premium unleaded gasoline Minimum Posted Octane 91 (Avg. of 96 RON/86 MON)
including a reserve of	ML 63 AMG	approx. 4.0 US gal (15.0 l)	Diesel engine: ULTRA-LOW SULFUR HIGHWAY DIESEL FUEL (15 ppm SULFUR MAXIMUM)
Air conditioning system	All models		R-134a refrigerant and special PAG lubricant oil (never R-12)
Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system*	All models	8.1 US qt (7.7 l)	MB Windshield Washer Concentrate ^1

^1 Use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “MB SummerFit” and water for temperatures above freezing or MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “MB SummerFit” and commercially available premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze for temperatures below freezing point. Follow suggested mixing ratios ( page 530).

Engine oils

Engine oils are specifically tested for their suitability in our engines and durability for our service intervals. Therefore, only use approved engine oils and oil filters required for vehicles with Maintenance System. For a listing of approved engine oils and oil filters, refer to the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet (USA only), or contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

Using engine oils and oil filters of specification other than those expressly required for the Maintenance System, or changing of oil and oil filter at change intervals longer than those called for by the Maintenance System will result in engine or emission control system damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

Please follow Maintenance System recommendations for scheduled oil changes. Failure to do so will result in engine or emission control system damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

Engine oil additives

! Do not blend oil additives with engine oil. They may damage the engine. Damage or malfunctions resulting from blending oil additives are not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

Air conditioning refrigerant

R-134a (HFC) refrigerant and special PAG lubricating oil are used in the air conditioning system.

! Never use R-12 (CFC) or mineral-based lubricating oil. Otherwise damage to the system will occur.

Brake fluid

Warning!

During vehicle operation, the boiling point of the brake fluid is continuously reduced through the absorption of moisture from the atmosphere. Under extremely strenuous operating conditions, this moisture content can lead to the formation of bubbles in the system, thus reducing the system's efficiency.

Therefore, the brake fluid must be replaced regularly. Refer to your vehicle's Maintenance Booklet for replacement interval.

Only brake fluid approved by Mercedes-Benz is recommended. Any authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center will provide you with additional information.

Technical data

Fuels, coolants, lubricants

Premium unleaded gasoline (gasoline engine)

Warning!

Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous. It burns violently and can cause serious personal injury.

Never allow sparks, flame or smoking materials near gasoline!

Turn off the engine before refueling.

Whenever you are around gasoline, avoid inhaling fumes and skin or clothing contact, extinguish all smoking materials.

Direct skin contact with fuels and the inhalation of fuel vapors are damaging to your health.

To maintain the engine's durability and performance, premium unleaded gasoline must be used. If premium unleaded gasoline is not available and low octane fuel is used, follow these precautions:

• Have the fuel tank only partially filled with unleaded regular gasoline and fill up with premium unleaded gasoline as soon as possible.
• Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt acceleration.
• Do not exceed an engine speed of 3000 rpm if the vehicle is loaded with a light load such as two persons and no luggage.
• Do not exceed ^2/_3 of maximum accelerator pedal position if the vehicle is fully loaded or operating in mountainous terrain.

Fuel requirements

Gasoline engine

Only use premium unleaded fuel:

•The octane number (posted at the pump) must be 91 min. It is an average of both the Research Octane Number (RON) and the Motor Octane Number (MON): (RON+MON)/2. This is also known as the ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.

Unleaded gasoline containing oxygenates such as ethanol, IPA, IBA and TBA can be used provided the ratio of any one of these oxygenates to gasoline does not exceed 10%; MTBE must not exceed 15%.

The ratio of methanol to gasoline must not exceed 3% plus additional cosolvents.

Using mixtures of ethanol and methanol is not allowed. Gasohol, which contains 10% ethanol and 90% unleaded gasoline, can be used.

These blends must also meet all other fuel requirements, such as resistance to spark knock, boiling range, vapor pressure, etc.

Diesel engine

Only use commercially available vehicular ULTRA-LOW SULFUR HIGHWAY DIESEL FUEL (15 ppm SULFUR MAXIMUM).

To prevent malfunctions, diesel fuel with improved cold flow characteristics is offered in the winter months. Check with your fuel retailer.

Do not fill the tank with gasoline. Do not blend diesel fuel with gasoline or kerosine. The fuel system and engine will otherwise be damaged, which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

Gasoline additives (gasoline engine)

A major concern among engine manufacturers is carbon build-up caused by gasoline. Mercedes-Benz recommends only the use of quality gasoline containing additives that prevent the build-up of carbon deposits.

After an extended period of using fuels without such additives carbon deposits can build up, especially on the intake valves and in the combustion area, leading to engine performance problems such as:

• Warm-up hesitation
• Unstable idle
• Knocking/pinging
• Misfire
• Power loss

In areas where carbon deposits may be encountered due to lack of availability of gasolines which contain these additives, Mercedes-Benz recommends the use of additives approved by us for use on Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Refer to the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet (USA only) or contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center for a listing of approved product(s). Follow directions on product label.

Do not blend other fuel additives with fuel. This only results in unnecessary costs and may be harmful to the engine operation.

! Damage or malfunction resulting from poor fuel quality or from blending additional fuel additives other than those tested and approved by us for use on Mercedes-Benz vehicles are not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

Technical data

Fuels, coolants, lubricants

Coolants

The engine coolant is a mixture of water and anticorrosion/antifreeze, which provides:

• Corrosion protection
- Freeze protection
- Boiling protection (by increasing the boiling point)

The cooling system was filled at the factory with a coolant providing freeze protection to approximately -35^ F ( -37^ C) and corrosion protection.

! Add premixed coolant solution only. Adding water and MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze separately from each other, could cause engine damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

If the antifreeze mixture is effective to -35^ ( -37^ ), the boiling point of the coolant in the pressurized cooling system is reached at approximately 266^ ( 130^ ).

The coolant solution must be used year round to provide the necessary corrosion protection and increase boil-over protection. Refer to Maintenance Booklet for replacement interval.

Coolant system design and coolant used determine the replacement interval. The replacement interval published in the Maintenance booklet is only applicable if MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze solution or other Mercedes-Benz approved products of equal specification are used to renew the coolant concentration or bring it back up to the proper level.

For information on other Mercedes-Benz approved products of equal specification, refer to the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet (USA only) or contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

To provide important corrosion protection, the solution must be at least 50% anticorrosion/antifreeze (equivalent to freeze protection to approximately -35°F [-37°C]). If you use a solution that is more than 55% anticorrosion/antifreeze (freeze protection to approximately -49°F [-45°C]), the engine temperature will increase due to the lower heat transfer capability of the solution. Therefore, do not use more than this amount of anticorrosion/antifreeze.

If the coolant level is low, water and MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze should be used to bring it up to the proper level (have cooling system checked for signs of leakage). Please make sure the mixture is in accordance with label instructions.

The water in the cooling system must meet minimum requirements, which are usually satisfied by normal drinking water. If you are not sure about the water quality, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

Technical data

Fuels, coolants, lubricants

Anticorrosion/antifreeze

Your vehicle contains a number of aluminum parts. The use of aluminum components in motor vehicle engines necessitates that anticorrosion/antifreeze coolant used in such engines be specifically formulated to protect the aluminum parts. Failure to use such anticorrosion/antifreeze coolant will result in a significantly shortened service life.

Therefore, the following product is strongly recommended for use in your vehicle: MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze agent. Before the start of the winter season (or once a year in hot southern regions), you should have the anticorrosion/antifreeze concentration checked. The coolant is also regularly checked each time you bring your vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center for service.

Anticorrosion/antifreeze quantity

	Approximate freeze protection
Model -35°F (-37°C)	-49°F (-45°C)
ML 320 CDI	5.0 US qt (4.75 l)	5.5 US qt (5.2 l)
ML 350
ML 550 ^1	5.6 US qt (5.25 l)	6.1 US qt (5.8 l)
ML 63 AMG	6.1 US qt (5.8 l)	6.8 US qt (6.4 l)

^1 Data preliminary.

Technical data

Fuels, coolants, lubricants

Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system\*

Both the windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system* are supplied from the windshield washer reservoir.

The windshield washer reservoir has a capacity of approximately 8.1 US qt (7.7 l).

▶Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield Washer Concentrate and water (or concentrate and commercially available premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze, depending on ambient temperatures).

Warning!

Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flammable. Do not spill washer solvent/antifreeze on hot engine parts, because it may ignite and burn. You could be seriously burned.

Windshield and headlamp washer fluid mixing ration

For temperatures above freezing point, use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate "MB SummerFit" and water:

• 1 part "MB SummerFit" to 100 parts water
  (1.34 fl oz [40 ml] "MB SummerFit" to 1 gal [4.0l] water)

For temperatures below freezing point, use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate

“MB SummerFit” and commercially available premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze:

- 1 part "MB SummerFit" to 100 parts solvent

(1.34 fl oz [40 ml] "MB SummerFit" to 1 gal [4.0 l] solvent)

Index

A

ABS 98

Indicator lamp 400

Messages in the multifunction display 415

Off-road - ABS 99

Accelerator position, automatic transmission 190

Accessory weight 379

Accident 64

Active head restraint 88, 127, 458

Adaptive Damping System (ADS)* 255

Air bags 74

Children 75, 89

Front passenger front air bag off indicator lamp 31, 83

Front, Driver 77

Front, Passenger 77

Occupant Classification System (OCS) 79

Safety guidelines 76

Side impact (front and rear*) 78

Window curtain 78

Air conditioning refrigerant 525

Air conditioning system see Climate control or

Automatic climate control (3-zone)*

Air conditioning, Cooling 214, 229

Air distribution, Front 209, 224

Air distribution, Rear 217, 233

Air pressure see Tire inflation pressure

Air pump, electric (ML 63 AMG) 485

Air recirculation mode 212, 227

Air suspension program* 254

Adaptive Damping System (ADS)* 255

Messages in the multifunction display 447

Vehicle level control* 255

Air vents 217

Air vents, Front 210, 224

Air vents, Rear 234

Air volume 210, 225

Alarm system see Anti-theft systems

Alignment bolt (vehicle tool kit) 450, 483

Anticorrosion/antifreeze 529

Antiglare, Interior rear view mirror 199

Antiglare, Rear view mirrors* 199

Antilock Brake System see ABS

Anti-theft systems 107

Anti-theft alarm system 106, 107 Immobilizer 106

Aquaplaning see Hydroplaning

Armrest storage/telephone* compartment Front 281

Ashtrays (Depending on vehicle configuration) 285

Aspect ratio 379

ATF 345

Attaching a trailer 330

AUDIO menu 160

Audio menu

CD operation 161

Radio operation 160

Satellite radio* operation 160

Auto-dimming*, Rear view mirrors 199

Automatic central locking, Control system 175

Index

Automatic climate control (3-zone)* 218

Air conditioning, Cooling 229

Air distribution, Front 224

Air distribution, Rear 233

Air recirculation mode 227

Air vents, Front 224

Air volume 225

Control panel, Front 220

Control panel, Rear 231

Deactivating system 222

Defogging 225

Defrosting 225

Maximum cooling, MAXCOOL 226

Rear passenger compartment 231

Rear window defroster 203

Residual engine heat (REST) 230

Using driver-side settings for all temperature zones 229

Automatic headlamp mode 136

Automatic lighting control, Interior lighting 142

Automatic locking when driving 125

Automatic shift program (ML 63 AMG only) 195

Automatic transmission 54

Accelerator position 190

Automatic shift program (ML 63 AMG only) 195

Emergency operation (Limp-Home Mode) 197

Gear ranges 192

Gear selector lever 54, 183

Gear shifting malfunctions 197

Hill start assist system 191

Kickdown 190

Kickdown, manual shift program (ML 63 AMG only) 196

Manual shift program (ML 63 AMG only) 195

Program mode selector switch (ML 63 AMG only) 194

Shift program (ML 63 AMG only) 194

Shifting procedure 186

Starting the engine 54

Steering wheel gearshift control 193

Towing a trailer 191

Transmission fluid level 345

Transmission positions 187

Automatic Transmission Fluid see ATF

B

Backrest

Seat 44

Seat, Lumbar support 129

Seat, Multicontour* 129

Backup lamps

Messages in the multifunction display 438

Replacing bulbs 471

Bar 380

BAS 100

Lamps in instrument cluster 400

Messages in the multifunction display 415

Basic carrier bars* 266

Batteries, SmartKey

Check lamp 110, 113

Messages in the multifunction display 427

Replacing 461

Battery, Vehicle 489

Charging 496

Disconnecting and connecting 491

Jump starting 497

Removing and installing 491

Index

Bead 380

Belt reel 276

Beverage holder see Cup holder

Block heater (Canada only) 385

Bolts, Collapsible tire (ML 63 AMG only) 453

Bolts, Minispare wheel (except ML 63 AMG) 452

Brake fluid 525

Checking 339

Messages in the multifunction display 430

Brake lamp

Cleaning lenses 393

Messages in the multifunction display 438

Replacing bulbs 471

Brake pads 312

Messages in the multifunction display 428

Brakes 312

Warning lamp 401

Break-in period 310

Bulbs, replacing see Replacing bulbs

Button for Voice control* system 30, 148

C

California retail buyers and lessees, Important notice for 11

Camera see Rear view camera*

Can holder see Cup holder

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants 522

Card holder 32, 35, 284

Cargo compartment cover blind 271

Cargo net* 272

Cargo tie-down rings 268

Carpets, Cleaning 397

Catalytic converter (gasoline engine) 335

CD changer* 161, 279

CD player 161

Center console

Lower part 32

Upper part 31

Central locking

Automatic 125

Locking/unlocking from the inside 126

Switch 126

Certification label 510

CHECK ENGINE malfunction indicator lamp 403, 404

Checking tire pressure electronically with the Advanced Tire Pressure Monitoring System (Advanced TPMS)*, (Canada only) 365

Checking tire pressure electronically with the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS), (USA only) 362

Checklist

Off-road driving 322

Returning from off-road driving 327

Children in the vehicle 89

Air bags 75, 89

Blocking rear door window operation 96

Indicator lamp, Front passenger front air bag 83

Infant and child restraint systems 84, 90

LATCH-type child seat anchors 93

Occupant Classification System (OCS) 79

Cigarette lighter (Depending on vehicle configuration) 286

Index

Climate control 204

Air conditioning, Cooling 214, 215

Air distribution, Front 209

Air distribution, Rear 217

Air recirculation mode 212

Air vents, Front 210

Air volume 210

Control panel*, Rear 216

Control panel, Front 206

Deactivating system 208

Defogging 212

Defrosting 210

Rear window defroster 203

Residual engine heat (REST) 215

Clock 27, 169

Cloth upholstery,

Cleaning and care of 397

Cockpit 24

Cockpit Management and Data System see COMAND system

Cold tire inflation pressure 380

Collapsible tire 518

Collapsible tire (ML 63 AMG only) 453

Collapsible wheel chock 452

COMAND system see separate operating instructions

Combination switch 59, 60, 62, 139

Compass 307

Adjustment 173

Calibration 174

Calling up the compass 307

Control and operation of radio transmitters 334

Control system 147

Multifunction display 147

Multifunction steering wheel 148

Resetting to factory default 164

Control system menus 147

AIRMATIC*/Compass 162

AMG menu 156

AUDIO 160

NAV* 161

Settings 163

Standard display 154

TEL* 180

Trip computer 178

Vehicle configuration 177

Vehicle status message memory 162

Control system submenus 151, 153, 166

Comfort* 176

Instrument cluster 167, 168

Lighting 170

Time/Date 169

Vehicle 173

Coolant 345, 528

Anticorrosion/antifreeze mixing ratio and quantity 529

Capacities 522

Checking coolant level 339, 345

Messages in the multifunction display 431, 433

Temperature 336

Temperature display 154

Corner-illuminating front fog lamps* 140

Messages in the multifunction display 439

Replacing bulbs 469

Crossing obstacles 325

Cruise control 244

Activating 246

Messages in the multifunction display 416

Index

Cup holders 284

Cleaning 285

Front center console 285

Front center console,

Removing/Installing 285

Rear armrest 284

Curb weight 380

Current transmission program mode

(AMG vehicles only) 147

D

Date display, Setting 169

Daytime running lamp mode 137

Setting 170

Deep water see Standing water

Defogging windshield 210, 225

Defrosting, Front 210, 225

Defrosting, Rear 203

Delayed shut-off

Exterior lamps 171

Interior lighting 172

Department of Transportation see DOT

Diesel engine

Preglow indicator lamp 29

Difficulties

While driving 63

While starting 57

Digital clock see Clock

Digital speedometer 147, 155

Dimensions, Vehicle 520

Direction of rotation (tires) 351

Displays

Digital speedometer 147, 155

Maintenance service indicator 386

Messages in the multifunction display 413

Multifunction display 147

Outside temperature 147, 155

Selecting 168

Symbol messages 427

Text messages 415

Vehicle status message 162, 413

Vehicle system settings, Control system 151, 153, 163

Distance to empty (range), Trip

Computer 178

Door

Entry lamps 144

Locking, In an emergency 456

Locking/unlocking, KEYLESS-GO* 39, 69

Locking/unlocking, SmartKey 38, 68

Messages in the multifunction display 435

Opening from inside/outside 112, 118

Remote door unlock (Tele Aid) 301

Unlocking, Mechanical key 455

Door control panel 36

Door handle 36

Door windows see Power windows

DOT 374, 380

Downhill driving

Cruise control 246

Downhill Speed Regulation (DSR) 249

Messages in the multifunction display 428

Drinking and driving 311

Index

Driving 51, 311

Abroad 334

Hydroplaning 316

In winter 318, 384

Instructions 51, 311

Problems 63

Safety systems 98

Systems 244

Through standing water 319

Through water 324

Driving off 58

Driving safety systems

4-ETS 104

ABS 98

BAS 100

EBP 104

ESP® 100

Driving systems 244

Adaptive Damping System (ADS)* 255

Air suspension program* 254

Cruise control 244

Downhill Speed Regulation (DSR) 249

Off-road driving program 253

Parktronic system* 259

Rear view camera* 264

Vehicle level control* 255

Driving tips 190

Accelerator position 190

Kickdown 190

E

Easy-entry/exit feature

Activating (driver's seat)* 176

Easy-entry/exit feature* 46

EBP 104

Indicator and warning lamps 402, 429

Electrical connections

Trailer 329

Electrical fuses see Fuses

Electrical system, Technical data 519

Electronic Brake Proportioning see EBP

Electronic Stability Program see ESP®

Electronic Traction System see 4-ETS

Emergency calls

Tele Aid 296

Emergency operation

Fuel filler flap 457

Locking/unlocking the vehicle 455, 456

Emergency operation

(Limp-Home Mode) 197

Emergency operations

Remote door unlock, Tele Aid 301

Unlocking/opening the tailgate 456

Emergency Tensioning Device see ETD

Emergency, In case of

Battery, Jump starting 497

Engine shut-down 506

First aid kit 448

Flat tire 478

Fuses 504

Hazard warning flasher 141

Instrument cluster, Indicator

lamps 400, 401, 402, 403, 404, 405, 406, 407, 408, 410

Roadside Assistance 12, 298

Towing the vehicle 499

Emission control 335

Information label 511

System warranties 10

Engine

Belt layout (ML 320 CDI) 512

Belt layout (ML 350, ML 550) 512

Belt layout (ML 63 AMG) 512

Block heater (Canada only) 385

Break-in recommendations 343

Cleaning 391

Compartment 341

Emergency engine shut-down 506

Malfunction indicator lamp 29

Maximum engine speed 146, 513, 514

Number 511

Starting 54

Starting with KEYLESS-GO* 55

Starting with the SmartKey 55

Tachometer 29, 146

Technical data 513

Turning off with KEYLESS-GO* 67

Turning off with the SmartKey 67

Engine coolant see Coolant

Engine oil 343, 525

Adding 344, 525

Additives 525

Changing 344, 525

Checking level 343

Checking with the oil dipstick 343

Consumption 343

Filler neck (ML 350, ML 320 CDI) 344

Filler neck (ML 550, ML 63 AMG) 344

Recommended engine oils and oil filters 525

ESP ^® 27, 100

Four wheel electronic traction system with ESP® 100

Messages in the multifunction display 418, 419

Off-road-ESP ^® 103

Warning lamp 27, 405

ETD 87, 410

Safety guidelines 76

Expanding cargo compartment 269

Exterior rear view mirrors 49, 199

Folding 201

Power folding* 200

Synchronizing 200

F

Fastening the seat belts 51

Filler neck, Engine oil

(ML 350, ML 320 CDI) 344

Filler neck, Engine oil

(ML 550, ML 63 AMG) 344

First aid kit 448

Flat tire 478

Collapsible tire

(ML 63 AMG only) 453, 518

Lifting the vehicle 479

Lowering the vehicle 487

Minispare wheel

(except ML 63 AMG) 452

Mounting the spare wheel 479

Preparing the vehicle 479

Spare wheel 518

Floormats 289

Index

Fluids

Automatic transmission fluid 345

Brake fluid 340, 523, 525

Capacities 522

Engine coolant 340, 345, 528

Engine oil 343, 525

Power steering fluid 523

Windshield washer and headlamp cleaning system* 340, 524, 530

Fog lamps 138, 139

Corner-illuminating front fog lamps* 140

Messages in the multifunction display 439

Rear fog lamp 139

Replacing bulbs 469

4-ETS 104

Off-road - 4-ETS 105

Front air bags 77

Front defroster 210, 225

Front lamps see Headlamps

Front passenger front air bag 72, 77

Messages in the multifunction display 421, 422, 423, 424

Front passenger front air bag off indicator lamp 31, 83

Front seat head restraints see Head restraints

Front towing eye 501

Fuel 338

Additives 527

Capacities, Fuel tank 524

Consumption statistics 179

Diesel fuel 524

Filling the tank 337

Fuel filler flap and cap 337, 457

Fuel gauge 29

Fuel tank reserve warning lamp 29, 410

Premium unleaded gasoline 338, 526

Requirements, Octane rating 526

Fuel cap

Messages in the multifunction display 435

Fuel consumption statistics

Since last reset 179

Since start 179

Fuel filler flap 337

Locking/unlocking 337

Opening 337

Opening in an emergency 457

Fuel tank

Capacity 524

Filler flap 337

Fuel, Premium unleaded gasoline 524

Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. 522

Fuses 504

Fuse box in cargo compartment 505

Fuse box in engine compartment 505

Fuse box in passenger compartment 506

Fuse chart 448

Replacing 504

Index

G

Automatic transmission 192

Limiting 192

Shifting into optimal 194

Gear selector lever 25, 54, 183

Cleaning 397

Gearshift pattern 183

Messages in the multifunction display 420

Position 186

Shifting procedure 186

Transmission position 187

Global locking/unlocking see Key, SmartKey

Glove box 279

Good visibility 199

Gross Axle Weight Rating see GAWR

Gross Trailer Weight see GTW

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating see GVWR

Gross Vehicle Weight see GVW

GTW 380

GVW 380

GVWR 380

H

Halogen headlamp see Headlamps

Hands-free microphone 33

Hard plastic trim items, cleaning 396

Hazard warning flasher 141

Head restraints 44, 127

Active head restraint 88, 127

Front seats, Adjusting 44

Rear seats 89

Rear seats, Adjusting 128

Rear seats, Removing and

installing 128

Headlamp aim

Adjusting 473

Headlamp cleaning system* 199, 346

Headlamp shut-off delay see Delayed shut-off, Exterior lamps

Headlamps

Automatic headlamp mode 136

Bi-Xenon* 438, 467

Cleaning lenses 393

Cleaning system* 199, 346

Halogen 466

High beam see High beam flasher

High beam see High beam headlamps

Light sensor, Messages in the multifunction display 438

Low beam see Low beam headlamps

Manual headlamp mode 136

Messages in the multifunction display 438, 439, 440, 441, 442, 443

Replacing bulbs 463, 464

Switch 59, 135

Heated seats see Seat heating*

Heated steering wheel* 290

Height adjustment

Vehicle level control (Vehicles with Air suspension program*) 257

Index

High beam flasher 59, 140

High beam headlamps

Indicator lamp 29

Messages in the multifunction display 439

Replacing bulbs 464, 466, 467

Switching on 59, 139

High mounted brake lamp 464

Hood 341

Messages in the multifunction display 435

Opening 341

Hooks

Loading 269

Horn 25

HVAC see Climate control or automatic climate control (3-zone)*

Hydroplaning 316

|

Identification labels see Labels

Ignition 40, 42, 55

Immobilizer 106

Infant and child restraint systems see Children in the vehicle

Inflation pressure see Tires, Inflation pressures

Information button see Tele Aid

Infrared reflecting windshield* 308

Instrument cluster 26, 28, 145

Illumination brightness 145

Lamps 400

Messages in display see Multifunction display messages

Multifunction display 147

Outside temperature indicator 146

Selecting language 167

Instrument lighting see Instrument cluster, Illumination brightness 145

Instrument panel see Instrument cluster

Instruments and controls see Cockpit

Interior lighting 142

Delayed shut-off 172

Interior rear view mirror 49

Antiglare positions 199

Auto-dimming mirrors* 199

Interior storage spaces see Storage compartments

Intermittent wiping

Windshield wipers 61

J

Jack 450, 451

Lifting the vehicle 479

Jump starting 497

K

Key, Mechanical 455

Key, SmartKey 110

Batteries 461

Battery check lamp 110

Closing the power windows (Convenience closing feature) 238

Closing the tilt/sliding sunroof (Convenience closing feature) 238

Closing, Power tailgate* 123

Factory setting 112

Index

Locking/unlocking 38, 68, 110

Locking/unlocking, Global setting 112

Loss of 118

Messages in the multifunction display 437

Opening the power windows (Summer opening feature) 237

Opening the tilt/sliding sunroof (Summer opening feature) 237

Remote control 110

Replacing batteries 461

Selective setting 112

Starter switch positions 40

Starting the engine 54

Turning off the engine 67

Key, SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*

Batteries 118, 461

Battery check lamp 113

Checking battery condition 118

Closing the power windows (Convenience closing feature) 238

Closing the tilt/sliding sunroof (Convenience closing feature) 238

Closing/locking, Power tailgate* 124

Factory setting 116

Important notes 115

Locking/unlocking 39, 68, 113

Locking/unlocking, Global setting 116

Loss of 118

Messages in the multifunction display 436, 437

Opening the power windows (Summer opening feature) 237

Opening the tilt/sliding sunroof (Summer opening feature) 237

Remote control 113

Replacing batteries 461

Selective setting 117

Start/stop button 41

Starter switch positions 40, 41

Starting the engine 55

Turning off the engine 67

Kickdown 190

Kilopascal 380

L

Labels 510

Certification 510

Emission control information 511

Engine number 511

Paintwork code 510

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) 510

Lamp sensor see Light sensor

Lamps, exterior 464

Front 464

Light sensor, Messages in the multifunction display 438

Messages in display 438

Messages in the multifunction display 438, 440, 442

Rear 464

Switch 135

Index

Lamps, indicator and warning

ABS 27,400

Adaptive Damping System (ADS)* 255

Alarm system 107

Battery (SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*) 117

Battery (SmartKey) 112

Brakes 27, 401, 402

Center console 31, 411

CHECK ENGINE 29, 403, 404

Downhill Speed Regulation 250

Engine diagnostics 29, 403, 404

ESP ^® 27,405

Fog lamps, Front/rear 135

Front passenger front air bag off 31, 78

Fuel reserve 29, 410

High beam headlamps 29

Instrument cluster 26, 28, 400, 401, 402, 403, 404, 405, 406, 407, 408, 410

Off-road driving program 253

Parktronic* 262

Preglow indicator, Diesel engine 29

Seat belt telltale 29, 87, 406

Seat belts 407

Seat heating* 130

Seat ventilation* 131

SRS 29, 72, 87, 410

Turn signals 27

Vehicle level control* 257

Language, Setting 167

LATCH-type child seat anchors see Children in the vehicle

Layout of poly-V-belt drive (ML 320 CDI) 512

Layout of poly-V-belt drive (ML 350, ML 550) 512

Layout of poly-V-belt drive (ML 63 AMG) 512

Leather upholstery*, Cleaning and care of 398

Lever for cruise control 244

License plate lamps 473 Messages in the multifunction display 440

Replacing bulbs 464, 473

Light alloy wheels, Cleaning 396

Light sensor

Messages in the multifunction display 438

Lighter see Cigarette lighter (Depending on vehicle configuration)

Lighting, Exterior and interior 135

Limp-Home Mode 197, 403, 404

Loading see Vehicle loading

Locator lighting 138, 171

Lock buttons, KEYLESS-GO ^* Outside door handle 69

Locking the vehicle see Key

Loss of keys, Mechanical key 118

Loss of keys, SmartKey 118

Loss of keys, SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* 118

Loss of Service and Warranty Information Booklet 509

Low beam headlamps Messages in the multifunction display 440

Replacing bulbs 464

Switching on 59, 135

Lubricants 522

Lumbar support 129

Index

M

Main dimensions 520

Maintenance 12, 386

Calling up service indicator display 388

Clearing service indicator message 387

Maintenance System 386

Resetting service indicator 388

Service indicator message 386

Service term exceeded 387

Maintenance System 386

Manual headlamp mode see Headlamps

Manual shift program

(ML 63 AMG only) 195

Manual shift program (ML 63 AMG)

Activating 195

Deactivating 196

Maximum cooling, MAXCOOL* see

Automatic climate control

(3-zone)* 226

Maximum load rating, Tires 381

Maximum loaded vehicle weight, Tires 381

MB Tex upholstery, Cleaning and care of 398

Mechanical key 455

Memory function* see Seats

Menus see Control system menus

Messages in display see

Multifunction display messages

Microphone, Hands-free 33

Minispare wheel see Spare wheel

Mirrors

Adjusting 49

Auto-dimming rear view mirrors* 199

Exterior rear view mirror 49

Interior rear view mirror 49, 199

MON 338, 526

Multicontour seat* 129

Multifunction display 147

Changing settings see Control system menus and Control system submenus

Selecting display 168

Selecting language 167

Multifunction display messages 413

ABS 415

Air suspension program* 447

Brake fluid 430

Brake lamps 438

Brake pads 428

Coolant 433

Corner-illuminating front fog lamps* 439

Cruise control 416

Doors 435

Downhill Speed Regulation 428

EBP 429

Engine coolant 431, 433

ESP ^® 405

Index

Fog lamps, Front 439

Fog lamps, Rear 441

Front passenger front air bag 421, 422, 423, 424

Fuel cap 435

Headlamps 438, 439, 441, 443

Hood 435

Key, SmartKey 437

Key, SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* 436, 437

Lamps 438, 439, 440, 441, 443

Low tire pressure 425, 445, 446

Parking brake 429

Parking lamps 441

Tele Aid 444

Telephone* 444

Turn signals 443

Vehicle battery 427

Windshield washer fluid 444

Multifunction steering wheel 30, 148

Button operation 148

N

Navigation system* 161

See separate COMAND system operating instructions

Net, Cargo* 272

Net, Parcel 283

Neutral gear position, Automatic transmission 183, 187

New vehicle, Break-in period 310

Night security illumination 138, 171

Normal occupant weight 381

Number, Vehicle Identification (VIN) 510

0

Occupant distribution 381

Occupant safety 72

Active head restraint 88

Air bags 74

Children and air bags 75, 89, 91

Children in the vehicle 89

Fastening the seat belt 51

Front passenger front air bag off indicator lamp 79, 83, 84

Infant and child restraint systems 90

LATCH-type child seat anchors 93 OCS 79

OCS, Messages in the multifunction display 421, 422, 423, 424

Seat belts 51, 76

OCS 79

Self-test 84

Odometer 146, 147, 154

Off-road - 4-ETS 105

Off-road - ABS 99

Off-road - ESP ^® 103

Off-road driving

Checklist 322, 327

Crossing obstacles 325

Driving instructions for off-road driving 319

Driving through water 324

Returning 327

Rules 321

Special driving features 320

Steep terrain 322

Off-road driving program 253

Oil level see Engine oil, Checking level

One-touch gearshifting 193

Operating safety 17

Operator's Manual 10

Index

Ornamental moldings, Cleaning 393

Outside temperature see Displays

Overdue maintenance service term387

Overhead control panel 33

Oxidation catalyst (diesel engine) 335

P

Paintwork code 510

Paintwork, Cleaning 390

Panic alarm 97

Parcel net

Front passenger footwell 283

Front seat backrests 283

Parking 65, 315

On hills 65

Over things that burn, Potential

consequences 65, 335

Parking brake 57, 65

Lamps, Indicator and warning 401

Messages in the multifunction display 429

Releasing 57

Parking lamps

Messages in the multifunction display 441

Replacing bulbs 468

Parking position*

Exterior rear view mirrors 177, 200

Parktronic* 31, 259

Cleaning system sensors 394

Minimum distance 261

Range 261

Switching on/off 263

System malfunction 263

System sensors 260

System sensors, Cleaning 394

Warning indicators 25, 262

Parts service 508

PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp see

Front passenger front air bag off indicator lamp

Passenger compartment 334

Fuse box 506

Interior lighting 142

Interior rear view mirror 33

Parcel net in front passenger footwell 283

Passenger safety see Occupant safety

Pedals 311

Phone see Telephone*

Plastic and rubber parts, cleaning 396

Poly-V-belt drive

Layout (ML 320 CDI) 512

Layout (ML 350, ML 550) 512

Layout (ML 63 AMG) 512

Positions (Memory function*) see Seats

Pounds per square inch see PSI

Power assistance 312

Power outlets 287

Power seat see Seats, Power

Power tilt/sliding sunroof 240

Convenience closing feature 238

Opening/closing 240

Stopping 238

Summer opening feature 237

Synchronizing 242

Power washer 390

Index

Power windows 235

Cleaning 395

Convenience closing feature 238

Door windows 236

Opening/closing 235

Rear door windows, Blocking operation 96

Summer opening feature 237

Synchronizing, Door windows 237

Practical hints 448

Premium unleaded gasoline 526

Problems

While driving 63

With starting see Starting difficulties

With the vehicle 18

Product information 9

Production options weight 381

Program mode selector switch (ML 63 AMG only) 194

PSI 381

Push-starting see Tow-starting

R

Radio

AUDIO menu, Control system 160

Selecting station 160

Selecting station (satellite*) 160

Radio transmitters 334

Range (distance to empty) 180

Range of the sensors Parktronic* 261

Reading lamp, front 142

Reading lamp, rear interior 143

Rear automatic climate control 231, 233

Rear center console ashtray see Ashtrays (Depending on vehicle configuration)

Rear climate control* 216

Rear door windows Blocking operation 96

Rear fog lamp see Fog lamps

Rear lamps see Tail lamps

Rear seat head restraints see Head restraints

Rear towing eye 502

Rear towing eye, Vehicles with Sport Package* 502

Rear view camera* 264

Rear view mirrors see Mirrors

Rear window defroster 203

Rear window wiper/washer 62

Rear windows see Power windows

Rear wiper blade 476

Recommended tire inflation pressure 381

Recovery services, Stolen vehicle (Tele Aid) 301

Refrigerant, Air conditioning 525

Refueling 337

Regular checks 339

Reminder, Seat belt see Seat belts, Telltale

Remote control

SmartKey 110

SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* 113

Remote door unlock, Tele Aid 301

Removing rear seat cushions (Vehicles with cargo management system*) 277

Replacing bulbs 463

Additional turn signals, Exterior rear view mirrors 470

Backup lamps 463, 471

Brake lamps 463, 471

Corner-illuminating front fog lamps* 463, 464, 469

Fog lamp, Rear 463, 471

Fog lamps, Front 463, 464, 469

High beam headlamps 463, 464, 467

License plate lamps 463, 473

Low beam headlamps 463, 464, 466

Parking/standing lamps 463, 468, 471, 472

Side marker lamps, Front 463, 464, 466, 469

Side marker lamps, Rear 463, 471

Tail lamps 463, 464, 471, 472

Turn signal lamps, Front 463, 464, 468

Turn signal lamps, Rear 463, 471

Reporting safety defects 19

Reset button, In instrument cluster 164

Reset tool

Active head restraints, Depository 459

Residual heat and ventilation 215, 230

Reverse gear position, Automatic transmission 183, 187

Rims 381, 515

Roadside Assistance 12

Roadside Assistance button see Tele Aid

RON 338, 526

Roof rails 266

Rubber parts, Cleaning 396

Run Flat Indicator (Canada only) 360

S

Safety

Driving safety systems 98

Occupant safety 72

Reporting safety defects 19

Safety belts see Seat belts

Satellite radio* 160

Scissors-type vehicle jack 450, 451

Seat belt force limiter 87

Seat belts 84

Children in the vehicle 89

Cleaning 397

Fastening 51

Height adjustment 53

Messages in the multifunction display 407

Proper use of 53, 86

Safety guidelines 76

Telltale 29, 84, 406

Warning lamp 406, 407

Seat cushion depth see Seats

Index

Seat heating* see Seats

Seat ventilation* see Seats

Seating capacity 353

Seats 43, 127

Adjusting 43

Cushion depth, Multicontour seat* 129

Folding the backrest forward 269

Heating* 130

Lumbar support 129

Memory function* 133

Multicontour seat* 129

Returning seat backrest to original position 271

Ventilation* 131

Securing cargo 268

Cargo tie-down rings 268

Hooks 269

Selector lever see Gear selector lever

Self-test

Lamps in the instrument cluster 400

OCS 84

Tele Aid 295

Vehicle battery 489

Service and warranty information 10

Service intervals see Maintenance, Service indicator

Service life

Tires 349

Service see Maintenance

Service system see Maintenance System

Service, Parts 508

Settings

Adaptive Damping System (ADS)* 255

Air suspension* 254

Clock 169

Comfort functions* 176

Control system menus 150, 152

Control system submenus 151, 153, 166

Date 153, 166, 169

Daytime running lamp mode 170

Factory, SmartKey 112

Factory, SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* 116

Individual, Vehicle 163

Instrument cluster 167

Language, multifunction display 167, 168

Lighting 170

Memory function* 133

Resetting all, Control system 164

Selective, SmartKey 112

Selective, SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* 117

Time 169

Vehicle configuration 177

Vehicle level control* 255

Shift program (ML 63 AMG only) 194

Shifting

Automatic transmission 54

Shifting, Automatic transmission 183

Side impact air bags 78

Side marker lamps

Cleaning lenses 393

Messages in the multifunction display 441

Replacing bulbs 464, 469, 472

Side windows see Power windows

Sidewall 381

SmartKey see Key, SmartKey

SmartKey see Key, SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*

Snow chains 385

Snow tires see Winter tires

Index

Spare wheel 518

Bolts 450

Mounting 479

Wheel bolts 484

Spare wheel (except ML 63 AMG) 452

Speed settings

Cruise control 246

Speedometer 27

Spinning see Tires, Direction of rotation

SRS 86

Indicator lamp 29, 410

Messages in the multifunction display 410

Standing lamps 135

Replacing bulbs 463, 464, 468, 471

Standing water, Driving through 324

Starter switch 25, 40

Positions 40

Starting difficulties, Engine 57

Starting, Engine 54

Steep terrain, Driving 322

Steering column 47, 48

Steering wheel 46

Adjustment, Electrically* 48

Adjustment, Manually 47

Buttons 30, 148

Cleaning 397

Steering wheel gearshift control

Automatic transmission 193

Stolen Vehicle Recovery services 301

Storage compartments 34, 279

Cup holder 284

Cup holders 284

Door pockets 34

Front center console 281

Glove box 279

Parcel net, Front passenger footwell 283

Parcel nets, Front seat backrest 283

Rear seats, In front of 282

Storage/telephone* compartment

Armrest, Front 281

Storing tires 350

Stranded vehicle 503

Submenus see Control system submenus

Sun visors 201

Sunroof see Power tilt/sliding sunroof

Suspension tuning see Air suspension program*

Symbols used in this Operator's

Manual 16

T

Tachometer 29, 146

Overspeed range 146

Tail lamps 471

Cleaning lenses 393

Messages in the multifunction display 442

Replacing bulbs 464, 472

Tailgate

Closing from the inside, Electrically* 122

Closing from the outside (vehicles without KEYLESS-GO*) 123

Opening 119

Opening from the inside, Electrically* 121

Unlocking and opening the tailgate in an emergency 456

Index

Tar stains 390

Technical data 507

Air conditioning refrigerant 525

Brake fluid 523, 525

Capacities fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. 522, 523

Coolant 528

Dimensions, Vehicle 520

Electrical system 519

Engine 513

Engine oil 525

Engine oil additives 525

Fuel requirements 526

Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. 522

Gasoline additives 527

Main dimensions 520

Premium unleaded gasoline 526

Rims 515

Tires 515

Weights 521

Windshield washer and headlamp cleaning system* 524, 530

Tele Aid 294

Call priority 300

Emergency calls 296

Hands-free microphone 33

Information 299

Initiating an emergency call manually 297

Messages in the multifunction display 444

Remote door unlock 301

Roadside Assistance 298

SOS button 297

Stolen Vehicle Recovery services 301

System self-check 295

Telephone cradle*

Changing 293

Telephone* 291

Answering/ending a call 181

Changing mobile phone cradle 293

Dialing a number from the phone book 181

Ending a call or rejecting an incoming call 181

Hands-free microphone 33

Inserting in cradle 292

Installing a different mobile phone cradle 294

Messages in the multifunction display 444

Operation 180

Phone book 181

Redialing 182

Rejecting/ending a call 181

Removing from cradle 293

Telescoping rod 277

Index

Temperature

Coolant 154

Display mode, Status indicator 168

Interior temperature 209

Interior temperature, setting see Climate control or Automatic climate control (3-zone)*

Outside temperature 155

Sensor, Interior temperature 206, 220

Sensor, Outside temperature 146

Setting display unit 155

Tether attachment points, see Children in the vehicle

Three-zone Automatic climate control see Automatic climate control (3-zone) *

Ticket holder 284

Tie-down rings 268

Tightening torque Wheel bolts 487

Tilt/sliding sunroof see Power tilt/sliding sunroof*

Time 169

TIN 374, 381

Tire and Loading Information

Placard 352

Terminology 379

Tire Identification Number see TIN

Tire inflation pressure

Checking manually 359

Checking tire pressure electronically with the Advanced Tire Pressure Monitoring System (Advanced TPMS)*, (Canada only) 365

Checking tire pressure electronically with the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS), (USA only) 362

Recommended tire inflation pressure 357

Tires 348, 515

Advanced Tire Pressure Monitoring System (Advanced TPMS) ^* , (Canada only) 365

Air pressure 379

Care and maintenance 349

Chains 385

Cleaning 350

Collapsible tire (ML 63 AMG only) 453

Collapsible tire, Spare wheel 518

Combination low tire pressure/TPMS malfunction telltale, USA only 27

Direction of rotation, Spinning 351

Driving instructions 315

Hydroplaning 316

Important guidelines 348

Important notes, Tire inflation pressure 358

Inflation pressure 340, 357, 359

Information placard 352

Inspection 349

Load rating 370, 371, 381

Loading Information 352

Loading terminology 379

Loading the vehicle 351

Low tire pressure telltale 408

Low tire pressure telltale, Canada only 27

Maximum load 382

Messages in the multifunction display 408

Minispare wheel (except ML 63 AMG) 452

Ply composition and material used 382

Index

Problems under-/overinflation 369

Retreads 348

Rims and tires 515

Rotating 351

Run Flat Indicator (Canada only) 360

Service life 349

Sizes 370

Snow chains 385

Spare wheel 479

Spare wheel, Collapsible tire 518

Speed rating 317, 372, 382

Storing 350

Temperature 358, 378

Terminology 379

TIN 374, 381

Tire Identification Number see TIN

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS), (USA only) 362

TPMS malfunction telltale 408

Traction 316, 378, 382

Tread 382

Tread depth 350, 384

Treadwear indicators 382

Vehicle maximum load on 382

Wear pattern 383

Winter tires 384

Tongue Weight Rating see TWR

Tools 448

Top tether

Children in the vehicle 94

Towing

Trailer 191, 328, 331

Towing eye bolt 501

Towing the vehicle 501, 503

Tow-starting 497, 499

Traction 378, 382

4-ETS, Driving safety systems 98, 104

Trailer

Attaching 330

Checking weights 330

Electrical connections 329

Hitch* 328

Loading 329

Towing 328, 331

Weights and ratings 329

Transfer case 198

Transmission position indicator 147

Transmission see Automatic transmission

Traveling abroad 334

Tread 382

Tread depth 350, 384

Treadwear indicators 382

Trip computer 178

Trip odometer, resetting 146

Turn signal lamps

Cleaning lenses 393

Messages in the multifunction display 443

Replacing bulbs 464

Turn signals 60

Additional in mirrors 464

Bulbs 464, 472

Cleaning lenses 393

Indicator lamps 27

Turning off the engine 67

TWR (Tongue Weight Rating) 382

U

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Standards 382

Units, Settings

Speedometer 168

Temperature 168

Unlocking the vehicle see Key

Index

Uphill driving

Cruise control 246

Upholstery

Cleaning and care of 397

Useful features 279

V

Vehicle

Battery 489

Break-in period 310

Care 389

Control system, Settings menu 163

Dimensions 520

Locking/unlocking 38, 65, 110

Locking/unlocking in an emergency 455

Modifications and alterations, Operating safety 17

Proper use of 17

Total load limit 382

Towing 499

Washing 389

Weights 521

Vehicle and trailer weights and ratings 329

Vehicle care 389

Vehicle Identification Number see VIN

Vehicle jack 450, 451

Vehicle level control* 255

Messages in the multifunction display 447

Vehicle lighting 340

Vehicle loading

Cargo compartment cover blind 271

Cargo net* 272

Cargo tie-down rings 268

Expanding cargo compartment 269

Hooks 269

Load limit 353

Loading instructions 266

Loading terminology 379

Parcel nets 283

Roof rails 266

Terminology 379

Vehicle maximum load on the tire 382

Vehicle Recovery services, Stolen (Tele Aid) 301

Vehicle status message memory menu 162

Vehicle tool kit 448

Vehicle washing 391

VIN 511

Voice control system*

Button on multifunction steering wheel 30, 148

Hands-free microphone 33

W

Warning indicators

Parktronic* 262

Warning lamps see Lamps, Indicator and warning

Warning sounds

Exterior lamps 135

Parking brake 58

Parktronic* 263

Seat belt telltale 84

Warranty coverage 10, 509

Index

Washer fluid see Windshield washer fluid

Washer reservoir level 530

Washing the vehicle 389

Wear pattern, Tires 383

Weights, Vehicle 521

Wheel

Bolts 450

Change 479

Removing 483

Spare 479, 518

Tightening torque 487

Wheel, Tires and 348

Window curtain air bags 78

Windows see Power windows

Windows, cleaning 395

Windshield

Cleaning 395

Cleaning wiper blades 395

Cleaning, Windshield washer fluid 62

Defogging 212, 226

Infrared reflecting* 308

Washer fluid 346, 530

Windshield washer fluid

Messages in the multifunction display 444

Mixing ratio 530

Refilling 346

Reservoir level 346

Wiping with 62

Windshield washer system 346, 530

Windshield wipers 60

Cleaning wiper blades 395

Fast continuous wiping 61

Fast intermittent wiping 61

Rear window wiper/washer 62

Replacing wiper blades 475

Slow continuous wiping 61

Slow intermittent wiping 61

Winter driving 384

Block heater (Canada only) 385

Snow chains 385

Tires 384

Winter driving instructions 318

Winter tires 384

Wood trims, cleaning 398

Service and Literature

Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center has trained technicians and Genuine Mercedes-Benz Parts to service your vehicle properly.

For expert advice and quality service, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

If you are interested in obtaining service literature for your vehicle, please contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

We consider this the best way for you to obtain accurate information for your vehicle.

For further information you can find us on the Mercedes-Benz web-site www.mbusa.com or www.mercedes-benz.ca.

Warning!

To help avoid personal injury, be extremely careful when performing any service work or repairs. Improper or incomplete service or the use of incorrect or inappropriate parts or materials may damage the vehicle or its equipment, which may in turn result in personal injury.

If you have questions about carrying out any type of service, turn to the advice of an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.

We reserve the right to make changes in design and equipment.

Therefore, information, illustrations and descriptions in this Operator's Manual might differ from your vehicle.

Reprinting, translation and copying, even of excerpts, is not permitted without our prior authorization in writing.

Press time March 23, 2007

GSP/TID

Printed in U. S. A